This  book  ■ 


ERN  BRANCH 

.  i  Y  OF  CALIFOI^IA 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 
AT    LOS  ANGELES 


This  book 


•lERM  BRANCH    . 

[bu  Y  OF  CALIFOI^IA 


WAR  DEPARTMENT    :    OFFICE  OF  THE  CHIEF  OF  STAFF 

Field 
Service  Regulations 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY 


4  7  .9  I  0 

1914 


Text  Corrections  to  December  20,  1916 
Changes  No.  5 


)  <* .      >      a 


o     ,  .NEW  YORiC 
ARMY  AND  NAVY  JOURNAL 


War  Department, 
Document  No.  47S. 

Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 


^v^ 


173 
AS 


War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chiep  op  Staff, 

Washington^  March  19, 1914, 

The  following  Field  Service  Regulations,  revised  by  the  General 
Staff  of  the  Army,  are  approved  and  published  for  the  information 
and  government  of  the  Regular  Army  and  the  Organized  Militia, 
and  in  time  of  war,  the  Volunteer  forces. 

Success  in  war  can  be  achieved  only  by  all  branches  and  arm^ 
of  the  service  mutually  helping  and  supporting  one^Jiother  in  the 
common  effort  to  attain  the  desired  end. 

The  basic  principles  of  the  combat  tactics  of  the  different  arms 
are  set  forth  in  the  drill  regulations  of  those  arms  for  imite  as  high 
as  brigades.  It  is  the  function  of  higher  troop  leading  to  so  com- 
bine and  coordinate  the  combat  tactics  of  all  the  arms  as  to  develop 
in  the  combined  forces  the  teamwork  essential  to  success. 

While  the  fundamental  principles  of  war  are  neither  very  numer- 
ous nor  complex,  their  application  may  be  diflScult  and  must  not 
be  limited  by  set  rules.  Departure  from  prescribed  methods  is 
'at  times  necessary.  A  thorough  knowledge  of  the  principles  of 
war  and  their  application  enables  the  leader  to  decide  whei)  such 
departure  should  be  made  and  to  determine  what  methods  should 
bring  success. 

Officers  and  men  of  all  ranks  and  grades  are  given  a  certain  inde- 
pendence in  the  execution  of  the  tasks  to  which  they  are  assigned 
and  are  expected  to  s][iqw  initiative  in  meeting  the  different  situa- 
tions as  they  arise. '  Every  individual,  from  the  highest  com- 
mander to  the  lowest  private,  must  always  remember  that  inaction 
and  neglect  of  opportunities  will  warrant  more  severe  censure 
than  an  error  in  the  choice  ol  the  means. 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General^  Chief  of  Staff. 
3 


CONTENTS. 


Part  I. 

ORGANIZATION. 


Page. 

Article  I.  Land  forces  of  the  United  States 9 

Coast  defense 10 

Oversea  departments ^. . .  *  11 

Tables  of  organization , 11 

Part  II. 

OPERATIONS. 

Article  I.  Information: 

General  principles. 12 

Reconnaissance 13 

Messages,  reports,  field  maps,  and  war  diaries 20 

Transmission  of  infonnation 22 

Article  II.  Security: 

General  principles 24 

Advance  guard 26 

Advance  guard  of  a  small  command 29 

Advance  guard  of  a  division  (independent) 30 

Security  for  the  head  of  a  retreating  force 30 

Flank  guards 31 

Rear  guards 31 

Rear  guard  of  an  advancing  force 32 

Outposts  and  outguards 33 

Article  III.  Orders: 

General  principles , ......  w . .  40 

Comi)08ition  of  formal  field  orders , 42 

Form  of  field  orders , , , 44 

4 


6  OONTEHTS. 

Article  IV.  Marches  and  convoys:  P«ge. 

General  principles 47 

Conduct  of  marches 47 

Special  regulations — 

Marches  in  peace 55 

Marches  in  campaign » . .  /  56 

Convoys 59 

Conducting  prisoners 63 

Convoys  by  water 63 

Article  V.  Combat: 

Combat  principles 67 

Use  of  combined  arms 68 

Fire  superiority 70 

Frontage  of  units  in  combat 71 

Intrenchments 72 

yse  of  machine  guns 72 

Post  of  the  leader 72 

Reserves 73 

Plan  of  action , 75 

Combat  orders , .  75 

Development  and  deployment  for  action 78 

The  surprise .' 80 

The  rencontre , 80 

Offensive  combat— 

The  attack ,, 82 

The  enveloping  attack 83 

Turning  movements 84 

The  holding  attack. . . . , 84 

The  assault 85 

The  pursuit. 87 

Defensive  combat — 

The  passive  defense 89 

The  defense  seeking  a  favorable  decision 89 

The  counter-attack. 90 

Cavalry  in  defensive  combat 51 

Defensive  positions 91 

Positions  in  readiness..... 9^ 

Withdrawal  from  action - 94 

Covering  positions 95 

Assembly  positions , 95 

The  retreat 96 

Delaying  actions .,^..>,^...  98 


CONTENTS. 

Article  V.  Combat— Continued. 

Night  combat—  l*a«e. 

The  offensive. . . . .  i •  •  •  100 

The  defensive - »••  100 

Night  advance * ■ . .  101 

Bivouac  on  the  battlefield 101 

Measures  to  be  taken  after  the  battle , .^  X02 

Article  VI.  Shelter: 

General  principles - » •-  -  103 

Shelter  in  the  zone  of  the  interior 104 

Shelter  in  the  theater  of  operations , 105 

Shelter  during  battle , 108 

Shelter  during  sieges 108 

Care  of  troops 108 

Part  III, 

ADMINISTRATION. 

Article  I.  General » ►v Ill 

Article  II.  The  service  of  the  interior: 

General ^ 112 

Mobilization  and  concentration 113 

Article  III.  The  service  of  the  theater  of  operations: 

General , 117 

Headquarters  and  staff — .....„.,.  J 17 

Article  IV.  The  zone  of  the  advance: 

General 120 

Transportation '  121 

Supply  service. , 124 

Ammunition  service ; 132 

Sanitary  service 137 

Engineer  train 143 

Article  V.  The  zone  of  the  liae  of  communications: 

General .,  '  145 

Service  of  defense 146 

Supply,  sanitary,  and  telegraph  service , 148 

Service  of  military  railways 151 

Channels  of  correspondence 154 

Article  VI.  Transportation  by  rail: 

Travel  on  commercial  railways , ,. 156 

Travel  on  military  railways , . .,...,,.. ^  160 


S  CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Article  VII.  Military  poKce 163 

Article  VIII.  Censordhip 165 

CorreiBpondents 166 

Article  IX.  Field  post  office 170 


APPENDICES. 

USEFUL  INFORMATION. 

1  A.  War  fitrength  in  round  numbers,  road  spaceB,  and  dimen- 

sionfl  of  camps 172 

1  B.  Semi-permanent  camp 174 

2.  Types  of  field  intrencnments 180 

3.  Forms  of  field  orders 182 

4.  Field  maps  and  sketches 188 

5.  Distinguisliing  flags  and  lanterns 189 

6.  Extracts  from .  international  conventions  and  confer- 

ences    190 

7.  Miscellaneous  data 205 

8.  Signals  and  codes 209 

9.  List  of  abbreviations • 214 


FELD  SERVICE  REGULATIONS, 
U.  S.  ARMY. 


Part  I. 
ORGANIZATION, 

Article  I. 
LAND  FORCES  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

1.  The  land  forces  of  the  United  States  consist  of  the  regular 
army,  the  organized  land  militia  when  called  into  the  service  of 
the  United  States,  and  such  vohinteet  forces  as  Congress  may 
authorize. 

In  i)eace  the  Army  of  the  United  States  consists,  ordinarily,  of 
the  regular  army;  but  whenever  the  United  States  is  invaded  or 
in  danger  of  invasion  from  any  foreign  nation,  or  of  rebellion  a^dnst 
the  auQiority  of  the  Government  of  the  United  States,  or  the  Presi- 
dent is  unable  with  the  regular  forces  at  his  command  to  execute 
the  laws  of  the  Union,  he  may  call  into  the  military  service  of  the 
United  States  all  or  any  part  of  the  militia  organized  as  a  land  force. 

In  war,  or  when  war  is  imminent,  the  Army  of  the  United  States, 
after  the  whole  or  part  of  the  organized  land  militia  has  been  called 
into  service,  may  be  further  augmented  by  the  employment  of 
volunteers.  When  the  raising  of  a  volunteer  force  has  oeen  author- 
ized by  Congress,  and  after  the  organized  land  militia  of  any  arm 
or  class  has  oeen  called  into  the  military  service  of  the  United 
States,  volunteers  of  that  particular  arm  or  class  may  be  raised 
and  accepted  into  said  service  regardless  of  the  extent  to  which 
other  arms  or  classes  of  militia  may  have  been  called  into  service. 

S.  The  land  forces  are  grouped  under  two  general  heads,  i.  e.: 

1.  The  MobQe  Army. 

2.  The  Coast  Artillery. 

8.  The  Mobile  Army. — The  mobile  army  is  primariljr  organized 
for  offensive  operations  against  an  enemy,  and  on  tnis  account 
requires  the  maximum  degree  of  mobility. 


10      DIVISION,  FIELD  ARMIES,  AND  COAST  DEPENSE. 

The  basis  of  organization  for  the  mobile  army  is  the  division. 
A  division  is  a  seli-contained  unit  made  up  of  all  necessary  arms 
and  services,  and  complete  in  itself  with  every  requirement  for 
independent  action  incident  to  its  ordinary  operations. 

When  several  divisions  are  acting  together  they  may  be  grouped 
into  field  armies.  To  the  field  army  there  are  attached  certain 
or^pizations  of  an  auxiliary  character,  called  field  army  troops. 

When  the  number  of  field  army  troops  attached  to  a  field  army 
make  it  necessarv,  they  are  organized  into  a  separate  bri^de  for 
purposes  of  supply  and  administration  and  a  commander  is  desig- 
nated and  the  necessary  staff  is  assigned  to  him.  Infantry,  cavalry, 
or  military  police  may  be  attached  to  this  separate  brigade  for 
defensive  purposes  on  tne  maxch.  The  number  of  troops  so  assigned 
depends  on  the  condition  of  the  service  and  the  number  of  field 
army  troops  in  the  brigade.  Troops  for  the  protection  of  field 
army  troops  are  preferably  furnished  from  troops  assigned  to  the 
line  of  communications. 

If  the  conditions  of  the  particular  service  reqtdre  it,  divisions 
operatingindependently  may  be  furnished  with  tne  necessary  field 
army  troops.  A  brigade  operating  independently,  when  so  desig- 
nated by  Competent  authority,  is  known  as  a  separate  brigade,  and 
when  so,  operating  may  be  supplied  with  the  necessary  special  and 
field  army  troops. 

When  several  field  armies  are  operating  in  the  same  theater  of 
war  and  if  conditions  so  require  it,  tiiey  may  be  organized  into 
armies. 

4.  A  line  of  communications  is  established  for  each  important 
force  about  to  engage  in  field  operations  of  an  extensive  character 
and  supplied  from  a  separate  base. 

6.  The  Coast  Artillery.  —  The  coast  artillery  is  charged  with 
the  care  and  use  of  the  fixed  and  movable  elements  of  land  and 
coast  fortifications,  including  submarine  mine  and  torpedo  defense. 

COAST  DEFENSE.* 

e.  The  Inilitary  preparations  for  the  defense  of  a  coast  line  include : 
(1)  The  construction  of  permanent  fortifications  and  the  provi- 
sion of  submarine  defenses  for  defense  against  naval  attack.    Such 
defenses  are  manned  and  operated  by  coast  artillery  troops. 

>  See  paragraph  252,  subparagraph  5. 


OVERSEA  DEPARTMENTS— TABLES  OF  ORGANIZATION.  11 

(2)  The  construction  of  semipermanent  fortifications  and 
field  works  for  the  protection  of  the  permanent  fortifications 
against  capture  by  small  raiding  parties  landing  from  ships, 
or,  in  the  case  of  an  island,  in  boats  from  the  adjacent  shore. 
Troops  assigned  to  this  duty  are  known  as  coast  artillery 
supports.  They  may  be  troops  of  the  coast  artillery  or  troops 
of  the  mobile  army. 

(3)  Divisions  and  field  armies  concentrated  and  held  at 
strategic  centers  of  value  with  reference  to  the  coast  line. 

OVERSEA  DEPARTMENTS. 

7.  The  commander  of  an  oversea  department  is  charged 
with  its  defense,  and  directs  the  operations  of  both  the  troops 
of  the  Mobile  Army  and  those  of  the  Coast  Artillery  serving 
therein.     (See  also  paragraph  258.) 

TABLES    OF   ORGANIZATION. 

S.The  details  of  organization,  the  amounts  and  kinds  of  trans- 
portation, and  the  factors  on  which  the  allowance  of  transpor- 
tation is  based,  are  fixed  in  the  Tables  of  Organization,  United 
States  Army. 


Part  II. 

OPERATIONS. 
Article  I. 

INFOBHATION. 

QENEKAL  PRINCIPLES. 

9.  Military  Information. — ^Military  information  may  be  con- 
sidered under  two  general  heads,  namely,  (1)  that  collected  hy  the 
General  Staff  in  time  of  peace;  (2)  that  obtained  by  troops  in  the 
field  after  the  outbreak  of  hostilities.  The  former  relates  to  the 
geography,  resources-,  and  military  strength  of  the  various  nations, 
and  enables  tiie  War  Department  to  decide  upon  the  size  of  an  army 
or  expedition,  the  proportion  of  the  different  arms,  character  of 
clothing,  equipment,  etc.,  that  may  be  necessary  in  the  event  of 
war.  The  Utter  relates  to  the  theater  of  operations  and  to  the  i)osi- 
tion,  strength,  intentions,  etc.,  of  the  enemy  in  the  field,  and  ia 
absolutely  essential  to  enable  a  commander  properly  to  estimate  the 
situation.  .  . 

Information  in  the  field  is  obtained  from  various  sources— lUgher 
commanders,  adjoining  troops,  inhabitants,  newspapers,  letters, 
telegraph  files,  prisoners,  deserters,  spies,  maps,  and  reconnais- 
sances. Knowledge  of  the  terrain,  always  essential  to  a  correct 
understanding  of  the  situation,  is  obtained  from  a  careful  study  of 
available  maps,  supplemented  by  thorough  reconnaissance. 

All  information  of  tiie  enemy  and  of  the  theater  of  operations  is 
sent  to  the  intelligence  section  of  the  general  staff  group  of  head- 
quarters of  units  larger  than  a  brigade  (par.  261).  This  section 
weighs  and  classifies  the  information  brought  in  and  supervises  the 
preparation  of  the  necessary  field  maps. 

An  efficient  secret  service  is  organized  as  soon  as  practicable. 

10.  In  hostile  territory  influential  persons,  especially  those  sup- 
posed to  be  active  in  the  enemy's  cause,  may  be  seized  and  their 
persons  and  houses  searched.  Letters  and  newspapers  in  poet 
offices  and  files  in  tel^^aph  offices  are  carefully  examined  and  any- 

13 


B^EOOHN^SSANCE.  13 

thing  of  importance  sent  to  higher  authority.  Matter  not  of  im- 
portance is  replaced,  il  time  permits;  if  not,  the  whole  is  sent  to 
neadquarters.    Local  mai)8  of  recent  date  may  be  of  great  value. 

WTien  reliable  information  of  the  enemy  can  not  be  obtained,  it 
is  assumed  that  he  will  act  with  good  judgment. 

Information  received  by  any  person  in  the  military  service,  and 
the  action  taken  thereon,  must  be  promptly  reported  to  the  proper 
military  superior. 

Unless  instructions  have  been  given  to  spread  false  information, 
all  persons  connected  with  the  military  service  are  forbidden  to 
discuss  the  military  situation,  plans,  movements,  etc.,  with,  or  in 
the  presence  of,  civilians  of  any  age,  sex,  or  nationality. 

RECONNAISSANCE. 

11.  Reconnaissance  is  the  military  term  used  to  designate  the 
work  of  troops  or  individuals  when  gathering  information  in  the 
field.  Reconnaissance  begins  as  soon  as  the  theater  of  possible 
operations  is  entered  and  continues  throughout  the  campaign.  No 
matter  what  other  soiurces  of  information  of  the  enemy  may  be 
available,  reconnaissance  must  be  depended  upon  to  obtain  the 
information  upon  which  all  tactical  movements  of  troops  should  be 
based. 

12.  By  Aero  Squadro^. — In  forces  of  the  strength  of  a  division,  or 
larger,  the  aero  squadron  will  operate  in  advance  of  the  independ- 
ent cavalry  in  order  to  locate  the  enemy  and  to  keep  tmck  of  his 
movements.  Contact  with  the  enemy  once  gained  will  be  main- 
tained thereafter  continuously. 

13.  By  the  Cavalzy. — Reconnaissance  in  the  theater  of  operations 
is  best  made  by  the  cavalry,  which  from  the  beginning  of  the  Cam- 
paign seeks  to  determine  the  enemy's  strength  and  dispositions, 
it  protects  its  own  army  against  surprise,  screens  its  movements, 
and  insures  the  safety  and  success  of  the  troops  of  other  arms.  The 
defeat  of  the  hostile  cavalry  and  its  expulsion  from  the  field  are 
usually  the  best  means  to  this  end.  As  the  opposing  armies  draw 
near  each  othor,  the  cavalry  endeavors  to  secure  control  of  the 
ground  between  and  bends  every  effort  to  that  close  and  contin- 
uous reconnaissance  of  the  enemy's  forces  that  is  vital  to  the  success 
of  the  entire  campaign. 

As  a  rule,. only  general  instructions  are  given  to  a  leader  of  inde- 
pendent cavalry.  It  is  usually  sufficient  to  indicate  the  country 
to  be  reconnoitered,  invite  attention  to  specially  importaiit  locaJ- 
ities,  and  point  out  the  extent  of  the  daily  advance  of  tne  field  force. 


14  BECONNAISSAHCE. 

He  ifl  generally  in  telegraphic  communication  with  the  supreme 
commander,  and  keeps  him  constantly  informed  of  the  situation 
at  the  front.  In  the  absence  of  telegraphic  facilities,  he  reports 
according  to  the  circumstances,  sending  nis  messages  by  the  divi- 
sional cavalry  when  practicable. 

14.  By  Independent  Cavalry. — Reconnaissance  by  the  independ- 
ent cavalry  will  give,  in  a  general  way,  the  enemy's  location  for 
several  hours,  or  even  days,  preceding  contact  of  the  main  bodies. 
If  this  cavalry  is  strong  enough  to  defeat  the  enemy's  cavalry,  it 
will  be  enabled  to  locate  the  hostile  infantry  and  artillery  and  to 
determine  their  approximate  strength.  If  weaker  than  the  enemy's 
cavjJry,  it  miist  rely  upon  the  work  of  strategical  and  tactical 
patrols  to  obtain  detailed  information  of  the  enemy,  or  it  must  be 
assisted  by  the  other  arms.  In  the  latter  case  the  advance  guard  of 
the  main  body  will  afford  this  assistance  by  stopping  the  advance 
of  the  enemy's  cavalry  and  compelling  him  to  aeploy  his  infantry 
and  artillery,  in  part  at  least. 

On  very  wide  fronts  an  army  is  generally  covered  by  two  or  more 
bodies  of  independent  cavalry;  each  is  informed  of  the  extent  of 
ground  it  is  to  cover  and  keeps  in  touch  with  the  neighboring 
cavalry. 

16.  By  Divisional  Cavalry.— The  cavalry  attached  t-o  an  infantry 
division  is  called  divisional  cavalry.  When  the  division  is  operat- 
ing independently,  the  divisional  cavalry  acts  also  aa  independent 
cavalry;  when  the  division  forms  part  of  a  field  army,  the  divisional 
cavalry  is  known  ob  advance  cavalry.  It  usually  enters  into  the 
composition  of  advance,  flank,  rear,  and  outpost  guards,  and  when 
po  employed  is  known  as  advance  guard,  flank  guard,  rear  guard, 
and  outpost  cavalry,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  performs  such  recon- 
naissance as  the  situation  demands. 

Reconnaissance  by  the  advance  cavalry,  is  such  as  will  afford 
seci  rity  to  the  main  body.  It  prevents  surprise  to  any  part  of  the 
force.  If  stronger  than  the  cavalry  opposing  it,  the  advance 
cavalry  will  obtain  valuable  information  of  the  enemy  before  the 
infantry  and  artillery  of  the  advance  ^ard  become  engaged.  But 
where  the  cavalry,  for  any  reason,  fails  in  this  purpose,  the  work 
must  be  done  by  the  other  arms,  without,  however^  so  dispersing 
battle  units  that  they  will  be  outside  of  supporting  distance  of  each 
other.  •      "  t 

Though  its  reconnaissance  is  more  restricted  than  that  of  the 
independent  cavalry,  advance  cavalry  goes  more  into  detail  and 
gathers  information  as  to  the  resources  of  the  country,  roads,  camp- 


RECONNAISSANCE.  15 

ing  places,  etc.  As  combat  becomes  imminent  and  the  independ- 
ent cavalry  is  drawn  off  to  a  flank,  the  advance  cavalry  must  be 
especially  active  to  guard  against  surprise,  gain  information  of  the 
enemy's  movements,  and  prevent  incursions  of  his  patrols. 

"When  there  is  independent  cavalry  in  front,  the  divisional  cav- 
ahy  maintains  connection  therewith-  when  not,  it  reconnoiters  far 
to  the  front  and  gains  touch  with  the  enemy  if  possible,  operatii^ 
in  a  manner  similar  to  that  of  independent  cavalry  of  larger  units. 

16.  By  Infantry. — ^The  extent  of  the  infantry  reconnaissance  will 
not  be  so  great  where  the  aero  squadron  and  the  cavalry  are  able 
to  perform  this  service  efficiently,  as  it  must  be  in  the  absence  of 
efficient  reconnaissance  by  the  other  arms.  In  no  case,  however, 
can  infantry  reconnaissance,  preceding  or  during  combat,  be  disr 
pensed  with.  Infantry  and  artillery  can  not  rely  wholly  upon 
cavalry  or  aero  reconnaissance,  but  miist  conduct  such  close-in 
reconnaissance  as  is  necessary  for  security  and  to  determine  their 
immediate  dispositions. 

In  the  absence  of  cavalry,  reconnaissance  at  a  distance  is  made 
by  infantry  or  scouts  specially  detailed  for  that  purpose. 

If  a  command  is  weak  in  cavalry,  or  the  country  is  .rough  and 
broken,  it  may  be  advisable  to  use  reconnoitering  detachments 
composed  of  both  infantry  and  cavalry. 

17.  Beconnaissance  Immediately  Preceding  Combat. — Eecon-> 
naissance  preceding  deployment  for  action  is  of  vital  importance. 
On  the  information  of  the  enemy  and  of  the  terrain  obtained 
through  proper  reconnaissance  combat  orders  are  based.  How 
complete  such  reconnaissance  may  be  will  depend  upon  the  time 
that  can  be  spared  for  the  purpose  without  losing  the  initiative  in 
action,  upon  the  character  of  information  desired,  and  upon  the 
efficiency  of  the  measures  taken  by  the  enemy  to  conceal  his  dis- 
positions. 

18.  The  strength  of  the  force  employed  in  this  reconnaissance 
is  determined  by  the  character  of  the  information  desired  and 
by  the  nature  of  the  hostile  screen.  In  every  instance  it  miust 
be  strong  enough  to  penetrate  the  enemy's  screen,  and  where 
detailed  information  of  the  enemy's  position  is  desired,  to  cause 
the  deployment  of  the  enemy's  infantry  and  the  opening  of  fire  by 
part,  at  least,  of  his  artillery.  In  the  latter  case  the  combat  recon- 
naissance may  develop  into  the  opening  phase  of  the  attack,  and 
care  must  be  taken  that  enough  troops  are  kept  in  hand  to  change 
completely  the  course  of  tiie  attack,  if  the  information  obtained 
calls  lor  such  action. 


16  AECOVVAISSASt^E:  - 

19.  In  any  advance  toward  the  enemy  the  advance  guard  must 
be  relied  upon  for  such  reconnaissance  as  is  necessary,  either  to 
eupplement  the  reconnaissance  of  other  troops  or  to  replace  it  when 
other  reconnaissance  is  wholly  wanting.  It  is  important  that  the 
advance  guard  force  the  enemy  to  disclose  liis  position  and  strength 
as  early  as  possible.  A  strong  force  of  artillery  is  most  useful  for 
thJB  purpose,  as  it  clears  up  the  situation  in  a  way  that  can  not  be 
done  by  other  troops,  except  by  incurring  heavy  losses. 

In  encountering  the  enemy  in  a  position  that  is  to  be  developed 
the  advance  guard  must  continue,  by  means  of  the  advance  cav- 
alry, the  reconnaissance  b^un  by  the  independent  cavalry  or  by 
other  troops.  The  enemy  will  not  disclose  his  position,  particu- 
larly that  of  his  artillery,  until  forced  to  do  so  oy  a  determined 
reconnaissance  which  may  call  for  the  use  of  infantry  and  artillery 
in  force  before  it  can  accomplish  its  purpose.  The  advance  of  the 
infMitry  will  finally  force  back  all  advanced  detachments  of  the 
enemy  and  bare  his  main  position.  The  artillery  will  assist  in  this 
advance  by  opening  fire  on  any  targets  of  importance  that  the 
infantry  advance  uncovers.  Finally,  the  enemy's  artillery  will  be 
obliged  to  disclose  its  position  by  opening  fire,  either  to  stop  the 
advance  of  the  opposing  infantry  or  to  keep  down  the  opposing  artil- 
lery fire.  The  information  thus  gained  of  the  enemy's  position 
and  strength  will  enable  the  leader  to  form  his  plan  of  attack. 

In  the  rencontre  efficient  measures  for  security  on  the  march  must 
be  relied  upon  to  take  the  place  of  the  more  complete  reconnais- 
sance which  the  necessity  of  obtaining  the  initiative  in  deployment 
forbids.  In  an  attack  on  a  position  that  the  enemy  has  had  time 
to  take  up  deliberately  and  to  strengthen,  time  is  not  so  important 
an  element,  and  the  reconnaissance  preceding  deployment  must 
be  as  complete  as  may  be  necessary  to  determine  the  enemy's 
strength  and  dispositions. 

20.  Eeconnaissance  During  Combat. — The  infantry  will  keep  up 
during  combat  such  reconnaissance  as  will  enable  it  to  keep  con- 
tact with  the  enemy,  acquaint  itself  with  the  terrain  in  its  front, 
and  especially  to  protect  its  flanks  and  rear.  The  field  artillery 
continues  the  reconnaissance  called  for  by  its  tactical  employment. 

21.  During  combat  the  aero  squadron  will  operate  around  the 
flanks  and  over  and  to  the  rear  of  the  enemy's  position,  for  the 
purpose  of  reporting  his  dispositions,  the  approach  of  reinforce- 
ments, or  the  beginning  of  his  withdrawal  from  action. 

22.  During  combat  the  cavalry  will  conduct  an  extended  recon- 
naissance around  the  flanks  and  to  the  rear  of  the  enemy's  i}Osition, 


PATROLS.  17 

but  such  reconnaissance  must  be  conducted  by  small  detachments 
in  order  that  the  main  body  of  the  cavahy  may  be  kept  close  at 
hand  to  aid  in  obtaining  success  in  the  main  battle. 

23.  Eeconnoitering  Patrols.' — The  chief  duty  of  reconnoitering 
patrols  is  to  gather  information.  They  habitually  seek  safety  in 
concealment  or  flight,  fighting  only  when  their  mission  demands 
it.  The  most  skillful  patrolling  is  where  patrols  accomplish  their 
mission  and  return  without  being  discovered  bj-  the  enemy. 

24.  The  commander  determines  the  number  and  strength  of 
patrols  and  when  they  are  to  be  sent  out.  It  is  a  cardinal  principle 
to  send  out  only  such  patrols  as  insure  effective  reconnaissance. 
Patrols  vary  in  strength  from  two  or  three  men  to  a  company. 
Small  patrols  have  great  mobility,  are  easily  concealed,  and  do  not 
draw  heavily  on  the  fighting  strength.  In  hostile  territory,  or  when 
resistance  is  expected,  stronger  detachments  are  required.  These 
cover  themselves  with  small  patrols  of  two  to  four  men,  the  re- 
mainder acting  as  support. 

The  officer  sending  out  a  patrol  verifies  the  detail,  designates 
a  second  in  command  and  gives  the  neces3ar>  instructions.  Horses 
of  conspicuous  color  and  those  that  neigh  when  alone  should  not  be 
sent.  Precautions  are  taken  to  avoid  the  glitter  and  rattle  of 
weapons  and  equipments. 

The  orders  or  instructions  for  a  patrol,  or  for  any  detachment 
goii^  on  reconnaissance,  must  state  clearly  where  the  enemy  is  or 
IS  supposed  to  be,  what  information  is  desired,  what  features  are  of 
special  itnportance,  the  general  direction  to  be  fallowed,  whether 
friendly  patrols  are  likely  to  be  encountered,  and  where  messages 
are  to  be  sent  or  the  patrol  is  to  report.  Important  and  comprehen- 
sive instructions  should  be  in  writing,  bat  precautions  against  cap- 
ture of  papers  must  be  taken.  An  officer  sending  out  a  patrol  must 
be  certain  that  his  orders  are  understood.  Detailed  instructions 
are,  as  a  rule,  avoided.    When  necessary  the  time  of  return  is  stated. 

26.  Patrol  Leaders. — Skillful  patrolling  is  the  basis  of  efficient 
reconnaissance.  Patrol  leaders  are  selected  with  care,  officers  being 
detailed  for  important  missions.  Patrol  leaders  should  combine 
the  qualities  of  good  health,  vigorous  physique,  keen  eyesight, 
presence  of  mind  and  courage,  with  good  judgment,  military  train- 
ing, and  experience.    They  should  be  able  to  read  maps,  make 

>  The  term  patrols  is  used  to  designate  smfeU  devachments  employed  for  a  variety 
of  purposes,  the  name  of  the  detachment  indicating  its  duty,  as  visiting,  connect- 
ing, combat,  exploring,  reconnoitering,  flanking,  harassing,  pursuing  patrols,  eto. 

35379"-14 2 


18  PATEOIS. 

sketches,  and  send  clear  and  concise  messages.  Officers  on  such 
duty  often  find  themselves  in  positions  where  the  situation  must  be 
viewed  from  the  standpoint  of  a  higher  commander,  and  should  be 
able  to  reason  accordingly. 

26.  Conduct. — Patrols  exercise  the  greatest  vigilance  to  prevent 
discovery. 

No  normal  formation  for  a  patrol  is,  or.  should  be  prescribed. 
Under  the  leader's  guidance  it  moves  so  as  to  guard  against  sur- 
prise, usually  with  point  and  flankers.  To  extend  the  sphere  of 
Its  observation,  still  smaller  patrols  (one  or  two  men)  may  be  sent 
out  for  short  distances,  communication  with  the  leader  being  main- 
tained by  signals.  Whatever  the  formation  adopted,  it  should 
favor  the  e8caj)e  of  at  least  one  man  in  case  of  surprise. 

In  questioning  civilians  caution  is  observed  not  to  disclose 
information  that  may  be  of  value  to  the  enemy.  Strangers  are 
not  allowed  to  precede  the  patrol.  Patrol  leaders  are  authorized 
to  seize  telegrams  and  mail  matter,  and  to  arrest  individuals, 
reporting  the  facts  as  soon  as  possible. 

27.  Indications  ol  the  Enemy. — Nothing  should  escape  the 
observation  of  the  patrol.  The  slightest  indication  of  the  enemy 
should  be  reported  to  the  leader  at  once.  On  roads  and  in  aban- 
doned camps,  signs  are  often  found  which  indicate  the  number, 
character,  and  condition  of  the  enemy,  and  the  direction  in  which 
he  is  marching.  Abandoned  clothing  or  equipage  may  bear  marks 
indicating  organizations. 

A  thick  and  low  cloud  of  dust  indicates  infantry;  a  high  and 
thin  cloud,  cavalry;  a  broken  cloud,  artillery  or  wagon  trains. 
The  size  of  the  command  and  direction  of  march  may  be  roughly 
estimated  by  the  dust,  but  the  effect  of  wind  must  be  considered. 

The  strength  of  a  body  of  troops  may  be  estimated  from  the 
length  of  time  it  takes  to  pass  a  given  point.  Assuming  that  infan- 
try in  column  of  squads  occupies  half  a  yard  per  man,  cavalry  in 
column  of  fours  1  yard  per  trooper,  and  artillery  in  single  column 
20  yards  per  gim  or  caisson,  a  given  point  would  be  passed  in  one 
minute  by  about — 

175  infantry. 
110  cavalry,  at  walk. 
,    200  cavalry,  at  trot. 
5  guns  or  caissons. 

For  troops  in  colunm  of  twos,  take  one-half  of  the  above  estimates. 

28.  When  it  is  certain  that  the  enemy  has  been  discovered,  that 
fact  is  promptly  reported. 


AIE  CRArT.  19 

The  exact  location  of  the  enemy — whether  deployed,  march- 
ing, or  in  camp — his  strength,  and  the  arms  of  service  are  next 
ascertained  and  reported  It  is  often  difficult  to  decide  whether 
the  troops  discovered  are  the  main  body  or  merely  the  advance 
guard  or  outposts.  The  rule  is  to  observe  the  main  body;  there- 
fore it  may  be  necessary  to  obtain  a  view  from  a  position  in  rear  of 
the  covering  troops.  This  is  done  by  going  around  or  by  breaking 
through,  returning  over  different  ground  to  avoid  ambuscade. 

29.  Signals. — In  addition  to  the  usual  signals  prescribed  in  drill 
regulations,  the  following  should  be  clearly  understood  by  mem- 
bers of  a  patrol: 

Enemy  in  sight  in  small  numbers,  hold  the  rifle  above  the  head 
horizontally,  enemy  in  force,  same  as  preceding,  raising  and  lower- 
ing the  rifle  several  times;  take  cover,  a  downward  motion  of  the 
hand 

Other  signals  may  be  agreed  upon  before  starting,  but  they  must 
be  familiar  to  the  men;  complicated  signals  are  avoided. 

30.  Employment  of  Air  Craft. — Military  air  craft  of  all  kinds  will 
be  employed  under  the  direction  of  the  commander  of  the  forces  to 
which  they  are  assigned  and  the  immediate  control  of  the  officer 
commanding  the  aero  organization. 

Balloons  are  classed  as  free,  captive,  and  dirigible.  Free  bal- 
loons may  be  used  to  convey  information  from  besieged  places, 
the  return  message  being  sent  by  radiotelegraphy,  earner  pigeons, 
or  otherwise.  Free  balloons  are  of  little  use  for  any  other  service, 
and  are  not  very  dependable  on  account  of  their  uncertainty  of 
movement.  Captive  balloons  may  be  used  for  tactical  reconnais- 
sance, for  observation  of  artillery  fire,  and  for  signaling.  Commu- 
nication from  a  captive  balloon  to  the  ground  should  be  by  tele- 
phone. 

Large  dirigible  balloons  are  of  practical  value  for  strategical 
reconnaissance  and  to  travel  great  distances;  they  are  also  suitable 
for  carrying  a  number  of  observers,  radio  equipment,  machine  guns, 
and  considerable  weight  of  explosives.  Aeroplanes  are  more 
dependable  for  field  service  with  a  mobile  army  than  dirigible 
balloons,  as  the  latter  require  substantial  shelter  from  winds  while 
on  the  ground. 

31.  Reconnaissance  by  aeroplane  includes  strategical  and  tactical 
reconnaissance  and  the  observation  of  artillery  fire.  Aeroplanes 
are  also  used  to  prevent  hostile  aerial  reconnaissance. 

Strategical  reconnaissance  by  aeroplane  is  effective  within  a 
radius  of  150  miles  from  the  starting  point,  and  is  for  the  purpoee 


20  MESSAGES,  REPORTS,  AND  WAR  DIARIES. 

of  determining  the  position,  strength,  and  direction  of  advance  of 
the  large  elements  of  an  enemy's  lorces,  and  also  the  character  of 
the  roads,  railroads,  streams,  and  the  general  military  topography 
of  the  theater  of  operations. 

Tactical  reconnaissance  by  aeroplane  is  used  both  in  attack  and 
defense.  It  is  extended  in  its  nature  and  does  not  involve  minute 
examinations  of  very  small  localities  or  detachments.  It  is  de- 
signed to  discover  turning  and  enveloping  movements,  the  position 
and  strength  of  the  enemy's  general  reserve,  artillery  positions 
and  movoments  of  cavalry;  also,  from  the  movement  of  combat 
or  fif'ld  trains  behind  an  enemy's  position  information  may  be 
gained  as  U)  whether  certain  parts  of  the  lino  are  being  weakened 
or  strengthened,  or  whether  a  retreat  is  contemplated. 

For  observation  of  fire  of  field  artillerv,  aeroplanes  are  usually 
aflsitcned  to  the  nrtillory  commanflcr.  They  are  e8i)ecially  useful 
apunirtt  tar^etfl  which  are  invisible  from  the  position  of  the  artillery 
ofiircr  conducting  the  fire 

Aeroplanes  are  safe  from  hostile  fire  at  altitudes  of  4,000  feet 
or  more. 

The  nwiltfl  of  rocornaissanco  are  reported  by  radio  telegraphy, 
(signals,  and  tho  dropjung  of  messages. 

MKSSAOE8,   KBPORTP,    MAPS,  AND  WAR  DIARIES. 

82.  In  tho  fichl  the  term  "  message"  is  generally  ai^^liod  to  writ- 
f-en  information  sent  be  messenger  or  wire.  Such  messages  should 
be  brief  and  clear,  resembling  telegrams.  The  source  of  the  infor- 
mation cont-ained  in  messages  is  always  given,  the  writer  carefully 
separating  what  ne  has  actually  seen  himself  from  that  received 
sccondhuJid.  Most  of  the  rrles  adopted  to  secure  clearness  in 
or<lerfl  ap]>ly  e(]ually  to  messages. 

88.  A  report  is  a  more  or  less  formal  account  Of  some  enterprise, 
undertaking,  or  event,  such  as  a  march,  reconnaissance,  battle, 
etc.  A  H'jKirt  is  usually  drawn  up  at  comparative  leisure,  is  often 
(ho  eupplement  and  expansion  of  short  messages,  and  thus  pos- 
pesses  the  value  of  greater  deatil. 

34.  In  the  field  the  maps  available  for  general  use  are  on  a  small 
scale.  Those  of  our  own  country  are  prepared  by  the  Geological 
Hurvey  on  a  scale  of  1  :  62500  (approximately  1  inch  to  the  mile), 
with  20-foot  contours.  These  maps  are  supplemented  by  field 
nmps  or  sketches  prepared  from  day  to  day.  For  facility  in  read- 
ing, militAry  map6  are  made  Recording  to  a  uniform  system  of 


MESSAGES,  KXPO£TS,  AKD  WAE  DIA&IES.  21 

scales  and  contour  intervals,  as  foUowe:  One  inch  to  1  mile,  V.  I. 
60  feet;  3  inches  to  1  mile,  V.  I.  20  feet;  6  inches  to  1  mile,  V.  I. 
10  feet;  12  inches  to  1  mile,  V.  I.  5  feet. 

As  a  rule,  road  sketches  are  made  on  a  scale  of  3  inches  U)  1  mile, 
V.  I.  20  feet;  position  and  outpost  sketches,  6  inches  t/)  1  mile, 
V.  I.  10  feet.  The  1-inch  map  is  used  for  extended  operation?.;  the 
12-inch  map  for  the  war  game  or  for  the  discussion  of  operations 
at  maneuvers,  and  in  siege  operations. 

As  sketches  must  be  made  rapidly,  often  on  horseVjack,  unnec- 
essary conventional  signs  are  omitted.  Sketches  are  useful  to 
supplement  messages  and  to  elucidate  reports  of  campaigns  and 
battles. 

35.  A  war  diary  is  a  record  of  events  kept  in  campaign  by  each 
battalion  and  hjigher  organization,  each  aoDmunition,  STjpply, 
engineer,  and  sanitary  train.  Entries  are  made  daily  and  »noi:id 
form  a  concise  history  of  the  military  operations ,  A  day  romprisf;^ 
24  hours  covered  by  the  date. 

Each  day's  record  idJl  commence  with  a  march  tabUr 
ment  of  the  operations  or  location  of  the  orgariization,  in/.^.^....^  .>:i 
accoui:t  of  '^^eather,  roadi?,  camp,  health  of  troopfl,  etc.,  and  a 
statement  of  the  supply  of  ammunition,  rations,  and  forat"^;      Tl.is 
will  be  followed  by  a  chronolcgiral  record  <rf  events,  :• 

time  and  place  of  issue  and  receipt  of  ordeis  and  meiEi 
a  copy  or  a  s^TiCpeis  of  contents. 

It  IS  of  special  importance  that  the  exact  lioiir  and  place  at  which 

movements  are  begun  and  ended,  and ofdew  OTimj, ' .  —  . .. 

sent  or  received,  be  noted.    A fter an enpefMiCP^ .  th- 
contain  a  report  o-f  loeees  and  captmcs  and  w^'  ■  ^  ■ 
by  a  sketch  showing  the  poHtiaiifl  of  the  ccr. 
important  pha--e=. 

Each  day  ■     ^      1  by  thee. ; 

adjutant;  ar.  fowi«r»ar.  : 

rec^ved,  ^ 

who,  as  80C  : 

the  war  dii 


command, 

ment. 


23  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFOBHATION. 

Transmission  op  Information. 
36,  Information  is  transmitted  as  follows: 

1.  Bv  wire  (telpsraph,  buzzer,  telephone). 

'I.  By  visual  siijiialmg  (flag,  helio,  night  lamp)., 

3.  BV  radio  telegraph. 

4.  By  messenger  (foot,  mounted,  cycle,  motor  car,  flying  machine). 

Information  over  considerable  dietances  is  usually  transmitted 
by  wire  or  radio  teleojaph.  For  sliort  distances,*  and  when 
otlier  means  are  not  available,  information  is  carried  by  messenger. 
When  messages  are  sent  by  wire  or  radio  telegraph  they  are 
always  handed  the  operator  in  writing.  The  telephone  is  not  as 
accurate  as  the  telegraph,  and  when  used  the  parties  concerned  do 
the  talking,  if  practicable.  All  available  means  are  utilized  to 
facilitate  the  transmission  of  information,  and  it  is  the  duty  of  all 
othccrs  to  assist  in  the  transmission  of  orders  and  messages. 

It  is  frequently  advisable  to  send  information  not  only  to  the 
proper  superior,  but  to  neighboring  troops  as  well.  When  copies 
of  messages  are  so  sent  the  fact  is  noted  upon  each.  In  large 
commanos  information  as  to  the  situation  of  neighboring  troops 
is  often  of  great  importance.  In  such  cases  "information  officers" 
with  messengers  are  sent  to  accompan>^  such  troops.  These 
officers  send  to  their  own  commanders  all  information  of  military 
importance  to  them. 

Messages  earned  by  messenger  are  usually  inclosed  in  envelopes 
]>roperly  addressed.  The  envelope  when  not  marked  "confi- 
deutial"  is  loft  unsealed,  so  that  commanders  along  the  line  of 
marcli  may  read  the  contents.  Upon  the  envelope  is  written 
the  name  of  the  messenger,  his  time  of  departuie.  and  rate  of  speed. 
The  latter  is  indicated  as  follows:  Ordinary,  rapid,  or  urgent. 
Ordinary  means  about  5  miles  an  hour  for  a  mounted  man;  rapid, 
about  7  or  8  miles  an  hour;  and  urgent,  the  highest  speed  con- 
sistent with  certainty  of  arrival  at  destination.  The  recipient 
notes  the  time  of  receipt  upon  the  envelope  and  returns  the  latter 
to  bearer 

When  there  is  danger  of  falling  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy, 
messages  are  sent  in  cipher. 

Important  information  is  sent  by  two  or  more  messengers, 
depending  upon  the  dangers  of  the  road.    It  may  be  advisable 

»  For  Instance,  at  urgent  speed  and  for  distances  up  to  about  half  a  mile,  a 
mounted  messenger  can  deliver  a  message  of  10  words  in  less  time  than  the  same 
can  be  delivered  by  wire. 


TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION.^  23^ 

to  send  duplicate  messages  by  different  routes.  Messengers  are 
informed  before  starting  of  the  purport  of  the  message,  and  where 
they  are  to  report  after  it  is  delivered. 

"When  the  usual  means  of  communication  can  not  be  estab- 
lished, or  fail  to  work,  relay  lines  of  mounted  men  paay  become 
necessary.  When  such  lines  are  established  connecting  posts  are 
geneially  placed  on  the  roads  at  well-marked  points,  such  as 
crossroads,  bridges,  etc.  The  distance  between  posts  depends 
upon  the  rapidity  of  transmission  desired,  the  number  of  men 
available,  and  the  location  of  suitable  stations.  The  usual  dis- 
tance is  from  5  to  10  miles.  The  strength  of  such  posts  varies 
from  six  men  and  a  noncommissioned  officer  to  half  a  troop.  A 
record  is  kept  at  each  post  of  all  conmiunications  received  and 
transmitted. 


Article  II. 

SECUBITY. 

GENEEAL  PEINCIPLE8. 

37.  Security  embraces  all  those  measures  taken  by  a  command  to 
protect  itself  from  observation,  annoyance,  or  surprise  by  the 
enemy. 

Ordinarily  this  security  is  provided  in  part  by  the  independent 
cavalry,  which,  operating  far  to  the  front,  checks  the  opposing 
cavalry  and  sends  in  timely  information  of  the  movements  of  the 
enemy.  But  as  a  command  is  not  always  preceded  by  independent 
cavalry,  and  as  this  cavalry  can  not  always  prevent  sudden  in- 
cursions of  the  enemy  or  discover  his  patrols,  additional  security 
becomes  necessary.  This  is  obtained  by  covering  the  immediate 
front  of  the  command  with  detachments. 

On  the  march  these  detachments  are  called  advance,  flank,  or 
rear  guards;  in  camp  or  bivouac  they  arc  called  outposts. 

The  object  of  the  former  is  to  facilitate  the  movement  of  tlie 
main  body  and  to  protect  it  from  surprise  and  observation;  the 
object  of  the  latter  is  to  secure  the  camp  or  bivouac  against  surprise 
and  to  prevent  an  attack  upon  it  before  the  troops  can  prepare  to 
resist. 

On  the  march  these  detachments  facilitate  the  advance  of  the 
main  body  by  promptly  driving  off  small  bodies  of  the  enemy  who 
seek  to  harass  or  delay  it;  by  removing  obstacles  from  the  line  of 
advance;  by  repairing  roads,  bridges,  etc.,  thus  enabling  the  main 
body  to  advance  uninterruptedly  in  convenient  marchiug  forma- 
tions. 

They  protect  the  main  body  by  preventing  the  enemy  from 
firing  into  it  when  in  close  formation;  by  holding  the  enemy  and 
enabling  the  main  body  to  deploy  before  coming  under  effective 
fire;  by  preventing  its  size  and  condition  from  being  observed 
by  the  enemy;  and,  in  retreat,  by  gaining  time  for  it  to  make  its 
escape  or  to  reorganize  it3  forces. 

U 


6ENEEAL  PBINCIFLE8  OF  SECUEITT.  35 

As  the  principal  duty  of  these  bodies  is  the  same,  viz,  that  of 
protecting  the  main  body,  there  is  a  general  similarity  in  the 
formations  assumed  by  them.  There  is  (1)  the  cavalry  covering 
the  front;  next  (2)  a  group,  or  line  of  groups,  in  observation;  then  (3) 
the  support,  or  line  of  supports,  whose  duty  is  to  furnish  die  obser- 
vation groups,  and  check 'the  enemy  pending  the  arrival  of  rein- 
forcements; still  farther  in  rear  is  (4)  the  reserve. 

38.  The  march  order  of  the  whole  command  should  explain  the 
situation,  and  among  other  things,  detail  the  commander  and 
troops  for  each  covering  detachment.  It  should  specify  the  route 
to  be  taken  and  the  distance  to  be  maintained  between  the  main 
body  and  its  covering  detachments.  It  should  order  such  recon- 
naissance as  the  commander  specially  desires  to  have  made. 

The  order  of  the  commander  of  a  covering  detachment  should 
clearly  explain  the  situation:  to  subordinates,  assign  the  troops 
to  the  subdivisions,  prescribe  their  distances,  and  order  such 
special  reconnaissance  as  may  be  deemed  necessary  in  the  l)e- 
ginning. 

39.  An  advance  or  flank  guard  commander  marches  well  to  the 
front  and,  from  time  to  time,  orders  such  additional  reconnais- 
sance or  makes  such  changes  hi  his  dispositions  as  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case  demand. 

In  large  commands  troops  from  all  arms  are  generally  detailed,  the 
proportion  from  each  being  determined  by  the  tactical  dtuation; 
but  commanders  detail  no  more  troops  than  the  situation  actually 
requires,  as  an  excessive  amount  of  such  duty  rapidly  impairs  the 
eflSciency  of  a  command.  As  a  general  rule  troops  detailed  on  the 
service  of  security  vary  in  strength  from  one-twentieth  to  one-third 
of  the  entire  command,  but  seldom  exceed  the  latter.  When  prac- 
ticable, the  integrity  of  tactical  units  is  preserved. 

In  mixed  commands  infantry  usually  lorms  the  greater  part  of 
the  troops  detailed  to  the  service  of  security.  Oavab^  is  assigned 
to  that  duty  whenever  advantage  can  be  taken  of  its  superior  mo- 
bility: The  kind  and  amount  of  artillery  are  determined  by  cir- 
cumstances. 

Engineer,  signal,  and  sanitary  troops  are  detailed  when  required. 

The  field  trains  of  tmops  on  this  duty  generally  remain  with 
the  field  train  of  the  command,  but  if  conditions  i)ermit  they  aaay 
join  their  organizations. 

Troops  on  the  service  of  security  pay  no  compliments;  individ- 
uals salute  when  they  address,  or  are  addressed  by,  a  sup^ior  officer. 


ADVANCE  GTTABDS. 


ADVANCE  GUARDS. 


40.  An  advance  guard  is  a  detachment  of  the  main  body  which 
precedes  and  covers  it  on  the  march. 
Its  duties  are:     ^ 

1.  To  guard  against  surprise  and  furnish  information  by  recon- 
noitering  tp  the  front  and  flanks. 

2.  To  push  back  small  parties  of  the  enemy  and  prevent  their 
observing,  firing  upon,  or  delaj-ing  the  main  body. 

3.  To  check  the  enemy's  advance  jln  force  long  enough  to  permit 
the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action. 

4.  When  the  enemy  is  encountered  on  the  defensive,  to  seize  a 
good  position  and  locate  his  lines,  care  being  taken  not  to  bring  on  a 
generail  engagement  unless  the  advance-guard  commander  is  em- 
powered to  do  so. 

5.  To  remove  obstacles,  repair  the  road,  and  favor  in  ever>  way 
possible  the  steady  march  of  the  column. 

.41.  Strength  and  Composition. — Subject  to  variation  according 
to  the  situation,  one-twentieth  to  one- third  of  a  command  may  be 
assumed  as  a  suitable  strength  for  the  advance  guard.  The  larger 
the  force,  the  larger  in  proportion  is  the  advance  guard,  for  a  large 
command  takes  reUtiyelj  longer  to  prepare  for  action  than  a  small 
one.  In  large  commands  it  is  usually  composed  of  all  arms,  the 
proportions  depending  on  the  nature  of  the  work,  character  of  the 
country,  etc.  In  open  country  it  should  be  strong  in  cavalry  and 
field  artillery,  but  artillery  is  seldom  assigned  to  the  advance  guard 
of  a  command  not  larger  than  a  brigade.  In  such  cases,  however, 
when  there  is  artillery  with  a  command,  an  officer  of  that  arm 
usually  accompanies  the  advance  guard  for  purposes  of  artillery 
reconnaissance.  In  swampy  country  or  jungle  it  may  be  formed 
of  infantry  alone.  When  not  preceded  by  independent  cavalry, 
the  advance  guard  must,  as  a  rule,  be  strong  in  cavalry;  in  such 
cases  the  commander  determines  whether  to  attach  all  of  the 
divisional  cavahy  to  the  advance  guard,  or  to  retain  a  part  for  some 
special  service. 

Machine  guns  materistlly  increase  the  effectiveness  of  an  advance 
guard.  They  are  useful  in  holding  bridges,  defiles,  etc.,  until 
reenforcements  can  be  brought  up. 

Engineers  are  usually  attached  to  an  advance  guard  to  remove 
obstacles,  repair  roads,  etc.  Circumstances  may  require  a  bridge 
train  to  be  attached. 


ABVAHCE  OVA&DS.  87 

The  supreme  commander  generally  retains  control  of  the  dgnal 
troops,  and  establishes  such  lines  of  information  as  he  deems  necea* 
sary.  However,  when  the  nature  of  the  country  favors  communi- 
cation by  signaling,  signal  troops  may  be  attached  to  the  advance 
guard. 

An  ambulance  company  usually  accompanies  large  advance 
guards. 

42.  Distance  from  Main  Body.—The  distance  at  which  the 
advance  guard  precedes  the  main  body,  or  the  main  body  follows 
the  advance  guard,  is  stated  in  the  march  order.  In  small  com- 
mands, where  there  is  no  difficulty  in  keeping  touch  with  the  main 
body,  the  march  order  generally  requires  the  advance  guard  to 
regulate  its  march  on  the  main  body ;  but  where  the  advance  guard 
is  large,  or  moves  at  a  considerable  distance  in  advance  of  the  main 
body,  the  latter  regulates  its  march  on  the  advance  guard. 

While  the  distance  between  these  two  bodies  should  be  great 
enough  to"  prevent  needless  interruptions  in  the  march  of  the  main 
body,  and  to  give  the  latter  time  to  deploy  should  the  enemy  be 
encountered,  it  should  never  be  so  great  that  timely  support  of  the 
advance  guard  becomes  impracticable. 

43.  Advance  Guard  Commander. — On  receipt  of  the  march  order 
the  advance  guard  commander  estimates  the  situation  and,  at  the 
proper  time,  issues  the  advance-guard  order.  This  order  divides  the 
advance  guard  into  its  tactical  components  (advance  cavalry,  sup- 
port, etc.),  and  gives  the  necessarv  instructions  for  each. 

The  advance-guard  commander  is  mounted  and  goes  wherever  he 
deems  his  presence  necessary,  though  his  habitual  station  is  at  the 
head  of  the  reserve,  or  with  the  support  when  there  is  no  reserve. 
He  conducts  the  advance  so  as  not  to  interrupt  the  steady  march  of 
the  main  body,  and,  when  ordered  to  move  at  a  certain  distance  in 
front  of  the  latter,  maintains  the  necessary  connection  therewith. 
He  bears  constantly  in  mind  the  duties  of  an  advance  guard,  and 
studies  the  ground  with  a  view  to  tactical  dispositions  should  the 
enemy  be  encountered. 

44.  Distribution  of  Troops. — ^An  advance-guard  order  generally 
prescribes  the  following  distribution  of  troops: 

Advance  cavalry. 

Support. 

Reserve. 

The  manner  in  which  the  advance-guard  cavalrv  is  employed 
depends  upon  the  situation.    Its  proper  place  is  in  the  direction  of 


2fl^  ADVAKCE  GTTARBS. 

the  enemy,  and  generally  all  or  the  greater  part  is  used  aa  advance 
cavalry.    If  weak  in  numbers,  it  may  be  assigned  to  the  support. 

46.  Advance  Cayalry. — ^The  advance  cavalry  is  that  part  of  the 
advance-guard  cavalry  preceding  the  support.  It  reconnoiters  far 
enough  to  the  front  and  flanks  to  guard  the  column  against  surprise 
loy  artillery  fire,  and  to  enable  timely  information  to  be  sent  to  the 
advance-guard  commander.  If  preceded  by  independent  cavalry, 
the  advance  cavalry  maintains  connection  therewith,  except  when 
prevented  by  uncontrollable  reasons ;  if  not  preceded  by  inde- 
pendent cavalry,  it  pushes  well  out  and  endeavors  to  find  the 
enemy,  performing  to  a  limited  extent  the  functions  of  independ- 
ent cavalry.  Its  commander  should  be  bold,  energetic,  and  capa- 
ble; he  sees  that  his  command  is  supplied  with  articles  required 
by  patrols. 

46.  Support. — Following  the  advance  cavalrv  is  the  support, 
varying  in  strength  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  of  the  advance 
guard.  In  mixed  commands  it  consists  of  infantry,  to  which  engi- 
neers may  be  attached.  If  there  is  no  advance  cavalry,  some 
cavalry  should  be  attached  to  the  support  for  reconroitering  duty. 

As  the  support  moves  out  it  sends  forward  an  advance  party  sev- 
eral hundred  yards,  the  distance  varying  with  the  terrain  and  the 
size  of  the  command. 

The  advance  party  supplements  the  work  of  the  advance  cav- 
alry, reconnoitering  to  the  front  and  flanks  to  guard  the  support 
against  surprise  by  effective  rifle  fire.  The  patrol  preceding  the 
advance  party  on  the  line  of  march  is  called  the  point,  and  is  com- 
manded by  an  officer  or  an  experienced  noncommissioned  officer. 

With  the  advance  cavalry  in  front  but  little  reconnoitering 
by  infantry  is  necessary,  and  the  advance  party  is  relatively 
small — one-eighth  to  one-third  of  the  support.  If  there  is  no 
advance  cavalry,  the  advance  party  is  made  stronger  (about  one- 
half  of  the  support)  and  the  flanks  are  guarded,  if  necessary,  by 
additional  patrols  sent  out  from  the  support  and  even  from  the 
reserve. 

The  support  commander  ordinarily  marchefl  with  the  advance 
party,  but  goes  wherever  needed.  He  sees  that  the  proper  road  is 
followed;  that  guides  are  left  in  towns  and  at  crossroacis;  that  neces- 
sary repairs  are  made  to  roads,  bridges,  etc.,  and  that  information 
of  the  enemy  or  affecting  the  march  is  promptly  transmitted  to  the 
advance-^uard  commander.  He  enaeavors  promptly  to  verify 
Information  of  the  enemy. 


ADVANCE  GUARDS.  29 

47.  Beserv^. — ^The  reserve  follows  the  support  at  several  hun- 
dred yards  distance.  It  consists  of  the  remainder  of  the  infantry 
and  engineers,  the  artillery,  and  the  ambulance  company.  The 
artillery  usually  marches  near  the  head  of  the  reserve,  the  engi^ 
neers  (with  bridge  train,  if  any)  and  special  troops  at  the  reaif. 

48.  Beconnaissance. — In  conducting  the  reconnaissance  the 
patrols  are,  as  a  rule,  small — from  two  to  six  men.  If  additional 
protection  is  necessary,  a  flank  guard  covers  the  threatened  flank. 
The  flanking  patrols,  whether  of  the  advance  cavalry  or  advance 
party,  are  sent  out  to  examine  the  country  wherever  the  enemy 
might  be  concealed  If  the  nature  of  the  terrain  j)ermit8,  these 
patrols  march  across  country  or  along  roads  and  trails  paralleUrg 
the  march  of  the  column.  For  cavalry  patrols  this  is  often  possible ; 
but  with  infantry  patrols  and  even  with  those  that  are  mounted, 
reconnaissance  is  generally  best  done  by  sending  the  patrols  to 
high  places  along  the  line  of  march  to  overlook  the  country  and 
examine  the  danger  points.  These  patrols  report  or  »gnal  the 
results  of  their  observations  and,  unless  they  have  other  instruc- 
tions, join  their  units  by  the  most  practicable  routes,  other  patrols 
being  sent  out  as  the  march  proceeds  and  as  the  nature  of  the  coun- 
try requires. 

Deserters,  suspicious  characters,  jand  bearers  of  flags  of  truce,' 
the  latter  blindfolded,  are  taken  to  the  advtoce  guard  commander 

Civilians  are  not  permitted  to  precede  the  advance  gu&rd. 

Communication  between  the  fractions  of  an  advance  guard  and 
between  the  advance  ^ard  and  main  body  is  maintained  by  wire, 
messenger  service,  or  signals. 

ADVANCE   GUARD  OP   A   SMALL   COMMAND, 

49.  In  forming  the  advance  guard  of  a  command  smaller  than  a 
brigade,  the  foregoing  distribution  is  modified,  depending  upon  the 
situation.  A  company  or  troop  usually  sends  forward  only  a  point, 
a  battalion  or  squadron,  an  advance  party;  but  a  battalion  or 
squadron  at  war  strength  should  put  a  company  m  troop  in  the 
advance  guard  and  a  regiment  should  put  a  battalion  or  squadron, 
if  an  enemy  is  liable  to  be  met.  A\Tienevet'  the  advance  guard  is 
less  than  a  battalion,  there  is  no  reserve. 

60.  Advance  Guard  of  a  Cavalry  Command. — Cavalry  marching 
independently  adopts  formations  for  its  advance  guard  similar  to 
those  described  above,  though  the  distances  are  generally  greater. 

>  See  Rules  of  Land  Warfare,  U.  S.  Army  relative  to  reception  of  beuwAOf  flags 
of  truce,  etc. 


so  A2>VAN0£  OtTAftdS. 

ADVANCE   GUARD  OP  A  DIVISION   (INDEPENDENT). 

61.  AssumiDg  that  the  advance  ^ard  consists  of  one  brigade  cf 
infantry,  one  squadron,  one  battahon  of  artillery,  one  company  of 
engineers,  and  an  ambulance  company,  the  distribution  (with 
independent  cavalry)  might  be  made  as  follows: 

Independent  cavalry. 

(One  or  two  marches.) 

Advance  guard. 

Advance  cavalry. --^One  squadron  with  point  and  flanking  patrols; 
communication  maintained  with  independent  cavalry.  (Point  of 
advance  cavalry  to  point  of  advance  party  at  least  4  or  5  miles.) 

Support. — One  regiment  of  infantry  and  mounted  detachment 
of  engineers.  The  support  sends  forward  its  advance  party,  one 
company,  about  500  yards;  the  advance  party  is  precedea  from 
300  to  500  yards  by  its  point. 

(About  1,000  yards.) 

Reserve — in  order  of jnarch— One  battalion  infantry;  one  battalion 
artillery;  two  battalions  of  infantry;  one  regiment  infantry;  com- 
pany engineers  (less  detachment);  ambulance  company.  (There 
may  be  a  detachment  of  signal  troops,  though  the  division  com- 
mander generally  retains  control  of  thoee  troops.) 

(One  to  two  miles.) 

Main  body. 

SECURITY  FOR  THE   HEAD  OP  A  RETREATING  FORCE. 

52.  In  retreat  a  column  is  preceded  by  a  body  of  troops  desig- 
nated "leading  troops,"  whose  principal  duty  is  to  clear  the  road 
of  obstacles  and  facilitate  the  withdrawal  of  the  command.  The 
strength  and  composition  of  such  troops  are  determined  by  the 
situation.  Engineers  are  generally  necessary;  cavalry  is  assigned 
to  this  duty  to  afford  protection  against  guerrillas  or  small 
hostile  parties  that  may  have  succeeded  in  reaching  the  rear 
of  the  command.  If  the  rear  is  seriously  threatened,  the  lead- 
ing troops  march  practically  as  an  advance  guard. 


FLANK  OTTARBS  AND  BEAR  QXJAEDS.  31 

FLANK  GUARDS. 

63.  The  flanks  of  a  column  are  protected  in  part  by  the  advance 
guard,  which  carefully  examines  the  ground  on  both  sides  of  the 
fine  of  march.  It  may  be  necessary,  however,  to  provide  addi- 
tional security  for  a  flank  threatened  by  the  enemy.  This  is  done 
by  sending  a  detachment,  called  a  flank  guard,  to  cover  the  exposed 
flank. 

Flank  guards  vary  in  size  from  patrols  to  detachments  of  all  arms. 
Their  composition  and  formation  depend  upon  th6  situation, 
though  thejr  are  generally  strong  in  cavalry  on  account  of  the  neces- 
sity for  rapid  reconnaissance  and  communication.  They  may  be 
composed  exclusively  of  that  arm,  but  when  strong  positions  are 
to  be  held,  or  prolonged  resistance  to  the  enemy  is  expected,  troops 
of  all  arms  are  necessary.  Their  duties  are  similar  to  those  of  an 
advance  guard.  They  keep  in  constant  touch  with  the  colupin 
either  by  wire,  signal,  or  messenger  service. 

Flank  guards  may  be  sent  out  by  an  advance  guard  (made  strong 
for  that  purpose)  or  by  the  main  bodyj  they  march  in  a  direction 
generally  parallel  to  the  column,  keepmg  abreast  of  the  unit  from 
which  detailed,  or  are  sent  to  occupy  favorable  positions  on  a 
threatened  flank,  remaining  there  until  the  whole  column  has 
passed.  In  the  latter  case  they  join  the  rear  guard  and  return  to 
their  commands  at  the  end  of  the  day's  march.  As  a  flank  guard 
usually  marches  a  greater  distance  than  the  body  from  which  de- 
tailed, it  is  generally  sent  out  in  advance. 

54.  Flank  Marches. — When  the  main  body  executes  a  flank 
march  near  the  enemy,  the  flank  guard  becomes  a  body  of  great 
importance.  If  the  flank  march  is  due  to  a  considerable  change 
of  direction  in  the  march  of  the  column,  it  is  generally  advisable 
to  convert  the  advance  gi:ard  into  a  flank  guard,  and  detail  a  new 
advance  guard  to  precede  the  column.  If  the  troops  making  the 
flank  march  start  irom  camp,  a  separate  flank  guard  will  have  to 
be  provided. 

In  long  columns  the  large  units,  such  as  regiments,  will  provide 
their  own  flank  observation. 

REAR  GUARDS. 

66.  The  rear  guard  is  charged  with  the  important  duty  of  covering 
the  retreat. 

;When  a  commander  decides  to  retreat,  he  issues  the  necessary 
order.  During  a  retreat  the  outpost  for  the  night  usually  forms  the 
rear  guard  of  the  following  day. 


32  BEAR  GUARDS. 

66.  Strengtli  and  Composition. — The  strength  of  a  rear  guard 
depends  upon  the  nature  of  the  country  and  the  strength  and  char- 
acter of  the  pursuing  force.  It  can  not,  like  the  advance  guard, 
count  on  the  support  of  the  main  hody. 

Machine  guns  are  especially  useful  in  the  passage  of  defiles  and 
in  covering  the  crossings  of  rivers. 

Engineers  and  ambulance  companies  are  ii8T:ally  assigned  to  rear 
guards. 

The  troops  of  a  rear  gi.ard  are  selected  from  those  that  have  had 
previous  local  successes,  or  have  suffered  little  loss  and  are  com- 
paratively fresh. 

67.  Distribution  of  Troops. — The  proximity  and  conduct  of  the 
enemy  control,  to  a  large  extent,  the  formation  of  a  rear  guard. 
When  it  is  not  necessary  to  withdraw  in  deployed  lines,  the  greater 
part  of  the  rearguard  marches  on  the  road  in  column  of  route,  taking 
up  a  formation  resembling  that  of  an  advance  guard  faced  to  the 
rear.  The  distribution  of  troops  is  therefore  similar  to  that  of  aa 
advance  guard,  namely: 

Reserve. 
Support. 
K  ear  cavalry. 

The  rear  cavalry  is  that  portion  of  the  rear  guard  cavalry  follow- 
ing the  support.  The  support,  as  in  an  advance  guard,  is  divided 
into  two  carts;  that  part  nearest  the  enemy  is  called  the  rear  party 
and  marcnes  with  a  rear  point.  Mounted  engineers  usually  accom- 
pany the  support  and  may  be  attached  to  the  rear  party.  Where 
the  cavalry  is  of  sufficient  strength  and  has  horse  artillery  attached , 
the  entire  rear  guard,  excepting  the  reserve,  may  be  composed  of 
that  arm.    The  reserve  is  composed  mainly  of  infantry  and  artillery. 

68.  Distances. — ^The  distances  of  the  rear  guard  from  the  main 
body  and  between  the  fractions  of  the  rear  gi:ard  are  about  the  same 
as  in  the  case  of  an  advance  guard.  If  marching  at  night,  the  rear 
guard  draws  nearer  the  main  body. 

BEAR  GUARD  OF  AN  ADVANCING  FORCE. 

69.  If  there  is  a  possibility  that  the  rear  of  the  column  may  bo 
attacked,  a  rear  guard  of  suitable  strength  and  composition  is  pro- 
vided .  If  the  hostile  attempts  are  confined  to  guerrillas,  marauders, 
etc.,  the  guard  should  be  strong  in  cavalry.  Its  conduct  is  prac- 
tically the  same  a£i  that  of  the  rear  guard  of  a  retreating  force.  It 
|;enerally  marches  in  rear  of  the- trains,  those  organizations  follow- 
ing the  combatant  troops  without  distance. 


OTTTPOSTS. 


OUTPOSTS. 


60.  The  size  and  disposition  of  the  outpost  will  depend  upon 
many  circumstances,  such  as  the  size  of  the  whole  command,  the 
proximity  of  the  enemy  and  the  situation  with  respect  to  him,  the 
nature  of  the  terrain,  etc. 

.V  suitable  strength  may  vaiy  from  a  very  small  fraction  to 
nue-third  of  the  whole  force.  For  a  single  company  in  bivouac 
a  few  sentinels  and  patrols  will  suffice;  for  a  hurge  command  a  more 
elaborate  outpost  system  niust  be  provided.  It  should  be  no 
stronger  than  is  consistent  with  reasonable  security. 

The  most  economical  protection  is  furnished  by  keeping  close 
contact  with  the  enemy  oy  means  of  outpost  patrols,  in  conjunc- 
tion with  resisting  detachments  on  the  avenues  of  approach. 

The  outpost  should  be  composed  of  complete  organisations. 

61.  In  a  brigade  or  smaller  force  on  the  march  toward  the 
enemy,  the  outpost  is  generally  formed  from  the  advance  guard^ 
and  is  relieved  the  following  aay  when  the  new  advance  guard 
crosses  the  line  of  outguards.  m  a  retreat,  the  detail  for  out- 
post dut>'  is  generally  made  from  the  main  body.  The  new  out- 
post becomes  the  rear  guard  the  following  day. 

When,  as  in  large  forces,  an  advance  and  rear  guard  performs 
such  duty  for  several  days,  the  outpost,  during  this  period,  is 
furnished  by  the  advance  or  rear  guaras. 

When  the  command  is  small  and  stationary  for  several  days, 
the  outpost  is  relieved  daily.  In  large  commands,  tiie  outpost 
will,  as  a  rule,  be  relieved  at  inter\'als  of  several  days. 

62.  The  positions  held  by  the  subdivisions  of  the  outpost  should 
generally  be  prepared  for  defense,  but  conditions  may  render  this 
unnecessary. 

Troops  on  outpost  keep,  concealed  as  much  as  is  consistent 
with  the  proper  performance  of  their  duties;  especially  do  tiiey 
avoid  appearmg  on  the  sky  Une. 

63.  Composition. — ^A  mixed  outpost  is  composed  principally  of 
infantry.  The  infantry  is  chai|;ed  with  the  duty  of  local  observa- 
tion, especially  at  night,  and  with  resisting  the  enemy  long  enough 
'or  the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action.  The  cavalry  is  charged 
mXh  the  duty  of  reconnaissance,  and  is  very  useful  in  open  country 
luring  the  day. 

If  the  infantry  has  been  severely  taxed  by  marching  or  fightdng, 
i  large  part  of  the  outpost  may  be  temporarily  formed  of  cavalry. 

35379'-l 


34  OUTPOSTS. 

Wlien  an  outpost  is  detailed  from  the  advance  guard,  the  advance 
cavahy  of  the  advance  g^jard  becomes  the  advance  cavahy  of  the 
outpost  and  continues  the  work  of  reconnaissance  until  recalled 
for  the  night. 

Artillery  is  useful  to  outposts  when  its  fire  can  sweep  defiles  or 
large  open  spaces  and  when  it  commands  positions  that  might  be 
<)ccupied  by  hostile  artillery.  The  guns  are  carefully  concealed 
or  protected  and  are  usually  withdrawn  at  night. 

Machine  guns  are  useful  to  command  approaches  and  check 
sudden  advances  of  the  enemy. 

Engineers  are  usually  attached  to  an  outpost  to  assist  in  con- 
structing entrenchments,  clearing  the  field  of  fire,  and  opening 
communications  laterally  and  to  the  rear.  ^ 

The  supreme  commander  generally  retains  control  of  the  signal 
troops  and  establishes  a  line  of  information  to  the  reserve  and  from 
the  reserve  to  each  support  and  important  detached  post. 

It  is  generally  unnecessary  to  attach  any  portion  of  the  sanitary 
train  to  an  outpost^  as  the  equipment  of  the  regimental  aid  station 
canied  in  the  sanitary  combat  train  mil  as  a  rule  be  suflicient. 
If  necessary,  dressing  stations  may  be  established  by  ambulance 
companies  of  the  sanitary  train  in  convenient  location  to  the 
rear  of  the  outpost  line. 

The  field  trains  of  troops  on  outpost  duty  generally  join  their  ot- 
ganizations;  if  an  engagement  is  probable,  they  may  be  held  in 
rear. 

64.  Distributioii  of  Outpost  Troops. — ^The  outpost  will  generally 
be  divided  into  four  parts.  These,  in  order  from  the  main  body, 
are  the  reserve,  the  line  of  supports,  the  line  of  outgiiards,  and  the 
advance  cavalry. 

The  distances  separating  these  parts,  and  their  distance  from  the 
main  body,  will  depend  upon  the  object  sought,  the  nature  of  the 
terrain,  and  the  size  of  the  command.  There  can  be  no  uniform- 
ity in  the  distance  between  supports  and  reserve,  nor  between 
outguards  and  supports,  even  in  the  same  outpost.  The  avenues 
of  approach  and  the  important  feature'?  of  the  terrain  will  largely 
control  their  exact  positions. 

The  outpost  of  a  small  force  should  ordinarily  hold  the  enemy 
beyond  effective  rifle  range  of  the  main  body  until  the  latter  can 
deploy.  For  the  same  purpose  the  outpost  of  a  large  force  should 
hold  the  enemy  beyond  artillery  ran^e. 

66.  The  reserve  constitutes  the  main  body  of  the  outpost  and  is 
held  at  some  central  point  from  which  it  can  readily  support  the 
troops  in  front  or  hold  a  rallying  position  on  which  they  may  retire. 


OUTPOSTS.  35 

The  reserve  may  be  omitted  when  tlie  outpost  consists  of  less  than 
two  companies. 

The  reserve  may  comprise  one-fourth  to  two-thirds  of  the  strength 
of  the  outpost. 

66.  The  supports  constitute  a  line  of  supporting  and  resisting 
detachments,  varying  in  size  from  a  half  company  to  a  battalion. 
They  furnish  the  line  of  outguards. 

Thie  supports  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left* 
They  are  placed  at  the  more  important  points  on  the  outpost  line, 
usually  in  the  line  on  which  resistance  is  to  be  made  in  case  of 
attack. 

As  a  general  rule,  t^ads  exercise  the  greatest  influence  on  the 
location  of  supports,  and  a  support  will  generally  be  placed  on  or 
near  a  road.  The  section  which  it  is  to  cover  should  be  clearly 
defined  by  means  of  tangible  lines  on  the  ground  and  should  be 
such  thatthe  support  is  centrally  located  therein. 

67.  The  outguards  constitute  the  line  of  small  detachments 
farthest  to  the  front  and  nearest  to  the  enemy.  For  convenience 
they  are  classified  as  pickets,  sentry  8C[uad8,  and  cossack  posts: 
They  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left  in  each  support. 

68.  A  picket  is  a  group  consisting  of  two  or  more  squads,  ordi- 
narily not  exceedincj  half  a  company,  posted  in  the  line  of  out- 
guards to  cover  u  given  sector.  It  furnishes  patrols  and  one  or 
more  sentinels,  double  sentinels,  sentry  squads,  or  cossack  post>< 
for  observation. 

Pickets  are  placed  at  the  more  important  points  in  the  line  of 
outguards,  such  as  road  forks.  The  strength  of  each  depends  upon 
the  number  of  small  groups  required  to  observ'-e  properly  its  sector. 

69.  A  sentry  squad  is  a  squad  posted  in  observation  at  an  indi- 
cated point.  It  posts  a  double  sentinel  in  observation,  the  remain- 
ing men  resting  near  by  and  furnishing  the  reliefs  of  sentinels.  In 
some  cases  it  may  be  required  to  furnish  a  patrol. 

70.  A  cossack  post  consists  of  four  men.  It  is  an  observation 
group  similar  to  a  sentry  squad,  but  employs  a  single  sentinel. 

At  night  it  will  sometimes  be  advisable  to.  place  some  of  the 
outguards  or  th«ir  sentinels  in  a  position  different  from  that  which 
they  occupy  in  the  daytime.  In^such  case  the  ground  should  be 
carefully  studied  before  dark  and  the  change  made  at  dusk.  How- 
ever, a  change  in  the  position  of  the  outguard  will  be  exceptional. 

71.  Sentinels  are  generally  used  singly  in  daytime,  but  at  nigiit 
double  sentinels  will  be  required  in  most  cases.  Sentinels  fur- 
nished by  cossack  posts  or  sentry  squads  are  kept  near  their  group. 
Those  furnished  by  pickets  may  be  as  fax  as  100  yards  away. 


36  OUTPOSTS. 

Every  sentinel  should  be  able  to  communicate  readily  with  the 
body  to  which  he  belongs. 

Sentinel  posts  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left 
in  each  outguard.  Sentry  scjuada  and  cossacbs  posts  furnished  by 
picket^s  are  counted  as  sentinel  posts, 

72.  By  day,  cavalrj'  reconnoiters  in  advance  of  the  line  of  obser- 
vation. If  there  is  independent  cavalrj'  in  front,  the  advance  cav- 
alry maintains  connection  therewith  and  reconnoiters  only  where 
necessary.  At  night,  however,  that  the  horses  may  have  needed 
rest  and  because  the  work  can  be  better  done  by  infantry,  the 
greater  part  of  the  cavalry  is  usually  withdrawn  in  rear  of  the  sup- 
ports, generally  joining  the  reser\-e,  small  detachments  being  as- 
signed to  the  supports  for  patrolling  at  a  distance. 

With  efficient  cavalry  in  front,  the  work  of  the  infantry  on  the 
line  of  observation  is  reduced  to  a  minimum. 

General  instructions  for  the  advance  cav-alry  are  given  by  the 
outpost  commander,  but  details  are  left  to  the  subordinate. 

73.  Instead  of  using  outguards  along  the  entire  front  of  observa- 
tion, part  of  this  front  may  be  covered  byj)atrol8  onlv.  Thesft 
should  be  used  to  cover  such  sections  of  the  front  as  can  he  crossed 
by  the  enemy  only  with  difficulty  and  over  which  he  is  not  likely 
to  attempt  a  crossing  after  dark. 

In  daylight  mucli  of  the  local  patrolling  may  be  dispensed  with 
if  the  country  can  be  seen  from  the  posts  of  the  sentinels.  How- 
ever, patrols  should  frequently  be  pushed  well  to  the  front  unless 
the  ground  in  that  direction  is*  exceptionally  open. 

74.  Patrols  or  sentinels  must  be  the  first  troops  which  the  enemy 
meets,  and  each  body  in  rear  must  have  time  to  prepare  for  the 
blow.  These  bodies  cause  as  much  delay  as  possible  without  sac- 
rificing themselves,  and  gradually  retire  to  the  line  where  the  out- 
past  is  to  make  its  resistance, 

Patrols  must  be  used  to  keep  up  connection  between  the  parts 
of  the  outpost  except  when,  diiring  daylight,  certain  fractions  or 
groups  are  mutually  visible.  After  dark  this  connection  must  be 
maintained  throughout  the  outpost  except  where  the  larger  subdi- 
visions are  provided  with  wire  communication. 

75.  In  aodition  to  ordinary  outguards,  the  outpost  commander 
may  detail  from  the  reserve  one  or  more  detached  posts  to  cover 
roads  or  areas  not  in  the  general  line  assigned  to  the  supports. 

In  like  manner  the  commander  of  the  whole  force  may  order 
detached  posts  to  be  sent  from  the  main  body  to  cover  important 
roads  or  localities  not  included  in  the  outpost  line. 


OUTPOSTS.  8T 

*The  number  and  strength  of  detached  posts  are  reduced  to 
the  absolute  needs  of  the  situation. 

76.  Establishing  the  Outpost. — The  outpost  is  posted  as  quickly 
as  possible,  so  that  the  troops  can  the  sooner  obtain  rest.  Until 
the  leading  outpost  troops  are  able  to  assume  their  duties,  tempo- 
rary protection,  known  as  the  march  outpost,  is  furnished  by  the 
nearest  available  tnx^ps. 

77.  The  halt  order  of  the  commander,  besides  giving  the  neces- 
sary information  and  assigning  camp  sites  to  the  parts  of  the  com- 
mand, details  the  ti-oops  to  constitute  the  outpost,  assigns  a  com- 
mander therefor,  designates  the  general  line  to  be  occupied,  and, 
when  practicable,  points  out  the  position  to  be  held  in  case  of 
attack. 

The  outpost  commander,  upon  receipt  of  this  order,  should 
issue  the  outpost  order  with  the  least  practicable  delay.  In  large 
commands  it  may  often  be  necessary  to  give  the  order  from  the 
map,  but  usually  the  outpost  conunander  will  have  to  make 
some  preliminary  reconnaissance,  unless  he  has  an  accurate  and 
detailed  map. 

The  order  gives  such  available  information  of  the  situation  as 
is  necessary  to  the  complete  and  proper  guidance  of  subordinates; 
designates  the  troops  to  constitute  the  supports;  assigns  their 
location  and  the  sector  each  is  to  cover;  provides  for  the  necessary 
detached  posts;  indicates  any  special  reconnaissance  that  is  to 
be  n:iade;  orders  the  location  and  disposition  of  the  reserve;  dis- 
poses of  the  train  if  same  is  ordered  to  join  the  outpost:  and  informs 
subordinates  where  information  will  be  sent. 

Generally  it  is  preferable  for  the  outpost  commander  to  give 
verbal  orders  to  his  support  commanders  from  some  locality 
which  overlooks  the  terrain.  The  time  and  locality  should  be  so 
selected  that  the  support  commanders  may  join  their  commands 
and  conduct  them  to  their  positions  without  causing  unnecessary 
delay  to  theii-  troops.  The  reserve  commander  should,  if  possible, 
receive  his  orders  at  the  same  time  as  the  support  commanders. 
iSubordinates  to  whom  he  gives  orders  separately  should  be  informed 
of  the  location  of  other  parts  of  the  outpost. 

In  large  outposts  wi-itten  orders  are  frequently  most  convenient. 

After  issuing  the  initial  orders,  the  outpost  commander  inspects 
the  outpost,  orders  the  necessary  changes  or  additions,  and  sends 
his  superior  a  report  of  his  dispositions. 

^78.  The  reserve  is  marched  to  its  post  by  its  commander,  who 
then  sends  out  such  detachments  as  have  been  ordered  and  places 

47940 


38  OTJTJPOSTS. 

the  rest  in  camp  or  bivouac,  over  which  at  least  one  sentinel  should 
be  posted.  Connection  must  be  maintained  with,  the  main  bod.y, 
the  supports,  and  nearby  detached  poets. 

79.  The  supports  march  to  their  posts,  using  the  necessary  cov- 
ering detachments  when  in  advance  of  the  march,  outpost,  A  sup- 
port commander's  order  should  fully  explain  the  situation  to  sub- 
ordinates, or  to  the  entire  command,  if  it  be  small.  It  should 
detail  the  troops  for  the  different  outguards  and,  when  necessary, 
define  the  sector  each  is  to  cover.  It  should  provide  the  necessary 
sentinels  at  the  post  of  the  support,  the  patrols  to  be  sent  therefrom, 
and  should  anange  for  the  necessary  intrenching.  Connection 
should  be  maintained  with  the  adjoining  supports  and  with  the 
outguards  furnished  by  the  support. 

In  posting  his  command  the  support  commander  must  seek  to 
cover  his  sector  in  such  manner  that  the  enemy  can  not  reach,  in 
dangerous  numbers  and  unobserved,  the  position  of  the  suppK)rt 
or  pass  by  it  within  the  sector  intrusted  to  the  support.  On  the 
other  hand,  he  must  economize  men  on  observation  and  patrol 
duty,  for  these  duties  are  unusually  fatiguing.  He  must  practice 
the  greatest  economy  of  men  consistent  with  the  requirements  of 
practical  security. 

As  soon  as  the  posting  of  the  support  is  completed,  its  commander 
carefully  inspects  the  dispositions  and  corrects  defects,  if  any,  and 
reports  the  disposition  of  his  support,  including  the  patrolling 
ordered ,  to  the  outpost  commander  This  report  is  preferably  made 
by  means  of  a  sketch, 

80.  Each  outguaid  is  mai'ched  by  its  commander  to  its  aseigned 
station,  and  especially  in  the  case  of  a  picket,  is  covered  by  ihe 
uecessaay  patrolling  to  prevent  sm'prise. 

Having  reached  the  position,  the  commander  explains  the  atua? 
tion  to  his  men  and  establishes  reliefs  for  each  sentinel,  and,:  if 
possible,  for  each  patrol  to  be  furnished. .  Besides, jtheee  sentindis 
and  patrols,  a  picket  must  have  &  sentinel  at  its  post^ 

The  commander  then  posts  the  sentinels  and  points  out  to  them 
the  principal  features,  such  as  towns,  roads,  and  streams^  and  gives 
their  names.  He  gives  the  direction  and  location  of  the  enemy,  if 
known,  and  of  adjoining  parts  of  the  outpost. 

He  gives  to  patrols  the  same  information  and  the  necessary 
orders  as  to  their  routes  and  tl  e  frequency  with  which  the  same 
shall  be  covered.  Each  patrol  sliotild  go  over  its  route  once  before, 
dark 


OUTPOSTS.  39 

81.  Every  i)icket  should  maintain  connection  by  patrols  with 
Oiitguards  on  its  right  and  left.  Each  commander  will  take  pre- 
caution to  conceal  his  outguard  and  will  generally  strengthen  his 
position  by  intrenching. 

82.  Believing  the  Outpost. — Evening  and  shortly  before  dawn  are 
hours  of  special  danger.  The  enemy  may  attack  late  in  the  day 
in  order  to  establish  himself  en  captured  ground  by  intrenching 
during  the  night;  or  he  may  send  forward  troops  under  cover  of 
darkness  in  order  to  make  a  strong  attack  at  early  da\m.  Special 
precaution  Is  therefore  taken  at  those  hoars  by  holding  the  outpost 
ir  readiness,  and  by  sending  patrois  in  advaiice  of  the  line  of  ob- 
servation. If  a  new  outpost  is  to  be  established  in  the  morning,  it 
sh  )ald  arrive  at  the  outpost  position  at  daybreak,  thus  doubling  the 
outpost  strengtn  at  that  hour. 

88 .  Ezaminiiig  Posts . ' — An  examining  post  is  a  small  de  tachment, 
under  the  command  of  an  oflficer  or  a  noncommissioned  officer, 
stationed  at  some  convenient  point  to  examine  strangers  and  to 
receive  bearers  of  flags  of  truce  brought  in  by  the  outguards  or 
patrols. 

Though  the  employment  of  examining  posts  ia  not  general  in  field 
operations,  tuere  are  many  occaaiouB  when  their  use  is  important; 
for  example:  When  the  outguards  do  not  speak  the  language  of  the 
country  or  of  the  enemy;  when  preparations  are  being  made  for  a 
movement  and  strict  scrutiny  at  the  outguards  is  ordered ;  at  sieges, 
whether  in  attack  or  defense*.  T\Tien  such  posts  are  used,  strangers 
approaching  the  line  of  observ^ation  are  passed  along  the  Hne  to  an 
examining  post. 

No  one  except  the  commander  is  allowed  to  speak  to  persons 
brought  to  an  examining  post.  Prisoners  and  deserters  are  at  once 
sent  under  guard  to  the  rear. 

»  See  Rules  ot  Land  Warfare,  U.  g.  Army,  relative  to  reception  of  Dearers  of 
flags  of  truce,  etc. 


Article  m. 
ORDERS. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

84.  The  ast  of  giving  proper  instructions  and  orders  to  troops  is 
one  of  the  most  important  features  in  the  exercise  of  command. 

The  expression  of  the  will  of  leaders  is  conveyed  in  letters  of 
instruction  or  by  written  or  verbal  orders. 

Letters  op  Instruction. — At  the  beginning  of  operations  and 
from  time  to  time  thereafter  the  plans  of  the  superior  leaders 
are  communicated  in  the  form  of  letters  of  instruction  These  reg- 
ulate movements  over  large  areas  and  for  considerable  periods 
of  time.     (See  Combat  Orders,  page  75.) 

85.  Field  Orders, — Field  orders  regulate  the  tactical  and  such 
strategical  actions  of  troops  as  are  not  carried  in  letters  of 
Instruction.     (See  Combat  Orders,  page  75.) 

The  field  orders  of  field  army  and  division  commanders  are 
almost  invariably  written.  When  conditions  demand  the  issuance 
of  verbal  orders,  written  orders  follow  The  field  orders  of  brigade 
commanders  are  usually  written.  The  field  orders  of  regimental 
and  smaller  unit  commanders  are  usually  verbal. 

The  object  of  field  orders  is  to  bring  about  a  course  of  action,  in 
accordance  with  the  intention  of  the  leader,  suited  to  the  situation 
and  with  full  cooperation  between  all  arms  and  services.  They 
are  issued  for  marches,  halts,  formation  of  camps  or  bivouacs, 
advance,  flank  and  rear  guards,  outposts,  combat,  etc. 

In  active  operations,  especially  during  engagements,  numerous 
field  orders  are  issued  in  fragmentary  form — either  verbally  or  in 
tJie  form  of  notes,  brief  dispatches,  messages,  orders  for  assembly, 
etc. — which  do  not  contain  all  the  requirements  of  a  formal  written 
field  order;  but  whenever  detailed  instructions  for  operations  are 
given,  whether  verbally  or  in  writing,  the  sequence  prescribed 
for  the  body  of  a  formal  field  order  is  preserved 

Administrative  details  are  usually  covered  in  "orders,"  but 
when  circumstances  make  it  more  convenient  they  may  be  in- 
cluded in  field  orders, 

86.  To  give  subordinate  leaders  an  oportunity  to  study  the  situa- 
tion, field  orders  should  reach  them  in  ample  time.    As  a  rule,  how- 


OBDEBS.  41 

ever,  it  is  desirable  to  keep  contemplated  movements  secret  as  long 
as  possible,  and  to  confine  knowledge  thereof  to  chiefs  of  staff 
departments  and  leaders  of  the  larger  units. 

In  lai^e  commands  it  requires  some  time  for  formal  orders  to  reach 
all  the  lower  units;  this  may  be  roughly  estimated  at  one  hour  for 
a  brigade  and  one  hour  and  a  half  for  a  division . 

The  hour  stated  in  the  heading  of  an  order  is  the  hour  of  signature. 

87.  Orders  not  connected  with  the  tactical  or  strategical  action 
of  troops,  but  necessary  in  the  ordinary  administration  of  military 
affairs,  are  called  geneml  orders,  orders,  and  special  orders,  accord- 
ing to  circumstances. 

General  Orders. — General  orders  include,  generally,  (1)  all 
detailed  instructions  necessary  in  carrying  out  certain  general 
regulations  or  orders  issued  from  a  superior  headquarters;  (2)  all 
standing  instructions,  to  the  end  that  frequent  repetition  may  be 
avoided;  and  (3)  proceedings  of  general  and  special  courts-martial. 

General  orders  are  issued  by  commanders  of  armies,  field  armies, 
divisions,  brigades,  regiments,  and  separate  battalions. 

Orders. — Orders,  in  contradistinction  to  field,  general,  and 
special  orders,  are  used  by  commanders  of  divisions  and  separate 
brigades  for  regulating  the  movements  and  resupply  of  the  field 
trains,  fixing  the  position  of  distributing  points  (rations  and 
forage),  authorizing  the  use  of  reserve  rations,  providing  for  ttie 
refilling  of  combat  trains  after  combat  or  a  march,  providing  for 
ambulance  and  hospital  service  in  camps,  and  for  furnishing  such 
other  similar  information  or  instructions  as  it  is  desired  to  com- 
municate to  troops.  They  also  include  such  instructions  as  may 
be  sent  to  the  commander  of  trains,  relative  to  the  movements 
and  disposition  of  the  trains  and  information  with  regard  to  the 
arrangements  made  with  the  line  of  communication  relative  to 
the  positions  of  refilling,  rendezvous,  and  evacuation  points. 

When  necessary,  orders  are  used  by  commanders  of  battaUona 
forming  parts  of  regiments,  and  smaller  units  and  detachments, 
for  the  same  class  of  instructions  as  are  promulgated  by  higher 
commanders  in  general  orders. 

Special  Orders.— Tfiese  cover  only  such  matters  relating  to  the 
movements  or  ajssignment  of  individuals  as  are  not  necessary 
to  be  commtmicated  generally  to  the  command. 

88.  Verbal  Orders. — When  not  communicated  by  the  leader 
in  person,  verbal  orders  are  carried  by  staff  officers  or  messengers. 
Important  verbal  orders  are  recorded  as  soon  as  practicable  after 
iasae. 


42  COMPOSITION  OF  FORMAL  FIELD  ORDERS. 

As  there  is  always  a  possibility  of  controversy  as  to  tiheir  wording, 
verbal  orders  are  sent  by  messengers  in  cases  of  necessity  only,  and 
vhen  so  sent  rarely  contain  more  than  one  definite  mandate.  For 
example:  "The  brigade  will  halt  three  hours  at /'  More  lati- 
tude is  allowed  in  sending  verbal  orders  by  officers. 

The  bearer  of  a  verbal  order  or  message  is  required  to  repeat  it 
before  starting. 

COMPOSITION    OF  FORMAL  FIELD    ORDERS. 

89.  To  frame  a  suitable  field  order,  the  leader  must  make  an  esti- 
mate of  the  situation,  culminating  in  a  decision  upon  a  definite 
plan  of  action.  He  must  then  actually  draft  or  word  the  orders 
which  will  carry  his  decision  into  effect. 

An  estimate  of  the  situation  involves  a  careful  consideration,  from 
the  commander's  view  point,  of  all  the  circumstances  affecting  the 
particular  problem.  In  making  this  estimate  he  considers  his 
mission  as  set  forth  in  the  orders  or  instructions  under  which  he  is 
acting,  or  as  deduced  by  him  from  his  knowledge  of  the  situation, 
all  available  information  of  the  enemy  (strength,  position,  move- 
ments, probable  intentions,  etc.),  conditions  affecting  his  own 
command  (strength,  position,  supporting  troops,  etc,),  and  the 
terrain  in  so  far  as  it  affects  the  particular  military  situation.  He 
then  compares  the  various  plans  of  action  open  to  him  and  decides 
upon  the  one  that  will  best  enable  him  to  accomplish  his  mission. 

Clear  and  decisive  orders  are  the  logical  result  of  definite  and  sure 
decisions  and  are  the  means  of  transforming  the  decision  into  action. 

In  framing  field  orders  the  integrity  of  tactical  units  is  preserved 
whenever  practicable. 

Field  orders  must  be  clear  and  definite.  Exj^ressions  depend- 
ing upon  the  view  point  of  the  observer,  such  as  right,  left,  in  front 
of,  Jjehind,  on  this  side,  beyond,  etc.,  are  avoided,  reference  being 
made  to  points  of  the  compass  instead.  The  terms  right  and  left, 
however,  may  be  applied  to  individuals  or  bodies  of  men,  or  to  the 
banks  of  a  stream;  m  the  latter  case  the  observer  is  supposed  to  be 
facing  downstream.  The  terms  right  flank  and  left  flank  are  fixed 
d^ignations.  They  apply  primarily  to  the  right  and  left  of  a  com- 
mand when  facing  the  enemy  and  do  not  change  when  the  com- 
mand is  retreating.  The  head  of  a  column  is  its  leading  element, 
no  matter  in  what  direction  the  column  is  facing;  the  other  ex- 
tremity is  the  tail. 

To  minimize  the  possibility  of  error,  geographical  names  are 
written  or  printed  in  boman  capitals;  when  the  spelling  does  not 


COMPOSITION  OF  FORMAL  FIELD  ORDERS.  48 

conform  to  the  pronunciation,  the  latter  is  shown  phonetically  in 
parentheses,  thus:  bicester  (Bister),  gila  (HeeMa). 

When  two  or  more  places  or  features  on  the  map  have  the  same 
name  they  are  distinguifihed  by  reference  to  other  points. 

A  road  is  designated  by  connecting  two  or  more  names  of  places 
on  the  road  with  dashes,  thus:  leavenworth— lowemoni^--- 
ATCHisoN  road. 

As  a  rule,  an  affirmative  form  of  expression  is  used.  Such  an 
order  as:  "The  supply  train  \^l\  not  accompany  the  division,"  is 
defective,  because  the  gist  of  the  order  depends  upon  the  single 
word  "not." 

Written  orders  should  be  so  distinct  as.to  be  legible  even  in  bad 
light. 

Field  orders  are  brief;  short  sentences  are  easily  understood; 
conjectures,  expectations,  reasons  for  measures  adopted,  and  de- 
tailed instructions  for  a  variety  of  possible  events,  do  not  inspire 
confidence,  and  should  be  avoided. 

The  commander  should  accept  the  entire  responsibilty.  In 
framing  field  orders  such  expressions  as  "attempt  to  capture," 
"try  to  hold,"  "as  far  as  possible,"  "as  well  as  you  can,"  etc.,  are 
forbidden.  They  tend  to  divide  responsibility  between  the  com- 
mander and  his  subordinates. 

An  order  should  not  trespass  upon  the  province  of  a  subordinate. 
It  should  contain  everything  beyond  the  independent  authority 
of  the  subordinate,  but  nothing  more 

When  the  transmission  of  orders  involves  a  considerable  period 
of  time,  during  which  the  situation  may  change,  detailed 
instructions  are  avoided.  The  same  rule  holds  when  orders  may 
have  to  be  carried  out  under  unforeseen  circumstances.  Iii  such 
cases  letters  of  guidance  are  preferable;  they  lay  stress  upon  the 
object  to  b6  attained,  and  leave  open  the  means  to  be  employed. 
Orders  attempting  to  arrange  matters  too  far  in  advance  may  have- 
to  be  recalled  and  others  substituted;  such  changes  impose  needless 
hardships  upon  a  command  and  injure  its  morale. 
*  Details  of  time  and  place  are  carefully  stated.  Subordinate 
commanders  and  staff  officers  regulate  their  watches  by  the  time 
kept  at  headquarters. 

Orders  issued  by  subordinates  should  not  be  mere  repetitions  of 
those  from  higher  authority  with  additions  of  their  own.  New 
orders  are  generally  clearer  and  more  satisfactory 

*  Vot  detaQ^  <tf  field  oafdcre  for  oombat  see  pars.  142-14»,  incL 


44  FORM  OF  FIELD  ORDERS. 

FORM  OF  FIELD  ORDERS.  (See  page  182.) 

90.  To  enable  the  will  of  the  commander  to  be  quickly  under- 
Btood,  to  secure  prompt  cooperation  among  bis  subordinates 
and  for  ready  reference,  field  orders  are  required  to  follow  a 
general  form.  This  form  divides  an  order  into  sections  or 
parts  and  assigns  to  each  a  particular  class  of  information. 

The  parts  of  a  field  order  are : 

The  heading. 

The   distribution    of    troops    (in    certain    orders). 

The  body. 

The  ending. 

91.  The  Heading. — The  heading  contains  the  title  or  name 
of  the  issuing  officer's  command,  the  place,  date,  hour  of  issue, 
the  number  of  the  order  and  reference  to  map  used. 

Titles  are  expressed  as  follows: 

Det.  1st  Diw 
Ox:tpost,  6th  Inf. 
Advp.nce  Guard.  3d  Div 
3  I  Briii.  1st  Div 
3d  Div. 

In  the  above  titles  "Det.  let  Div  "  means  that  the  comniand  is 
composed  of  troops  from  the  first  division;  "Advance  Guard,  3d 
Div."  means  that  the  command  is  the  advance  guard  of  the  third 
division. 

The  title  may  appear  in  the  order  creating  a  command,  thus 
'The  Second  Brigade  will  constitute  the  advance  guard." 

The  title  with  place,  date,  and  number  thus  fully  identifies  an 
order. 

Whether  named  in  the  title  or  elsewhere  in  the  order,  the  abbre- 
viated form  for  the  designation  of  tactical  organizations  is  prefer- 
able.    (See  Appendix  9,  List  of  Abbreviations.) 

When  a  fraction  of  an  orgEinization  can  not  be  designated  by 
naming  one  or  more  of  the  subdivisions,  it  receives  the  generic- 
title  of  "detachment." 

A  detachment  is  a  body  of  troops  separated  from  a  higher  com- 
miand  and  intrusted  with  a  special  mission. 

Nearly  every  command  of  any  size  is  composed  of  troops  from 
the  different  arms  or  special  services,  or  both,  and  when  not  con- 
stituting a  division,  brigade,  or  other  authorized  unit,  the  question 
arises  whether  to  call  such  a  command  a  "detachment"  or  to  give 
it  the  tactical  designation  of  the  predominating  arm  or  special 


FOBH  OF  FIELD  OBDEES.  4$ 

service.  If  there  is  a  predominating  element  the  title  of  the  com- 
mand is  that  of  the  predominating  element,  unless  the  proportion 
of  auxiliary  troops  or  special  troops  equals  or  exceeds  that  pre- 
scribed for  a  division,  in  which  case  the  command  is  a  detachment. 
For  example:  A  command  consisting  of  1  regiment  of  infantry  and 
1  squadron  is  a  detachment,  while  the  title  of  a  command  consist- 
ing of  1  regiment  of  infantry  and  a  troop  is  that  of  the  regiment. 
Dates  in  the  heading  are  abbreviated  thus:  4  Feb.  08,  2-45  p.  m. 

92.  The  Distribution  of  Troops. — ^The  distribution  of  troops  shows 
the  tactical  components  into  which  a  command  is  divided  (advance 
guard,  main  body,  etc.)  and  the  troops  assigned  to  each.  It  is 
generally  used  in  march  orders  and  in  tne  first  field  o/der  applying 
to  a  command  newly  created  or  organized.  In  other  cases  it  is 
usually  more  convenient  to  name  the  troops  in  the  body  of  the 
order,  where  their  duties  are  prescribed. 

When  a  "distribution"  is  used  it  is  headed  ^'Troops,"  and  in 
written  or  printed  orders  is  placed  on  the  left  of  the  body,  occupy- 
ing about  one-third  of  the  page.  The  tactical  components  are 
marked  with  lettered  subheaos  (a),  (6),  etc.,  the  troops  listed  under 
each  performing  the  task  prescribed  in  the  similarly  marked  para- 
ge aph  of  the  bchdy  of  the  (wder. 

When  orders  are  dictated  or  sent  by  wire  or  signals,  the  distribu- 
tion of  troops  (if  used)  is  given  immediately  after  paragraph  2, 
without  number. 

93.  The  Body. — The  body  contains  information  and  instructions 
for  the  command,  and  is  arranged  in  numbered  paragraphs  as 
follows: 

Paragraph  1  contains  such  information  of  the  enemy  and  of  our 
supporting  troops  as  it  is  desirable  that  subordinates  should  Imow. 

raragraph  2  contains  the  general  plan  of  the  commander,  or  sf> 
much  thereof  as  will  insure  cooperation  of  all  jparts  of  the  command. 

Paragraph  3  contains  the  detailed  tactical  dispositions  adopted 
by  the  commander  to  carry  out  the  plan  outlined  in  paragraph  2, 
including  the  tasks  assigned  to  each  of  the  several  combatant  frac- 
tions of  the  command.  These  tasks  are  given  under  lettered  sub- 
heads (a),  (6),  etc.,  the  leading  fraction,  or  the  one  having  the 
most  important  duty  to  perform,  being  generally  considered  first. 
For  inbtaace:  In  an  attack  order  it  is  customary  to  consider  the 
artillery  first;  in  a  march  order,  troops  are  considered  according 
to  their  position  in  the  column. 

Instructions  applicable  to  all  of  these  fractions  may  be  embodied 
in  a  subparagraph,  lettered  {x),  at  the  end  of  paragraph  3. 


4«5  FORM  OF  FIELD  ORDERS. 

Paragraph  4  contains  instructions  for  the  trains,  and  may 
designate  the  position  of  ammunition  distributing  stations, 
dressing  stations,  and  stations  for  slightly  wounded. 

The  last  paragraph,  usually  paragraph  5,  shows  where  the 
commander  can  be  found  or  messages  may  be  sent.  In  orders 
of  subordinate  commanders,  this  paragraph  also  gives  the 
location  of  "lines  of  information,"  if  any  have  been  estab- 
lished. 

If  additional  paragraphs  are  necessary,  they  are  incorporated, 
properly  numbered,  aft^r  paragraph  4.  Sometimes  it  is  unneces- 
sary to  include  instructions  for  the  tarains;  but  whatever  the  number 
of  paragraphs  the  last  always  shows  where  the  commander  can  be 
found,  etc. 

No  abbreviationsr  are  used  in  the  body  of  the  order  except  a.  m 
and  p.  M.  for  morning  and  afternoon,  the  authorized  abbreviations 
for  tactical  organizations,  and  those  customary  in  designating  rank. 
In  naming  a  night  both  davs  should  be  mentioned  thus:  Night 
4/5  Feb,  OS.  To  designate  noon"  and  ''midnight"  these  words 
are  written. 

94.  The  Ending. — The  endiiig  contains  the  authentication  of  the 
order  and  a  statement  of  how  it  is  communicated  to  the  command , 
This  statement  is  an  important  feature  of  a  field  order  and  is  made 
by  the  officer  signing  the  order,  he  being  responsible  that  it  is 
properly  distributed. 

95.  Before  orders  are  issued  they  are  carefully  tested  to  see  that 
the  entire  command  is  accounted  for.' 

» For  forms  of  orders  see  Appendix  3. 


Article  IV. 
MARCHES  AND  CONVOYS. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

96.  A  successful  march,  whether  in  peace  or  war,  is  otie  that 
places  the  troops  at  their  destination  at  the  proper  moment  and  in 
the  best  possible  condition.^  In  war,  marches  are  of  daily  occur- 
rence, and  success  depends  in  a  great  measure  upon  the  skill  with 
which  they  are  conducted. 

Good  marching  is  secured  by  careful  preparation,  strict  discipline^ 
and  the  due  observance  of  march  sanitation. 

While  conforming  to  other  requirements,  marches  are  conducted 
80  as  to  reduce  to  a  minimum  the  hardships  of  the  troops. 

When  possible,  ample  notice  is  given  so  that  preparations  can  be 
made  without  haste. 

The  march  is  habitually  at  route  order 

Troops  are  informed  of  the  length  of  halts  so  that  they  can,  take 
full  advantage  of  the  same. 

The  men  are  not  kept  under  arms  longer  than  necessary,  nor 
required  to  carry  heavy  burdens  when  transportation  is  available. 

Special  care  is  paid  to  the  feet  of  the  men  and  to  the  hoofs  and 
backs  of  animals. 

In  prolonged  marches  at  least  one  day  in  seven  should  bo  a  day  of 
rest. 

A  forced  march  is  never  imdertaken  unless  the  situation  re- 
quires it. 

As  a  rule  troops  on  the  march  pay  no  compliments;  individuals 
salute  when  they  address,  or  are  addressed  by,  a  superior  officer. 
•  The  conduct  of  a  march  (forming  the  column  or  columns,  dis- 
tribution of  troops,  the  start,  rate,  length  of  march,  etc.)  is  con- 
trolled by  the  situation  and  object  to  be  accomplished. 

CONDUCT  OP  MARCHES. 

97.  Preparation. — It  is  tlie  dutv  of  the  commander  to  see  that 
the  necessary  preparations  are  made — that  the  men  and  animals  are 
in  fit  condition  and  that  they  are  properly  equipped;  that  all 

47 


48  CONDITCT  OF  MAECHES. 

trains  accompanying  the  command  are  loaded  as  prescribed; 
that  proper  measures  have  been  inaugurated  for  the  replenish^ 
ment  of  supplies,  and  that  the  necessary  arrangements  have 
been  made  for  the  care  and  evacuation  of  the  sick  and  wounded. 

98.  Forming  the  Colunm. — To  torm  the  coiumn  lor  a  maicii,  uie 
Commander  issues  the  necessary  orders  (march  order). 

The  march  order  states  the  object  of  the  march,  gives  the  distri- 
bution of  the  troops,  order  of  march  of  the  main  body,  manner  of 
forming  the  column,  etc  If  the  command  consists  of  two  or  more 
columns,  the  order  of  the  supreme  commander  generally  indicates 
the  march  to  be  made  by  each  colunm,  and  the  column  command- 
ers issue  corresponding  march  orders. 

When  troops  are  encamped  or  bivouacked  at  some  distance  from 
the  road,  columns  are  formed  by  the  successive  arrival  of  the  frac- 
tions at  an  initial  or  starting  point,  which,  as  a  rule,  is  located  in  the 
direction  of  the  proposed  march.  The  commander  fixes  the  initial 
point  after  considering  the  position  of  the  troops  and  the  roads  by 
which  they  can  join  the  column.  He  also  prescribes  the  hour  at 
which  tlie  leading  fraction  or  fractions  clear  the  initial  point,  and, 
if  necessary,  the  routes  to  be  followed  in  reaching  it.  ^  To  prevent 
needless  marching,  he  may  designate  special  initial  points  for  parte 
of  the  command. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  larger  units  of  a  command  should  be 
camped  in  the  order  in  which  they  will  march  on  the  following  day. 

In  drafting  march  orders,  the  road  space  and  rate  of  march  of  the 
different  fractions  of  the  command  and  their  distances  trom  the 
initial  point  must  be  considered.  With  foot  troops  and  cavalry 
•marching  four  abreast,  artillery  and  traias  in  single  column  of  car- 
riages, thie  following  may  be  assumed  for  approximate  calculations: 
Two  men  per  yard  for  foot  troops,  one  man  per  yard  for  each  mount- 
ed man,  20  yards  for  each  gun,  caisson,  or  wagon,  and  12  yards 
for  each  autotruck 

Commanders  of  subordinate  units  examine  the  route  to  be  fol- 
lowed, calculate  the  time  required,  and  start  their  commands 
accordingly  They  may  designate  initial  points  for  their  own  com- 
mands.    In  every  casethe  initial  point  should  be  of  easy  access. 

^^^en  troops  are  located  on  or  near  the  roads  to  be  followed,  the 
commander  prescribes  the  hour  of  starting  for  the  larger  units;  the 
subordinate  commanders  issue  corresponding  orders  for  their  com- 
mands. 

99.  Distribution  of  Troops. — ^The  order  of  march  of  a  column 
is  controlled  mainly  (1)  by  tactical  considerations,  which  are 


COin)VCT  OP  IIEARCHES.  49 

paramount  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  and  (2)  by  the  rule 
requiring  the  hardships  of  troops  to  be  reduced  to  a  minimum. 

During  an  advance  the  order  of  march  of  a  column  is  generally 
as  follows,  the  necessary  security  being  provided: 

Combatant  troops  (with  combat  trains): 

1.  Cavalry  and  horse  artillery. 

2.  Infantry  and  light  or  mountain  artillery. 

3.  Engineers  and  signal  troops. 

4.  Trains,  etc. 

During  a  retreat  the  order  of  march  is  practically  the  reverse  of 
the  above. 

In  mixed  commands,  large  bodies  of  cavalry  and  horse  artillery 
should  not  be  intermingled  with  foot  troops. 

A  detachment  of  engineers  usually  marches  near  the  head  of 
each  column  to  repaii*  roads,  strengthen  bridges,  etc. 

The  order  of  brigades  in  divisions,  regiments  in  brigades,  bat- 
talions or  squadrons  in  regiments,  and  company  units  in  battalions 
or  squadrons  is  generallv  changed  from  day  to  day — the  leading 
unit  one  day  taking  its  place  at  the  tail  the  following,  and  so  on. 

On  the  march,  troops,  as  far  as  practicable,  keep  "to  the  right  of 
the  road,  leaving  the  left  free.  WTien  the  roads  are  narrow,  space 
should  still  be  left  for  messengers  to  pass  freely  along  the  column. 
When  roads  are  soft  with  mud  or  heavy  with  sand  or  very  dusty,  it 
may  be  advisable  to  divide  the  column  longitudinally,  thus  permit- 
ting men  and  animals  to  pick  their  way,  the  middle  of  the  road 
being  left  clear.  Care  should  be  taken  not  to  permit  straggling  or 
undue  lengthening  of  the  column. 

Infantry  usually  marches  in  column  of  squads,  column  of  twos 
when  necessary;  cavalry,  in  column  of  fours  on  good  roads  or  when 
compact  formation  is  desirable,  otherwise  in  colimiii  of  twos; 
artillery  in  section  colunm  (single  column  of  carriages),  or  in 
double  section  column  if  the  width  of  the  road  permits.  On  trails, 
troops  march  in  column  of  files  or  troopers.  In  marching  across 
country,  the  commander  adopts  the  most  advantageous  formation. 

100.  The  Start. — When  practicable,  marches  begin  in  the  morn- 
ing, ample  time  being  allowed  for  the  men  to  breakfast,  animals  to 
feed,  and  the  wagons  oranimalsto  be  packed.  The  time  for  reveille 
and  stables  should  be  designated  the  evening  before.  Canteens 
are  filled,  fires  put  out,  latrines  covered,  and  the  camp  policed 
before  departure. 

The  hour  for  the  start  depends  upon  circumstances.  As  a  rule, 
foot  troops  do  not  start  before  broad  daylight;  mounted  troops, 
35379»— 14 4 


50  CONDUCT  OP  MARCHES. 

when  practicable,  about  an  hour  after  broad  daylight.  Both  men 
and  animals  rest  well  in  the  early  morning  hours. 

The  signals  for  striking  camp  and  putting  the  command  in 
march,  such  as  the  general,  boots  and  saddles,  etc.,  are  ordered  by 
the  commanders  of  the  larger  units  at  the  proper  time.  After  the 
general,  one  or  more  officers  of  each  organization  superintend  the 
preparations  for  the  march. 

The  different  units  of  the  column,  including  those  of  the  train, 
are  separated  at  the  start  by  distances  prescribed  in  regulations  or 
by  the  commander.  These  distances  are  temporarily  increased  or 
diminished,  according  to  circumstances,  thus  facilitating  uniform 
progress  without  checks,  and  with  a  continual  tendency  to  the 
gi'adual  resumption  of  normal  distances. 

101.  Rate  and  Length  of  Marches. — The  rate  of  march  of  a  mixed 
command  is  regulated  by  that  of  the  foot  troops.  It  varies  with  the 
length  of  the  march,  size  of  the  command,  condition  of  the  troops, 
and  other  chcumstances;  sandy,  rough,  muddy,  or  slippery  roads, 
great  heat  and  dust,  strong  headwinds,  stomis  and  broken  country, 
reduce  the  rate.  If  hills  are  to  be  climbed  or  swampy  country  is 
to  be  crossed,  or  defiles  passed,  liberal  allowances  are  made  in  time 
calculations. 

For  infantry  the  rate  prescribed  for  drill  is  100  yards  a  minute 
or  3.4  miles  an  hour;  on  the  road  the  maximum  to  be  counted  on 
is  88  yards  a  minute  or  3  miles  an  hour,  including  halts  2^-  to  2| 
miles.  The  rate  of  infantry  columns,  under  average  conditions, 
may  be  assumed  at  2^  to  2^  miles  an  hour. 

The  average  march  of  infantrj'-,  and  of  mixed  commands  consist- 
ing partly  of  foot  troops,  is  15  miles  a  day;  but  in  extensive  opera- 
tions, involving  large  bodies  of  troops,  the  average  is  about  12  miles 
a  day.  Small  commands  of  seasoned  infantry  marching  on  good 
roads  in  cool  weather,  can  average  20  miles  a  day. 

It  is  of  great  importance  that  a  uniform  rate  of  march  be  main- 
tained throughou  t  the  column.  WTien  a  change  in  the  rate  is  to  be 
made,  warning  is  sent  along  the  column, 

Forcavaliy  the  rates  prescribed  for  drill  are: 

The  walk  4  miles,  the  trot  S  mUes,  and  the  gallop  12  miles  an 
hour.  The  average  walk  of  a  horse  is  at  the  rate  of  a  mile^  in  16 
minutes  or  3|  miles  an  hour;  the  average  trot,  a  mile  in  8  minutes 
or  7^  miles  an  hour. 

In  the  field  the  usual  gait  is  the  walk  of  3|  miles  an  hour,  includ- 
ing halts  3^  to  3^  miles  an  hour. 

The  average  march  of  cavalry,  after  men  and  animals  are  hard- 
ened, 13  25  imles  a  day. 


COWDTTCT  OF  MAECHES.  51 

The  daily  march  of  field  artillery  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  com- 
mand of  which  it  forms  a  part;  if  alone  it  covers  from  15  to  20  miles. 
The  rate  of  horse  artillery  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  cavalry  to  which 
it  is  attached. 

The  rate  of  a  wagon  train  varies  with  the  class  and  condition  of 
the  draft  animals,  the  load,  length  of  the  column,  and  the  condi- 
tion of  the  roads.  While  large  mules  drawing  light  loads  on  good 
roads  can  cover  nearly  4  miles  an  hour,  in  long  columns  a  rate  of 
2  miles,  including  halts,  is  all  that  can  be  expected  even  under 
favorable  conditions;  small  trains  may  make  2^  miles  an  hour. 
The  daily  march  of  a  wagon  train  is  about  the  same  as  that  of 
infantry. 

The  average  load  of  a  pack  mule  is  250  pounds,  and  a  train  thus 
loaded  can  tmvel  from  20  to  25  miles  a  day  on  ordinary  roads  or 
trails;  over  rough  country,  from  10  to  15  miles. 

The  rate  of  march,  the  load,  and  the  distance  that  may  be  covered 
in  a  day  with  autotrucks  or  with  tractors  drawing  wagons  are 
dependent  on  the  character  and  condition  of  the  roads  and  the 
carrying  or  pulling  power  of  the  trucks  or  tractors. 

102.  Halts. — To  rest  the  men  and  animals  and  for  other  purposes, 
a  command  on  the  march  is  occasionally  halted.  The  fii^t  halt  is 
made  after  marching  about  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  and  is  about 
15  minutes  long,  to  enable  the  men  to  attend  to  the  calls  of  nature 
and  to  adjust  their  clothing,  etc.  Judgment  should  be  exercised 
in  selecting  the  place  for  the  first  halt;  it  should  not  be  made  in  a 
village  or  "place  where  one  of  the  objects  of  the  halt  would  be 
defeated. 

After  the  tii-st  rest,  there  is  for  foot  troops  a  halt  of  alx)ut  10 
minutes  every  hour — that  is,  the  troops  march  50  minutes  and 
then  halt  10.  In  very  hot  weather  the  halts  may  be  longer  and 
more  frequent.  The  men  are  allowed  to  fall  out,  but  remain  in 
the  immediate  "vicinity  of  their  places. 

For  cavalry  the  hourly  halts  are  shorter — ^5  minutes;  the  men 
examine  the  horses'  feet,  adjust  saddles,  etc. 

Por  artillery  the  hourly  halts  are  from  5  to  10  minutes;  harness 
is  adjusted,  girths  are  tightened,  etc. 

As  a  rule  troops  prefer  to  finish  a  day's  march  as  soon  as  possible. 
In  good  weather,  with  favorable  temperature,  long  halts  are  not 
desirable  on  marches  of  less  than  15  miles  for  infantry  or  25  miles 
for  cavalry.  WTien  tlie  day's  march  will  run  well  into  the  after- 
noon, a  halt  of  about  one  hour  near  meal  time  is  advantageous. 
Places  for  long  halts  should  be  selected  with  care;  wood,  water. 


52  COimUCT  OF  MABCHES. 

grass,  dry  ground,  and  shade  are  desirabk  features.  Anns  are 
fltacbed  and  equipments  removed;  mounted  troops  dismount  and 
loosen  cinchas. 

In  hot  weather,  especially  in  the  tropics,  it  may  be  desirable  to 
avoid  the  midday  heat.  If  the  march  is  long,  the  command  may 
make  an  earlier  start,  or  it  may  rest  for  three  or  four  hours  during 
the  hottest  part  of  the  day  and  finish  the  march  in  the  evening.  As 
a  general  proposition,  however,  it  is  undesirable  to  arrive  at  a 
strange  place  after  nightfall  or  even  late  in  the  afternoon. 

Halts  are  not  made  in  or  near  towns  or  villages  unless  to  procure 
water  or  supplies,  and  when  so  made,  the  men  remain  in  column, 
details  being  sent  for  whatever  is  necessary  In  commands  not 
exceeding  a  regiment,  and  in  wagon  trains  of  less  than  a  mile  in 
lengtli,  the  umts  may  halt  simultaneously,  the  signal  from  the 
head  being  promptly  repeated  This  may  also  be  accomplished 
in  longer  columns  by  the  commanders  of  units  setting  their  watches 
at  the  same  hour  before  starting,  and  agreeing  when  the  halts  shall 
be  made;  the  units  ^11  halt  and  resume  the  march  at  the  moments 
agreed  upon. 

103.  Crossing  Bridges,  Fords,  and  Ferries. — When  a  cause  of 
delay — for  example,  a  damaged  bridge-^is  encountered,  the  troops 
in  rear  are  notified  of  the  minimum  length  of  the  delay;  they  then 
conduct  themselves  as  at  regular  halts. 

In  ascending  or  descending  slopes,  crossing  streams  or  other 
obstacles,  or  passing  through  defiles  requiring  a  reduction  of  front, 
every  precaution  is  taken  to  prevent  interruption  of  the  march  of 
the  troops  in  rear.  If  the  distances  are  not  sufficient  to  prevent 
check,  units  are  allowed  to  overlap;  if  necessary,  streams  are 
crossed  at  two  or  more  places  at  the  same  time;  in  passing  through 
short  defiles  the  pace  is  accelerated  and  the  exit  cleared  at  once. 
If  a  company  unit  is  delayed  while  crossing  an  obstacle,  the  head 
slackens  the  pace  or  halts  until  all  of  tliat  unit  has  passed;  it  then 
resumes  its  place  in  the  column,  increasing  the  pace  if  necessarv. 

Before  attempting  to  cross  with  bodies  of  troops,  careful  exami- 
nation is  made  of  fords,  boggy  places,  bridges  of  doubtful  character, 
ice,  etc.,  as  the  case  may  be. 

\^^^en  necessary,  an  officer  is  designated  to  superintend  the 
crossing;  his  instructions  must  be  strictly  observed,  the  troops 
crossing  in  formation  prescribed  by  him.  Foot  troops  crossing 
bridges  march  without  cadence. 

Whenever  a  military  bridge  is  constructed  with  the  bridge 
equipage,  -or  if  deemed  necessary,   in  cases  where  improvised 


CONDUCT  OF  HAECHES.  63 

material  is  employed,  a  bridge  guard  under  an  engineer  officer 
will  be  detailed  for  its  care  and  maintenance  during  the  period 
of  its  use.  All  orders,  regulations,  and  instructions  issued  by 
this  engineer  officer  relative  to  the  care,  protection,  and  use 
of  the  bridge  will  be  considered  as  emanating  from  the  com- 
mander of  the  force  crossing  the  bridge. 

When  roads  lead  through  swamps  or  quicksand,  or  across 
streams  with  treacherous  bottoms,  their  limits  are  marked 
with  stakes  or  bushes,  or  warnings  are  placed  at  dangerous 
points.  At  night  lanterns  are  hung  from  the  stakes,  and  a 
fire  is  built  or  a  lantern  hung  to  mark  the  landing. 

When  the  current  is  strong  and  the  water  deep,  foot  troops 
cross  on  as  broad  a  front  as  possible,  the  men  marching  abreast 
and  holding  hands.  They  should  not  look  at  the  water,  but  at 
the  opposite  shore.  If  the  ford  is  wide  eno.ugh,  mounted  troops 
may  cross  at  the  same  time  on  the  upstream  side,  thus  break- 
ing the  force  of  the  current. 

Fords  that  are  at  all  difficult  delay  long  columns  unless  the 
troops  cross  at  several  places  at  once.  The  crossing  of  many 
animals  or  wagons  may  deepen  a  ford  and  render  it  impass- 
able ;  new  places  may  thus  become  necessary. 

Persons  operating  the  ferry  are  interfered  with  as  little  as 
possible. 

The  men  enter  pontons  or  barges  singly  at  the  bow  or  stern^ 
and  gradually  move  toward  stern  or  bow ;  larger  vessels  may 
be  entered  in  column  of  twos ;  the  men  retain  the  places  as- 
signed them  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  handling  of  boat;  in 
small  boats  when  water  is  rough  they  sit  down  ;  when  there 
is  danger  they  are  directed  to  remove  their  equipments. 

Horses  are  loaded  one  at  a  time.  When  there  is  room  for  a 
single  row  only  they  alternate  heads  and  tails :  if  in  two  row» 
they  face  inward.  If  a  horse  falls  into  the  water  it  is  turned 
loose. 

Guns,  caissons,  and  wagons  are  generally  loaded  by  hand; 
if  practicable,  the  teams  are  sent  on  the  same  vessel. 

Unloading  is  also  from  the  bow,  in  good  order,  without 
crowding ;  men  sitting  down  do  not  rise  before  their  turn. 

When  rafts  are  used,  special  precautions  are  necessary.  The 
center  of  the  raft  is  first  occupied  and  then  the  load  uniformly 
distributed.  Unloading  is  carried  out  in  inverse  order,  the 
center  of  tlie  load  being  last  to  leave. 

The  crossing  of  beef  cattle  on  boats  or  rafts  is  dangerous. 
When  practicable  they  are  crossed  by  swimming. 


54  COKSUCT  OF  MARCHES. 

104.  Care  of  Troops. — On  the  march,  commanderB  of  the  larger 

units  keep  themselves  informed  of  the  condition  of  their  commands 
and  of  the  progress  of  subordinate  units  in  rear. 

Sources  of  water  supply  are  examined  by  experts  and  marked 
good  or  bad.  In  countries  infected  wdth  cholera  or  other  harmful 
bacteria,  this  is  imperative 

Precaution  is  taken  to  prevent  excess  in  eating  and  drinking 
The  drinking  of  water  is  often  a  matter  of  habit;  under  ordinary 
conditions  a  canteen  of  water  should  last  one  man  a  day's  marcli 
Soldiers  should  be  trained  to  be  economical  in  the  use  of  water, 
and  to  keep  a  small  supply  \intil  their  canteens  can  be  replenished. 
If  water  is  plentiful  they  may  drink  often,  but  only  a  small  quan- 
tity at  a  time. 

Commanders  afford  the  men  ample  opportunity  for  replenishing 
iheir  canteens,,  but  it  is  done  by  order,  not  by  straggling  from  the 
command  In  certain  cases,  the  advance  guard  may  require  the 
inhabitants  to  place  water  in  vessels  along  the  line  of  march  for  the 
convenient  use  of  troops  On  long  marches  through  country  de- 
ficient in  water,  or  where  the  water  is  bad,  it  may  be  necessary  tc 
carr\^  a  supply  in  wagons 

The  wateriiig  of  cavalry  horses  upon  the  march  de{)ends  largely 
on  the  facilities  available  In  hot  weather,  or  if  nothing  is  known 
about  the  water  supply  of  the  day's  march,  the  horses  are  watered 
before  leaving  camp  *  Good  opportunities  for  watering  on  the 
road  should  not  be  neglected  To  avoid  delay,  as  many  troops  as 
possible  are  watered  at  the  same  time;  as  thehead  of  a  command 
approaches  a  place  suitable  for  watering,  the  several  units  are 
conducted,  according  to  their  position  in  column,  to  the  different 
watering  places 

Animals  of  the  artillery  and  of  wagon  trains  are  watered  while 
in  camp — before  departure  and  after  arrival — or  during  a  long  halt. 
If  time  permits,  they  may  be  watered  on  the  march  from  buckets, 
or  by  unhitching  and  riding  or  leading  to  water 

One  of  the  greatest  sources  of  hardship  on  a  march,  especially 
for  infantry,  is  hot  weather  Every  precaution  is  taken  to  prevent 
suffering  from  this  cause.  Halting  places  are  selected  when  prac- 
ticable where  there  is  shade  and  free  circulation  of  air,  and  the  men 
are  cautioned  against  drinking  too  much  water  Green  leaves  or  a 
moist  handkerchief  in  the  hat  afford  relief  from  the  hot  rays  of  the 
sun.  If  the  men  are  overheated,  care  is  taken  to  preveiit  them 
being  chiUed  by  exposure  to  cola  winds  or  drafts. 


MARCHES  IN  JPEACE.  65 

105.  Straggling. — No  man  leaves  the  ranks  -without  permission; 
it  is  the  duty  of  all  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  to  prevent 
straggling.  '  Enlisted  men  found  away  from  their  organizations 
without  authority  are  arrested  by  the  military  police.  Military 
prisoners  held  by  military  police  are  returned  to  their  units  at  the 
tirst  opportimity,  with  a  statement  of  the  circumstances  of  their 
apprehension. 

All  persons  found  pillaging,  marauding,  or  committing  crimes 
are  arrested  and  dealt  with  according  to  law 

106.  Camp  of  Bivouac. — As  a  command  approaches  the  camping 
place  the  commander  issues  the  halt  order.  This  order  provides 
for  the  outpost,  if  necessary,  and  gives  instruction  for  the  encamp- 
ment o£  the  command. 

SPECIAL  REGULATIONS. 

107.  Though  of  general  application,  the  foregoing  rules  must  be 
modified  according  to  the  situation. 

For  convenience  of  reference  and  discussion,  marches  are  classi- 
fied as  follows: 

1.  Marches  in  peace: 

(1)  Marches  in  changing  station. 

(2)  Practice  marches. 

2.  Marches  in  campaign: 

(1)  Concentration  marches. 

(2)  Marches  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy. 

(3)  Forced  marches. 

(4)  Night  marches. 

Marches  in  peace. 

108.  Changing  Station. — The  march  order  is  issued  from  day  to 
day,  or  it  may  cover  marches  of  several  days.  It  prescribes  the 
distribution  of  troops,  time  of  starting,  camping  places,  service  calls, 
and  such  other  details  as  the  commander  deems  necessary. 

To  afford  greater  freedom  of  movement,  the  distances  between  the 
elements  of  a  column  may  be  materially  increased. 

In  wet  weather,  to  avoid  cutting  up  the  road  in  advance,  mounted 
troops  of  small  mixed  commands  may  follow  the  infantry;  in  going 
through  high  vegetation  or  snow,  they  may  lead  to  break  the  way. 

Field  trains  may  follow  immediately  in  rear  of  their  regiments, 
and  the  supply  trains  be  placed  to  facilitate  issues.  "* 


56  MARCHES  IN  CAMPAIOH. 

109.  Practice  Marclies. — The  practical  training  of  troops  is 
divided  into  two  phases,  namely,  garrison  training  and  field  trainr 
ing.  Practice  marches  form  a  part  of  field  training  and  are  made 
-with  two  objects  in  view  (1)  That  of  hardening  the  men  and  ani- 
mals and  of  keeping  them  in  proper  physical  condition;  (2)  that  of 
instructing  ofiicers  and  men  in  duties  incident  to  a  campaign — 
inarching,  camping,  cooking,  etc. — and  the  principles  of  tactics, 
including  the  services  of  information  and  security. 

A  practice  marcli  conforms  to  the  conditions  it  is  intended  to 
simulate 

That  the  maximum  benefit  may  be  obtained,  practice  marches 
should  always  include  instruction  in  field  duties  of  some  character 
In  maneuvers,  and  in  exercises  where  the  presence  of  the  enemy  is 
ssumed.  regular  field  orders  are  issued 

Marches  m  campaign 

110  Concentration  — Marches  of  concentration  are  made  for  the 
jurpose  of  assembling  at  a  certain  time  and  place  bodies  of  troops 
fiom  different  localities  Such  marches  require  an  accurate  com- 
putation of  the  time  required  for  marching  and  of  the  road  space 
occupied  by  the  troops  The  condition  of  the  roads,  weather,  etc., 
must  be   considered 

A  column  of  troops  on  the  march  should  not  be  cut  by  another 
If  the  heads  of  two  columns  meet  at  a  distance  from  the  enemy,  the 
senior  commander  has  the  right  of  way,  if  near  the  enemy,  the 
senior  determines  what  measures  are  to  be  taken. 

If  a  column  in  march  overtakes  another  at  a  halt,  it  may  pass  on, 
provided  its  commander  be  the  senior,  or  the  other  commander 
gives  his  consent. 

111.  Marches  in  the  Presence  of  the  Enemy. — The  order  of  march 
of  these  bodies  is  controlled  by  tactical  considerations. 

The  order  of  march  of  the  main  body  is  determined  by  the  con- 
templated employment  of  the  troops.  When  contact  with  the 
enemy  is  probable,  columns  are  closed  up  and  march  on  broad 
fronts;  communication  is  maintained  between  the  colunms  on 
parallel  roads,  and  all  impedimenta  not  necessary  in  "the  conflict 
are  kept  in  rear  If  a  part  of  a  unit  of  infantry  is  assigned  to  the 
advance  guard,  the  remainder  of  that  unit  usually  marches  at  the 
head  of  the  main  body 

During  the  advance,  the  artillery,  in  order  to  expedite  its  entry 
anto  action,  is  generally  near  the  head  of  the  main  body,  sufficient 


MARCHES  IN  CAMPAIGN.  57 

infantry  leading  to  insure  proper  security.  Its  commander  usually 
accompanies  the  commander  of  the  column.  If  there  is  danger  U> 
the  flanks  from  small  bodies  of  the  enemy,  the  artillery  may  be 
broken  into  columns  not  longer  than  a  regiment;  it  then  marches 
like  a  convoy  with  infantry  in  front,  in  or  opposite  the  center,  and- 
at  the  rear.  This  formation  of  necessity  delays  the  entry  into 
action  of  a  part  of  the  infantry;  to  reduce  this  delay,  the  artillery 
marches,  if  possible,  in  double  column,  and  its  combat  train  follows 
immediately  in  rear  of  the  last  infantry  unit.  When  moving  into 
action  the  artillery  has  the  right  of  way. 

Thus,  in  the  march  of  a  division,  assuming  the  advance  guard  to 
consist  of  one  brigade  of  infantry,  all  of  the  divisional  cavalry,  one 
battalion  of  artillery,  one  company  of  engineers,  a  detachment  of 
signal  troops,  and  a  detachment  of  the  santitary  train,  the  distribu- 
tion of  the  main  body  and  trains  might  be  made  as  follows  t 

1  regiment  infantry. 

1  battalion  artillery. 
Regiment  artillery. 

2  brigades  infantry  (less  1  regiment.) 
Engineers. 

Signal  troops. 
Artillery  combat  trains. 
Trains. 

On  marches  through  long  defiles,  or  dense  forests,  or  on  night 
marches,  it  may  be  advisable  to  place  the  artillery  near  the  rear  of 
the  column. 

112.  Trains. — Military  trains  are  at  all  times  pro\'ided  with  the 
necessary  guards.    Field  trains  are  guarded  as  far  as  practicable  by 
men  on  duty  with  the  train,  by  convalescents  and  other  noneffec- 
tives, by  dismounted  men  of  the  cavalry  and  by  men  from  the 

battery  reserves  in  the  artillery.  Supply,  ammunition,  and  engi- 
neer trains  are  guarded  by  the  military  police.  In  marches  into 
action  the  trains  are  held  far  enough  in  rear  not  to  interfere  with 
the  movements  of  troops  or  to  check  withdrawal  in  case  of  defeat. 

If  a  ponton  battalion  is  attached  to  a  division  and  is  to  be  used 
during  the  day's  march,  it  is  assigned  a  place  in  column  as  far  for- 
ward as  practicable. 

If  a  wagon  breaks  down  or  is  stalled,  its  load  is  transferred  to  other 
wagons  and  the  road  cleared  as  soon  as  practicable. 

113.  Forced  Marches. — The  conduct  of  forced  marches  is  con- 
trolled by  the  distance  to  be  covered  and  the  time  in  which  the 
piarch  is  to  be  accomplished .    As  they  seriously  impair  the  fighting 


58  ttABCHES  IN  CAMPAIGN. 

power  of  even  the  best  troops,  forced  marches  are  undertaken  only 
in  cases  of  necessity.  Long  forced  marches  can  not  be  made  with- 
out injury  unless  the  command  is  in  good  condition  and  the  march 
is  made  with  good  judgment.  The  difficulties  of  the  problem 
rapidly  increase  with  the  size  of  the  command  and  length  of  the 
march,  but  in  any  case  the  completion  of  the  march  should  find  the 
troops  in  condition  to  accomplish  the  object  of  the  march. 

With  foot  troops  forced  marches  are  generally  made  by  increasing 
the  number  of  marching  hours,  the  halts  and  periods  for  cooking  and 
sleep  being  arranged  so  as  to  afford  the  maximum  benefit.  The 
rules  prescribed  for  the  average  march  are  followed  as  closely  as 
possible.  For  large  columns  of  infantry,  marching  long  distances, 
increase  of  pace  is  seldom  of  value 

A  maximum  day's  march  for  infantry  and  trains  is  about  28  to 
30  miles.  A  march  of  this  character  can  not,  as  a  rule,  be  pro- 
longed more  than  36  hours.  If  a  forced  march  is  to  continue  for 
several  days,  it  becomes  practically  a  succession  of  daily  marches 
of  more  than  average  length. 

Foot  troops  are  favored  in  every  way  possible.  They  are  assigned 
the  best  roads^  and  not  intermingled  with  vehicles  or  mounted  men. 
If  transportation  is  available,  their  packs  are  lightened. 

With  moimted  troops  the  gait,  as  well  as  the  number  of  marching 
hours,  may  be  increased. 

Under  favorable  conditions  of  road  and  weather  a  rate  of  50  miles 
in  24  hours  can  be  maintained  for  three  or  four  days.  On  such 
marches  the  usual  hourly  halts  are  made;  in  addition,  a  halt  of 
2  hours  is  made  at  the  end  of  the  first  half  of  each  day's  march, 
during  which  the  horses  are  unsaddled  and  permitted  to  roll,  feed, 
and  lie  down.     The  rate  is  about  5  miles  an  hour,  excluding  halts 

Under  very  favorable  conditions  a  single  march  of  100  miles  can 
be  made  in  from  24  to  30  hours.  On  such  a  march  the  usual  hourly 
halts  are  made;  in  addition  halts  of  2  hours  are  made  at  the  end  of 
the  first  and  second  thirds  of  the  march,  during  which  the  horses 
are  unsaddled  and  permitted  to  roll,  feed,  and  he  down.  The  rate 
is  about  5^  miles  an  hour,  excluding  halts. 

For  distances  from  30  to  40  miles  a  rate  of  6  miles  an  hour, 
excluding  halts,  can  be  maintained  under  favorable  conditions  of 
road  and  weather.  If  the  command  be  small,  well  seasoned,  and 
lightly  equipped,  the  rate  may  be  even  greater.  The  usual  halts 
are  made. 

If  the  distance  to  be  covered  by  forced  marches  is  about  150  miles, 
the  march  begins  at  a  rate  of  not  more  than  50  miles  a  day.    For 


COjrVOYS;  69 

distances  greater  than  200  miles  the  daily  march  is  from  30  to  40 
mile? 

On  forced  marches  where  the  road  is  level  or  nearly  so  and  the 
footing  good,  the  men  are  occasionady  required  to  dismount  and 
march  for  short  distances  at  a  fast  walk  or  slow  double  time,  leading 
their  horses.  They  are  also  permitted  to  loosen  or  remove  their 
sweaters  and  overcoats,  if  their  comfort  will  be  materially  increased 
thereby. 

114.  Night  Marches. — Night  marches  are  sometimes  made  in  hot 
weather;  generally,  however,  they  are  made  as  the  result  of  a  forced 
march  to  surprise  the  enemy  or  to  secure  a  favorable  position  from 
which  he  may  be  attacked  at  night  or  at  dawn. 

Moonlight  and  good  roads  are  favorable  for  night  marches.  A 
waning  moon  is  of  advantage  in  marches  beginning  early  in  the 
morning.  As  all-night  marches  rapidly  impair  the  efficiency  of 
a  command,  a  few  hours'  rest  should  be  taken  if  practicable.  Spe- 
cial effort  is  nece.ssary  to  maintain  good  march  discipline. 

Precaution  is  taken  that  the  proper  road  is  followed  and  that 
contact  between  units  is  maintained,  men  being  stationed  to  mark 
changes  of  direction.  If  necessary  guides  are  seciu'ed  and  charged 
with  the  duty  of  following  the  right  road.  When,  due  to  unfavor- 
able conditions,  units  can  not  be  kept  well  closed,  men  will  be 
placed  at  forks  and  crossings  of  roads,  especially  on  dark  nights  and 
at  times  of  dense  fogs  or  storms,  and  always  when  passing  through 
cities  or  towns  from  which  roads  diverge  in  many  directions.- 

When  the  march  is  secret,  additional  precautions  are  necessary. 
Silence  is  maintained;  mouthpieces  of  bugles  are  removed,  and 
articles  of  equipment  secured  to  prevent  rattling;  smoking  is  not 
permitted ;  villages  and  farmhouses  are  avoided  on  account  of  warn- 
ing given  by  do^s.  If  the  troops  are  compelled  to  leave  the  roads, 
their  progress  will  be  slow,  and  additional  time  allowance  must  be 
made. 

If  cavalry  forms  a  part  of  the  column  at  night,  it  ordinarily 
marches  in  rear  of  the  infantry;  if  there  is  artillery,  it  generally 
follows  the  cavalry  and  has  a  special  infantry  escort. 

CO.VVOYS. 

116.  On  land  the  term  "convoy"  is  usually  applied  to  those  trains 
by  which  supplies  are  forwarded  to  an  army  from  depots  or  maga- 
izines  in  rear,  and  to  trains  bringing  in  supplies  collected  by  requi- 
sition.   The  trains  directly  attached  to  a  military  force  are  gener- 


60  cojnroYs. 

ally  sufficiently  protected  by  the  presence  of  troops  and  by  train 
guards. 

116.  Wagon  Convoys. — As  the  difficulty  of  controlling  and  pro- 
tecting a  convoy  increases  rapidly  with  its  length,  it  should  not,  ae 
a  rule,  contain  more  than  100  wagons.  Such  a  train  occupies  about 
1  mile  of  road  space 

An  officer,  with  such  assistants  as  may  be  available,  is  placed  in 
charge  of  the  transportation.  He  divides  the  train  into  sections  of 
20  to  30  wagons  and  places  a  noncommissioned  officer  or  wagon 
master  in  charge  of  each  section. 

Military  police  are  assigned  to  preserve  order,  protect  property, 
render  assistance  in  case  of  accidents,  and  take  part  in  the  defense. 
With  hired  or  impressed  transportation  a  strong  guard  is  required 

117  A  convoy  marches  with  a  distance  of  about  25  yards  between 
sections,  about  2  yards  between  wagons,  and  at  a  rate  of  2  to  2^ 
miles  an  hour,  including  halts.  The  march  is  similar  to  that  of  a 
body  of  troops,  except  for  breathing  spells  in  ascending  long  slopes 
and  delays  to  lock  wheels  on  steep  descents.  Long  halts  are 
avoided.    The  slowest  teams  are  placed  in  the  lead. 

Broken  wagons  are  removed  from  the  road,  theii-  loads  being 
transferred  to  spare  wagons  or  distributed  among  other  wagons  of 
the  train. 

118.  Security. — Security  for  a  convoy  is  furnished  by  the  escort, 
which,  as  a  rule,  is  composed  of  infantry,  with  enough  cavalry  for 
scouting  and  commimicatiou,  and  some  engineers.  The  proportion 
of  cavalry  varies,  being  greater  in  open  than  in  close  country. 

The  strength  of  the  escort  depends  upon  the  importance  and 
size  of  the  train,  the  lisk,  nature  of  the  country,  length  of  the  jour- 
ney, etc  A  train  containing  explosives  requires  a  strong  escort 
in  order  to  keep  the  enemy  from  firing  into  it. 

The  senior  line  officer  on  duty  with  the  troops  commands  the  con- 
voy He  consults  with  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  transportation, 
and,  if  practicable,  defers. to  the  latter's  wishes  as  to  the  hours  of 
starting,  length  of  marches,  parking  of  the  train,  military  police, 
etc  Officers  casually  with  a  convoy  exercise  no  authority  therein 
Distribution  of  Troops. — TVTien  a  convoy  is  to  march,  the 
commander  assigns  military'  police  to  the  different  sections,  and 
distributes  the  remainder  of  the  escort  as  follows* 

Advance  guard. 

Main  body. 

Flank  guard  (if  necessary). 

Rear  guard. 


CONVOYS.  61 

Advance  guard. — ^The  advance  cavalry,  if  any,  precedes:  the  train 
3  to  5  miles,  scouting  to  the  front  and  flanks.  It  is  accompanied 
by  the  necessary  guides  and  interpreters.  Careful  examination 
is  made  of  bridges  and  defiles  and  of  the  country  in  the  vicinity; 
temporary  guards  are  left  at  such  points  until  the  support  comes  up. 

The  remainder  of  the  advance  guard  marches  about  a  mile  in 
front  of  the  train. 

The  advance  guard  commander  examines  the  country  with  a  view 
to  selecting  suitable  places  for  halting  or  parking  the  convoy, 
should  the  enemy  be  encountered. 

The  head  of  the  train  is  never  permitted  to  enter  a  defile  until 
the  advance  guard  is  in  possession  of  the  farther  end. 

Main  body. — The  main  body  marches  at  the  most  important 
point,  which  may  be  near  the  head,  in  rear,  or  opposite  the  center 
of  the  train,  the  latter  being  the  usual  position.  If  the  main  body 
marches  opposite  the  center  it  is  generally  advisable  to  place  a  sec- 
tion of  infantry  at  the  head  and  another  at  the  tail  of  the  train  for 
its  immediate  protection. 

Rear  guard. — The  rear  guard  marches  a  short  distance  in  rear  of 
the  train ,  with  the  usual  rear  guard  formation .  Its  strength  is  ordi- 
iirtrily  about  one-sixth  of  the  escort. 

119.  Camping. — The  place  for  camping  is  usually  selected  by  the 
advance  guard  commander,  due  regard  being  paid  to  the  water  sup- 
ply, fuel,  grass,  and  facilities  for  defense.  A  field  inclosed  by  wire 
fence  is  advantageous. 

Herding  should  not  be  undertaken  unless  there  is  little  danger 
from  attack,  or  lack  of  forage  demands  it. 

On  going  into  camp  or  during  long  halts,  the  train  is  parked, 
the  fonnation  dependmg  upon  the  proximity  and  character  of  the 
ouemy  and  the  amount  of  ground  available. 

\Vhenthe  enemy  is  knowo  to  be  distSint  the  train  is  usually  parked 
in  column  of  sections  or  half  sections,  with  distances  of  about  20 
yards  between  subdivisions,  and  intervals  of  6  to  8  yards  between 
wagons.  A  compact  fonnation  is  secured  by  placing  the  wagons 
axle  to  axle  and  tying  the  animals  to  picket  lines  in  front  of  the 
wagons. 

For  purposes  of  defense  wagons  may  be  placed  in  two  lines  facing 
each  other,  or  in  the  form  of  a  square,  rectangle,  oval  or  circle,  the 
poles  inside;  the  inclosure  thus  formed  furnishes  shelter  for  the 
men  and  animals.  When  there  is  time,  wire  entanglements  are 
constructed  and  shelter  trenches  dug  outside  the  corral. 


63  CONVOYS. 

A  diamond^shaped  corral  is  recommended  for  emergencies,  as  it 
can  be  rapidly  formed  and  the  march  quickly  resumed.  The 
animals  of  the 'first  two  sections  are  imhitched  and  placed  inside; 
openings  are  left  where  necessary-.  If  the  nature  of  the  ground  per- 
mits, the  teams  of  the  first  two  sections  may  coimtermarch  before 
.forming  the  corral,  thus  obv-iating  the  necessity  of  unhitching. 

The  camp  is  protected  by  the  necessary  outposts. 

Defense  of  a  Convoy. — ^The  chief  duty  of  the  escort  is  to 
keep  the  enemy  from  gaining  a  position  permitting  effective  fire 
on  the  train .    With  eflicient  security  a  convoy  can  not  be  surprised 

The  flanks  of  a  convoy  are  its  most  vulnerable  parts.  If  the 
enemy  is  reported  near,  the  wagons  are  closed  up  and  the  march  is 
continued  in  the  most  orderly  manner  possible;  if  pi-acticable,  the 
wagons  are  formed  in  double  column. 

The  escort  fights  only  when  necessary,  and  does  not  pursue  when 
the  enemy  is  repulsed.  If  the  enemy  holds  a  commanding  posi  tirn 
or  a  defile  on  tJie  line  Qi  march,  he  is  either  dislodged  by  the  escort 
or  the  convoy  takes  another  road. 

The  advance  cavalry  reports  the  presence  of  the  enemy  with  the 
utmost  dispatch  so  that  the  commander  may  change  the  direction 
of  march,  park  the  train,  or,  if  necessary,  begin  a  retreat. 

If  menaced  by  small  parties  of  the  enemy,  a  convoy  continues  its 
march  under  protection  of  tiie  escort;  if  attacked  by  a  superior 
force,  the  train  is  parked  or  a  corral  formed,  skirmishers  being 
thrown  out  to  delay  the  enemy  and  gain  time  for  the  formation 
The  commander  selects  good  defensive  positions  at  some  distance 
from  the  train,  intrenches  if  possible,  and  pi-epares  for  a  stubborn 
resistance.  Couriers  are  dispatched  to  apprise  the  nearest  troops 
of  the  situation.  Should  the  enemy  be  repulsed,  his  retreat  is 
carefully  verified  before  the  march  is  resumed 

If  it  is  e\ident  that  the  train  can  not  be  saved,  the  commander 
endeavors  to  escape  with  the  most  valuable  part,  the  remainder 
being  set  on  fire  or  otherwise  destroyed. 

Attack  of  a  Convoy. — ^The  most  favorable  time  for  attacking 
a.  convoy  is  when  it  is  passing  through  woods,  a  defile,  or  over  a 
bridge;  when  it  is  g<ung  around  a  diarp  bend  in  the  road;  when 
ascending  or  de&cending  difficult  slopes  or  passing  over  bad  sections 
of  the  road;  when  the  convoy  is  beginning  to  form  a  conal;  when 
the  teams  are  being  watered ;  ot,  generally,  whenever  the  conditions 
are  such  that  the  escort  can  not  quickly  prepare  for  defense. 

The  attacking  force  endeavors  to  bring  the  convoy  to  a  halt,  and 
to  throw  it  into  confusion  by  making  an  attack  from  an  unexpected 


comroYS  by  water.  63 

?uarter.    The  fire  of  artillery  and  of  machine  guns  is  verjr  effecti-ve. 
f  a  convoy  is  captured,  the  parts  that  can  not  be  carried  off  are 
destroyed. 

CONDUCTING   PRISONERS. 

120.  In  addition  to  an  escort  to  repel  attempts  at  rescue,  a  guard 
of  about  10  foot  soldiers  and  several  mounted  men  is  required 
for  every  100  prisoners.  The  captives  are  formed  into  companies 
and  marched  m  column,  their  officers  marching  separately.  Pris- 
oners are  treated  kindly,  but  must  be  given  to  understand  that  any 
attempt  to  escape  will  draw  fire.  If  the  convoy  is  attacked,  they 
are  ordered  to  lie  do-wTi.  At  night  they  are  placed  in  suitable  well- 
lighted  buildings  or  inclosures. 

CONVOYS  BY  WATER 

121.  On  interior  waterways,  water  transportation  derives  its 
security  principally  from  the  presence  of  ti'oops  in  the  field.  For 
protection  against  guerrillas  and  raiding  parties,  a  shallow-draft 
steamboat,  provided  with  machine  guns  and  shelter  against  rifle 
fijre,  carries  part  of  the  escort  and  precedes  the  transports.  Means 
for  rapidly  disembarking  the  escort  are  provided  in  order  that  hos- 
tile parties  on  shore  may  be  quickly  dislodged.  In  the  case  of 
naiTow  streams  or  canals  lined  with  woods  or  other  cover,  it  may  be 
necessary  to  have  the  escort  march  on  both  banks  and  clear  the 
country  as  it  advances. 

At  sea,  on  the  Great  Lakes,  and  on  large  rivers,  inlets,  and  estu- 
aries, convoy  escort  duty  is  performed  by  the  navy  in  accordance 
with  the  foliowing  rules' prepared  "by  the  joint  board: 

"1.  All  matters  relating  to  the  purchase,  charter,  fitting  out, 
equipping,  and  maintenance  of  transi)orts,  engaging  their  oflicers 
and  crews,  and  providing  niles  for  their  government,  their  interior 
discipline  and  administration,  shall  be  controlled  by  the  army. 

"2.  If  practicable,  all  transports  carrying  troops  or  animals  shall 
be  supplied  with  distilling  apparatus  adequate  for  the  supply  of 
water  required.  As  a  reserve  in  case  of  emergency,  a  distilling 
ship,  furnished  by  the  navy,  shaU,  if  practicable,  accompany  each 
convoy. 

"3.  a.  All  matters  relating  to  the  loading  of  the  transports  with 
troops,  animals,  or  stores,  and  the  quota  or  cargo  to  be  assigned  each 
vessel,  will  be  under  the  charge  of  the  army 

"6.  The  discharge  of  troops,  animals,  and  stores  from  the  trans- 
ports into  the  boats  and  their  transfer  in  boats  to  the  shore  will  be 


64  CONVOYS  BY  WATEE. 

in  charge  of  the  navy,  and  will  be  carried  out  at  such  time  and 
in  such  order  as  the  army  commander  may  decide. 

"4.  a.  An  expedition  oversea  which  requires  naval  convoy  being 
decided  upon,  as  soon  as  the  transports  begin  to  assemble  at  the 
rendezvous  a  naval  officer  of  suitable  rank  shall  be  appointed 
as  convoy  commander  and  be  supplied  with  information  concern- 
ing the  strength  of  the  expedition  and  it3  proposed  objective. 

"6.  The  army  authorities  shall  furnish  him  with  facilities  for 
inspecting  the  transports  as  they  assemble,  for  the  purpose  of  ascer- 
taining whether  they  are  properly  fitted  with  ground  tackle,  boats, 
lines,  and  all  equipment  necessary  for  the  proper  management 
and  control  of  the  convoy  while  in  transit  and  while  disembark- 
ing men  and  animals  under  the  conditions  which  will  probably 
be  met.  Defects  in  this  direction  shall  be  by  him  called  to  the 
attention  of  the  proper  army  authority,  who  shall  use  every  effort 
to  remedy  such  defects,  in  accordance  with  the  judgment  of  the 
naval  convoy  commander  The  naval  convoy  commander  shall 
render  all  possible  assistance  with  the  resources  at  his  disposal. 
In  the  event  that  it  is  found  impracticable  to  remedy  defects 
which,  in  the  opinion  of  the  naval  convoy  commander,  will  threaten 
the  safety  of  the  convoy  or  jeopardize  the  success  of  the  expedi- 
tion, such  defects  shall  be  reported  immediately  to  their  respective 
departments  by  the  army  and  navy  convoy  commanders. 

"5.  A  naval  lieutenant  and  a  junior  or  warrant  officer  and  four 
quartermasters  or  signalmen  for  each  transport  and  supply  vessel 
under  convoy  shall  be  supplied  by  the  Navy  Department  and  shall 
be  detailed  by  the  naval  convoy  commander  to  the  vessels  when 
they  are  ready  to  proceed  to  the  anchorage  determined  upon  as 
the  final  rendezvous  for  departure  Means  of  making  flag,  hand 
semaphore,  and  wigwag  signals  by  day  and  night  shall  also  be 
provided  by  the  Navy  Department. 

"6.  a.  The  orders  as  to  the  destination  of  con\T>y  and  time  of 
sailing  shall  be  issued  by  the  army  commanding  officer  under  the 
authority  of  the  War  Department  and  communicated  to  the  naval 
convoy  commander  Should  circumstaiices  arise  after  sailing 
which  render  a  change  in  plan  or  destination  necessary  or  desirable, 
which  change  it  is  not  practicable  to  refer  to  higher  authority,  the 
army  commander  shall,  after  consultation  with  the  naval  convoy 
commander,  decide  as  to  such  change. 
^ '  h.  The  naval  convoy  commander  shall  have  control  of  all 
movements  of  the  convoy  and  shall  establish  all  orders  of  sailing 
and  formation.    He  shall  make  provision  for  emergencies,  such  as 


COirVOYS  BY  WATEE.  65 

an  attack  by  an  enemy  or  dispersion  of  the  convoy  by  weather  or 
other  circumstances- 

"c.  He  will  make  his  subordinates,  placed  on  the  transports  and 
supply  vessels,  familiar  with  his  dispositions  and  plans. 

"d.  Should  the  transports  be  separated  from  the  convoying  ves- 
sels by  accident  or  design,  the  senior  naval  officer  present  and  on 
duty  will  take  charge  of  the  convoy  and  control  its  movements 
in  accordance  with  the  plans  of  the  convoy  commander. 

"7.  a.  The  senior  naval  officer  attached  to  a  transport  or  supply 
vessel  shall,  under  the  authority  of  the  naval  convoy  commander 
and  in  obedience  to  his  orders  and  signals,  control  entirely  the 
movements  of  the  vessel  in.-^hich  he  is  embarked,  including  her 
anchorage. 

"6.  He  shall  have  no  other  authority  on  board.  The  master 
and  officers  of  the  vessel  shall  perform  their  navigation  duties 
affecting  her  speed  and  movement  under  his  direction,  and  should 
there  be  any  opposition  to  or  interference  with  his  authority  in  any 
way  he  shall  call  upon  the  commanding  officer  of.  troops  on  board, 
who  shall  take  such  steps  with  the  force  under  his  command  as  may 
be  necessary  to  enforce  the  authority  of  the  naval  officer  attached  to 
the  vessel. 

"8.  The  time,  place,  and  order  of  landing  will  be  decided  upon 
by  the  army  officer  commanding,  who  will  consult  with  the  naval 
convoy  commander  as  to  naval  assistance,  such  as  the  covering  and 
protection  of  the  landing  bjr  the  artillery  of  the  men-of-war  and 
use  of  naval  boats.  This  assistance  the  naval  convoy  commander 
will  render  to  the  utmost  extent  practicable  and  with  the  sole 
object  in  view  of  assisting  to  the  utmost  the  plan  of  campaign  of 
the  army  commanding  officer.  After  the  order  of  landing  is  made 
known  to  him,  the  naval  convoy  commander,  in  accordance  there- 
with, will  control  the  placing  of  the  transports  and  supply  vessels 
for  disembarking  the  troops,  animals,  munitions,  and  stores,  and 
will  control  the  loading  and  unloading  of  boats  and  have  control 
over  such  area  of  the  beach  as  may  be  necessary  for  the  proper 
execution  of  the  above.  The  naval  convoy  commander  will  also 
control  the  withdrawal  of  transports,  when  discharged,  to  the 
harbor  and  anchorage  selected-.  In  case  of  reembarkation  under 
naval  convoy  the  same  general  procedure  will  govern. 

"9.  It  is  deemed  desirable  that  the  army  commanding  officer, 
if  convenient,  shall  be  embarked  in  the  flagship  of  the  naval  con- 
voy  commander.    If   not  convenient,    the   army   commanding 


66  CONVOYS  BY  WATER. 

officer's  transport  should  be  out  of  the  formation  and  near  the  flag- 
ship of  the  naval  convoy  commander,  in  order  that  communication 
between  them  may  be  readily  had  at  any  time,  and  in  this  case 
the  senior  naval  officer  assigned  to  transports  should  be  embarked 
in  the  same  transport  as  the  army  commanding  officer. 

"10.  Any  existing  regulations  or  orders  in  conflict  or  at  variance 
with  any.  of  the  foregoing  rules  are  rescinded  or  modifled  to  the 
^extent  of  such  conflict  or  variance."' 


Article  V. 

COMBAT. 

122.  Combat  is  divided  into  two  general  classes,  the  offensive 
and  the  defensive.  The  defensive  is  divided  into  the  purely  pas- 
sive defense  and  the  temporary  defense,  which  has  for  its  object  the 
assumption  of  the  offensive  at  the  first  favorable  opportunity. 

Decisive  results  are  obtained  only  by  the  offensive.  Aggressive- 
ness wins  battles.  The  purely  passive  defense  is  adopted  only 
when  the  mission  can  be  fully  accomplished  by  this  method  of  war- 
fare. In  all  other  cases,  if  a  force  be  obliged  by  uncontrollable 
circumstances  to  adopt  the  defensive,  it  must  be  considered  as  a 
temporary  expedient,  and  a  change  to  the  offensive  with  all  or  part 
of  the  forces  will  be  made  as  soon  as  conditions  warrant  such  change. 

COMBAT  PRINCIPLES. 

The  following  principles  apply  to  both  offensive  and  de- 
fensive combat: 

Fire  superiority  insures  success. 

Unity  of  command  is  essential  to  success.  The  regiment  united 
in  combat  has  greater  force  and  fighting  power  than  have  three 
separate  battalions.  A  battalion  acting  as  a  unit  is  stronger  than 
are  four  companies  acting  independently.  All  the  troops  assigned 
to  the  execution  of  a  distinct  tactical  task  must  be  placed  under 
one  command. 

The  task  assigned  any  unit  must  not  involve  a  complicated 
maneuver.  Simple  and  direct  plans  and  methods  are  productive 
of  the  best  results  in  warfare. 

All  the  troops  that  are  necessary  to  execute  a  definite  task  must, 
be  assigned  to  it  from  the  beginning.  Avoid  putting  troops  into 
action  in  driblets. 

Detachments  during  combat  are  justifiable  only  when  the  exe- 
cution of  the  tasks  assigned  them  contributes  directly  to  success  in 
the  main  battle  or  when  they  keep  a  force  of  the  enemy  larger 
than  themselves  out  of  the  main  battle .  When  combat  is  immi-nent 
all  troops  must  be  called  to  the  probable  field  of  battle.    A  force 


69  USE  OF  THE  COHBINEO  ARMS. 

is  never  so  strong  that  it  can  needlessly  dispense  with  the  support 
of  any  of  its  parts  during  combat. 

Too  many  troops  must  not,  however,  be  committed  to  the  action 
in  the  early  stages,  no  matter  what  be  the  nature  of  the  deployment 
or  the  extent  of  line  held.     Some  reserves  must  be  kept  in  hand. 

Use  the  reserve  only  when  needed  or  when  a  favorable  oppor- 
tunity for  its  use  presents  itself.  Keep  some  reserve  as  long  as 
j)racticable,  but  every  man  that  can  be  used  to  advantage  must 
participate  in  the  decisive  stage  of  the  combat. 

Flanks  must  be  protected  either  by  reserves,  fortifications,  or 
the  terrain. 

Flank  protection  is  the  duty  of  the  commanders  of  all  flank  units 
down  to  the  lowest,  whether  specifically  enjoined  in  orders  or  not. 
This  applies  to  units  on  both  sides  of  gaps  that  may  exist  in  the 
comlsat  lines. 

Reconnaissance  continues  throughout  the  action. 

USE   OF  THE   COMBINED  ARMS. 

123.  Infantry.— The  infantry  is  the  principal  and  most  important 
arm,  which  is  charged  vnth  the  main  work  on  the  field  of  battle  and 
decides  the  final  issue  of  combat.  The  role  of  the  infantry,  whether 
offensive  or  defensive,  is  the  role  of  the  entire  force,  and  the  utili- 
zation of  that  arm  gives  the  entire  battle  its  character  The  suc- 
cess of  the  infantry  is  essential  to  the  success  of  the  combined  arms. 

124.  Artillery. — The  artillery  is  the  close  supporting  arm  of  the 
infantry  and  its  duties  are  inseparably  connected  with  those  of 
the  infantry  Its  targets  are  those  units  of  the  enemy  which,  from 
the  infantry  point  of  view,  are  most  dangerous  to  its  infantry  or 
that  hinder  infantry  success.  The  greater  the  difiiculties  of  the 
infantry  the  more  powerful  must  be  the  artillery  support. 

In  order  to  insure  close  cooperation  of  the  artillery  with  the 
infantry  in  combat,  the  leader  of  each  infantry  unit  to  which 
artillery  support  has  been  assigned  will,  in  both  the  attack  and 
defense,  make  known  to  the  artillery  commander  his  p>lans  and 
their  expected  development  and  will,  throughout  the  action,  keep 
the  artillery  representative  accompanying  him  fully  informed  of 
the  needs  of  the  infantry  in  the  matter  of  artillery  support. 

The  security  of  the  artiller}'-  in  combat  must  be  provided  for 
either  by  the  distribution  of  the  other  arms  or  specifically _  in 
orders.  But  when  such  is  not  the  case  the  necessary  protection 
must  be  afforded  by  the  nearest  unit  of  infantry  or  cavalry  whose 
mission  will  permit  it  to  give  such  protection. 


USE  OF  THE  COKBINED  ARUS.  69 

126.  Cavalry. — The  cavalry,  preceding  contact  of  the  opposing 
Iroops  of  the  other  arms,  is  engaged  in  reconnaissance  of  the  enemy 
and  of  the  terrain  and  in  accomplishing  such  mission  .as  may  be 
assigned  it.  During  combat  it  directs  its  activities  to  the  support 
of  the  other  arms  and  particularly  toward  insuring  the  success  of 
the  infantry  as  soon  as  that  arm  is  fully  committed  to  action.  It 
must  not  be  given  a  task,  nor  voluntarily  assume  one,  that  will 
prevent  its  fullest  cooperation  with  the  other  arms  in  the  decisive 
action.  The  cavalry  leader  will  be  given  wide  initiative  in  the 
tactical  employment  of  his  command  during  the  decisive  combat. 

The  cavalry  of  a  field  army  is  divided  into  two  classes,  that 
attached  to  the  infantry  divisions  and  called  divisional  ca\alry, 
and  that  forming  a  separate  strategical  unit  called  the  cavalry 
division. 

The  divisional  cavalry  is  an  auxiliary  arm  of  the  infantry  division 
and  is  used  as  the  division  commander  directs,  either  as  independ- 
ent cavalry  or  as  advance  cavalry. 

The  cavalry  division  is  pushed,  as  independent  cavalry,  far  to 
the  front,  often  several  days'  march  in  advance  .of  the  remainder 
of  the  field  army,  to  drive'  back  the  covering  forces  of  the  enemy 
and  to  gain  accurate  information  of  his  dispositions,  strength,  and 
movemects.  This  is  the  most  valuable  use  of  the  cavalry  division 
in  the  opening  stages  of  a  campaign.  The  use  of  the  cavalry  divi- 
sion as  a  screen  is  justified  only  in  exceptional  cases,  as  it  is  seldom 
effective  in  absolutely  preventing  hostile  reconnaissance.  Bet- 
ter results  can  be  obtained  by  using  the  cavalry  as  a  mass  to 
engage  and  defeat  the  enemy's  cavalry.  The  troop  leading  of  the 
cavalry  division  is  prescribed  in  the  drill  regulations  for  that  arm. 

A  field  army  commander  may  find  it  necessary  to  strengthen  the 
independent  cavalry  of  the  field  army  by  the  temporary  assignment 
to  it  of  all  or  part  of  the  divisional  cavalry. 
^  An  army  commander  may  combine  two  or  more  cavalry  divi- 
sions under  one  leader. 

126.  Special  Troops. — The  engineer  troops,  when  not  engaged  in 
the  special  duties  of  their  arm,  may  be  used  as  infantry,  but  only  in 
exceptional  cases,  as  part  of  the  attacking  line.  On  the  offensive, 
when  used  as  infantry  they  form  part  of  the  reserve,  part  of  a 
holding  force,  or  are  used  for  flank  protection.  On  the  defensive, 
they  may  be  used  as  infantry  wherever  the  development  of  the 
action  warrants  such  use. 

The  duties  of  all  other  special  troops  or  units  that  form  part  of 
the  division  are  laid  down  in  the  different  tactical  manuals. 


70  FIRE  STTPERIORITY. 

127.  Heavy  Field  Artillery. — The  limited  mobility  of  heavy  field 
artillery  renders  its  use  inadvisable  in  any  position  from  which  the 
conditions  of  combat  may  require  its  hasty  withdrawal.  For  that 
reason  it  has  no  place  in  an  advance 'guard;  in  an  outpost,  unless 
occup^'ing  a  position  in  which  the  action  is  to  be  fought  to  a  deci-- 
eion;  m  advanced  positions  or  posts;  in  the  rencontre;  or  in  delay- 
ing actions,  unless  its  loss  is  justifiable 

128.  On  the  offensive,  heavy  field  artillery  finds  its  function  in 
firing  upon  supporting  points  in  the  hostile  line;  upon  covered 
positions  occupied  by  large  bodies  of  the  enemy,  particularly  his 
reserves;  in  the  destruction  of  material  objects,  as  buildings, 
bridges,  etc  ;  and,  in  general,  against  a  position  that  has  been 
deliberately  taken  up  and  strengthened  by  the  enemy. 

129.  On  the  defensive,  heavy  field  artillery  finds  its  use  in  com^ 
pelling  the  deployment  of  the  enemy's  columns  at  long  distances 
from  the  defensive  line,  againfet  any  large  formed  bodies  of  the 
enemy,  and  against  those  parts  of  his  materiel  or  material  objects 
within  his  lines  that  offer  an  important  target. 

Due  to  its  long  range,  it  is  profitably  used  in  both  offensive  and 
defensive  combat  in  restricting  the  field  of  activity  of  the  enemy's 
shorter  range  artillery.  It  can  also  be  used  to  advantage  in  i\te 
destruction  of  the  enemy's  field  artillery  materiel. 

130.  The  use  of  the  heavier  types  of  field  artillery  presupposes 
an  offensive,  where  reconnaissance  of  the  enemy's  position  has  been 
thorough  and  where  the  attack  has  been  carefully  planned;  or  a 
defensive,  where  there  has  been  time  to  deliberately  select  and 
strengthen  a  position  Until  the  use  of  the  heavier  field  artillery 
under  the  conditions  given  can  be  clearly  foreseen,  its  position  ia 
well  to  the  rear  of  all  the  combatant  units. 

FIRE    SUPERIORITY 

131.  Fire  superiority  must  be  obtained  in  the  early  stages  of 
combat  and  maintained  to  the  end.  Without  it,  success  can  not  be 
expected  either  on  the  offensive  or  the  defensive  It  affords  the 
best  protection  that  can  be  given  troops  advancing  to  the  attack, 
as  also  the  best  means  of  diminishing  losses.  The  artillery  must 
cooperate  with  the  infantry  in  obtaining  and  maintaining  fire 
superiority  Deficiency  in  the  volume  of  fire  on  the  defensive 
should  be  offset  by  the  selection  of  a  position  naturally  strong,  or 
that  can  be  made  strong,  in  the  time  available  for  that  purpose. 


FRONTAGE  OF  TTNITS  IN  COMBAT.  71 

FRONTAGE   OP  UNITS  IN   COMBAT. 

132.  Depth  in  formation  for  combat,  rather  than  extension  of 
front,  is  all  important  in  the  initial  deployment,  even  where  the 
position  and  the  strength  of  the  enemy  have  been  fully  developed. 
Suflacient  depth  makes  available  means  to  meet  the  contingencies 
of  combat  and  the  unforeseen  developments  in  the  situation  as  they 
arise.  Troops  once  deployed  and  committed  to  action  are  no  longer 
available  to  enable  the  leader  to  exercise  a  constant  influence  over 
the  com-se  of  the  entire  combat.  The  progress  of  the  combat  'will 
call  for  an  extension  of  the  front  occupied  in  the  initial  deployment 
that  can  not  be  foreseen  Troops  must  be  held  available  for  the 
purpose  of  such  extension.  For  that  reason  some  reserves  must  be 
held  to  the  last,  but  when  the  decisive  moment  arises  every  man 
that  can  be  used  to  advantage  must  be  put  into  the  action. 

Frontages  for  dej)loyment  are  based  upon  the  infantry^  strength  of 
the  division  and  higher  units.  Artillery  has  no  place  in  the  front 
line  of  the  initial  deployment  and,  at  the  time  such  deployment  is 
made,  the  place  of  the  cavalry  is  out  in  front  of  the  line  or  in  contact 
with  the  enemy  on  the  flanks.  The  infantry  strength  alone,  there- 
fore, is  considered  in  fixing  the  frbntages  for  the  initial  deployment. 

The  frontages  occupied  by  the  difif6rent  battle  units  are  not  in 
proportion  to  the  number  of  their  component  units.  The  duration 
of  the  combat  and  the  needs  for  the  security^  of  the  flanks  increase 
with  the  size  of  the  force  employed.  Each  higher  leader  must  keep 
out  a  reserve.  A  division,  therefore,  makes  its. initial  deployment 
or  a  front  only  twice  that  justified  for  the  brigade,  and  a  field  army 
of  three  divisions,  when  one  division  is  held  as  a  reserve,  is  assigned 
for  deployment  a  front  twice  that  of  the  di^^ision. 

A  unit  whose  flanks  are  secured  by_  othef  troops  or  by  impassable 
obstacles,  or  one  that  occupies  a  position  naturally  strong,  or  made 
so  by  adequate  preparation,  may  be  given  a  frontage  limited  only 
by  the  requirements  of  fire  efiiciency  throughout  the  combat.  The 
same  is  true  of  reserves  deployed  to  bring  about  a  decision  already 
prepared  by  other  troops.  A  force  whose  flanks  are  exposed  must 
protect  them  by  a  maximum  distribution  in  depth. 

Frontages  of  units  in  forces  no  larger  than  a  brigade  are  prescribed 
in  the  drill  regulations  for  the  different  arms,  and  the  principles 
upon  which  the  frontages  given  are  based  apply  when  such  units 
are  part  of  a  larger  force  than  a  "brigade. 


72      INTEENCHMENTS,  USE  OF  MACHINE  GTTNS,  ETC. 

Divisions  and  Field  Akmies.-— A  division,  when  operating 
against  an  enemy  of  nearly  equal  training  and  morale,  and  on 
open  and  unprepared  ground,  can  not  make  its  initial  deployment 
on  a  front  greater  than  1^  to  2  miles  and,  at  the  same  time,  have 
the  capacity  to  hold  its  position  strongly  throughout  the  action. 
In  the  same  way  a  field  army  of  three  divisions  would  be  limited 
in  its  initial  deployment  to'  the  frontage  of  4  to  5  miles.  Where, 
for  uncontrollable  reasons,  deployment  over  a  more  extended  front 
is  necessary,  strong  reserves  are  the  only  means  available  to  meet 
the  dangers  incident  to  such  overextension. 

iNTRENCHMENTS.    (See  page  180. 

183.  On  the  defensive  the  artificial  strengthening  of  the  position 
taken  up  is  limited  only  by  the  time  and  the  facilities  available. 
On  the  offensive  intrenchments  are  used  on  all  lines  that  are  to  be 
held  for  any  length  of  time.  Troops  advancing  to  the  attack  must 
understand  that  the  best  protection  against  losses  is  afforded  bj^  an 
uninterrupted  and  vigorous  advance  toward  the  enemy's  position, 
and  by  the  use  of  such  natural  cover  as  the  ground  offers.  In  the 
attack  intrenchments  will  be  used  only  when  further  advance  is 
for  some  time  impossible,  and  to  hold  ground  already  gained. 

USE  OP  MACHINE  GUNS. 

134.  Machine  ^ns  are  emergency  weapons.  They  are  best  used 
when  their  fire  is  in  the  nature  o!  a  surprise  to  the  enemy  at  the 
crises  of  combat.  Their  effective  use  will  be  for  short  periods  of 
time — at  most  but  a  few  minutes — until  silenced  by  the  enemy. 
"When  engaged  they  must  be  used  to  the  limit  of  their  effective 
capacity.  On  the  offensive  they  find  their  use  in  assisting  the 
attack  to  obtain  fire  superiority  temporarily  lost  and  against  lines 
of  trenches  which  are  to  be  assaulted.  In'the  defensive  they  are 
used  against  large  targets  visible  for  a  short  time  only,  and  on 
advancing  lines  of  the  enemy's  infantry  within  the  close  and 
effective  ranges.  The  effect  of  enemy's  gunfire,  particularly 
his  artillery  fire,  on  machine  guns,  is  lessened  by  their  employ- 
ment in  small  groups. 

POST    OF   THE   LEADER. 

135.  On  the  march  when  there  is  a  probability  of  contact  with  the 
enemy,  the  leader  of  each  column  is  at  the  front,  usually  well 


EESERVES.  73 

forward  with  the  advance  guard.  During  action,  in  forces  no  larger 
than  a  brigade,  the  leader  places  himself  far  enough  to  the  front  to 
personally  direct  the  movements  of  his  command.  In  di\dsions,  it 
will,* at  times,  be  possible  to  find  a  point  of  observation  from  which 
the  division  commander  can  personally  supervise  the  course  of  the 
action  or,  at  least,  overlook  the  most  important  part  of  the  field 
assigned  to  his  di\d6ion.  In  forces  not  larger  than  a  division,  the 
post  of  the  leader  during  combat  is  usually  near  the  position  of  the 
reserve.  In  forces  larger  than  the  division,  and  in  the  division 
where  the  terrain  does  not  permit  of  pei-sonal  observation,  it  is  best 
for  the  leader,  during  the  action,  to  be  well  in  rear,  removed  as  far  as 
possible  from  the  sights  and  sounds  of  the  battlefield,  in  order  that 
his  decisions  may  not  be  unduly  influenced  by  local  conditions. 
In  this  case  communication  wjth  all  parts  of  the  battlefield  must 
be  direct,  rapid,  and  continuous. 

RESERVES. 

136.  The  preponderatin,^  influence  of  rifle  fire  in  deciding  an 
action  seems  to  call  for  the  deployment  in  the  early  stages  of  all 
the  troops  that  can  be  used  on  the  firing  line.  But  rifle  fire,  even 
with  the  maximum  possible  support  of  artillery  fire,  will  not  alone 
force  a  favorable  decision.  Infantry,  properly  trained  and  prop- 
erly led,  can  not  be  driven  from  position  by  fire  action  alone.  For 
that  purpose  an  assault  actually  delivered,  or  one  that  shows,  a 
determination  to  close  with  the  enemy,  is  necessary.  The  firing 
line  prepares  the  way  for  this  assault,  but  is  not  in  itself  sufficient 
for  its  completion.  Fresh  troops  must  be  at  hand  to  give  the  firing 
line  the  impetus  necessary  to  drive  it  forward,  and  fresh  troops 
must  be  at  hand  to  actually  penetrate  the  enemy's  position,  to 
fill  in  gaps  that  develop  in  the  line,  to  cover  the  reorganization  of 
troops  disorganized  in  the  assault,  and  to  meet  counter  attacks. 
On  the  defensive,  troops  must  be  at  hand  to  meet  the  play  of  ^e 
opponent  who  holds  the  initiative.  In  both  offensive  and  defen- 
sive combat,  flanks  that  are  vulnerable  must  be  secured.  For  all 
such  purposes  some  troops  must  be  kept  out  of  the  firing  line  until 
the  very  last  stages  of  the  action.  Reserves  are  thus  a  necessity 
and  they  must  be  strong  enough  to  answer  the  demands  made  upon 
them  during  the  entire  combat. 

The  reserve  ia  the  leader's  weapon,  which,  on  the  offensive, 
enables  him  to  shape  the  course  of  the  action  and  to  finally  force 
a  decision.    On  the  defensive,  it  enables  him  to  meet  the  develop- 


74  RESERVES. 

ments  of  the  action  as  they  arise.  Adequate  reserves  must  be  held 
for  the  crises  of  combat,  but  all  troops  will  find  a  field  for  activity 
before  or  at  the  close  of  the  battle 

137.  The  knowledge  of  the  situation  that  the  leader  possesses 
must  guide  him  in  fixing  the  strength  of  the  reserves  On  the 
offensive  one-fourth  to  one-third  of  tne  entire  force  is  held  out  at 
first  as  a  reserve  in  all  units  down  to  and  including  the  regiment. 
In  the  passive  defense,  after  the  requirements  of  the  firing  line  are 
fully  provided  for,  the  governing  consideration  in  fixing  the 
strength  of  the  reserve  is  the  vulnerability  of  the  flanks  Where 
the  flanks  are  secured  by  other  means,  a  reserve  as  low  as  one- 
eighth  of  the  entire  force  may  suffice  In  the  defense  seeking  an 
opportunity  to  attack,  the  change  from  the  defensive  to  the 
offensive,  together  with  the  requirements  of  flank  protection,  re- 
quires strong  reserves  Here  it  may  be  necessary  to  hold  out  at 
first,  for  this  purpose,  as  much  as  two-thirds  of  the  entire  force 

In  an  attack  involving  forces  of  the  size  of  a  division,  or  larger,  the 
brigade  reserves  protect  the  flanks  of  the  attacking  lines,  support  such 
lines  if  they  be  repulsed,  meet  counterattacks,  secure  the  captured 
position,  thus  giving  the  disordered  attacking  lines  time  to  reform, 
and  initiate  the  pursuit  of  the  retreating  enemy  In  the  brigade  on 
the  outer  flank  of  an  enveloping  movement  the  reserve  may  be  used  at 
the  last  to  extend  the  line  In  the  defense,  the  brigade  reserve  ia 
used  to  protect  the  flanks  of  its  firing  lines,  to  support  such  lines  is 
driven  back,  to  make  local  counter  attacks,  and  to  cover  the  re- 
treat of  its  firing  lines,  if  the  latter  be  compelled  to  withdraw  from 
action 

138.  In  Divisions. — In  divisions,  the  division  reserve  is  used  to 
meet  enveloping  or  turning  movements,  to  make  an  enveloping 
movement  where  the  situation  of  the  division  permits;  to  fill  in 
gaps  that  may  develop  between  its  own  divisions  and  others  on  its 
flanks  during  the  course  of  the  action,  and  to  make  counter  at- 
tacks A  decisive  engagement  will  call  for  the  use  of  all  or  nearly 
all  of  the* reserves  before  a  decision  is  reached,  but  if  any  part  of 
the  reserve  remains  in  hand  when  a  retreat  becomes  necessary,  it 
will  be  used  to  cover  the  withdrawal  from  action  and  reformation 
of  the  deployed  lines. 

♦139  In  Field  Armies. — In  field  armies  the  general  reserve  may 
be  smaller  proportionally  than  in  the  division  acting  alone.  Its 
function  is  not  to  reinforce  divisions  in  action,  or  to  be  used  piece- 
meal in  any  part  of  the  field  It  finds  its  best  use  as  a  mass  of  ma- 
neuver to  envelop  or  turn  the  enemy's  position,  to  meet  similar 


PLAN  OF  ACTION  AND  COMBAT  ORDERS.  75 

moves  on  his  part,  or  to  change  the  character  of  the  action,  as  from 
defensive  to  offensive. 

140.  Artillery. — Artillery  that  can  find  active  employment  any- 
where in  an  action  is  out  of  place  as  a  reserve.  When  the  unit  of 
which  it  forms  a  part  is  held  as  a  reserve,  it  remains  a  component 
part  of  such  reserve  unless  detached  for  active  use  in  some  part  of  the 
field  under  the  orders  or  directions  of  the  superior  leader 

CAVALRr. — The  value  of  cavalry  as  a  reserve  lies  mainly  in  its 
mobility  The  cavalry  division  gives  the  leader  of  the  field  army 
a  valuable  and  powerful  weapon  with  which  to  meet  any  crises  in 
combat  which  demand  the  employment  of  troops  possessing  the 
highest  mobility.  But  to  rely  wholly  upon  cavalry  for  a  reserve  is 
to  restrict  the  sphere  of  activity  of  that  arm  Reserves  other  than 
those  composed  of  cavalry  must  be  provided  for 

PLAN   OP  ACTION. 

141.  Upon  the  information  of  the  enemy  and  of  the  terrain  ob- 
tained by  reconnaissance  and,  as  far  as  time  will  permit,  upon  the 
study  of  the  terrain  in  the  field  of  probable  operations  made  by  the 
leader,  the  plan  of  action  is  baaed.  After  contact  is  gained  the 
decision  will  be  to  attack,  to  take  up  a  defensive  position,  to  with- 
draw, or  to  change  the  direction  of  march.  The  offensive  must  be 
the  rule,  to  be  departed  from  only  for  uncontrollable  reasons. 

The  following  factors  must  be  considered  in  arriving  at  the  de- 
cision: The  mission,  relative  numerical  strength  of  the  opposing 
force,  relative  efficiency  of  the  troops  on  both  sides,  the  terrain,  and 
the  probable  results  of  Victory  or  defeat.  In  doubtful  cases  aggres- 
siveness and  initiative  will  usually  win.  To  take  up  a  defensive 
position,  to  withraw,  or  to  change  the  direction  of  march  so  as  to 
avoid  contact  with  the  enemy  may  be  a  conservative  or  prudent 
course  to  follow  in  doubtful  cases,  but  such  a  course  will  not  bring 
victory  nor  shorten  the  campaign.  The  mission  of  an  army  in  war 
is  to  win  battles.    Every  step  taken  must  be  with  that  end  in  view. 

COMBAT  ORDERS,,    (See  Article  III  and  Appendix  3.) 

142.  The  initial  combat  orders  of  the  division  and  of  all  units 
higher  than  the  division  are  almost  invariably  written.  Troops 
may  be  put  in  motion.in  the  desired  direction,  especially  in  a  xen- 


76  COMBAT  ORDERS. 

centre  engagement,  by  verbal  orders,  b\it  ^uch  verbal  orders  must 
be  followed  as  soon  as  possible  by  written  orders.  After  the  action 
has  begun  the  greater  number  of  the  orders  given  by  the  higher 
commanders  will  be  fragmentary  and  verbal!  In  units  higher 
than  the  regiment  all  such  orders  will,  as  far  as  practicable,  be 
written  out  by  a  staff  officer  at  the  time  they  are  issued,  and  a  copy 
thereof  be  given  the  officer  charged  with  the  execution  of  the  order, 
if  possible  at  the  time  the  order  is  delivered,  otherwise  as  soon  there- 
after as  it  is  possible  to  furnish  it. 

Troops  deployed  and  under  fire  can  change  front  only  at  the  risk 
of  incurring  heavy  losses  WTien  they  are  once  committed  to  any 
line  of  action,  change  to  another  is  costly  both  in  men  and  morale 
It  is  impossible  for  the  higher  troop  leaders  to  directly  influence 
the  course  of  an  action  once  begim  in  any  way  except  through  the 
use  of  such  reserves  as  may  be  at  hand .  Modern  fire  effect  will  not 
permit  the  higher  leaders  to  change  abruptly  the  course  of  action  of 
troops  already  engaged  by  the  mere  sending  of  orders,  verbal  or 
written,  to  the  commanders  of  such  troops.  These  principles  must 
be  borne  in  mind  in  issuing  combat  orders. 

Combat  orders  are  the  expression  of  a  fixed  decision  and  must 
definitely  state  the  end  in  view,  such  as  "To  attack,"  or  "To  take 
up  and  defend  "  a  position  Vague  or  ambiguous  orders  indicate 
vacillation  and  the  absence  of  any  definite  decision  on  the  part  of 
the  officer  responsible  for  them  Troops  have  a  right  to  be  told,  in 
terms  that  are  direct  and  unmistakable,  exactly  what  it  is  their 
leader  wants  them  to  do. 

143.  Armies. — In  armies,  combat  orders  will  often  be  in  the  form 
of,  or  a  part  of,  letters  of  instruction  to  the  commanding  generals  of 
the  field  armies  composing  the  'trmy.  But  where  the  field  armies 
are  within  supporting  distance  of  each  other  and  can  mutually  co- 
operate in  the  task  assigned  them,  formal  combat  orders  may  be 
issued.  Such  orders  are  necessarily  general  in  their  character  and 
consist  6f  a  statement  of  the  objective  sought  by  the  army  com- 
mander, and  of  the  part  he  expects  each  field  army  to  play  in  attain- 
ing this  objective.  The  army  commander,  either  by  means  of  let- 
ters of  instruction  or  by  personal  conferences  with  his  field  army 
commanders,  fully  acquaints  them  not  only  with  the  immediate 
end  in  view,  but  also  with  so  much  of  his  further  plans  as  may  be 
necessary  to  insure  thorough  cooperation  on  their  parts. 

144.  Field  Annies.— In  field  armies,  combat  orders  recite  the 
decision  of  the  commanding  general  and  assign  the  tasks  that  each 
division  is  to  perform  in  carrying  out  such  decision      Details  as  to 


COMBAT  ORDERS.  77 

the  movements  of  any  part  of  a  division,-  including  the  trains, 
have  no  proper  place  in  combat  orders  of  field  armies. 

146.  Divisions. — In  divisions,  or  in  forces  smaller  than  a  division 
but  made  up  of  two  or  more  arms,  the  combat  orders  will  recite 
the  purpose  of  the  commanding  general,  which  is  either  the  ex- 
pression of  his  own  decision,  or  is  the  task  allotted  him  by  the 
higher  commander,  and  will  then  state  definitely  the  task  that  each 
subordinate  unit  is  to  perform  in  the  execution  of  this  purpose. 
The  order  states  definitely  what  each  subordinate  unit  is  to  do. 
How  the  task  allotted  is  to  be  performed  is  the  function  of  the 
commanders  of  the  subordinate  units. 

146.  Personal  conferences  between  the  higher  commanders  and 
the  subordinates  who  are  to  execute  their  orders  may  at  times  be 
advisable,  in  order  that  the  latter  may  arrive  at  a  correct  understand- 
ing of  the  plans  and  intentions  of  their  superiors  and  may  correctly 
interpret  the  orders  issued.  But  such  conferences  are  not  for  the 
purpose  of  criticizing  the  orders  or  plans  of  the  higher  commander, 
nor  to  influence  the  latter's  action.  The  officer  issuing  the  order 
can  not  share  the  responsibility  therefor  with  any  of  his  subordinates. 
The  decision,  no  matter  how  arrived  at,  is  his  alone. 

147.  In  assigning  combat  tasks,  divisions  in  field  armies  and 
brigades  in  divisions  are  given  certain  well-defined  parts  of  the 
enemy's  line  to  attack,  or  certain  sections  of  a  line  to  defend,  or  are 
held  as  general  reserves.  In  divisions,  the  special  troops  are 
assigned  tasks  in  orders  only  where  such  tasks  are  not  definitely 
prescribed  in  the  manuals  for  the  employment  of  such  troops  in 
combat.  ^  Combat  orders  of  divisions  fix  the  position  of  ammunition 
distributing  stations,  dressing  stations,  and  stations  for  the  slightly 
wounded.  If  no  previous  arrangements  have  been  made  for  the 
disposition  of  the  trains,  the  combat  order  provides  for  grouping 
all  trains  not  needed  on  the  battle  field  far  enough  to  the  rear  so  as  not 
to  interfere  with  the  movements  of  the  combatant  troops,  should 
withdrawal  become  necessary. 

_  148.  Combat  orders  need  not  necessarily  provide  for  the  protec- 
tion of  flanks  or  maintenance  of  communication,  nor  for  the  keeping 
upof  local  reconnaissance,  unless  some  special  disposition  is  desired. 
Such  matters  are  attended  to  by  the  commanders  of  all  units  in- 
volved, as  a  matter  of  course  If  an  omission  in  these  respects  is  to 
be  feared  on  the  part  of  a  subordinate,  attention  may  be  directed  to 
them  in  orders,  provided  such  subordinate  can  not  be  replaced  by 
an  officer  more  fitted  to  command. 


78       DEVELOPMENT  AND  DEPLOYMENT  FOE  ACTION. 

149.  Commanders  of  subordinate  units  cannot  plead  absence  of 
orders  or  the  nonreceipt  of  orders  as  an  excuse  for  inactivity  in  a 
situation  where  action  on  their  part  is  desirable,  or  where  a  change 
in  the  situation  upon  which  the  orders  issued  were  based  renders 
such  orders  impracticable  or  impossible  of  execution.  If  the 
subordinate  Commander  knows  what  the  general  plan — the  end 
in  view — is,  lack  of  initiative  on  his  part  is  inexcusable. 

DEVELOPMENT  AND  DEPLOYMENT  FOR  ACTION 

160.  In  armies,  the  objectives  assigned  to  each  field  army  are 
necessarily  of  a  general  character  and  are  determined  some  time, 
oft^n  several  days,  preceding  probable  combat.  The  objective 
determines  the  route  of  march  for  the  field  army  and  the  manner  in 
which  such  march  is  conducted.  The  object  is  to  place  the  field 
armies  in  preparatory  positions  from  which  development  for  action 
can  be  best  accomplished  and  the  divisions  moved  most  expedi- 
tiously to  their  allotted  tasks. 

151.  In  the  theater  of  possible  operations,  forces  larger  than  a 
division  will  march  in  more  than  one  column  unless  the  only  routes 
available  are  such  as  would  place  the  different  columns  outside 
of  supporting  distance  of  each  other.  Divisions  are  within  sup- 
porting distance  of  each  other  when  not  more  than  a  day's  practi- 
cable march  apart,  and  when  the  intervals  between  the  heads  of 
the  different  columns  are  such  as  will  not  permit  the  enemy  to  inter- 
pose his  force  between  them.  In  field  armies  the  intervals  between 
the  divisions  in  march  must  be  such  as  will  permit  simultaneous 
development  and  deployment  for  action,  without  crowding  the 
troops  or  unduly  extending  the  line 

152.  ^Vhen  an  encounter  with  the  enemy  is  probable,  every 
available  means  will  be  taken  to  gain  information  and  to  lessen 
beforehand  the  time  that  will  be  required  in  the  deployment  for 
action.  Single  route  columns  of  such  length  that  the  rear  elements 
are  out  of  supporting  distance  of  those  in  the  lead,  must  be  shortened 
by  an  extension  of  front,  as  far  as  security  and  the  terrain  will  permit. 
This  extension  is  secured  by  breaking  the  single  column  into  two  or 
more  parallel  columns,  rather  than  by  an  extension  of  the  front  of 
such  units,  as  for  instance,  marching  in  columns  of  platoons  or 
sections — a  difiicult  and  fatiguing  method  of  march  As  the 
enemy  draws  nearer  and  combat  becomes  imminent,  these  columns 
are  again  broken  up  into  smaller  parallel  columns,  until  the  final 


DEVELOPMENT  AND  DEPLOYMENT  FOE  ACTION.       7« 

development  is  such  as  to  insure  rapid  deployment  and  still  retain 
sufficient  depth  in  formation  to  enable  the  leader  to  meet  tiie 
after  requirements  of  the  situation. 

163.  Precautions  must  be  taken,  in  this  development  for  action, 
that  each  column  is  directed  upon  its  probable  objective,  and  that 
the  different  columns  and  parts  of  columns  do  not  get  out  of  sup- 
porting distance  of  each  other.  This  development  for  action 
takes  place  jn  divisions  and  smaller  units  before  the  route  column 
comes  withm  the  zone  of  hostile  artillery  fire. 

154.  Combats  of  armies  or  of  field  armies  are  made  up  of  a  number 
of  local  combats  conducted  by  divisions  or  parts  of  divisions. 
In  divisions,  each  brigade  is  given  a  definite  objective  or  is  held 
in  reserve.  After  the  combat  is  on,  the  division  commander  can 
retain  but  little  direct  control  over  the  troops  actually  engaged. 
His  control  over  the  course  of  the  entire  action  must  rest  in  his 
use  of  the  artillery  and  of  the  reserves  he  has  at  hand .  The  artillery 
is  the  only  arm  that  can  immediately  respond  to  demands  for 
support  made  by  troops  already  engaged.  The  division  com- 
mander uses  this  arm  to  meet  local  crises  in  the  battle  that  must 
be  met  at  once.  The  reserves  are  so  placed  and  maneuvered  as 
to  meet  the  demands  of  the  larger  crises  of  the  action. 

155.  In  field  armies,  after  the  divisions  are  moving  upon  their 
objectives,  .the  field  army  commander  does  not  interfere  in  the 
leading  of  such  divisions  except  as  may  be  necessary  to  influence 
the  entire  action.  His  best  weapon  for  this  purpose  is  the  general 
reserve. 

156.  After  the  initial  deployment  of  the  division  for  action 
the  subsequent  troop  leading  of  the  brigades,  and  of  the  units 
smaller  than  the  brigade,  follows  the  principles  laid  down  in  the 
drill  regulations  of  the  different  arms. 

157.  With  the  entry  into  action  of  the  infantry,  the  cavalry  with- 
draws from  the  front.  From  that  time  on  the  position  of  the  cav- 
ahy  should  be  one  of  readiness  for  use  in  the  crises  of  the  combat. 
If  inferior  to  the  enemy's  cavalry,  it  may  be  forced  to  conform  to 
the  movements  of  the  latter.  In  such  a  case  it  will  have  little  or 
no  voice  in  the  selection  of  the  position  toward  which  it  falls  back. 

158.  In  armies  the  cavalry  divisions"  will  usually  remain  under 
the  orders  of  their  own  field  army  commanders. 

159.  In  field  armies  and  in  divisions,  the  selection  of  the  flank 
toward  which  their  cavah-y  will  fall  back  when  obliged  to  uncover 
the  front  is  the  function  of  the  commanders  of  those  units.    The 


80  THE  SimPRISE  AND  THE  RENCONTRE. 

flank  selected  is  the  one  most  exposed,  and  where  the  actiye  sup- 
port of  the  cavahy  may  be  most  necessary  to  the  infantry,  or,  if 
that  factor  can  not  be  determined,  the  flank  that  affords  the  best 
field  of  activity  for  the  cavalry  in  assisting  in  the  main  coinbat 
or  in  operating  against  the  enemy's  flanks  or  rear.  Throughout 
the  entire  action  contact  must  be  maintained  with  the  hostile" 
cavalry,  and  the  latter  prevented  from  hindering  the  success  of  the 
infantry.  To  best  effect  this  purpose  the  cavalry  of  field  armies 
and  divisions  must  be  kept  concentrated  on  one  flank.  Such  a 
division  of  the  cavalry  in  an  endeavor  to  cover  both  flanks  as 
would  seriously  impair  its  fighting  capacity,  is  but  rarely  justifiable. 

THE   SURPRISE. 

160.  To  be  surprised  is  never  justifiable  in  warfare.  If,  however, 
due  to  insufficient  reconnaissance,  troops  are  forced  into  action 
directly  from  a  formation  unsuitable  for  combat  or  come  un- 
expectedly under  effective  fire  of  the  enemy  before  development 
and  deployment,  boldness  in  decision  and  in  action  is  usually 
the  best  line  of  conduct.  If  the  enemy  is  still  beyond  close  range, 
quick  development  of  fire  is  important.  Here  the  artillery  must 
be  put  into  action  at  once,  to  deliver  a  heavy  fire  upon  the  most 
threatening  bodies  of  the  enemy.  If  the  enemy  is  so  near  that  a 
charge  is  practicable,  recourse  to  the  bayonet  must  be  unhesitating. 
This  principle  applies  particularly  well  where  troops  suddenly 
encounter  the  enemy  in  the  local  phases  of  a  battle.  To  attempt 
to  retire  at  once  when  surprised  is  to  risk  annihilation.  ^ 

When  troops  are  on  the  march  or  at  rest,  reconnaissance  by 
the  cavalry,  the  omission  of  which  is  never  justifiable,  is  the 
best  means  to  guard  against  being  surprised.  In  action  cavalry 
reconnaissance  is  the  best  protection  against  surprise  on  the  flanks 
or  from  the  rear. 

THE  RENCONTRE. 

161.  In  the  rencontre,  where  there  is  no  surprise,  success  depends 
mainly  upon  eSicient  troop  leading.  To  well-trained  and  well-led 
troops  the  attack  in  the  rencontre  is  natural,  and  presents  fewer 
difficulties  than  under  any  other  condition  of  warfare.  Quick 
decision  on  the  part  of  the  leader  is  possible,  if  he  has  thought  out 
beforehand  and  keeps  constantly  in  mind  what  he  will  do  when  the 
enemy  is  encountered.    On  the  march  he  must  take  care  to  change 


THE  RENCONTRE.  81 

the  details  of  his  mental  plan  to  fit  the  changing  conditions  of  ter- 
rain. This  principle  applies  to  all  leaders,  from  the  superior  com- 
mander down  to  the  commander  of  the  advance  party  on  the  march 
or  of  the  outguards  when  in  camp. 

162.  In  rencontre  combat  there  are  but  two  courses  open  to  the 
commander  of  the  advance  guard,  viz,  to  attack,  or  to  hold  his 
position.  The  action  of  the  advance  guard  will  usually  shape,  and 
in  every  instance  decidedly  influence,  that  of  the  entire  force.  It 
must,  therefore,  be  such  as  will  accord  with  the  preconceived  plans 
and  intentions  of  the  supreme  commander.  The  advance-guard 
commander  must  know  in  advance  whether  the  general  plan  is 
aggressive  or  defensive,  and  what  the  ideas  of  his  superior  are  as  to 
the  development  of  such  plan.  This  is  the  only  guide  to  action 
the  advance-guard  commander  can  have,  but  it  will  ordinarily 
suffice  to  determine  him  whether  to  act  boldly  or  cautiously.  _  The 
terrain  of  the  rencontre  may  be  the  deciding  factor  in  his  decision, 
but,  except  for  uncontrollable  reasons,  no  action  of  the  enemy 
should  rob  him  of  the  initiative,  or  force  him  from  the  decision  he 
believes  to  be  in  accord  with  the  plans  of  the  supreme  commander. 

Boldness  on  the  part  of  the  advance-guard  commander  or  the 
prompt  action  of  the  enemy  may  cause  an  intial  deployment  that 
the  development  of  the  action  shows  to  be  faulty  or  on  wrong  lines. 
In  such  a  case  the  action  of  the  advance  guard  must,  perforce,  be 
of  a  holding  or  delaying  character,  in  order  to  give  time  for  the 
correct  deployment  of  the  main  body.  Until  this  deployment  is 
accomplished  the  advance  guard  must  hold  its  position.  It  may 
then  be  withdrawn  and  form  the  reserve. 

The  advanced  detachments  must  endeavor  to  forestall  the  enemy 
in  deployment  and  not  only  cover  the  advance  into  action  of  the 
artillery,  but  also  disclose  targets  for  its  fire.  Strong  firing  lines 
and  the  use  of  machine  guns  are  the  most  important  factors  in 
successfully  accomplishing  this  task.  Important  supporting  points 
must  be  seized  and  held.  This  brings  the  enemy  to  a  standstill, 
and  gives  the  superior  leader  the  opportunity  to  seize  the  initiative 
and  to  deploy  the  remainder  of  his  troops  for  action,  uninfluenced 
by  the  first  dispositions  of  the  enemy. 

In  the  rencontre  the  early  use  of  the  artillery  delays  the  de- 
ployment of  the  hostile  lines  or  forces  such  deployment  at  long 
ranges  and  thus  gains  valuable  time  for  the  leader  to  shape  his  plans. 

35379"— 1 


89  OFFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

OFFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

The  attack. 

163.  In  combat,  where  the  force  involved  is  as  large  as  or  larger 
nthan  a  division,  a  simultaneous  effective  advance  against  the  entire 
hostile  front  is  out  of  the  question.  Modem  battles  are  made  up 
of  a  number  of  local  combats,  where  success  or  failure  in  any  one 
instance  may  decide  the  issue  of  the  entire  battle.  Fronts  occupied 
by  field  armies  are  but  seldom  continuous,  even  in  comparatively 
flat  and  open  country.  Some  parts  of  the  line  will  be  held  much 
more  strongly  than  others,  and  the  natviral  defensive  features  of 
portions  of  the  front  may  render  part  of  the  line  naturally  impreg- 
nable. 

_  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  select  in  the  enemy's  position 
limited  sections,  against  which  the  decisive  attacks  will  be  made; 
but  to  insure  success,  the  attention  of  the  enemy  must  be  held 
along  his  entire  front.  The  attack  thus  develops  into  two  parts; 
one  whose  task  it  is  to  actually  assault  the  hostile  position  at  selected 
points,  if  assault  be  necessary  to  drive  the  enemy  out;  the  other 
yhose  task  it  is  to  threaten  or  to  actually  attack  all  other  parts  of 
\hQ  enemy's  line,  in  order  to  hold  the  hostile  troops  to  their  position 
and  to  prevent  the  strengthening  of  the  points  to  be  assaulted. 

164.  As  fire  superiority  is  the  first  and  most  important  requisite 
to  success,  it  must  be  obtained  at  the  start  and  maintained  through- 
out the  action.  Fire  superiority  depends  mainly  upon  the  volume 
of  the  fire.  A  frontal  attack  alone  against  the  hostile  position  may 
give  no  opportunity  to  obtain  a  greater  volume  of  fire  than  that  of 
the  enemy,  unless  the  latter's  lixies  be  unduly  extended.  Where 
■^,hat  condition  exists,  a  combination  of  a  frontal  with  a  flank 
attack  promises  the  best  results.  The  enemy  is  attacked  in  front 
by  jjart  of  the  force,  while  the  remainder  is  directed  against  one 
of  his  flanks  with  a  view  to  enveloping  it.  A  successful  envelop- 
ment of  both  flanks  of  the  enemy,  simultaneously  with  the  frontal 
attack,  is  made  possible  only  by  a  decided  numerical  superiority  on 
the  part  of  the  attack.  An  attempt  to  envelop  or  to  attack  both 
hostile  flanks,  without  an  attack  in  front,  entails  a  dispersion  of 
force  so  rarely  justifiable  as  to  deserve  no  consideration. 

165.  In  armies  and  in  large  field  armies  only  the  direct  attack 
is  practicable  as  a  whole.  But  in  the  local  combats  of  the  smaller 
units  into  which  the  entire  action  is  divided  envelopment  is 
usually  practicable. 


OFFENSIVE  COMBAT.  93 

166.  The  terms  ''frontal"  and  "enveloping"  attacks  have  no 
significance  so  far  as  the  ultimate  relative  positions  of  the  con- 
tending forces  are  concerned.  Unless  the  enemy  blunders  or  is 
decidedly  numerically  inferior,  the  enveloping  attack  finally 
becomes  a  frontal  attack,  so  tar  as  the  brigaoe  and  smaller  units 
involved  aie  concerned.  It  must  be  expected,  therefore,  that  all 
attacks,  no  matter  how  initiated,  will  ultimately  be  made  in  a 
direction  normal  to  the  position  of  the  troops  opposing  them., 

167.  Preconcerted  j)lans  covering  all  phases  of  an  attack  are 
objectionable,  since  it  is  impossible  to  determine,  until  the 
development  of  the  action  makes  it  manifest,  what  part  or  parts 
of  the  enemy's  line  will  prove  the  most  attractive  for  the  assault. 
Both  frontal  and  enveloping  attacks  will  be  equally  energetic  at 
first,  and  when  the  time  comes  for  the  decisive  attack,  the  part  of 
the  attacking  line  designated  for  that  purpose  is  given,  by  means 
of  the  supports  or  reserves,  the  added  momentum  and  strength 
that  may  be  found  necessary  to  a  successful  assault,  while  the 
remainder  of  the  force  holds  the  enemy  in  its  front  to  his  positions. 

168.  Selection  of  Enemy's  Flank  to  Envelop  or  Turn. — In  the 
selection  of  the  flank  of  the  enemy  against  which  to  direct  the 
enveloping  or  the  turning  movement,  the  governing  considerations 
are  both  tactical  and  strategical-  Tactical  considerations  point  U> 
the  selection  of  that  flank  of  the  enemy  which  is  weakest  in  posi- 
tion or  in  troops,  gives  ease  in  approach,  affords  cover  to  the 
enveloping  or  the  turning  movement,  and  where  the  defeat  of  the 
enemy  will  prove  most  disastrous  to  him  Strategical  consider- 
ations direct  the  attack  toward  that  flank  of  the  enemy  where,  if 
successful,  it  will  drive  him  away  from  his  line  of  retreat  and  cut 
him  off  from  his  nearest  supporting  troops  or  the  possibility  of 
reinforcement.  The  possibility  of  defeat  and  the  resultant  posi- 
tion of  the  attacking  troops  must  also  be  considered  Miere 
tactical  and  strategical  considerations  conflict,  tactical  consider- 
ations must  govern  The  gaining  of  the  decision  in  combat  is  of 
primary  importance. 

The  enveloping  attack. 

169  The  advantages  of  envelopment  lie  mainly  In  the  longer 
concentric  line  employed,  which  gives  a  greater  volume  of  fije,  or 
a  fire  that  is  conve'i"ging  upon  the  enemy's  position,  and  which  may 
enfilade  part  of  the  enemy's  line  when  he  is  compelled  to  form  a 
new  front  or  to  refuse  a  flank  of  the  old  to  meet  the  enveloping 
attack. 


B4  OFFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

170.  While  surprise  is,  to  a  great  extent,  essential  to  the  success 
of  an  enveloping  attack,  it  can  not  be  hoped  that  the  enemy  will 
60  neglect  the  auty  of  reconnaissance  as  not  to  be  aware  of  th6 
movement  in  time  to  form  a  new  line  to  meet  it.  The  time  that 
he  has  for  this  pur{)ose  must  be  reduced  to  a  minimum  by  the  use 
of  cover  for  the  enveloping  force,  as  far  as  the  terrain  "makes  it 
possible,  and  by  keeping  at  a  distance  the  reconnoitering  force  of 
the  enemy  What  the  enemy  may  be  kept  from  knowing,  if  the 
holding  and  enveloping  attacks  be  properly  conducted,  especially 
as  regards  coordination  of  time  and  effort,  is  against  which  part  of 
his  line  the  decisive  attack  will  be  finally  made. 

In  the  enveloping  attack,  since  the  enemy  moves  on  shorter 
lines,  he  can  reaaily  extend  his  flank  beyond  that  of  the  attack  up 
to  the  limit  of  his  strength.  An  attempt  to  meet  such  movement 
is  apt  to  lead  to  overextension  of  troops,  or  to  a  dangerous  sepa- 
ration of  the  enveloping  from  the  holding  attack.  It  is  usually 
better  to  take  advantage  of  the  enemy's  overextension  and  thin- 
ning of  his  lines  by  retaining  a  deep  formation  and  protecting  the 
outward  flank  by  reserves,  than  to  overextend  in  turn  in  an  effort 
to  outflank  him. 

Turning  movement. 

171.  In  forces  larger  than  a  division  turning  movements  may 
be  used  in  conjunction  with  a  frontal  or  a  frontal  and  enveloping 
attack.  As  a  turning  movement  separates  the  entire  force  into  two 
parts,  each  for  a  time  outside  of  the  immediate  supporting  distance 
of  the  other,  both  the  holding  and  the  turning  force  should  be  made 
up  of  all  arms,  and  each  force  should  be  strong  enough  to  maintain 
itself  in  position  without  calling  upon  the  other  for  support.  The 
turning  movement  is  justifiable  only  when  it  can.be  made  in  such 
a  manner  as  to  permit  of  dividing  the  entire  force,  without  giving 
the  enemy  a  favorable  opportunity  to  defeat  the  separated  parts  in 
detail. 

The  holding  attach. 

172.  This,  as  the  name  implies,  is  for  the  purpose  of  holding  the 
enemy  to  his  position  by  offensive  action  in  one  part  of  the  field 
while  a  decisive  blow  in  the  nature  of  an  assault  or  of  an  enveloping 
or  a  turning  movement  is  struck  in  another  quarter.  The  govern- 
ing idea  of  the  holding  attack  is  to  make  it  energetic  enough  to 
deceive  the  enemy,  in  order  that  he  may  use  as  many  of  his  troops 
as  possible  in  resisting  it,  even  drawing  upon  his  reserves  for  such 
purpose.    Early  development  of  the  maximum  volume  of  rifle  and 


OFFENSIVE  COMBAT.  85 

artillery  fire 'is  therefore  essential,  and  for  that  reason  the  deploy- 
ment is  on  extended  lines.  Supports  and  reserves  are  reduced  to 
the  minimum  that  will  be  needed  to  replace  losses,  secure  the 
flanks,  and  strengthen  those  i)arts  of  the  line  against  which  the 
enemy  might  act  most  aggressively.  Holding  attacks  differ  from 
delaying  actions  in  that  the  guiding  principle  in  the  former  is 
offense  and  in  the  latter  defense.  The  holding  force  may  be  called 
upon  to  push  the  attack  to  the,  point  of  an  assault,  and  in  the  end 
will  join  in  the  advance  on  the  enemy's  position  when  the  decisive 
attack  has  succeeded.  Care  must  be  taken  that  the  holding 
attack  does  not,  because  of  promising  conditions  in  its  front, 
make  a  premature  assault  on  the  enemy's  line  and  be  defeated 
before  the  decisive  blow  can  be  struck  in  another  part  of  the  field. 
There  is  danger,  also,  in  prematurely  pushing  this  attack  so  far 
that  its  weakness  or  its  intentions  may  be  disclosed  to  the  enemy 
and  give  hira  the  opportunity  to  defeat  the  entire  force  in  detail. 

The  assault. 

173.  If  the  hostile  lines  are  held  by  good  infantry,  properly  led,* 
and  supported  by  good  artillery,  fire  action  alone  will  not  bring 
about  a  decision.     For  this  purpose  the  assault  will  be  necessary. 

174.  In  large  forces  assaults  are  local  and  not  general.  Combined 
assaults  in  forces  larger  than  a  division  are  not  practicable,  nor  can 
the  assaults  of  several  di-visions  along  an  extended  front  be  coor- 
dinated in  time.  Each  battle  unit  to  which  has  been  assigned  a 
distinctive  mission  must  time  its  assault  according  to  conditions  in 
its  own  part  of  the  field,  but  other  units  must  keep  the  enemy  in 
their  front  so  occupied  that  he  can  not  concentrate  a  heavy  force 
to  meet  the  assault  or  to  make  a  counter  attack. 

176.  WTiile  the  plan  of  the  superior  leader  under  which  the  first 
deployment  for  action  takes  place  may  have  in  view,  in  a  general 
way,  an  assault  of  certain  portions  of  the  hostile  lines  in  the  attack 
of  an  enemy  in  position,  or  the  forcing  back  of  a  portion  of  the 
enemy's  line  in  the  rencontre,  the  point  of  the  assault  can  not 
be  definitely  fixed  until  the  attack  is  well  developed.  For  that 
reason  the  different  parts  into  which  the  attack  is  divided  must  be 
so  handled  and  the  reserves  must  be  so  placed,  that  any  portion 
of  the  line  may  be  pushed  to  the  assault  when  the  proper  time 
comes. 

176.  Selection  of  Objective. — ^\Vhen  the  time  for  the  assault 
arrives,  all  the  firing  lines  will  have  advanced  far  enough  toward 


86  OFFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

the  enemy  to  disclose  the  weak  and  the  strong  points  of  his  lines. 
The  selection  of  the  objective  of  the  assault  and  the  time  for  launch- 
ing it  rest  preferably  with  the  superior  leader  in  that  part  of  the 
field,  but  conditions  may  arise  vsrhich  justify  subordinate  com- 
manders in  moving  to  the  assault,  or  the  impulse  for  the  assault 
may  emanate  from  the  troops  engaged  and  not  be  the  result  of 
orders.  In  the  absence  of  orders,  subordinate  commanders  are  not 
justified  in  j)ushing  to  the  assault,  no  matter  how  promising  condi- 
tions in  their  front  may  be,  if  there  are  not  reserves  avaUable  in 
their  part  of  the  field  to  insure  success,  or  if  success  would  interfere 
with  the  general  plan. 

177.  While  the  superior  leader  in  the  local  combat  may  be  so 
far  to  the  rear  of  the  firing  line  that  it  is  difficult  for  him  to  per- 
ceive when  the  proper  time  to  make  the  assault  has  come,  he  alone 
is  in  position  to  give  it  the  proper  direction  and  to  clinch  success 
by  use  of  the  reserves  and  by  coordination  of  the  action  of  the 
remaining  troops  to  that  of  the  assaulting  lines.  Where  the  assault 
is  made  by  orders  of  subordinate  commanders,  or  where  the  impulse 
for  it  emanates  from  a  part  of  the  firing  line,  there  is  danger  that 
other  parts  of  the  line  will  have  neither  the  power  nor  the  inclina- 
tion to  move  forward  in  support.  Assaults  by  small  bodies  of 
troops  can  succeed  only  where  conditions  of  terrain  are  such  as  to 
afford  them  cover  and  protect  their  flanks.  Otherwise,  if  they  are 
not  supported  by  other  parts  of  the  line,  the  result  may  be  the 
annihilation  of  the  assaulting  force.  The  higher  commanders  must 
keep  closely  in  touch  with  the  varying  phases  of  the  fire  fight,  and 
be  ready  to  give  the  necessarj'  impulse  by  means  of  the  reserves  or 
other  parts  of  the  line,  when  they  see  that  the  enemy's  firing  power 
is  broken  and  there  is  an  inclination  on  the  part  of  the  firing  line 
to  close  with  the  enemy.  But  if  they  believe  the  time  is  not  ripe 
for  the  assault,  they  must  not  be  forced  into  it  by  the  premature 
action  of  part  of  the  line.  Rather  than  support  a  premature  minor 
assault,  it  is  best  to  let  such  assault  expend  itself,  even  to  annihi- 
lation. 

178.  Support  by  Fire.— .^s  soon  as  the  decision  to  assault  is  made, 
all  the  fire  that  can  be  brought  to  bear  by  artillery,  machine  guns, 
fire  of  position,  and  from  other  parts  of  the  firing  line  wSl  be 
directed  upon  that  part  of  the  enemy's  lines  selected  for  assault. 
The  artillery  must  support  this  assault  to  the  end,  regardless 
of  the  losses  it  may  sustain,  and  must  continue  its  fire  up  to 
the  moment  of  the  charge,  even  at  the  risk  of  some  of  its  pro- 
jectiles striking  among  its  own  infantry. 


OFFENSIVE  COMBAT.  87 

The  pursuit. 

179.  Importance. — Only  by  means  of  an  energetic  pursuit  of  the 
beaten  enemy  can  the  full  fruits  of  victory  and  decisive  results 
therefrom  be  obtained.  It  is  not  the  mere  defeat  of  the  enemy's 
army,  but  its  destruction,  that  ends  the  campaign.  The  task  of 
the  victorious  army  is  less  than  half  performed  when  it  remains 
satisfied  with  the  mere  possession  of  the  battle  field.  Pursuit  must 
immediately  follow  victory,  and  every  effort  be  made  to  continue 
contact  with  the  enemy,  day  and  night,  up  to  the  absolute  limit 
of  physical  endurance  of  the  troops. 

180.  Initiation. — When  the  enemy  continues  the  engagemjent.un- 
til  actually  driven  from  his  position  by  the  attack,  pursuit  is  locally 
initiated  by  regiments  and  battalions,  whose  firing  lines  occupy  the 
enemy's  trenches  and  fire  on  his  retreating  troops.  Supports  and  re- 
serves still  in  hand  are  held,  as  far  as  required,  to  meet  any  counter 
attack  that  the  enemy  may  make.  As  the  retreating  enemy  gets  be- 
yond the  range  of  fire  from  the  occupied  position  and  the  danger  of  a 
counter  attack  seems  removed,  any  local  reserves  that  remain  in 
hand  are  designated  by  the  commanders  of  the  units  to  which  they 
belong  to  follow  the  enemy  in  their  own  section  of  the  battle  field. 
But  the  need  of  re-forming  the  attacking  units  and  of  replenishing 
ammunition,  together  with  the  mental  and  physical  condition  of 
the  troops  that  made  the  attack,  as  well  as  the  insufficient  strength 
of  the  forces  immediately  available,  soon  brings  this  local  pursuit  to 
an  end.  In  order  that  the  enemy  may  not  be  able  to  take  advantage 
of  this  opportunity  to  shake  himself  free  from  his  opponent,  a 
systematic  and  orderly  pursuit  milst  take  up  the  task  where  the 
local  pursuit  left  off.  The  superior  leader  miist  promptly  issue 
orders  that  will  insure  this  pursuit.  Where  the  defeat  of  the  enemy 
has  been  decisive,  pursuit  by  all  the  forces  in  battle  formation  will 
be  the  most  effective  in  the  beginning.  Where,  however,  the 
attack  has  been  of  such  a  nature  as  to  greatly  weaken  all  or  a  part 
of  the  troops  directly  engaged,  it  is  best  to  give  such  troops  an  op- 
protimity  to  assemble  and  reorganize.  In  such  a  case  pursuit  is 
inaugurated  by  all  the  reserves  that  may  remain  in  hand.  The 
other  troops,  when  re-formed  and  reorganized,  follow  as  a  reserve. 

181.  When  the  enemy  commences  his  withdrawal  before  his 
front  lines  have  given  way,  troops  committed  to  the  attack  con- 
tinue in  their  allotted  task  until  the  enemy  in  their  front  is  driven 
from  his  position,  when  they  pass  to  immediate  pursuit  in  battle 
formation     In  the  meantime,  all  the  cavalry  and  horse  artillerji; 


88  OFFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

available  are  thrown  against  the  flank  or  in  front  of  the  re- 
ti  eating  troops,  and  whatever  general  reserves  of  infantry  and 
artillery  are  still  intact  are  moved  against  the  flank  or  rear  of 
the  hostile  holding  force  or  at  once  take  up  the  direct  pursuit 

182.  Conduct. — No  matter  under  what  circumstances  the  pur- 
suit is  inaugurated,  the  principles  under  which  it  is  conducted 
thereafter  are  the  same.  The  task  is  to  keep  continuous  con- 
tact with  the  enemy  and  to  seek  every  opportunity  to  inflict 
losses  upon  him.  Boldness  to  the  point  of  rashness  is  not  only 
justified  but  is  demanded  in  the  pursuit.  The  assumption  of 
a  dangerous  offensive  on  the  part  of  a  retreating  enemy  unless 
he  be  reinforced  is  not  to  be  feared  so  long  as  he  is  given  no 
opportunity  to  free  himself  of  his  opponent 

183.  Cavalry  and  Artillery. — ^The  cavalry  takes  up  the  pursuit  of 
a  beaten  or  retreating  enemy  at  once,  without  waiting  for  specific 
orders  to  do  so.  Only  such  mounted  troops  as  may  be  necessary  to 
keep  contact  with  the  enemy  will  pursue  directly  on  the  road  or 
roads  over  which  he  is  retreating.  The  bulk  of  the  available  mounted 
troops,  cavalry  and  horse  artillery,  will  endeavor  to  get  on  the  flanks 
or  in  front  of  the  retreating  enemy,  in  order  to  bring  him  to  a  stand- 
still, or  to  at  least  delay  hia  retreat.  The  task  of  this  force  is  essenti- 
ally independent  of  that  of  the  other  troops.  It  must  endeavor  to 
anticipate  the  enemy,  in  the  possession  of  defiles,  bridges,  or  other 
points  of  vantage  that  lie  on  the  latter's  line  of  retreat  (5  Its  mission 
is  to  further  disorganize  the  enemy  and,  where  unable  in  itself  to 
break  down  the  opposition  of  his  larger  formed  bodies,  to  hold  them 
to  a  position  until  the  infantry  and  the  field  artillery  can  again  come 
up  with  them.  All  remaining  available  artillery  will  be  pushed  as 
far  in  advance  in  the  pursuit  as  the  infantry  support  will  permit. 

Broad  Front. — Where  the  terrain  permits,  pursuit  on  a  broad 
front  is  productive  of  the  best  results,  as  it  facilitates  the  envelop- 
ment or  turning  of  any  position  taken  up  by  the  retreating  troops. 
If  the  enemy  takes  up  a  position  to  hold  part  of  the  pursuing  line, 
the  continued  advance  of  the  other  parts  will  ^ive  opportunities  to 
cut  off  the  delaying  forces  of  the  enemy,  or  will  compel  his  early 
withdrawal  from  the  position  taken.  Where  there  are  several  pur- 
suing columns  one  will  thus  open  the  way  for  the  others.  In  pursu- 
ing on  a  broad  front  care  must  be  taken  that  the  different  parts  of 
the  pursuit  do  not  get  out  of  supporting  distance  of  one  another. 


DEFENSIVE  COMBAT.  89 

DEFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

The  passive  defense. 

184.  A  force  may  at  times  fully  accomplish  its  mission  "by  retain- 
ing its  position  for  a  specified  time  with  or  without  combat.  Here 
the  object  is  to  avoid  giving  the  enemy  the  decision,  either  by 
avoiding  combat  altogether  or,  if  he  attacks,  by  preventing  him 
from  carrying  the  position  held  by  the  defensive  troops.  The  posi- 
tion taken  up  is  selected,  as  far  as  the  mission  will  permit,  with 
reference  to  its  natural  defensive  features.  Since  the  idea  of  offen- 
sive combat  is  absent,  every  advantage  is  taken  of  obstacles,  natural 
or  artificial,  that  hinder  or  altogether  prevent  the  advance  of  the 
enemy.  Negative  rather  than  positive  measures  are  relied  upon  to 
prevent  the  enemy  from  seizing  the  position.  In  this  form  of  de- 
fense the  firing  line  is  made  as  strong  as  possible  frcm  the  first.  If 
the  flanks  are  not  secured  by  other  means,  reserves  strong  enough 
for  that  purpose  must  be  provided,  but  no  reserves  need  be  held 
for  a  decisive  counter  attack.  Supports  and  local  reserves  need  be 
only  strong  enough  to  replace  losses,  to  strengthen  or  reenforce  the 
firing  line  where  the  enemy's  attack  is  most  tlireatening,  and  to 
repair  breaches  in  the  line. 

185.  The  purely  passive  defense  is  justified  where  the  see  ob- 
ject is  to  gain  time,  or  to  hold  certain  positions  pending  the 
issue  of  events  in  other  parts  of  the  field.  Its  results,  when  it 
accomplishes  its  mission,  can  never  be  other  than  negative. 

The  defense  seeking  a  favorable  dedsipn. 

186.  This  is  the  only  form  cf  the  defense  that  can  secure  positive 
results.  A  force  whose  intentions  are  offensive  may  at  times  be 
forced  to  assume  the  defensive  either  viluntarily  in  order  to  gain 
time  or  to  secure  some  advantage  over  tUe  enemy ,  or  invcluntarily , 
as  where,  in  the  rencontre,  the  enemy  gets  a  start  in  deployment 
for  action,  or  wnere  the  enemy's  attack  is  impetuous  and  without 
sufficient  preparation  In  either  case  the  defensive  force  contents 
itself  with  parrying  the  blows  of  the  enemy,  while  gathering  its 
strengtn  and  looking  for  the  opening  to  strike  a  decisive  blow 

187.  The  crisis  of  this  fcrm  of  the  defensive  comes  with  the  coun- 
ter attack,  which  marks  the  change  from  the  defensive  to  the  offen- 
eive.  Upon  the  superior  leader  falls  the  responsibility  of  perceiv- 
Wg  the  right  moment  at  which  this  change  should  be  made  and 


90  DEFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

of  having  at  hand  the  means  necessary  to  effect  it.  The  general 
reserve  affords  him  the  weapon  necessary  for  his  purpose.  In  this 
class  of  the  defensive,  therefore,  strong  supports  and  reserves  are 
essential.  The  firing  line  is  made  as  short  as  possible  at  first,  in 
order  to  permit  of  the  holding,  out  of  local  supports  and  reserves 
strong  enough  to  meet  all  movements  of  the  enemy  and  to  hold  the 
line  thoughout  up  to  the  time  of  the  decisive  counter  attack,  and 
the  retention  until  that  time  of  a  reserve  strong:  enough  to  make  the 
counter  attack  a  success.  An  open  field  of  fire  for  effective  and 
close  ranges  is  essential.  Obstacles  immediately  in  front  of  the 
position  that  might  impede  the  counter  attack  are  objectionable. 

The  counter  attack. 

188.  The  part  of  the  enemy's  line  at  which  the  counter  attack  will 
be  launched  can  not  be  determined  definitely  until  the  time  comes 
to  make  it.  The  enemy's  attack  will  usually  disclose  weakness  in 
some  parts  of  his  lines,  and  supports  and  local  reserves  ma}--  be 
used  to  accentuate  tliis  weakness  or  even  to  develop  it  in  that'^part 
of  the  enemy's  line  where  the  terrain  or  the  position  of  the  general 
reserve  may  give  the  best  opportunities  for  the  counter  attack. 

The  counter  attack  may  become  necessary  where  the  enemy 
shows  the  greatest  strength,  La  order  to  keep  him  from  penetrating 
the  defensive  position.  The  decision  as  to  the  time  and  the  place 
for  making  the  counter  attack  rests  with  the  superior  leader.  All, 
or  the  greater  part,  of  the  general  reserve  is  used  to  effect  this 
change  from  the  defensive  to  the  offensive.  Local  counter  attacks 
by  small  units  are  a  means  of  defense  and  will  often  be  necessary 
and  advisable,  but  have  no  direct  bearing  on  the  main  counter 
attack,  which  Is  controlled  by  the  superior  leader.  Local  counter 
attacks  must  not,  therefore,  be  pushed  to  the  extent  of  committing 
other  than  local  supports  or  reserv^es  to  the  offensive  before,  in  the 
opinion  of  the  superior  leader,  the  time  has  come  to  strike  the 
decisive  blow. 

189.  The  counter  attack  may  be  made  by  launching  the  reserve 
against  the  enemy's  flank  after  he  is  fully  committed  to  the  attack, 
or  straight  to  the  front  where  weakness  in  iiis  attacking  Lines  is 
apparent.  The  impulse  for  the  coimter  attack  may  at  times  be 
given  by  the  advance  of  llic  fighting  line  after  a  repulse  of  the 
enemy  and  the  consequent  demoralization  of  his  attacking  lines. 

>  190.  When  the  time  comes  for  the  counter  attack,  aU  the  artillery 
and  machine-gun  fire  available  is  suddenly  turned  on  that  part  of 


DEFENSIVE  COMBAT.  91 

the  enemy's  line  selected  for  the  attack.  This  must  not  be  done 
until  the  troops  are  ready  for  the  attack.  Otherwise,  the  enemy 
may  discern  the  intention  in  time  to  make  preparations  to  meet  it 
either  by  reenforcing  that  part  of  his  line  or  by  pushing  the  assault 
in  another  part  of  tHe  field. 

Cavalry  in  defensive  combat. 

191.  In  all  defensive  combat  cavalry  has  even  a  more  important 
lole  than  it  holds  in  tiie  offensive.  It  must  always  be  ready  to 
come  immediately  to  the  assistance  of  the  infantry  and  to  make 
any  sacrifice  necessary  to  ward  off  the  defeat  of  that  arm.  It  must 
be  kept  near  at  hand  and  ready  for  actidnv  mounted  or  dismounted, 
in  any  part  of  the  field.  Its  opportunities  for  mounted  action  to 
check  the  enemy's  advancing  Imes,  especially  those  that  threaten 
the  flanks  of  the  infantry,  will  probably  be  many.  It^  coopera- 
tion can  not  be  limited  to  any  part  of  the  battle.  It  may  be  able 
to  hasten  by  its  action  the  time  for  the  counter  attack  or  to  create 
the  opportunity  for  such  attack.  The  superior  leader  must  be  in 
immediate  communication  with  the  cavalry  commander  through- 
out the  action,  and  the  work  of  the  cavalry  must  be  so  coordinated 
with  that  of  the  general  reserves  that  each  will  be  prepared  to 
seize  any  opportunity  created  by  the  other.  The  general  reserve 
and  the  cavalry,  together  with  all  the  artillery  not  fully  occupied 
elsewhere,  are  the  means  available  to  the  superior  leader  to  change 
from  the  defensive  to  the  offensive  and  to  make  such  change 
Buccessfully. 

Defensive  positions. 

192.  A  defensive  position  may  b6  taken  up  and  strengthened 
when  the  direction  or  the  enemy's  advance  is  definitely  fixed,  and 
when  it  will  be  necessary  for  hrbi  to  carry  such  position  in  order  to 
keep  the  force  occupying  it  from  accompfishing  its  mission.  Until 
such  condition  is  fulfilled  the  time  has  not  come  to  take  up  a  defen- 
sive position. 

193.  Rectuisites. — ^T^e  requisites  to  be  sought  in  a  defensive  posi- 
tion are  a  clear  field  of  fire  up  to  the  effective  range  of  the  artillery, 
flanks  that  are  naturally  secure  or  that  can  be  made  so  by  the  use  of 
the  reserves,  extent  of  ground  suitable  to  the  strength  of  the  force  to 
occupy  it,  effective  cover  and  concealment  for  the  troops,  especially 
reserves,  good  communications  throughout  the  position,  and  good 
lines  of  retreat.    Unless  the  defense  is  to  be  a  purely  passive  one. 


92  DEPENSIVE  COMBAT. 

obstacles  in  front  of  the  position  must  not  be  such  as  would  impede 
the  counter  attack. 

194.  Division  and  Occupation. — The  front  of  the  position  is  di- 
vided into  sections  and  to  each  is  assigned  a  unit  which  provides 
its  own  section  reserve  The  subunits  pro\ide  their  own  sup- 
ports. The  entire  position  is  prepared  for  defense,  as  far  as 
time  will  permit.  The  governing^  consideration  in  the  selection 
and  the  strengthening  of  the  position  is  the  needs  of  the  infantry 
Suitable  artillery  positions  are  selected  and  prepared,  but  are  not 
occupied  until  the  plans  of  the  enemy  are  developed  In  the 
meantime  the  artillery  is  held  in  readiness.  Artillery  firing 
positions  must  be  such  as  will  bring  fire  to  bear  at  long  range  on 
attacking  lines  approaching  from  any  possible  direction.  The 
artillery  will  serve  the  needs  of  the  defense  best  when  it  can 
bring  an  effective  fire  to  bear  on  the  assaulting  lines  of  the  enemy 
and  can  sweep  the  front  of  the  entire  position. 

195.  Position  of  General  Reserve  —The  position  of  the  general 
reserve  is  such  as  will  enable  it  to  respond  best  to  the  most  prob- 
able demands  to  be  made  upon  it  If  the  line  is  such  that  the 
enemy  may  attempt  a  decisive  attack  alon^  any  part  of  it,  the 
reserve  will  be  held  in  a  central  position  Dividing  the  general 
reserve  and  holding  it  in  two  or  more  positions  widely  apart  are 
inadvisable,  except  where  necessary  to  insure  the  reenforcement  of 
any  part  of  the  line  in  time  to  be  effective 

196.  Advanced  Positions  and  Posts.— The  occupation  by  a 
strong  force  of  any  position  in  advance  of  the  main  position  is 
objectionable,  in  that  it  involves  a  dispersion  of  strengthen  the  part 
of  the  defense  and  may  result  in  compelling  the  entire  force  to  fight 
to  a  decision  in  the  advanced  position  and  not  in  the  position  pre- 
pared for  that  purpose.  Wliere  necessary  to  occupy  advanced  posi- 
tions in  order  to  secure  more  time  before  the  enemy  can  attack  the 
main  position,  or  in  order  to  keep  the  enemy  out  of  them  as  long  as 
possible,  care  must  be  taken  that  the  force  detailed  for  the  purpose 
IS  not  so  weak  that  it  will  fall  back  to  the  main  position  before 
it  accomplishes  its  mission,  and  not  so  strong  that  it  will  be  tempted 
to  hold,  out  too  long,  with  the  resultant  danger  of  committing  the 
remaining  troops  to  action  in  advance  of  the  main  position  It' is 
not  a  question  of  how  strong  a  force  can  be  spared  for  the  purpose 
of  occupying  an  advanced  position,  but  rather  how  weak  can  this 
force  be  made  and  yet  have  strength  sufficient  to  accomplish  ita 
mission. 


DEFENSIVE  COMBAT.,  98 

The  holding  of  strong  posts  in  advance  of  the  main  position, 
either  for  the  purpose  of  delaying  the  enemy  or  for  observation,  is  not 
objectionable  due  to  the  fact  that  the  force  necessary  for  the  pur- 
pose is  restricted  in  strength.  Unlike  advanced  positions  held  in 
force,  advanced  posts  may_be  occupied  up  to  the  last  so  long  as  any 
advantage  is  gained  thereby,  even  to  the  extent  of  risking  the  total 
loss  of  the  occupying  detachment. 

197.  Supporting  Points, — Even  on  comparatively  level  and  open 
ground  it  is  rarely  necessary  or  advisable  to  occupy  or  strengthen 
the  defensive  line  to  the  same  degree  throughout  its  entire  extent. 
The  terrain  will  generally  offer  some  points  in  the  line  that  are 
unusually  strong  naturally,  or  that  can  be  readily  strengthened,  and 
such  points  will  be  used  as  supports  on  which  to  rest  the  entire  line. 
They  should  be  selected  with  a  view  to  afford  each  other  mutual 
support,  flanking  the  ground  over  which  the  enemy  must  attack, 
and  compelling  him  to  capture  one  or  more  of  them  before  he  can 
force  a  decision.  Supporting  points  are  especially  desirable  on  the 
flanks  of  the  position  and  where  there  are  unavoidable  salients  in 
the  line.  They  must  form  a  part,  and  not  be  in  advance,  of  the 
main  position. 

Positions  in  readiness. 

198.  WTiere  it  is  intended  to  resist  the  advance  of  the  enemy  in 
the  immediate  vicinity,  and  knowledge  of  his  movements  is  not 
yet  sufficiently  definite  to  decide  upon  a  i)lan  of  action,  troops  may 
be  placed  in  a  position  in  readiness  for  action.  A  position  in  readi- 
ness may  be  preliminary  to  taking  the  offensive  against  the  enemy 
or,  as  is  more  often  the  case,  to  taking  up  and  occupying  a  defensive 
position.  In  the  former  case  no  defensive  position  need  be  selected 
or  prepared  The  troops  are  developed  for  action  in  such  a  way  as 
will  hasten  their  deployment  when  the  time  comes.  In  the  latter 
case  defensive  positions  will  be  tentatively  selected  covering  all 
the  probable  lines  of  approach  of  the, enemy,  but  none  of  the  posi- 
tions so  selected  will  be  occupied  or  strengthened  until  a  dennite 
selection  can  be  made.    However,  if  there  be  a  line  or  supporting 

Eoiht  that  is  common  to  all  the  tentative  positions  and  which  must 
e  held,  no  matter  what  may  be  the  direction  of  the  enemy'e 
advance,  it  will  be  occupied^  at  once  and  strengthened.^  The 
infantry  necessary  for  its  garrison  will  be  assigned  to  it  without 
delay. 

199.  The  remainder  of  the  infentry  will  be  held  near  its  most 
probable  position  in  the  ultimate  defensive  line.    The  artillery 


94  DEFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

will  be  placed  in  readiness  to  command  all,  or  at  least  the  most 
probable,  lilies  of  approacli  of  the  enemy  and  where  it  can  be 
readily  moved  into  firing  positions  when  required.  Continued  and 
thorough  reconnaissance  is  most  essential,  and  all  the  cavalry  avail- 
able will  be  used  for  that  purpose,  supported  by  otiier  arms  where 
such  support  is  necessary  to  obtain  the  desired  information. 

200.  Requisites. — The  requisites  of  a  position  in  readiness  are 
good  means  of  communication  to  the  probable  positions  to  be 
occupied,  or  to  the  front  where  the  intention  is  to  assume  the 
offensive,  and  such  coyer  as  will  prevent  the  enemy  from  readily 
reconnoitering  the  position  and  dispositions  of  the  troops. 

Withdrawal  from  action. 

201  No  other  situation  in  combat  demands  so  high  an  order  of 
skill  in  troop  leading  as  does  withdrawal  from  action  under  pressure 
of  the  enemy's  attack.  A  leader  is  not  justified  in  withdrawing 
from  the  field  of  battle  as  long  as  he  has  reserves  in  hand  whose 
active  use  might  turn  apparent  defeat  into  victory  To  hold  out 
reserves  for  the  sole  purpose  of  covering  a  possible  retreat  is  never 
justifiable  as  long  as  defeat  is  not  a  certainty  But  when  defeat  is 
certain  the  last  reserves  in  hand  should  be  used  to  cover  the  with- 
drawal from  action  of  the  firing  lines.  WTiere  all  the  troops  have 
been  committed  to  the  action,  and  withdrawal  under  pressure  of 
the  enemy's  attack  is  unavoidable,  unless  troops  can  be  gotten 
together  to  cover  the  withdrawal  of  the  lines  that  are  the  hardest 
pressed  the  retreat  quickly  degenerates  into  disorderly  flight  It 
will  seldom  be  the  case  that  tnere  are  not  some  local  supports  or 
reserves  still  intact  somewhere  along  the  line,  or  that  some  portions 
of  the  firing  line  can  not  be  withdrawn  without  serious  difficulty  or 
risk.  In  the  absence  of  reserves  such  troops  are  sent  to  occupy  a 
position  to  cover  the  withdrawal.  Cavalry  and  horse  artillery  may 
be  used  unsparingly  to  take  the  place  of  the  infantry  withdrawn,  and 
to  hold  the  advance  of  the  enemy  in  that  part  of  the  field  until  the 
covering  positions  are  occupiexl.  All  available  artillery  is  used  to 
fitop  the  advance  of  the  enemy. 

202.  Order  of  Withdrawal. — In  the  withdrawal  from  action  it  is 
desirable  to  withdraw  first  the  troops  that  can  be  rnost  readily  dis- 
engaged from  the  enemy.  But  the  terrain  may  dictat^  the  with- 
drawal first  of  the  troops  that  are  the  hardest  pressed,  in  order  to 
prevent  them  from  being  cut  off  or  forced  away  from  the  line  of 
retreat. 


BEFEirSIVE  COMBAT.  95 


Covering  positions. 


203.  Selection  of  good  positions  to  cover  the  withdrawal  iis  the 
most  important  requisite  in  retreat.  The  first  covering  position 
taken  up  should  be  far  enough  to  the  rear  to  prevent  the  troops 
occupying  it  from  being  directly  influenced  by  the  withdrawal 
from  the  main  position,  and  yet  near  enough  to  such  position  to 
exert  at  once  an  influence  on  the  action  when  the  withdrawal 
begins,  and  to  cover  the  retirement  of  the  advanced  lines.  De- 
feated lines  will  usually  be  forced  by  the  enemy's  attack  to  retreat 
straight  to  the  rear,  and  the  covering  positions  selected  should  be 
located  preferably  to  the  flanks  of  the  lines  of  retreat.  They  must 
afford  also  facilities  for  ready  withdrawal  of  the  occupying  force. 
If  any  reserves  remain  at  hand, 'they  occupy  the  selected  position 
and  immediately  make  dispositions  to  cover  the  withdrawal  of  the 

advanced  lines.  The  maximum  fire  effect  at  the  long  and  effec- 
tive ranges  is  desirable,  and  this  is  gained  by  making  the  firing 
line  as  strong  as  possible.  Supports  and  reserves  for  this  line  are 
reduced  to  a  minimum.  Machine  guns  so  placed  that  they  can 
open  suddenly  upon  the  lines  of  the  enemy  are  a  very  effective 
means  of  stopping  the  pursuit.  A  clear  field  of  fire  at  the  close 
ranges  is  not  necessary  in  a  covering  position.  The  position  of  the 
artillery  may  be  still  further  to  the  rear,  but  always  within 
effective  range  of  the  main  position,  in  order  to  bring  fire  to 
bear  upon  the  enemy's  pursuing  lines  as  soon  as  the  with- 
drawal from  the  main  position  is  under  way. 

204.  Successive  Covering  Positions. — When  retreat  is  decided 
upon  it  may  be  necessary  to  take  up  successively  other  covering 
positions  farther  to  the  rear  before  the  advance  of  the  enemy 
can  be  checked  long  enough  to  give  the  time  necessary  to  prop- 
erly organize  the  retreat,  to  bring  the  troops  from  the  deployed 
battle  formation  into  an  orderly  column  of  march,  and  to  enable 
the  rear  guard  to  take  up  its  duties  in  an  effective  manner.  The 
principles  governing  the  selection  and  the  occupation  of  the_  first 
covering  position  apply  to  all  the  others.  Their  occupation  is  for 
the  purpose  of  gaining  time  and  putting  as  great  a  distonce  as  pos- 
sible between  the  mam  body  of  retreatmg  troops  and  the  pursuing 
enemy. 

Assembly  positions. 

205.  When  compelled  to  withdraw,  troops  that  have  been  actively 
engaged  will  ususdly  be  obliged  to  fall  back  for  several  miles  in 


96  DEFENSIVE  COMBAT. 

deployed  formation,  before  efficient  reorganization  and  assembly 
is  possible.^  It  is  a  mistake  to  attempt  re-formation  of  the  disor- 
ganized units  too  close  to  the  position  from  which  withdrawal  is. 
necessary.  The  assembly  position  must  be  far  enough  to  the  rear 
to  enable  the  deployed  lines  to  thoroughly  free  themselves  from 
all  contact  with  the  enemy  and  to  insure  sufficient  time  for  undis- 
turbed reorganization.  Reserves  must  continue  to  cover  the  with- 
drawal of  the  disorganized  troops  until  the  latter  have  reached  a 
safe  assembly  position,  where  complete  reorganization  is  possible. 
Leaders  of  the  smaller  units,  however,  collect  and  re-form  such 
units  as  fast  as  possible  on  the  march 

206.  As  soon  as  the  withdrawal  is  well  under  way,  the  superior 
leader  goes  to  the  rear  to  select  the  assembly  position,  if  not 
already  selected,  and  to  make  plans  for  the  reorganization  of  his 
force  and  for  its  future  dispositions. 

The  retreat. 

207.  A  Step-by-step  opposition  to  the  enemy's  pursuit,  by  takiflg 
up  and  holding  successively  covering  positions  to  th6  rea,r  of  the 
mam  position,  can  not  be  continued  long  without  involving  an 
excessive  number  of  troops  and  increasing  the  demoralization  of 
the  entire  force  The  number  of  covering  positions  taken  up  in 
the  immediate  \dcinity  of  the  battle  field  must  be  reduced  to  a 
minimum  by  organizing  the  retreat  and  forming  a  rear  guard  as 
soon  as  possible  after  the  decision  to  retreat  has  been  reached. 

208.  Preparation  of  Plan.— The  leader  will  bear  in  mind  during 
the  course  of  the  battle  the  possibility  of  retreat,  and  will  form  at 
least  a  mental  plan  as  to  how  such  retreat  will  be  inaugurated  and 
conducted,  should  it  become  necessary  Such  A  plan  may  be  con- 
sidered even  before  combat,  and  the  higher  staff  officers  must  be 
prepared  to  submit  to  the  leader,  when  called  upon,  the  parts  of  the 
order  that  concern  their  o\m  departments.  Lines  of  retreat  will  be 
selected  that  give  the  greatest  strategical  advantages  and  afford  the 
shortest  practicable  routes  to  reenforcements  or  a  safe  position  The 
retreat  must  be  on  lines  that  lead  to  a  concentration  of  the  forces 
as  soon  as  practicable.  Measures  must  be  thought  out  to  keep  the 
enemy  from  forcing  the  retreat  over  lines  other  than  those  selected. 
Covering  positir  ns  are  tentatively  selected  and  the  troops  to  occupy 
them  are  kept  in  mind  during  the  shifting  phases  of  the  battle. 

209.  Assignment  of  Eoads.— In  forces  larger  than  a  division,  all 
the  roads  practicable  for  the  retreat  will  be  used  and,  if  possible, 


DEFENSIVE  COMBAT.  97 

each  division  assigned  a  separate  road.  In  such  a  case  each  divi- 
sion forms  its  own  rear  guard,  ^^^lere  more  than  one  division  is 
forced  to  use  the  same  road,  the  rear  division  covers  the  retreat. 

210.  Preliminary  Measures. — When  the  engagement  has  been  de- 
cisive the  orders  for  the  retreat  will  necessarily  be  issued  fragmen- 
tarily  and  in  the  form  of  successive  Instructions  to  the  units 
involved.  Under  such  conditions,  only  after  the  retreat  is  under 
way  and  the  rear  guard  is  cffcctiveljr  performing  its  duties  can  a 
combined  order  be  issued  The  trains  are  at  once  put  in  march 
in  the  direction  of  the  retreat  and  every  effort  made  to  keep  them 
out  of  the  way  of  the  combatant  troops.  Those  troops  that  have 
been  but  slightly  engaged  with  the  enemy  and  can  be  readily  with- 
drawn may  be  assembled,  after  withdrawal  from  action,  immediately 
back  of  the  firing  lines,  if  cover  be  available,  and  at  once  put  in 
order  of  march  or  used  to  cover  the  withdrawal  of  other  troops. 
The  troops  last  to  withdraw,  usually  those  that  have  been  most 
heavily  engaged,  may  not  be  brought  into  order  of  march  as  a 
whole  until  they  have  fallen  back  to  the  position  of  assembly  well 
to  the  rear 

211.  iRear  Guard. — The  formation  of  an  effective  rearguard  must 
be  the  first  care  of  the  leader  The  troops  best  adapted  for  a  rear 
guard  are  those  whose  strength  and  morale  have  been  least  impaired 
in  combat.  All  of  the  divisional  cavalry,  except  reconnoitermg  de- 
tachments, and  as  much  of  the  artillery  as  can  be  effectively  used, 
are  assigned  to  the  rear  guard  The  strength  of  the  infantry  force 
assigned  to  the  rear  guard  will  usually  be  limited  to  that  of  the  in- 
fantry immediately  available,  but  will  notexceed  one-third  of  the 
entire  force .  The  rear  guard  differs  in  composition  from  the  advance 
guard  in  the  greater  proportion  of  artillery  and  cavalry.  All  troops 
doing  rear-guard  work  should  be  placed  under  one  command 

212.  Conduct. — The  conduct  of  the  rear  guard  must  be  governed 
by  the  consideration  that  the  advance  of  the  enemy  must  be  delayed 
without  becoming  so  involved  in  action  that  withdrawal  is  difficult 
or  excessively  costly.  The  rear  guard  that  obliges  all  or  any  part 
of  the  main  body  to  stop  the  retreat  in  order  to  come  to  its  assistance, 
fails  in  its  mission.  The  taking  up  of  positions  on  a  broad  front  on 
ground  favorable  to  the  use  of  long-range  fire  will  oblige  the  enemy 
to  make  wide  deployments  that  require  much  time  to  effect.  This 
in  itself  accomplishes  the  mission  of  the  rear  guard.  Negative 
measiures,  such  as  the  destruction  of  bridges,  the  placing  of  obstruc- 
tions in  roads,  defiles,  etc.,  are  used  to  the  fullest  extent.    There 

35379»-14 7 


98  SETENSIVE  COMBAT. 

need  be  no  hesitation  on  the  part  of  the  commander  of  the  rear 
guard  in  the  destruction  of  any  material  objects  in  the  path  of  the 
enemy,  since  such  objects  will  undoubtedly  be  destroyed  later  by 
the  enemy,  should  he,  in  turn,  be  obliged  to  retreat.  ^ 

213.  As  the  enemy  will  pursue  on  a  broad  front  with  a  view  to 
cutting  off  the  delaying  force  on  some  one  route  or  of  attacking  the 
main  body  in  flank,  the  rear  guard  must  fall  back  on  a  broad  front. 
Flank  detachments  will  be  necessary  where  the  terrain  gives  to 
the  enemy  more  than  one  route  of  pursuit.  The  different  colunms 
into  which  the  rear  guard  may  be  divided  must  be  always  in  a 
position  to  afford  mutual  support,  and  must  endeavor  to  keep 
abreast  of. each  other.  Not  every  good  position  need  be  taken 
advantage  of  to  delay  the  enemy,  where  delay  is  not  essential  to 
the  safety  of  some  part  of  the  command.  The  march  of  the  main 
body  must  be  expedited  as  far  as  the  maintenance  of  order  and  the 
retention  of  morale  will  permit.  Only  in  that  way  can  be  avoided 
the  necessitv  of  calling  upon  the  rear  guard  for  undue  exertion  and 
heavy  sacrifices.  Points  on  the  line  of  retreat,  whose  possession  is 
essential  to  the  safety  of  the  command,  such  as  bridges,  defiles, 
etc.,  must  be  secured  in  advance  of  the  enemy.  Strong  flank  posi- 
tions that  command  the  lines  of  retreat  will  be  occupied  by  detach- 
ments from  the  main  body  and  held  until  the  rear  guard  comes  up. 
Detachments  of  the  hostile  cavalry  that  gain  a  position  from  which 
they  may  harass  the  flanks  of  the  retreating  columns  must  be 
kept  at  a  distance  by  the  use  of  infantry,  as  all  the  available 
cavalry  wiU  find  its  employment  in  contact  with  the  leading  troops 
of  the  pursuit. 

214.  In  the  retreat  the  cavalry  and  the  artillery  must  be  called 
upon  to  make  the  greatest  exertions  and  to  suffer  the  heaviest  losses, 
where  necessary,  to  check  the  pursuit.  The  loss  of  men,  horses,  and 
matdriel  must  be  unhesitatingly  faced,  if  there  be  any  decided  gain 
thereby. 

215.  Divisions  retreating  over  parallel  roads  will  endeavor  to 
mutually  support  each  other,  and  to  keep  their  cohimns  abreaflt,  as 
far  as  may  be  possible.  The  cavalry  division  will  usually  find  its 
best  employment  against  the  enemy's  cavalry,  or,  in  the  absence  of 
the  latter,  against  a  flank  of  the  enemy's  pursuit. 

Delaying  actions. 

216.  Delaying  actions  are  of  two  classes:  One  in  which  the  ad- 
vance of  the  enemy  ia  delayed  as  long  as  is  possible  without  im- 
periling the  safe  withdrawal  of  the  delaying  force;  the  other^iD 


iriGHT  COUBAT.  99 

which  this  force  must  hold  its  position,  regardless  of  the  risks 
and  losses  involved,  for  a  time  that  is  dependent  upon  condi- 
tions in  other  parts  of  the  field  or  in  the  theater  of  war. 

217.  In  delaying  actions  of  the  first  class  mentioned,  the 
firing  line  is  made  as  strong  as  possible  from  the  beginning. 
Supports  and  reserves  are  reduced  to  a  minimum.  A  clear 
field  of  fire  at  the  long  and  the  effective  ranges  is  most  impor- 
tant, as  the  enemy  must  be  brought  under  as  heavy  a  fire  as 
possible  as  soon  as  he  comes  within  range.  The  terrain  must 
be  such  as  to  give  ease  of  withdrawal  from  the  position.  A 
clear  field  of  fire  at  the  close  ranges  is  not  necessary.  As  soon 
as  the  enemy  comes  within  assaulting  distance  the  position  is 
vacated,  machine  guns  and  mounted  troops  delaying  the  ad- 
vance of  the  enemy's  lines  up  to  the  last  minute  that  permits 
of  safe  withdrawal. 

218.  In  delaying  actions  of  the  second  class  mentioned,  where 
time  must  be  gained  even  at  the  risk  of  sacrifice  of  the  delay- 
ing force,  development  of  effective  fire  at  the  long  and  effec- 
tive ranges  is  an  important  element.  But  here  the  close  ranges 
must  also  afford  a  good  field  of  fire.  Artillery  and  machine 
guns  remain  in  action,  even  at  the  risk  of  total  loss,  as  long 
as  there  is  a  target  at  which  to  fire. 

219.  Since  in  all  delaying  actions  the  governing  idea  is  to 
gain  as  much  time  as  possible  before  the  enemy  can  come  with- 
in assaulting  distance,  the  position  taken  up  must  be  such  as 
will  not  afford  cover  to  the  attack  up  to  the  close  or  nearer 
effective  ranges.  Open  ground  to  the  front  is  desirable,  in  order 
that  the  enemy  may  be  obliged  to  make  an  early  and  a  wide 
deployment  before  advancing  to  the  attack.  A  maximum  ex- 
tent of  firing  line  is  useful  for  this  purpose.  Supports  and  re- 
serves are  held  well  to  the  rear.  Obstacles,  natural  or  con- 
structed, that  impede  the  advance  of  the  enemy  are  desirable. 
Defiles  that  can  not  be  readily  turned  offer  good  opportunities 
for  delaying  action. 

NIGHT  COMBAT. 

220.  With  the  increase  in  range  and  accuracy  of  fire,  particu- 
larly that  of  the  artillery,  and  the  facilities  for  observation 
that  are  afforded  by  the  use  of  aero-craft,  night  operations  in- 
crease in  importance.  Troops  must  often  make  use  of  darkness 
to  minimize  losses  from  fire  and  to  escape  observation,  to  pre- 
pare for  an  assault  to  be  made  at  daybreak,  or  to  approach  a 
point  from  which  a  daylight  assault  is  to  be  made.  Night 
operations  may  be  necessary  also  for  purpose  of  gaining  time. 


100  NIGHT  COMBAT. 

The  offensive. 

221.  Even  with  well-trained  and  easily  led  troops,  a  night  attack 
involves  risks  that  should  be  aesumed  only  for  tlie  most  weighty 
reasons,  and  when  the  results  of  success  are  such  as  will  justify  the 
action.  With  poor  troops  and  inefficient  leaders  night  attacks  are 
out  of  the  question.  As  control  is  difficult,  artillery  support  of  the 
assault  impossible,  and  confusion  almost  inevitable,  chance  is  a 
factor  that  must  be  given  maximum  weight  in  estimating  the 
probabilities  of  success. 

222.  A  night  attack  may  appear  advisable  where  it  is  found 
impossible  to  secure  the  fire  superiority  necessary  to  permit  of  an 
assault  by  day  or  where,  for  other  reasons,  it  is  found  impracticable 
to  push  the  attack  to  within  assaulting  distance  of  the  enemy's 
position;  to  avoid  the  heavy  losses  that  would  be  incurred  in  an 
attack  over  open  ground  against  a  well-prepared  position;  to  capture 
an  advanced!^  post  or  position,  or  an  outpost  as  a  preliminary  to 
further  operations,  or  to  surprise  poorly  trained  and  poorly  led 
troops. 

223.  A  night  atta,ck  made  simultaneously,  along  the  entire  front 
of  a  division  or  field  army,  is  impracticable.  A  force  as  large  as  a 
brigade  may  be  designated  for  the  purpose  of  making  a  night  attack 
against  one  definite  objective  in  the  enemy's  line,  but  each  regi- 
ment and  each  battalion  therein  must  In  turn  be  given  an  objective. 
If  a  night  attack  is  to  take  place  along  a  more  extended  front  than 
that  assigned  to  a  brigade,  it  will  be  made  up  of  a  number  of  separate 
attacks,  and  the  objective  assigned  to  each  brigade  must  be  so 
separated  from  those  assigned  to  others  that  the  possibility  of 
eollision  between  the  brigades  dming  the  attack  is  eliminated. 

224.  Night  attacks  will  be  made  only  by  order  or  consent  of  the 
superior  leader  in  tliat  part  of  the  field.  The  decision  to  attack 
must  be  made  while  there  is  yet  sufficient  daylight  to  make  all  the 
preliminary  reconnaissances  and  necessary  preparations.  A 
thorough  knowledge  of  the  ground  and  of  the  enemy's  position  is 
necessary  for  the  subordinate  commanders.  Any  cooperation  on 
the  part  of  the  troops  other  than  those  directly  assigned  to  the 
task,  that  may  appear  advisable,  is  provided  for  by  the  superior 
leader. 

The  defensive. 

225.  On  the  defensive,  obstacles  in  front  of  the  position  occupied 
and  strong  patrols  pushed  well  forwajd  afford  the  best  protection 
against  night  attacks.    When  the  approach  of  the  enemy  is  evident, 


BIVOUAC  ON  THE  BATTLEFIELD.  101 

the  trenches  are  heavily  manned  and  the  supports  moved  close  up 
to  the  firing  line  Fire  is  not  opened  until  the  enemy  is  close 
enough  to  offer  a  profitable  target,  otherwise  the  fire  will  be  wild 
and  ineffective.  The  principal  reliance  in  repelling  attack  must 
be  placed  in  the  bayonet.  Reserves,  using  the  bayonet  only,  make 
counter-attacks  when  the  opportunity  to  do  so  comes,  especially 
against  the  flanks  of  the  hostile  attacking  lines., 

Night  advance. 

226.  An  advance  may  be  made  at  night  in  order  to  gain  ^ound 
toward  the  enemy's  position,  but  without  any  intention  of  bringing 
on  a  decisive  engagement  wj  th  the  enemy  during  darkness.  Pre- 
liminary to  such  a  movement  patrols  should  be  pushed  toward  the 
enemy  beyond  the  position  to  be  gained.  If  the  position  taken  is 
within  range  of  the  hostile  position,  it  must  be  occupied  long  enough 
before  daylight  to  give  time  to  strengthen  it,  unless  it  is  occupied 
with  the  intention  of  pushing  the  attack  at  dawn. 

BIVOUAC  ON  THE   BATTLEFIELD. 

227.  In  combats  between  armies  and  even  between  field  armies 
or  equivalent  units,  several  days  may  elapse  before  a  decision  is 
reached.  This  condition  entails  a  severe  mental  and  physical 
strain  upon  the  troops  engaged,  a-  strain  which  every  effort  must 
be  made  to  lessen  as  far  as  the  requirements  of  the  task  imposed 
will  permit.  The  physical  wants  of  the  troops  must  be  provided 
for  and  every  opportunity  for  rest  given  them.  But  shelter  and 
comfort  of  the  troops  must  be  subordinated  to  the  requirements 
of  instant  readiness  for  action  at  all  times. 

228.  When  opposing  forces  are  in  contact^  night  will  afford  the 
advanced  troops  but  little  opportunity  for  sleep.  The  offensive 
will  now,  more  than  ever  before,  take  advantage  of  night  to  push 
forward  and  entrench  new  lines  or  strengthen  ground  already 
^ined.  The  defensive  must  avail  itself  of  darkness  to  stren^heu 
its  position  and  repair  faults  in  its  lines.  Night  attacks  by  either 
side  are  always  a  possibility  Regular  rest  for  the  troops  occupying 
the  advanced  lines  is,  therefore,  out  of  the  question,  and  to  prevent 
exhaustion  they  must  be  permitted  to  rest  at  any  time,  day  or 
night,  when  the  exigencies  of  combat  will  permit. 

229.  It  is  usually  impracticable,  and  genejally  inadvisable,  to 
wholly  relieve  the  firing  lines  at  night  by  fresh  troops  unless  a  new 


102  MEASTTEES  TO  BE  TAKEN  AFTER  BATTLE. 

position  be  taken  up  While  all  troops  bivouac  at  night  in  position, 
the  firing  lines  must  maintain  their  tactical  formations  and  a  greater 
readiness  for  action  than  is  necessary  for  the  other  troops.  To  give 
the  troops  on  the  firing  lines  as  much  rest  as  possible,  patrols  and 
sentry  posts,  composed  of  the  freshest  troops  from  the  supports  or 
localreserves,  are  pushed  to  the  front  to  keep  a  constant  watch  on 
the  enemy  and  upon  the  foreground.  Sentry  posts  may  be  en- 
trenched and  given  cover  from  fire  from  both  front  and  rear,  but 
in  such  a  manner  as  not  to  interfere  with  observation  to  the  front. 
Combat  patrols  must  look  to  the  safety  of  the  flanks  and  of  the  rear, 
where  protection  to  the  rear  is  not  otherwise  provided  for  Artil- 
lery positions  must  be  fully  covered.  Fires  must  not  be  lighted  in 
any  part  of  the  position  that  is  within  range  and  observation  of 
the  enemy 

230.  The  approach  of  dawn  is  often  taken  advantage  of  by  the 
offensive  to  launch  an  energetic  attack  from  a  position  gained 
during  the  night,  and  by  the  defensive  to  make  a  counter-attack 
and  to  drive  back  the  opposing  advanced  lines  All  troops  that 
are  necessary  to  meet  such^moves  on  the  part  of  the  enemy  must, 
therefore,  be  held  fully  in  readiness  at  that  time 

MEASURES  TO   BE  TAKEN   AFTER  THE   BATTLE 

2Z1.  Wlien  a  favorable  decision  on  the  field  of  battle  has  been 
gained  and  the  enemy  is  in  retreat,  the  superior  leader  must  first 
give  his  attention  to  the  inauguration  of  a  systematic  and  orderly 
pursuit.  The  replenishment  of  the  ammunition  supj)ly  must  be  his 
next  care  Other  supplies  necessaiy  for  the  subsistence  or  the 
comfort  of  the  troops  are  brought  up  Orders  are  ie^sued  providing 
for  the  police  of  the  battlefield,  in  order  to  prevent  pillage  and 
maltreiitment  of  the  dead  and  wounded,  and  for  a  thorough  search 
for  the  wounded  of  both  sides  (See  also  par  349  )  Field  hos- 
pitals immobilized  for  the  care  of  the  wounded  will  be  evacuated 
as  rapidly  as  the  condition  of  the  wounded  and  facilities  for  evac- 
uation to  the  rear  will  permit.  Wlien  the  decision  has  been  ad- 
verse and  a  retreat  is  necessary,  all  the  severely  wounded  and  the 
wounded  whose  transport  might  delay  or  impede  the  retreat  will  be 
left  behind  with  the  sanitary  personnel  and  'supplies  necessary  to 
their  immediate  needs. 


Article  VI. 

SHELTEB. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

232.  To  maintain  the  efficiency  of  a  command,  the  troops  must 
have  adequate  shelter. 

In  time  of  peace  troops  in  the  field  ar-e  generally  sheltered  undei* 
canvas.  In  local  insurrections,  riot  or  disorder,  public  buildings 
in  the  disturbed  district  may  be  used  for  sheltering  the  troops 
engaged  in  quelling  the  disturbance,  when  other  shelter  is  not  pro- 
vided. Private  buildings  are  not  entered  without  the  owner's 
consent,  except  in  the  performance  of  duty. 

In  time  of  war  temporary  use  may  be  made  of  public  buildings 
in  our  own  country  when  absolutely  necessary — ^for  example,  in 
the  care  of  the  sick  and  wounded ;  but  as  long  as  communities  or 
individuals  offer  the  use  of  buildings,  or  they  can  be  rented  at 
reasonable  rates,  seizure  is  not  resorted  to  unless  the  emergency  is 
imperative.  In  enemy  territory  public  and  private  buildings 
may  be  used  to  shelter  troops  and  for  other  militaxy  purposes;  but 
for  sanitary  reasons  troops  are  seldom  quartered  in  private  buildings. 
When  public  or  private  buildings  are  to  be  taken  for  shelter,  the 
civil  authorities  should  be  consulted  and  satisfactory  arrangements 
made  Families  are  not  removed  from  their  dwellings  if  it  can 
avoided. 

233.  When  troops  are  sheltered  under  canvas,  they  are  in  camp 
When  resting  on  the  ground  without  shelter,  they  are  in  bivouac 
when  occupying  buildings  in  towns  or  villages,  or  huts  specially 
erected,  they  are  in  cantonment. 

Cantonments  often  develop  through  improvement  of  camps — 
huts  or  temporary  buildings  taking  the  place  of  tents.  During  a 
prolonged  suspension  of  hostilities,  the  occupation  of  enemy  ter- 
ritory, and  at  sieges,  cantonments  are  advantageous,  especially 
m  cold  or  wet  weather. 

234.  Billeting  ^  is  the  assignment  of  troops  to  public  or  private 
buildmgs  for  quarters. 

«f\Jl°  ^^^^  ^^^?'  ^  *^®  0^  P«^»  be  quartered  in  any  house  without  the  consent 
?tiStiS™d  men'SiS)   ""^^  ^"^  ^  ^  """^^  ^  ^  prescribed  by  law.    (Con- 


104      SHELTER  IN  THE  SERVICE  OF  THE  IKTERIOR. 

^  236.  The  allowance  of  tentage  to  be  carried  on  the  march  is  fixed 
in  Tables  of  Organization.  The  allowances  at  other  times  is  fixed 
by  thg  various  equipment  manuals. 

SHELTER  IN  THE  SERVICE   OF  THE  INTERIOR. 

236.  In  mobilization  and  concentration  camps,  troops  are  shel- 
tered under  canvas  or  in  temporary  barracks,  and  proper  provision 
is  made  for  their  health,  comfort,  and  instruction.  As  a  rule,  such 
camps  or  cantonments  should  fulfill  the  following  conditions : 

1.  The  grounds  should  be  easily  drained,  naturally  healthful, 
large  enough  for  depots,  corrals,  hospitals,  etc.,  and  the 
encampment  of  the  troops  without  crowding,  and  with  ample 
space  for  exercise  and  instruction. 

2.  The  water  supply  should  be  excellent  and  abundant  and 
not  liable  to  contamination  from  any  source. 

3.  There  should  be  ample  railroad  and  switching  facilities  and 
suitable  arrangements  for  loading  and  unloading,  as  the  funda- 
mental reasons  for  the  mobilization  or  concentration  will  be  de- 
feated if  ample  rail  or  water  facilities  are  not  available  to  promptly 
receive  and  dispatch  troops  and  supplies. 

4.  AU  parts  of  the  camp  should  be  readily  accessible  by  good 
wagon  roads. 

All  aiTangements  for  the  accommodation  and  supply  of  the  troops 
should  be  completed  before  their  arrival  by  the  permanent  camp 
personnel  sent  ahead  for  the  purpose.  Camps  are  laid  out  so  as  to 
preserve  the  integrity  of  units,  the  headquarters  of  each  being 
centrally-  or  conveniently  located  with  respect  to  its  troops;  tents 
are  pitcned  and  aligned,  kitchens  equipped,  water  and  fuel  supply 
arranged,  latrines  prepared,  hospitals  erected,  and  arrangements 
made  for  ample  mail,  telegraph,  and  telephone  service.  The 
general  headquarters  should  be  centrally  located  and  connected 
by  wire  with  the  principal  subordinate  headquarters.  Depots  and 
storehouses  are  placed  at  railroad  sidings  and  the  hospitals  near 
the  railroad  station  Trains  are  placed  so  as  to  interfere  as  little 
as  possible  with  the  comfort  and  cleanliness  of  the  troops.* 

No  individuals,  troops,  or  trains  of  organizations  temporarily 
present  should  be  attached  to  the  permanent  camp  personnel,  if 
it  can  be  avoided      It  is  the  function  of  the  permanent  camp  per- 

^  See  semipermanent  camps,  p.  174. 


SHEIiTEE  IK  THE  THEATER  OF  OPERATIONS,        106 

aonnel  to  operate  depots,  hospitals,  to  maintain  camp  telephone 
and  telegraph  lines,  etc.  The  troops  temporarily  present  must  be 
in  constant  readiness  to  move. 

SH£LT£B  IN  THE  THEATER  OF  OPERATIONS. 

237.  Tactical  considerations  demand  greater  concentration  and 
generally  control  the  location  of  the  camp. 

If  troops  are  actually  engaged  in  field  operations,  their  equip- 
ment, including  tentage,  is  necessarily  limited  to  that  carried  on 
the  men,  on  animals,  and  in  trains.  In  certain  instances,  after 
proper  sanitary  inspection,  local  buildings  in  the  theater  of  opera- 
tions may  be  used  to  advantage  in  affording  additional  shelter  to 
officers,  enlisted  men,  and  animals. 

If  the  length  of  a  halt,  during  the  period  of  operations,  is  of  some 
considerable  duration,  when  practicable,  additional  camp  equip- 
ment (baggage,  tents,  surplus  kits,  etc.)  are  sent  up  from  the  line^ 
of  communication  and  temporarily  placed  at  the  disposition  of 
organizations.  In  this  instance  every  possible  use  is  made  of 
local  buildings  and  temporary  structures,  to  the  end  that  the  troops, 
be  made  as  comfortable  as  possible  during  the  period  of  the  halt. 
^  238.  Selection  of  Site.— There  is  often  little  choice  in  the  selec- 
tion of  camp  sites  in  war  Troops  may  have  to  camp  many  nights 
on  objectionable  ground.  Nevertheless,  sanitary  considerations 
are  given  all  the  weight  possible  consistent  with  the  tactical 
requirements. 

When  tactical  questions  are  not  involved,  and  especially  when 
the  camp  is  to  be  occupied  for  some  time,  great  care  is  exercised  in 
selecting  the  site.  Through  no  fault  of  their  own,  troops  occupying 
an  unsanitary  site  may  suffer  greater  losses  than  in  the  battles  of 
a  long  campaign.  A  medical  officer  assists  in  the  selection  of 
camp  sites. 

The  selection  of  camp  sites  while  on  the  march  or  during  active 
operations  is  governed  by  the  following  conditions 

1.  The  ground  should  accommodate  the  command  with  as  little 
crowding  as  possible,  be  easily  drained,  and  have  no  stagnant 
water  within  300  yards. 

2.  The  water  supply  should  be  sufficient,  pure,  and  accessible. 

3.  There  should  be  good  roads  to  the  camp  and  good  interior 
G€»nimunication. 

4.  Wood,  grafis,  forage,  and  supplies  must  be  at  hand  or  obtain- 
able. 


106        SHELTEE  IN  THE  THEATEB  OF  OPERATIONS. 

Closely  cropped  ti'rf  with  sandy  or  gravelly  subsoil  is  ^sfest; 
high  banks  of  rivers  are  suitable,  provided  Ho  marshes  are  n^ir. 

In  hot  summer  months,  the  ground  selected  should  be  high, 
free  from  underbrush,  and  shaded  with  trees  if  possible. 

In  cold  weather  ground  sloping  to  the  south,  with  woods  to 
break  the  north  winds,  is  desirable. 

Old  camp  grounds  and  the  vicinity  of  cemeteries  are  undesir- 
able. Marshy  ground  and  stagnant  water  are  objectionable  on 
account  of  the  damp  atmosphere  and  the  annoyance  and  infection 
from  mosquitoes.  Ground  near  the  foot  of  a  hill  range  generallv 
has  a  damp  subsoil  and  remains  muddy  for  a  long  time.  Thick 
forests,  dense  vegetation,  made  ground,  alluvial  soil,  punch-bowl 
depressions,  inclosed  ravines,  and  dry  beds  of  streams  are  iinia- 
vorable. 

Camp  sites  should  be  selected  so  that  troops  of  one  unit  need 
not  pass  through  the  camp  grounds  of  another. 

As  a  protection  against  epidemics,  temporary  camp  sites  in  the 
theater  of  operations  should  be  changed  every  two  or  three  week3. 

239.  Form  and  Dimensions  of  Camps. — The  forms  of  the  camp 
should  be  such  as  to  facilitate  the  prompt  encampment  of  troops 
after  a  march  and  their  prompt  departure  when  camp  is  broken. 
The  form  of  camps  will  depend  upon  the  tactical  situation  and 
the  amount  and  nature  of  ground  available.  In  certain  cases, 
particularly  in  one-night  halts  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy, 
camps  must  of  necessity  be  contracted,  while  in  other  cases,  where 
a  more  extended  halt  is  contemplated  and  where  tactical  reasons 
will  permit,  better  camp  sanitation  may  be  secured,  and  a  more 
comfortable  arrangement  made  by  the  expansion  of  camp  areas. 

Appendix  1  (p.  172)  gives  the  general  forms,  dimensions,  and 
interior  arrangements  of  camps  of  troops  and  trains.  It  also  shows 
and  explains  the  contracted  camping  areas. 

240.  Establishing  the  Camp. — Camp    is    established  pursuant 
to  the  halt  order.    This  order  provides  for  tlie  outpost,  if  necessary, 
and  gives  instructions  for  the  encampment  of  the  main  body 
When  practicable,  large  commands  are  encamped  by  brigades. 

The  camping  ground  may  be  selected  by  the  supreme  com- 
mander, but  in  large  commands  is  generally  chosen  by  a  staff  officer 
sent  forward  for  that  purj)ose.  This  officer,  with  a  representative 
from  each  brigade  and  regiment  and  a  medical  officer,  precedes  the 
command,  selects  the  camping  ground,  assigns  sections  thereof  to 
the  larger  fractions  of  the  command,  and  causes  them  to  be  con- 
ducted to  their  respective  sections  on  arrival.    He  also  designates 


SHELTER  IN  THE  THEATER  OF  OPERATIONS.       107 

the  place  for  obtaining  drinking  and  cooking  water,  for 'watering 
animals,  for  bathing,  and  for  washing  clothing,  in  the  order  nanxed, 
from  upstream  down. 

On  tne  arrival  of  the  troops,  guards  are  posted  to  enforce  proper 
use  of  the  water  supply;  the  interior-camp  guards  proceed  to  their 
places,  and  after  posting  sentinels,  pitch  their  tents.  The  remain- 
ing troops  pitch  tents  and  secure  animals  and  equipment;  kitchens 
are  established  and  details  made  to  procure  fuel,  water,  forage,  etc., 
and  to  prepare  latrines  and  kitchen  pits;  if  necessary,  tents,  com- 
pany streets,  and  picket  lines  are  ditched. 

In  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  places  of  assembly  for  the  troops 
are  designated  and  directions  given  for  their  conduct  in  case  of 
attack.    Lines  of  information  are  established  with  the  outpost. 

241.  Billeting. — ^Vhen  troops  are  to  be  billeted  a  staff  officer  and 
a  representative  from  each  brigade  and  regiment  precede  the  col- 
umn. The  staff  officer  confers  with  the  civil  authorities,  if  present, 
makes  an  equitable  division  of  the  available  quarters  into  distinct 
sections,  and  assigns  a  section  to  each  regimental  representative; 
the  latter  distributes  the  quarters  to  the  troops  of  his  regiment  and 
conducts  them  to  their  places  on  arrival. 

Unless  the  force  is  small,  shelter  of  this  character  is  usually  inad- 
equate, and  some  of  the  troops  must  use  shelter  tents  or  bivouac. 
Villages  and  large  farms  often  afford  facilities,  such  as  wells  and 
cisterns,  bakeries,  blacksmith  shops,  material  for  repairs,  fiiel,  and 
forage,  which  contribute  to  the  comfort  of  the  troops;  it  £s  there- 
fore advantageous  to  camp  or  bivouac  near  them. 

242.  Bivouacs. — On  marches  or  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy 
troops  are  frequently  forced  to  bivouac  on  account  of  lack  of  suit- 
able ground  or  for  tactical  reasons.  (See  par.  227.)  On  the  other 
hand,  in  fine  weather,  in  midsummer,  or  in  the  ^ry  season  in  the 
Tropins,  the  troops  may  bivouac  from  choice. 

From  the  tactical  point  of  view,  bivouacs  are  ver\'  convenient, 
but  for  sanitary  reasons  they  are  resorted  to,  as  a  rule,  only  when 
necessary.  The  general  principles  governing  the  selection  of  camp 
sites  apply  to  bivouacs.  The  ground  should  be  dry  and  protected 
against  sun  and  wind.  Light  woods  are  nearly  always  good  sites 
for  infantry  bivouacs,  on  account  of  the  shelter  and  mrterial 
available. 

In  the  artillery  on  marches  from  day  to  day  the  men  may  be  per- 
nitted  to  sleep  under  carriages  or  paulins  covering  the  harness, 
hus  obviating  the  necessity  of  pitching  tents. 


108  CABE  OF  TKOOPS  IN  CAMPS. 

SHELTER  DUBINQ  BATTLE., 

243.  During  a  lull  in  an  engagement,  or  when  hostilities  are 
suspended  for  the  night,  the  troops  bivouac  in  line  of  battle  on  or 
near  the  position  they  occupy,  the  officers  in  rear  of  the  center  of 
their  units.  Reserves  required  to  remain  in  instant  readiness 
generall}'-  bivouac  in  column  with  a  flank  to  the  front.  After  the 
outposts  are  established,  the  commander  of  the  main  body  decides 
whether  the  troops  shall  use  their  shelter  tents  or  not.  (See 
"Bivouacs  on  the  Battlefield,"  p.  101.) 

SHELTER  DURING   SIEGES. 

244.  On  account  of  the  long  range  of  modern  fortress  artillery, 
the  camps  or  cantonments  of  the  main  body  of  the  besiegers,  unless 
good  cover  is  available,  are  generally  not  less  than  5  miles  from 
the  enemy's  works.  To  guard  against  sorties  a  large  part  of  the 
command  is  continually  on  outpost  duty,  but  when  that  duty  is 
completed  the  troops  return  to  their  own  camp  with  the  main 
body  in  order  to  recuperate  from  this  arduous  work. 

To  guard  against  danger  from  epidemics  in  the  necessarily 
crowded  camps  or  cantonments  of  the  besiegers,  the  most  careful 
attention  is  paid  to  the  water  supply  and  sanitation. 

CARE    OP  TROOPS. 

246.  Lack  of  sufficient  rest  renders  troops  unfit  for  hard  work  and 
diminishes  their  power  of  resisting  disease.  Therefore  commanders 
should  secure  for  the  troops,  whenever  possible,  their  accustomed 
rest. 

The  rules  of  sanitation  are  enforced 

Men  should  not  lie  on  damp  ground  In  temporary  camps  and 
in  bivouac  they  raise  their  beds  if  suitable  material,  such  as  straw, 
leaves,  or  boughs  can  be  obtained,  or  use  their  ponchos  or  slickers. 
In  cold  weather  and  when  fuel  is  plentiful  tne  ground  may  be 
warmed  by  fires,  the  men  making  their  beds  after  raking  away 
the  ashes. 

IVhen  troops  are  to  remain  in  camp  for  sometime  all  imderbrush 
is  cleared  away  and  the  camp  made  as  comfortable  as  possible. 
Watering  troughs,  shelter  in  cold  weather,  and  shade  in  hot,  are 
provided  for  the  animals,  if  practicable. 

In  camps  of  some  duration  guard  and  other  routine  duties  follow 
closely  the  custom  in  garrison.  The  watering,  feeding,  and  groom- 
ing of  animals  take  place  at  regular  hours  and  under  the  supervision 
of  officers. 


CAKE  OF  TBOOPS  IN  CAMPS.  109 

The  camp  is  policed  daily  after  breakfast  and  all  refuse  matter 
burned. 

Tent  walls  are  raised  and  the  bedding  and  clothing  aired  daily, 
weather  permitting. 

Arms  and  personal  equipments  are  kept  in  the  tents  of  the  men. 
In  the  cavaliy ,  horse  equipments  are  also  usually  kept  in  the  tents, 
but  in  camps  of  some  duration  they  may  be  placed  on  racks  outside 
and  covered  with  slickers.  In  the  artillery,  horse  equipments  and 
harness  are  placed  on  the  poles  of  the  carriages  and  covered  with 
paulins. 

The  water  supply  is  carefully  guarded.  When  several  com- 
mands are  encamped  along  the  same  stream  this  matter  is  regulated 
by  the  senior  officer. 

If  the  stream  is  small,  the  water  supply  may  be  increased  by 
building  dams.  Small  springs  may  be  dug  out  and  lined  with 
stone,  brick,  or  empty  barrels.  Surface  drainage  is  kept  off  by  a 
curb  of  clay. 

When  sterilized  water  is  not  provided,  or  when  there  is  doubt  as 
to  the  purity  of  the  water,  it  is  boiled  20  minutes,  then  cooled  and 
aerated. 

246.  Latrines  for  the  men  are  always  located  on  the  opposite  side 
of  the  camp  from  the  kitchens,  generally  one  for  each  company 
unit  and  one  for  the  officers  of  a  battalion  or  squadron.  They  are 
so  placed  that  the  drainage  or  overflow  can  not  pollute  the  water 
supply  or  camp  grounds. 

When  the  camp  is  for  one  night  only,  straddle  trenches  suffice. 
In  camp  of  longer  duration,  and  when  it  is  not  possible  to  provide 
latrine  boxes,  as  for  permanent  camps,  deeper  trenches  should  be 
dug.  These  may  be  used  as  straddle  trenches  or  a  seat  improvised. 
When  open  trenches  are  used  the  excrement  must  be  kept  covered 
at  all  times  with  a  layer  of  earth.  In  more  permanent  camps  the 
trenches  are  not  over  2  feet  wide,  6  feet  deep,  and  12  feet  long, 
and  suitably  screened.  Seats  with  lids  are  provided  and  covered 
to  the  ground  to  keep  flies  from  reaching  the  deposits;  lu-inal 
troughs  discharging  into  the  trenches  are  provided.  Each  day 
the  latrine  boxes  are  thoroughly  cleaned,  out^de  by  scrubbing 
and  inside  by  applying  when  necessary  a  coat  of  oil  or  whitewash. 
The  pit  is  burned  out  daily  with  approximately  1  gallon  oil  and 
15  i)ounds  straw.  When  filled  to  within  2  fleet  of  the  surface,  such 
latrines  are  discarded,  filled  with  earth,  and  their  position  marked. 
All  latrines  and  kitchen  pits  are  filled  in  before  the  march  is  re- 
sumed. In  permanent  camps  and  cantonments,  lu-ine  tubs  may  be 
placed  in  the  company  streets  at  night  and  emptied  after  reveille. 


110 


ADHINlSTBATIOir. 


OUTLINE  OF  TH£  SYSTEM  OF  ADMINISTRATION 
SHOWING 


LIMITATIONS  OF  COMMAND  AND  CONTROL 


Contral'.. 

V 


(llol<lrttn.',sul,) 


Zont  of  the  Advance 

Qd     0<vi9i«fl» 

'ft      Oii>i»ion  H'dq'rs. 
••'•    Line*  of  InformAtion 
Train* 


LEGEND 

Zone  of  tHe  Line  of  ComffluaiLattons 
?■     Service  of  Oerenc*- 

A    Adv4nce'lntermcdiatc«nd  ButSctticnl  Suppty 
«      Column.  KIIlV-'^^ 

' '  '    Lints  of  Inforniation   UifC  J   jir?,; 

*"•  Service  Mihury  Roilvnays 
♦<♦ -Commercial  Telegraph 
•"*  Ccmmer&ial  Fv«ilways 


Service 


Part  III. 
ADMINISTRATION. 

Article  I. 
GENERAL. 

247.  In  time  of  war  the  activities  of  the  military  establishment 
embrace: 

(a)  The  service  of  the  interior 

(6)  The  service  of  the  theater  of  operations. 

248.  The  service  of  the  interior  is  carried  on  by: 

(a)  Department  commanders. 

(6)  Bureau  chiefs,  having  for  this  purpose  general  depots  of  supply,  genera 
hospitals,  arsenals,  etc. 

249.  The  service  of  the  theater  of  operations  is  carried  on  by  the 
commander  of  the  field  forces.  The  theater  of  operations  is  divided 
into  two  zones: 


U 


The  zone  of  the  line  of  communications. 
The  zone  of  the  advance. 


The  service  of  the  interior  functions  both  in  peace  and  in  war;' 
that  of  the  theater  of  operations  in  war  only. 


Article  II. 
THE  SERVICE  OF  THE  INTERIOR. 

GENERAL. 

250.  The  function  of  tlie  service  of  the  interior,  in  time  of  war,  is 
to  supply  the  commander  of  the  field  forces  with  the  means  neces- 
sary for  the  accomplishment  of  his  mission.  ^ 

This  service  is  carried  on  by  the  bureau  chiefs,  department  com- 
manders, and  in  certain  instances  by  commanders  of  concentra- 
tion camps  and  of  ports  of  embarkation.  Their  respective  opera- 
tions are  directed  and  coordinated  by  the  Secretary  of  War  through 
the  medium  of  the  Chief  of  Staff. 

*  In  general  the  functions  of  the  bureau  chiefs  and  the  department 
commander  are  as  follows: 

251.  Bureau  Chiefs. — They  are  the  advisers  of  the  Secretary  of 
War  and  the  Chief  of  Staff  on  all  matters  connected  with  the  opera- 
tions of  their  respective  departments  or  corps  throughout  the  entire 
military  establishment.  . 

They  are  kept  informed  of  the  plans  of  tlie  field  forces  and  recom- 
mend the  steps  to  be  taken  to  insure  the  successful  execution  of 
these  plans,  as  far  as  their  respective  corps  or  departments  are  con- 
corned. 

They  control  directly  and  are  responsible  for  the  efhcient  opera- 
tion of  the  general  depots  of  supply,  general  hospitals,  arsenals, 
and  other  militaiy  establishments  placed  under  their  orders. 

They  are  charged  with  the  accumulation  of  the  necessary  supplies 
and  materiel  and  with  forwarding"  the  same,  in  accordance  with 
regulations,  to  the  point  where  they  come  under  the  control  of  the 
department  commander,  the  commander  of  the  field  forces,  the 
commander  of  the  port  of  embarkation,  and  in  certain  instances 
the  commander  of  a  concentration /camp. 

They  formulate  estimates  for  the  necessary  appropriations  to 
carry  on  the  operations  of  their  respective  departments  or  corps. 

252.  Department  Commander. — He  is  responsible  for  the  recruit- 
ment, training,  and  equipment  of  all  military  forces  not  specially 
excepted  within  the  limits  of  his  department,  and  for  theu:  mobi- 
lization and  dispatch  to  concentration  camps. 

112 


H0BIII2AT10K  ANB  CONOENTEATIOK.  118 

He  is  advised  by  the  War  Department  where  troops  of  his  com- 
mand  are  to  be  sent,  the  time  at  -yvhich  they  should  arrive,  and  the 
commander  to  whom  they  should  report.  He  is  responsible  for 
their  movement,  transportation,  and  supply  while  en  route. 

He  is  responsible  that  adequate  records  of  physical  examinations 
are  prepared  and  tiiat  all  men  going  forward  to  the  theater  of  oper- 
ations are  protected  by  the  prescribed  prophylactic  treatments. 

He  keeps  the  War  Department  informed  of  the  state  of  prepared- 
ness of  the  troops  under  his  command. 

He  is  responsible  for  the  defense  of  all  portions  of  his  department 
except  where  an  independent  commander  has  been  assigned  by 
War  Department  orders.  In  this  latter  case  the  responsibility  of 
the  department  colnmandef  does  not  extend  to  the  area  of  opera- 
tions of  the  independent  commander. 

MOBILIZATION   AND   CONCENTRATION. 

263.  Mobilization  Camps. — A  mobilization  camp  is  a  place,  in 
the  territory  from  which  the  troops  are  drawn,  where  they  are 
assembled  to  be  raised  to  war  strength,  equipped,  and  prepared 
for  service. 

The  mobilization  of  the  Regular  Army  will  be  effected  at  their 
permanent  stations.  Recruits,  after  being  armed,  equijjped,  and 
trained  at  the  recruit  depots,  will  be  forwarded  to  their  respec- 
tive organizations. 

The  mobilization  of  the  organized  militia  and  volunteers  will  be 
effected  at  mobilization  camps. 

The  general  instructions  relative  to  mobilization  are  published  in 
regulations  or  in  War  Department  orders. 

Department  commanders  are  responsible  that  all  military  organ- 
izations leave  mobilization  points:  (1)  with  the  full  equipment  re- 
quired by  existing  orders;  (2)  with  sufficient  rations  and  grain  to 
fully  supply  them  while  en  route;  and  (3)  with  two  days'  rations 
and  grain  for  use  after  their  arrival  at  the  concentration  camps. 

254.  Concentration  Camps. — ^A  concentration  camp  is  a  place  near 
the  scene  of  intended  operations  or  near  an  embarkation  point, 
where  troops  are  assembled  for  immediate  use  against  the  enemy 
or  for  transport  to  an  oversea  theater  of  operations. 

The  command  of  troops  at  a  concentration  camp  lies  with  the 

department  commander  in  whose  territory  the  camp  is  situated, 

unless  these  troops  pertain  or  are  assigned  to  a  commander  not  under 

the  department  commander's  orders  prior  to  the  concentration. 

36379»— 14 8 


lU  POETS  OF  EMBAEKATIOK. 

The  commander  of  the  concentration  camp  deals  directly  with  the 
War  Department.  In  cases  where  it  is  desired  to  make  an  excep- 
tion to  the  foregoing  rule,  or  where  doubt  may  exist,  the  authority 
ordering  the  concentration  should  define  in  orders  upon  whom  the 
command  falls  and  to  whom  the  commander  reports. 

266.  Concentration  Camp  at  a  Port  of  Embarkation. — In  case  the 
concentration  is  ordered  at  a  port  of  embarkation  alreadj^  provided 
by  higher  authority  with  a  staff  for  receiving  and  forwarding  troops, 
the  responsibility  for  camp  sites  and  facilities  and  the  necessary  sup- 
plies devolves  upon  the  commanding  officer  of  the  port  of  embarka- 
tion. Under  these  circumstances  the  necessary  staff  officers  will 
be  sent  in  advance  by  the  commander  of  the  troops  ordered  to  the 
camp  to  cooperate  in  making  the  detailed  arrangements.  But  in 
case  no  such  permanent  staff  is  provided  at  the  port  of  embarkation, 
the  staff  of  the  command  concerned  must  make  all  provisions  for 
receiving,  camping,  and  supplying  the  troops.  The  necessary  sup- 
plies are  obtaiued  by  ordinary  methods  of  requisition  or  purchase. 

266.  Concentratiou  at  a  Point  near  the  Scene  of  Intended  Opera- 
tions.— In  case  the  concentration  is  ordered  at  a  point  near  the 
scene  of  intended  operations  when  troops  are  assembled  for  imme- 
diate use  against  the  enemy,  the  necessary  line  of  communications 
personnel  will,  if  practicable,  be  ordered  by  the  War  Department  to 
report  to  the  commander  of  these  troops  and  will  be  sent  in  advance 
by  him  to  the  cam.p  to  make  all  preliminary  arrangements  for  receiv- 
ing, camping,  and  supplying  the  troops.    If,  however,  no  additional 

Eersonnel  for  the  line  of  communications  is  provided  by  the  War 
department,  the  commander  of  the  troops  concerned  designates  the 
necessary  personnel  from  his  own  command  and  sends  them  ahead 
to  make  the  preliminary  arrangements. 

267.  Duties  of  the  Commander  of  the  Port  of  Embarkation. — 
The  duties  of  the  commander  of  the  port  of  embarkation  are  as 
follows: 

(a)  To  arrange  camps  for  the  troops  at  or  near  the  port  of  em- 
barkation. 

^  (6)  To  accumulate  supplies  for  the  maintenance  of  the  expedi- 
tionary force  while  at  the  port  of  embarkation  and  until  its  arrival 
at  the  port  of  debarkation. 

(c)  To  accumulate  and  ship  the  necessary  supplies  for  the  main- 
tenance of  the  troops  at  the  oversea  base  pending  the  organization 
of  the  supply  services  jji  the  theater  of  operations. 

(d)  To  make  all  detailed  arrangements  for  the  prompt  detraining 
of  troops  and  material  and  for  their  subsequent  embarkation. 


OVERSEA  OPERATIONS. 


119) 


116  OVERSEA  DEPARTMENTS. 

(e)  To  see  that  the  ships  furnished  him  by  the  Quartermaster 
Corps  are  properly  fitted  out  for  use  as  transports. 

(/)  To  operate  and  maintain  the  military  shipping  and  traflfic 
between  liis  port  and  the  oversea  base  through  a  superintendent 
of  transport  service,  who  is  a  member  of  his  staff. 

(g)  To  command  all  administrative  groups  assigned  to  the  port 
of  embarkation  and  to  be  directljr  responsible  to  the  War  Depart- 
ment for  the  efficient  and  economical  direction  of  their  operations. 

The  commander  of  the  port  of  embarkation,  his  staff  and  per- 
sonnel, are  not  subject  to  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  tae  troops 
at  the  concentration  camp  nor  the  latter  commander  to  the  orders 
of  the  former. 

The  commander  of  the  port  of  embarkation  prepares  the  sched- 
ules for  the  embarkation  of  troops,  materiel  and  supplies  on  trans- 
ports, and  has  charge  of  such  embarkation.  Tlie  commander  of 
the  camp  issues  the  orders  necessary  to  carry  out  these  schedules 
and  details  a  staff  officer  to  assist  the  commander  of  the  port  of 
embarkation  during  the  loading.  Under  all  conditions  these 
schedules  wlU  be  made  onlv  after  consultation  with  the  superior 
commander  of  the  troOps  to  be  embarked. 

When  a  lajidii\g  or  disembarkation  in  the  face  of  opposition  is 
anticipated,  the  distribution  and  plan  of  embarkation  will  be  made 
to  suit  the  tactical  requiremients  of  the  situation,  and  in  case  of  a 
difference  of  opinion  the  final  decision  will  rest  with  the  commander 
of  the  troops  When  no  opposition  to  landing  is  expected,  the 
final  decision  wijl  jest  with  the  commander  of  the  port  of  embarka- 
tion. »         '-^ 

Cordial  cooperation  between  these  commanders  is  essential  to 
the  efficient  performance  of  their  respective  duties. 

258.  Oversea  Departments. — The  department  commander,  in 
addition  to  his  functions  as  described  in  "The  Service  of  the  Inte- 
rior," is  also  charged  with  the  defense  of  the  oversea  department, 
and  directs  all  miutary  operations  within  its  limits.  Such  regula- 
tions as  are  appUcabla  relating  to  the  control  and  command  of  the 
commander  of  the  field  forces  in  the  theater  of  operations  are,  in 
time  of  war,  vested  in  the  commander  of  an  oversea  department. 


Article  III. 
THE  SERVICE  OF  THE  THEATER  OF  OPERATIONS. 

GENERAL. 

259.  In  the  theater  of  operations  the  functioiLS  of  the  War  Depart- 
ment and  of  the  various  commanders  are,  in  general,  as  follo^^s: 

The  War  Department  designates  the  commander  of  the  field 
forces,  assigns  him  a  definite  mission,  prescribes  the  zone  under  bis 
command,  and  supplies  him  Avith  the  n^eans  necessary  to  the 
accomplishment  of  his  mission 

The  commander  of  the  field  forces  exercises  supreme  authority 
over'  all  military  and  administrative  matters  within  the  zone 
assigned  liim,  organizing  the  means  placed  at  his  disposal  so  as 'to 
insure  efficiency,  and  directing  and  controlling  all  operations 
necessary  to  the  accom.plishment  of  liis  mission 

The  cominander  of  the  line  of  communications  is  responsil>Ie  to 
the  commander  of  the  field  forces  for  the  efficient  operation  and 
defense  of  the  line  of  communications  and  directs  and  controls  all 
administrative  and  staff  services  attached  thereto 

HEADQUAnXERS   AND   STAFFS. 

260.  All  military  units  larger  than  a  company  have  headquarters 
and  staffs.  The  headquarters  of  squadrons,  battalions,  and  bri- 
gades have  no  administrati\e  functions.  The  lieadquarters  of  an 
independent  detachment  has  for  the  time  being  administrati\e 
functions  and  during  such  periods  is  temporarily  assigned  an 
administrative  staff. 

The  commander  of  an  army  concerns  himself  ^vith  only  the 
broad  questions  of  strategy  and  military  policy.  He  assigns  gen- 
eral missions  to  his  subordinate  commanders  and  leaves  them  to 
work  out  the  necessary  details.  On  this  account  he  is  assigned  only 
such  administrative  and  technical  staff  as  he  may  require  for  these 
broad  functions. 

The  staff  functions  of  the  headquarters  of  units  larger  than  a 
brigade  may  be  separated  into  two  groups,  i.  e.  (I)  general  staff 
group;  and  (2)  a  technical  and  administrative  group— record,  in- 
spection, law,  supply,  sanitary,  engineer,  ordnance,  and  signal. 

X17 


118  HEADaXTAETERS  AND  STAFF. 

261.  The  General  Staff. — ^The  Chief  of  Staff  is  the  mouthpiece 
of  his  commander  and  should  enjoy  his  complete  confidence  and  a 
considerable  degree  of  independence  in  the  performance  of  his 
duties.  He  controls  and  coordinates  the  operations  of  the  troops 
and  all  administrative  and  technical  services  under  the  orders  of 
his  commander.  He  is  provided  with  such  assistants  as  are  neces- 
sary. To  each  such  assistant  is  particularly  assigned  the  work  of 
one  or  more  of  the  three  general  divisions  of  general  staff  work,  viz: 

The  first  or  combat  section  concerns  itself  with  orders,  move- 
ments, and  dispositions  of  the  forces;  combats,  detachments;  war 
diaries. 

The  second  or  administrative  section  concerns  itself  with  organi- 
zation, losses,  reinforcements,  police  and  discipline;  questions  of 
supplies  of  all  kinds;  signal  and  telegraph  service;  evacuation  and 
care  of  sick  and  wounded;  relations  with  the  line  of  communica- 
tions and  all  general  correspondence. 

The  third  or  intelligence  section  concerns  itself  with  the  move- 
ments and  dispositions  of  the  enemy,  including  exploration, 
reconnaissance,  and  the  gathering  and  distribution  of  information; 
interpreters,  newspaper  correspondents,  and  various  agents;  rela- 
tions with  the  eneniy,  flags  of  truce,  deserters,  and  prisoners  of  war; 
relations  with  the  civil  authorities  of  the  occupied  territory,  requi- 
sitions, etc. 

262.  Technical  and  Administrative  Staff. — ^This  includes  the 
representative  of  the  various  staff  corps  and  departments  who  may 
be  assigned  to  the  headquarters.  These  oflicers  perform  the  duties 
appropriate  to  their  office  under  the  instructions  of  their  com- 
mander. During  the  period  of  grand  tactical  operatioiLs  with  com- 
mands larger  than  a  division  and  when  a  line  of  communication  is 
in  operation,  their  functions  are  advisory.  Upon  completion  of 
the  grand  tactical  operations  and  upon  the  discontinuance  of  an 
organized  line  of  communications,  or  if.no  line  of  communications 
h^  been  organized,  these  staff  officers  assume  a  more  immediate 
control  of  their  respective  staff  personnel,  depots,  hospitals,  etc.  ^ 

The  functions  of  the  technical  and  administrative  staff  of  a  divi- 
sion are  so  intimately  connected  with  the  maintenance  of  the  divi- 
sion as  to  preclude  the  separation  of  any  of  its  personnel  for  any 
extended  period  of  time  from  its  headquarters.  These  staff  officers 
are  the  technical  advisers  of  the  divifioion  conmiander,  and  control 
directly  the  operation  of  such  portions  of  their  respective,  corps 
personnel  as  may  be  placed  under  their  immediate  orders. 


HEADaiTAETERS  AND  STAFF.  119 

263.  The  Commander  of  the  Line  of  Communications. — This 
commander  reports  directly  to  the  commander  of  the  field  forces. 

The  mission  of  the  tactical  units  and  administrative  groups  as- 
signed to  a  line  of  communications  is  to  relieve  the  combatant  field 
force,  as  far  as  possible,  from  every  consideration  except  that  of 
defeating  the  enemy. 

It  is  necessary  that  the  commander  of  the  field  forces  be  relieved 
from  the  consideration  of  details  and  thus  be  free  to  consider  the 
broad  lines  of  action  to  be  followed  by'  his  command. 

A  line  of  communications  is  not  organized  when  a  force  can 
safely  occupy  a  territory  without  military  operations  of  an  extensive 
character.  In  this  case  administration  and  supply  naturally  and 
properly  follow  the  same  general  principles  as  with  troops  in  the 
service  of  the  interior 


Article  IV. 
THE  ZONE  OF  THE  ADVANCE. 

GENERAL. 

264.  The  division  is  the  great  administrative  unit  and  forms  the 
model  for  the  organization  of  the  administrative  ser^'ice  of  smaller 
units  operating  independently.  To  the  division  alone  are  regu- 
larly attached  ammunition,  supply,  sanitary,  and  engineer  trains. 
Field  army  troops  may  be  assigned  to  divisions  for  the  purpose  of 
supply  and  for  the  care  and  evacuation  of  their  sick  and  wounded. 
In  this  instance  the  divisional  trains  of  the  division  to  which 
they  are  assigned  must  be  increased.  WTien  field  army  troops  are 
organized  into  a  separate  brigade  their  administration  and  supply 
follows  the  principles  laid  down  for  a  division.  In  this  instance 
the  necessary  ammunition,  supply,  and  sanitary  trains  are  organ- 
ized and  assigned  to  the  brigade. 

265.  Military  administration  follows  the  fundamental  principle 
that  troops  in  action  should  not  hav6  their  attention  diverted  from 
their  task  of  defeating  the  enemy  by  anxiety  concerning  questions 
of  supply  or  evacuation  of  sick  or  wotinded.  The  impetus  in  all 
these  matters  should  be  given  from  rear  to  front,  by  the  troops  or 
services  in  the  rear. 

Normal  routine  req^uirements  which  can  be  foreseen  are  replaced 
automatically  and  without  the  preliminary  of  formal  requisitions. 
This  has  particular  application  to  furnishing  rations,  grain,  ammu- 
tion,  and  sanitary  supplies. 

266.  It  is  the  function  of  the  line  of  communications  to  extend 
its  lines  so  as  to  make  contact  with  the  divisions  in  advance,  and 
not  the  latter's  function  to  extend  back. 

During  certain  periods  of  time  the  line  of  communications  will 
be  within  a  short  distance  of  the  division,  whereas,  during  other 
periods,  for  tactical  and  strategical  reasons,  this  distance  may  be 
greatly  increased,  and  often  for  short  periods  of  time  all  connection 
between  the  line  of  communications  and  certain  units  of  the 
division  may  be  severed. 

267.  In  principle,  the  administrative  services  of  a  division  must 
have  the  same  degree  of  mobility  as  the  division  itself.    They 

120 


TRANSPORTATION  181 

e 
should  not  be  charged  with  taking  care  of  supplies  which  can  not 
be  transported  in  the  amnaunition,  supply,  and  engineer  trains. 
The  equipment  of  the  sanitary  train  provides  only  necessities  for 
the  sick  and  wounded  pending  their  immediate  evacuatioB  to  the 
rear 

268  It  is  the  function  of  the  administrative  services  of  the  line 
of  communications  or  of  the  administrative  services  attached  to 
camps,  as  the  case  may  be,  to  relieve  the  division  from  the  care  of 
its  sick  and  wounded,  and  to  take  care  of  all  material  which  the 
division  is  not  normally  equipped  to  carry 

269  In  the  preparation  of  these  regulations,  divisions,  field 
armies,  and  armies  are  considered  as  operating  in  the  zone  of  the 
advance  The  same  general  principles  of  administration  hold 
with  reference  to  these  units  when  concentrated  and  operating  in 
the  service  of  the  interior  and  in  the  zone  of  the  line  of  communi- 
cations 

Transportation. 

270  The  function  of  combat,  field,  ammunition,  supply,  sani- 
tary, and  engineer  trains  is  to  keep  the  commands  to  which  thejr 
are  attached  at  all  times  ready  for  action  without  hampering  their 
freedom  of  movement 

To  meet  these  requirements  demands  not  only  well-thought-out 
otders  by  the  superior  authority,  but  also  the  highest  sense  of 
responsibilty  on  the  part  of  those  in  command  of  these  trains 

These  officers  must  be  prepared  to  make  any  sacrifice  in  ofder 
that  their  trains  shall  arrive  at  the  destinations  appointed  at  tiie 
hours  fixed. 

271  Baggage  and  other  impedimenta  must  be  reduced  to  a 
minimum,  and  as  far  as  possible,  all  transport  and  material  not 
actually  required  with  the  combatant  field  forces  must  be  left  in 
the  zone  of  the  line  of  communications,  whence  it  may  be  sent 
forward  as  reqtured 

272.  Commanders  of  organizations  are  responsible  that  no 
unauthorized  vehicles  accompany  troops  or  trains,  and  that  no 
unauthorized  supplies  or  material  are  transported  Train  com- 
manders and  guards  permit  only  those  who  are  so  authorized  to 
ride  on  vehicles 

273  Trains  will  always  be  halted  on  the  right-hand  side  of  the 
road,  leaving  the  left-hand  side  clear  for  the  passage  of  troops, 
ambiilances,  etc. 


122  XBANSPOETATION. 

274.  Trains. — ^Transportation  attached  to  organizations  U 
grouped  under  the  following  heads,  i.e.: 

(a)  The  trains  assigned  to  organizations  smaller  than  a  brigadjB 
designated  combat  and  field  trains,  respectively. 

(6)  The  trains  assigned  to  divisions,  designated  ammunitionj 
supply,  sanitary,  and  engineer  trains,  respectively. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  there  are  ammunition,  supply,  sanir 
tary,  and  engineer  columns  which  are  attached  to  and  belong  to 
the  advance  section  of  the  line  of  communications.     (See  Par.  279.) 

276.  Combat  Trains. — Combat  trains  include  all  personnel, 
vehicles  and  animals  attached  to  organizations  for  transporting 
ammunition  reserve  and  special  Equipment  required  during  com- 
bat, including  the  mule  or  cart  carrying  sanitary  first  aid  equip- 
ment. To  them  also  are  attached  those  vehicles  required  for  the 
technical  service  of  engineers  and  signal  troops. 

Combat  trains  remain  at  all  times  with  the  unit  to  which  attached 
and  follow  it  into  action.  _  In  the  cavalry  and  field  artillery  it  may 
be  advisable  to  temporarily  separate  combat  trains  from  the  troops. 

276.  Field  Trains. — Field  trains  include  all  personnel,  vehicles, 
and  animals  attached  to  organizations  or  headquarters  for  the  trans- 
portation of  the  authorized  allowance  of  baggage,  rations,  and  grain, 
and  include  rolling  kitchens,  if  supplied.  Wagons  of  sutlers,  corre- 
spondents, etc.,  accompanying  a  field  force  by  proper  authority  are 
assigned  to  the  field  train  of  the  organization  to  which  their  owners 
are  attached.  On  the  march  the  headquarters  wagons  of  brigades 
and  divisions  are  generally  attached  to  some  regimental  field  train. 

Field  trains  are  assigned  to  regiments  and  independent  battalions 
and  are  habitually  divided  into  two  sections:  (1)  A  baggage  section 
carrying  baggage;  and  (2)  a  ration  section  carrying  rations  and  grain 
exclusively,  and  including  rolling  kitchens,  if  supplied. 

For  transportation  of  baggage  each  organization  is  assigned  its 
proportionate  space  on  the  vehicles  of  the  baggage  section. 

277.  When  an  organization  is  operating  independently,  the  field 
trains  are  under  the  direct  control  of  the  organization  commander. 
When  organizations  are  not  operating  independently,  field  trains 
are  ordinarily  ordered  to  be  grouped  by  the  division  commander 
and  the  senior  line  officer  present  with  the  train  assumes  command 
and  moves  it  as  directed  by  the  superior  authority.  When  the  field 
trains  are  ordered  grouped  with  the  divisional  train  they  are,  for  the 
time  being,  under  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  trains. 

The  field  trains  are  not  again  placed  at  the  disposition  of  the 
organization  until  so  ordered  oy  the  division  commander.    During 


TEANSPORTATION  128 

combatj  the  division  commander  holds  the  grouped  trains  well  to  the 
rear,  thus  relie'^-ing  the  roads  of  unnecessary  vehicles. 

In  the  late  afternoon,  or  at  the  end  of  a  march  or  close  of  a  combat, 
the  div^ision  commander  directs  the  field  trains  to  move  up  imme- 
diately in  rear  of  the  troops,  and  informs  the  commanding 
oflBcers  of  organizations  that  their  baggage  sections  and  one  day's 
rations  from  their  ration  sections  have  been  ordered  to  be  at  a  des- 
ignated place  The  organization  commander  at  once  sends  an  or- 
derly to  the  designated  place  to  conduct  the  vehicles  to  the  organi- 
zation As  soon  as  practicable  after  the  arrival  in  camp  of  the  ration 
vehicles  they  are  unloaded  and,  without  delay,  rejoin  the  grouped 
portions  of  the  ration  vehicles  The  division  commander  usually 
returns  the  baggage  sections  to  the  same  place  early  the  following 
morning 

278.  Ammunition,  Supply,  Sanitary,  and  Engineer  Trains.— 
The  ammunition  train  includes  all  vehicles,  animals,  and  personnel 
employed  in  transporting  the  divisional  artillery  and  infantry 
ammunition  reserve,  or  in  bringing  up  the  same  from  the  refilling 
point  to  the  combat  trains  of  organizations  (See  Ammunition 
Service  ) 

The  supply  train  includes  all  vehicles,  animals,  and  personnel 
employea  in  transporting  the  divisional  ration  and  grain  reserve, 
or  in  bringing  up  the  same  from  the  refilling  point  to  the  distributing 
point  To  it  may  also  be  attached  herds  of  beef  cattle,  remounts, 
vehicles  carrying  reserve  quartermaster  supplies,  and  reserve  trans- 
portation    (See  Supply  Service  ) 

The  sanitary  train  includes  all  vehicles,  animals,  personnel,  and 
reserve  sanitary  material,  not  attached  to  organizations,  emploj^ed 
in  collecting  and  caring  for  the  sick  and  wounded  of  the  division 

E ending  their  evacuation  by  the  line  of  communication.     (See 
anitary  Service  ) 

The  engineer  train  includes  all  vehicles,  animals,  and  personnel 
for  transporting  heavy  entrenching  tools,  explosives,  and  other 
engineer  equipment  and  material  which,  under  ordinary  conditions, 
is  required  to  accompany  the  division      (See  Engineer  Train.) 

279.  Ammunition,  Supply,  Sanitary,  and  Engineer  Columns.— 
These  columns  belong  to  the  line  of  communications  and  are  at- 
tached to  the  advance  section  of  its  supply,  sanitary,  and  telegraph 
services  They  are  the  means  whereby  transportation,  equipment, 
supplies,  evacuation,  and  field  hospitals,  and  ambulance  compa-, 
nies,  not  continually  required  with  a  division,  may  be  pushed  for*; 
ward  when  needed.    (See  par.  377.) 


124  SUPPLY  SERVICfi. 

280.  Commander  of  Trains. — A  commander  of  trains  is  assiigned 
for  each  division,  together  with  the  necessary  assistants  and  troops. 
He  controls  the  marching  and  camping  of  the  combined  amninni- 
tiott,  supply,  sanitary,  and  engineer  trains.  He  is  also  charged  with 
all  matters  of  general  police  in  the  rear  of  the  division  while  on  the 
march  and  throughout  the  command  while  it  is  in  camp.  (See 
Military  Police;) 

281.  When  the  trains  of  more  than  one  division  are  marching  on 
the  same  road,  the  field  army  commander  or  other  superior  authority 
designates  an  oflBcer,  usually  a  general  staff  oflficer,  to  decide  all 
questions  of  precedence  in  the  movement  and  camping  of  the  trains 
of  the  different  divisions. 

282.  When  combat  is  imminent,  the  ammunition,  sanitary,  and 
engineer  trains  are  ordered  released  from  the  control  of  the  com- 
mander of  trains,  and  thereaftei  during  the  period  of  the  combat 
operate  in  the  manner  described  hereafter.  (See  Ammunition,  Sani- 
tary Service,  and  Engineer  Trains.) 

Upon  the  completion  of  the  period  of  combat  and  when  no  longer 
required  to  operate  independently,  these  trains  revert  to  the  control 
of  the  commander  of  trains, 

283.  "V^Tien  troops  are  in  camp,  out  of  the  presence  of  the  enemy, 
ammunition,  supply,  sanitary,  and  engineer  trains  may  be  ordered 
released  from  the  control  of  the  commander  of  trains  and  operated 
directly  under  the  orders  of  their  respective  chiefs  of  service. 

Supply  Service. 

284.  The  zone  of  activity  of  a  division  operating,  for  an  extended 
period  of  time,  in  a  country  devoid  of  local  resources,  is  limited  by 
the  extreme  radius  of  supply  of  the  available  transportation  from 
the  line  of  communications. 

As  the  amount  of  transportation  with  a  division  is  necessarily 
limited,  contact  of  such  force  with  the  line  of  communications  can 
be  maintained  for  only  a  short  distance  to  the  rear.  This  distance 
is  dependent  on  the  character  and  amount  of  transportation  and 
the  conditioii  of  the  roads. 

In  territory  not  wholly  devoid  of  local. resotirces,  the  radius  01 
supply  can  be  increased  to  91  greater  or  less  extent,  depending  upon 
the  use  that  can  be  made  of  these  resources. 

285.  Befllling  J»oint. — ^A  refilling  point  is  the  place  where  the 
empty  vehicles  of  the  stipply  train  are  refilled  by  the  line  of  com- 
munications.   It  may  be  a  rail,  automobile,  tractor,  wagon,  or  water 


SUPPLY  SERVICE. 


126 


0^.> • 


If 

o-C  s: 

2a^ 


•  eo 


io  q.'q.  a.  Q. 


KOCK  (^«0<0  ^ 


126  StrPPIY  SERVICE. 

head,  and  it  may  be  at  or  in  advance  of  the  advance  supply  depot 
of  the  line  of  communications. 

286.  Distributing  Point. — ^A  distributing  point  is  the  place  where 
the  ration  sections  of  the  field  trains  are  replenished  either  from 
the  supply  train  or  the  line  of  communications;  in  the  latter  case 
either  directly  from  its  depots  or  by  means  of  its  supply  columns 
When  troops  are  advancing  distributing  points  will  usually  be 
pushed  forward  close  behind  the  troops,  if  possible,  even  up  to  the 
camping  area,  so  that  the  ration  vehicles  may  be  able  to  refill  with- 
out marching  too  far  In  a  retreat  it  may  be  advisable  to  deposit 
supplies  along  the  probable  line  of  retreat 

287  Rendezvous  Point. — A  rendezvous  point  is  a  place  to  which 
line  of  communications  supply  columns  (usually  auto-trucks  or 
tractors  with  wagons)  are  dispatched  and  where  they  are  met  by 
an  agent  of  the  commander  of  the  field  forces  and  conducted  to 
distributing  points  When  it  is  possible  to  do  so,  rendezvous  points 
may  be  fixed  with  advantage  at  the  actual  distributing  points 

288.  Distributing  points  are  fixed  by  division  commanders 
The  commander  of  a  force  larger  than  a  division  may  delegate  to 

his  division  commander  the  duty  of  fixing  the  refilling  or  rendez- 
vous points  of  their  respective  commands  within  certain  prescribed 
limitations,  or,  on  the  other  hand,  he  may  himself  fix  these  points 

In  the  first  instance  the  division  commander  is  responsible  for 
sending  timely  information  of  the  point  and  hour  selected  to  the 
assistant  chief  of  staff  of  the  advance  section  of  the  Une  of  commu- 
nications    (See  Par  378.) 

In  the  second  instance  the  commander  of  the  field  forces  notifies 
the  division  commander  and  the  commander  of  the  line  of  commu- 
nications of  the  refilling  or  rendezvous  point  and  the  hour  at  which 
contact  is  to  be  made 

289.  Source  of  Supply. — For  troops  in  campaign  there  are  two 
sources  of  supply,  namely 

1.  The  theater  of  operations. 

2.  The  base. 

It  is  generally  necessary  to  utilize  to  the  fullest  extent  the  food, 
especially  the  forage,  available  in  the  theater  of  operations  This 
becomes  practically  imperative  when  the  line  of  communications 
runs  through  a  country  devoid  of  railroads  and  waterways. 

When  the  theater  of  operations  is  in  the  home  country  or  that  of 
an  ally,  supplies  are  obtained  by  purchase;  when  in  hostile  terri- 
tory, by  purchase  or  requisition.     It  is  a  fundamental  principle 


-  SVTl^LY  SERVICE.  127 

that  all  supplies  available  in  the  theater  of  operations  should  be 
utilized  to  the  utmost. 

290.  Requisitions  —Requisitions  are  either  (1)  direct  (foraging) 
or  (2)  by  systematic  collection  into  depots.  Requisitions  are  resorted 
to  only  when  authorized  in  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  field 
forces,  and  should  be  enforced  by  detachments  commanded  by  a 
commissioned  officer  Unauthorized  seizure  of  property  is  punished 
as  looting  The  right  to  reqi  isitlon  food  supplies  in  a  hostile  coun- 
try covers  the  nght  to  impress  labor  and  means  of  transportation  to 
facilitate  delivery,  and  to  make  use  of  buildings,  flour  mills,  baker- 
ies, blacksmith  shops,  etc  Property  obtained  by  requisition  is  either 
paid  for  or  i-e^tored  with  suitable  indemnification.  If  no  reason  to 
the  contrary  exists,  better  results  are  obtamed  when  cash  payment 
is  made  for  supplies  taken  If  the  supplies  are  not  paid  for  upon 
delivery,  receipts  are  given,  copies  or  stubs  being  retained 
These  receipts  are  redeemed  by  the  proper  officer  in  accordance 
with  the  instructions  of  the  commander  of  the  field  forces. 

In  the  interests  of  the  troops  themselves,  it  is  well,  even  m  the 
enemy's  country,  to  treat  the  inhabitants  with  the  greatest  con- 
sideration At  the  same  time,  when  the  gravity  of  the  situation 
demands  it,  due  severity  must  be  exercised  toward  hostile  inhabi- 
tants Leniency  and  negligence  at  the  wrong  time  and  place  may 
lead  to  hardships  for  the  troops. 

291.  Food  supplies  gathered  by  independent  cavalry  or  advance 
guards  in  excess  of  their  needs,  are  turned  over  to  troops  in  the  rear, 
and,  correspondingly,  those  in  excess  of  the  needs  of  these  latter 
troops  or  which  can  not  be  used  for  current  issues  or  carried  in  the 
field  and  supply  trains,  are  taken  over  by  the  line  of  communica- 
tions. 

292.  While  a  well-organized  system  of  requisitions  is  of  great 
service,  exclusive  reliance  can  not  be  placed  thereon,  even  m  the 
most  productive  countries  As  soon  as  the  army  halts,  or  when  it 
advances  slowly,  recourse  must  be  had  to  shipments  brought  up  by 
the  line  of  communications.    (See  Art.  V  ) 

293-  The  Ration. — Upon  arrival  of  troops  at  mobilization  and 
concentration  camps,  the  ration  savings  pri\'ilege  is  suspended  and 
entirely  replaced  by  issues  of  rations  in  kind  This  same  restriction 
holds  during  the  period  of  hostilities. 

294.  The  garrison  ration  is  intended  to  be  issued  m  kind  when- 
ever possible.  The  approximate  net  weight  of  the  garrison  ration 
is  4.5  pounds. 


128  STTPPLY  SERVICE. 

295.  The  reserve  ration  is  the  simplest  efficient  ration  and  con- 
stitutes the  reserve  carried  for  field  service.  The  approximate  net 
weight  of  the  reserve  ration  is  2  pounds. 

296.  The  field  ration  is  the  ration  prescribed  in  orders  by  the 
commander  of  the  field  forces.  It  consists  of  the  reserve  ration  in 
whole  or  in  part,  supplemented  by  articles  requisitioned  or  pur- 
chased locally  or  shipped  from  the  rear,  provided  Sach  supplement 
or  substitutes  correspond  generally  with  the  component  articles  or 
substitute  equivalent  of  the  garrison  ration 

297.  In  many  cases  it  will  be  possible  to  s apply  a  much  more 
varied  ration  to  troops  of  the  line  of  communications  and  to  the 
advance  forces,  when  halted  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  line  of 
communications,  than  to  troops  at  a  distance  from  it.  The  allow- 
ance of  transportation  for  field  rations  with  the  division  is  based  on 
carrying  a  3-pound  gross  weight  ration  While  it  will  ordinarily  be 
possible  to  supply  the  full  garrison  ration  to  troops  in  mobilization 
and  concentration  camps,  nevertheless,  in  the  absence  of  orders  to 
the  contrary,  these  conmxanders  have  the  same  authority  as  com- 
manders of  the  field  force  in  the  theater  of  operations  with  reference 
to  prescribing  the  ration  to  be  issued  their  commands. 

298.  The  forage  ration  is  prescribed  in  Army  Regulations. 

299.  In  the  field  the  authorized  allowances  must  often  be  reduced 
and  supplemented  by  grazing  and  other  kinds  of  food,  such  as  green 
forage,  beans,  peas,  rice,  palay,  wheat,  and  rye  The  amount  of 
each  issued  depends  upon  circumstances.  Wheat  and  rye  should 
be  crushed  and  fed  sparingly  (about  one-fourth  of  the  allowance). 
F'or  unshelled  corn,  add  about  one  quarter  weight 

The  commander  of  the  field  forces  in  the  theater  of  operations 
may  authorize  in  written  orders  the  issue  of  increased  allowances 
of  forage  for  the  animals  of  his  command  worn  down  by  hard  cam- 
paigning Ordinarily  this  will  be  possible  only  dming  periods 
when  the  animals  are  within  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  line  of 
communications, 

300.  On  the  march  gram  is  the  only  forage  carried,  and  recourse 
must  be  had  to  grazing,  if  it  is  not  possible  to  procure  long  forage  in 
the  country'  traversed. 

The  allowance  of  transportation  of  the  forage  ration  with  a  divi- 
sion is  based  on  carrying  a  12-pound  ration  of  grain  for  each  horse 
and  a  9-pound  ration  of  grain  for  each  mule. 

301.  Disposition  of  Bations. — Organizations  of  all  arms  of  a  di- 
vision carry  on  the  man  or  animal  and  in  field  trains  the  same 
number  of  days'  rations.  The  same  rule  applies  to  grain  carried 
on  animals  and  vehicles.    They  are  all  distnbuted  between  men 


STJPPLY  SERVICE.  129 

and  vehicles  of  the  ration  section  of  the  field  train  in  the  same, 
manner  and,  therefore,  must  be  replenished  from  the  supply  train 
or  column  at  the  same  time. 

302.  In  campaign  a  command  carries  as  a  part  of  its  normal 
equipment  the  folio ^ving  rations  and  forage: 

(a)  On  each  man:  At  least  two  days'  reserve  ration.  Civil  em- 
ployees, etc.,  accompanying  the  combatant  forces  are  also  required 
to  carry  with  them  the  same  reserve  as  enlisted  men. 

For  each  draft  animal-  On  each  vehicle,  a  reserve  of  1  day's 
grain  ration  for  its  draft  animals. 

Reserve  rations  are  consumed  only  in  case  of  extreme  necessity, 
when  no  other  supplies  are  available.  They  are  not  to  be  con- 
sumed or  renewed  without  an  express  order  fi-om  the  officer  in  com- 
mand of  the  troops  who  is  responsible  for  the  provision  of  supplies, 
namely:  the  division  commander  or  other  independent  detachment 
commander 

Every  officer  within  the  limits  of  his  command  is  held  responsible 
for  the  enforcement  of  this  regulation. 

Reserve  rations  consumed  must  be  replaced  at  the  first  oppor- 
tunity.^ 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  commanders  will  require  each  man 
on  the  march  to  carry  the  unconsumed  portion  of  the  day's  ration 
issued  the  night  before,  for  the  noonday  meal.  In  the  same  manner, 
cavalry  and  field  artillery  carry  on  their  horses  a  portion  of  their 
gi-ain  ration  issued  the  night  before,  for  a  noonday  feed. 

(6)  In  the  ration  section  of  the  field  train:  For  each  man  two 
days'  field, 2  one  day's  reserve,  and  for  each  animal  two  days'  grain 
rations.  Organizations  equipped  with  rolling  kitchens  carry  one 
day's  field  ration  in  the  rolling  kitchen,  a  corresponding  reduction 
being  made  in  the  number  of  other  vehicles  attached  to  the  ration 
section. 

The  one  day's  reserve  ration  is  intended  to  provide  for  replacing 
immediately  any  reserve  ration  carried  by  the  man  which  may  be 
consumed.  The  two  remaining  days'  field  rations  are  more  varied 
in  character. 

(c)  In  Supply  Train: 

Of  an  infantry^  division  two  days'  field  and  grain  rations. 
Of  a  cavalry  division  one  day's  field  and  grain  rations. 

» This  includes  frequent  renewal  of  the  bacon  component,  which  is  liable  to 
deteriorate. 
2  See  par.  296  for  composition  of  field  ration. 

35379«-14 9 


130  SUPPLY  SERVICE. 

Independent  cavalry,  when  in  front  or  on  the  flanks  of  an  army, 
will  have  to  depend  to  a  great  extent  on  the  resources  of  the  country. 
The  rapid  operations  of  cavalry  often  necessitate  complete  sepa- 
ration from  slow  moving  field  and  supply  trains  during  extended 
periods  Autotrucks  are  employed,  whenever  possible,  in  the  sup- 
ply of  independent  cavalry. 

303.  Operations  of  the  Supply  Service. — Ordinarily  rations  and 
grain  are  issued  to  troops  during  the  afternoon  from  the  ration  sec- 
tion of  the  field  train  sent  forward  for  the  purpose.    These  supplies 

{)rovide  the  evening  meal,  the  following  day's  breakfast,  and  the 
unch  to  be  carried  on  the  man,  and  in  addition,  grain  for  the  even- 
ing's feed,  the  following  morning's  feed,  as  well  aa  the  noonday  feed 
to  be  carried  in  the  nosebag.     (See  Par  302) 

Jn  the  presence  of  the  enemy  the  same  method  is  used  with 
organizations  equipped  with  rolling  kitchens,  the  endeavor  being 
to  furnish  two  hot  meals  evening  and  morning  and  a  cold  lunch  to 
be  carried  on  the  man.  When  not  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy 
and  on  the  march,  the  rolling  kitchen  usually  m^ches  with  the 
combat  train  and  a  hot  lunch  is  supplied. 

Empty  vehicles  of  the  ration  section  are  conducted  to  the  desig- 
nated distributing  point  at  the  hour  specified  (usually  during  the 
morning),  refill,  and  rejoin  the  grouped  field  trains. 

Rolling  kitchens  are  refilled  whenever  empty,  usually  in  the 
early  morning,  by  the  other  vehicles  of  their  ration  section. 

304.  The  supplies  carried  in  the  supply  train  may  be  held  as  a 
reserve  or,  on  the  other  hand,  the  supply  train  may  be  so  operated 
as  to  form  the  connecting  link  between  the  refilling  point  and  the 
distributing  point. 

When  operating  as  a  connecting  link,  the  supply  train  of  a  divi- 
fiion  is  ordinarily  divided  into  eectione,  each  carrying  one  day's 
supply 

305.  The  service  of  supply  is  dfrected  and  controlled  in  orders 
and  instructions  issued  by  the  division  commander  These  orders 
fix  the  distributing  point  or  points  to  which  the  empty  vehicles  of 
the  ration  sections  of  the  field  trains  are  to  be  sent  for  resupply. 
The  commander  of  trains  is  advised  by  division  headquarters  of 
the  location  of  the  refilling  point  to  which  the  empty  vehicles  of- 
the  supply  train  can  be  sent  for  replenishment.  The  commander 
of  trains  then  directs  the  movement  forward  of  the  necessary  num- 
ber of  loaded  vehicles  of  the  supjply  train  to  the  distributing  points, 
and  makes  arrangements  for  their  prompt  return  and  for  reloading 
all  empty  vehicles  of  the  supply  tmin  at  refilling  xwinte. 


SUPPLY  SERVICE.  131 

806.  When  supply  columns  are.  operated  by  the  line  of  communi* 
cations  the  division  commander  advises  the  assistant  chief  of  staff 
of  the  advance  section  as  to  most  convenient  rendezvous  point 
and  has  the  supply  column  met  at  this  point  by  a  representative 
of  the  commander  of  trains  and  conducted  to  the  distributing  points. 

307  The  positions  of  the  distributing  points  are  subject  to  fre- 
quent changes  and  are  ordinarily  communicated  to  the  division 
daily  in  orders.  It  is  not  necessary  to  inform  the  whole  division 
as  to  the  positions  of  refilling  and  rendezvous  points,  but  informa- 
tion as  to  the  points  fixed  must  be  communicated  to  the  commander 
of  trains. 

308.  The  division  quartermaster  keeps  the  cJiief  of  staff  informed 
at  all  times  of  the  state  of  the  ration  and  forage  supply  of  the  divi- 
sion, the  condition  of  the  quartermaster  equipment  and  suggests 
the  means  for  their  replenishment.  He  controls  the  operation  of 
detachments  sent  out  for  the  purpose  of  purchasing  or  otherwise 
collecting  supplies  Such  supplies,  transport,  or  animals  as  may 
be  procured  are  turned  over  to  organizations  or  to  the  supply  train. 
He  daily  formulates  and  presents  to  the  chief  of  staff  all  orders 
relating  to  the  resupply  of  the  ration  vehicles  and  advises  as  to  the 
most  suitable  places  for  refilling,  rendezvous  and  distributing 
points.  ( 

309.  The  quartermaster  in  charge  of  the  supply  train  is  the  subor- 
dinate of  the  commander  of  trains  and  operates  his  train  as  directed 
by  the  latter  authority  He  is  responsible  for  the  efficient  opera- 
tion of  the  supply  train  and  commands  ita  personnel. 

310.  Fresh  Beef. — Whenever  possible,  troops  should  be  supplied 
with  fresh  beef  This  supply  may  be  effected  either  by  driving 
herds  of  cattle  with  the  supply  train  or  preferably  by  sending  up 
special  transportation  from  the  line  of  communications  with  frozen 
beef  to  the  distributing  points.  In  the  first  case  the  cattle  are 
ordinarily  slaughtered  by  the  supply  train  personnel  at  appropriate 
times  and  turned  over  to  the  field  trains  at  the  distributing  point. 

In  the  second  case  the  movement  of  the  frozen  meat  to  the  desig- 
nated distributing  points  is  effected  by  the  supply  column  of  the 
line  of  communications. 

311.  Fresh  or  Field  Bread. — Fresh  or  field  bread  is  issued  troops 
as  often  as  possible.  The  bread  is  baked  by  bakery  companies 
attached  to  the  line  of  communications.  Fresh  bread  is  issued  to 
troops  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  field  bakeries.  Field  bread 
is  issued  and  transported  by  supply  and  field  trains  in  the  same 
manner  as  other  components  of  the  ration. 


182  AMHITNITION  SERVICE. 

312.  Sales  Stores. — Sales  stores  are  not  supplied  in  advance  of 
the  line  of  communications  When  troops  have  gone  into  per- 
manent camp  or  cantonment,  the  advance  end  of  the  line  of  com 
munications  will  usually  be  established  at  that  point  and  stores 
sold  It  may  be  possible  at  certain  times  for  the  Ime  of  communi- 
cation to  send  forward  to  the  combatant  troops  transportation 
loaded  with  this  class  of  stores 

Ammunition  Service. 

313  The  system  ot  replacing  ammunition  differs  somewhat  from 
that  by  which  rations  and  grain  are  replenished  No  ammunition 
is  obtainable  locally  and.  therefore,  all  the  mobile  ammunition 
reserves  with  the  division  must  be  replaced  by  the  line  of  commu- 
nications The  requirements  of  rations  and  grain  are  continuous, 
whereas  the  requirements  of  ammunition  are  spasmodic  and  neither 
the  exact  quantiry  nor  the  time  of  replenishment  can  be  foreseen. 

314.  The  organization  and  operation  of  the  ammunition  service 
is  the  duty  of  the  field  artillery  The  commander  of  the  ammuni- 
tion train  is  the  immediate  subordinate  of  the  di\asional  artillery 
commander  after  the  ammunition  train  has  been  released  from  the 
control  of  the  commander  of  trains 

316.  Ammunition  carried  on  the  man  and  on  the  caissons  of  the 
firing  batteries  is  replaced  by  that  carried  in  organization  combat 
trains  These  latter  trains  are  ordinarily  refilled  from  vehicles 
attached  to  the  ammunition  train,  though  in  certain  instances  they 
may  be  refilled  directly  from  the  line  of  communications  or  from 
ammunition  columns. 

316.  It  is  the  duty  of  commanders  of  all  grades  to  see  that  due 
economy  is  exercised  in  the  expenditure  of  ammunition  and  to 
make  provision  for  its  timely  replenishment 

No  means  should  remain  untried  for  bringing  up  ammunition  to 
troops  in  action  and  for  keeping  up  the  fire,  on  the  maintenance  or 
cessation  of  which  the  success  of  the  action  may  depend 

317  It  is  the  function  of  the  organization  commander  to  which  a 
combat  train  is  assigned  to  regulate  the  supply  of  ammunition  from 
the  combat  train  to  the  firing  line,  and  to'  dispatch  the  empty 
vehicles  of  the  combat  train  to  the  distributing  station  Battalion 
commanders  are  charged  with  keeping  their  combat  trains  properly 
filled  and  ecjuipped 

The  principles  under  which  this  supply  is  effected  are  laid  down 


AMMUNITIQH  SERVICE. 


m 


^              !»! 

.2    S  6     3 

<b 

11          i^SIII 

i^ 

7' 

§     \        2  5liiS.= 

•^US'    %      -^li.-^rjt 

"                      \                  OO^catK 

*           >.             •»i*>Xl^ 

■3- 

t*>.      ^     • 

"«.-S-       *.. 

-s- 

*     ^-..x 

fT 

1    .;.•:•*-*... 

e       CO 
o     •-• 

ir'V 

'.> 

L 

a 
1 

*    V/ 

.0 

> 

tf^:*  / 

"«; 

•e- 

8yj* 


■""o 


0 

(Q  a 

Q 

Q 
^  0 


I 


tt'     IS 

^  I 


0 


■nfi-'" 


111 

4|«3 

I 


■v-i?-e 


184  AMMimiTIOK  SEEVICE. 

818.  Ammimition  Distributing  Station. — An  ammunition  dis- 
tributing station  is  the  place  where  combat  trains  are  sent  to  be 
resupplied  * 

AnimtiiLition  Befilling  Point. — An  ammunition  refilling  point  is 
the  place  where  the  ammunition  train  is  refilled. 

Ammimition  Rendezvous  Point.— An  ammunition  rendezvous 
point  is  the  place  to  which  the  ammunition  columns  of  the  line  of 
communications  are  dispatched  and  where  they  are  met  by  agents 
of  the  ammunition  train  and  conducted  to  refilling  points 

319  The  divisional  ammunition  8er\ace  is  directed  by  the  com 
mander  of  the  ammunition  train,  and  includes  the  supply  of  both 
small-arms  ammunition  and  field-artillery  ammunition 

The  ammunition  train  is  organized  either  into  two  companies  or 
into  two  battalions  designated,  respectively,  the  first  and  second 
ammunition  companies  or  battalions,  each  battalion  or  company 
being  further  subdivided  into  infantry  and  artillery  ammunition 
•sections 

320  The  ammunition  train  carries  the  divisional  ammunition 
reserve  from  which  combat  trains  are  refilled,  and  is  a  connecting 
link  in  the  chain  of  ammunition  supply  from  the  refilling  point  of 
the  line  of  communications  to  the  ammunition-distributing  station 
In  principle,  it  is  the  function  of  the  ammunition  column  to  push 
up  close  to  the  rear  of  the  troops  and  to  maintain  a  constant  supply 
of  ammunition  at  the  refilling  point  This  has  the  effect  of  short- 
ening the  haul  for  the  ammunition  tram 

If  no  ammunition  column  be  operated  it  is  preferable  to  employ 
the  second  ammunition  company  or  battalion  in  bringing  up  am- 
munition to  some  point  designated  by  the  ammunition-train  com- 
mander, and  in  resupplying  the  first  ammunition  company  or 
battalion  vehicles  at  the  same  point  In  the  latter  case  the  -first 
ammunition  company  alone  establishes  and  maintains  distributing 
stations. 

321  For  each  division  the  positions  of  the  ammunition-refilling 
point  and  the  rendezvous  point  are  fixed  in  the  same  manner  as  are 
the  refilling  and  rendezvous  points  of  the  supply  service  (see 
Par.  288),  and  are  communicated  to  the  commander  of  the  ammu- 
nition train  by  division  headquarters. 

>  322.  In  the  case  of  a  deliberate  attack  on  the  enemy  in  position 
or  when  our  forces  occupy  a  defensive  position,  the  positions  of  the 

» In  the  field  artillery,  caissons  of  the  firing  battery  may  also  be  sent  directly  to 
the  distributing  station. 


AMMlINITIOl?  SEBVICE.  185 

ammunition-distributing  stations  are  fixed  in  orders  by  the  division 
commander  and  communicated  to  the  troops.  In  the  case  of  a 
rencontre  engagement  the  ammunition  train  is  released  from  the  con- 
trol of  the  commander  of  trains  and  moved  forward  by  its  com- 
mander to  some  suitable  point  from  which  practicable  routes  radi- 
ate to  the  different  portions  of  the  probable  line  of  battle  This 
point  is  usually  within  2  or  3  miles  of  the  line  of  battle.  From  this 
point  the  commander  of  the  ammunition  train  dispatches  agents  to 
the  different  bri§:ade  commanders  for  the  purpose  of  arranging  for 
the  position  of  distributing  stations  and  for  investigating  the  best 
lines  of  approach  to  the  same.  If  a  battle  has  commenced,  the  com- 
mander of  trains  releases  the  ammunition  train  without  waiting  for 
orders  and  directs  it  to  press  forward  to  the  field  of  battle 

*  323.  Inasmuch  as  the  expenditure  of  ammunition  will  not  be  the 
same  for  all  portions  of  the  line  of  battle,  it  is  as  a  rule  desirable  to 
hold  the  ammunition  train  together  during  the  earlier  stages  of  the 
engagement.  As  the  probable  course  of  the  engagement  becomes 
known  different  portions  of  tlie  first  ammnnition  company  or 
battalion  are  pushed  out  and  establish  ammunition-distributing 
stations  in  the  reswr  of  the  fighting  troops.  As  fast  as  the  vehicles 
of  the  first  company  or  battalion  are  emptied  they  return  and  are 
refilled  or  replaced  by  vehicles  of  the  second  company  In  the 
same  manner  empty  vehicles  with  the  second  company  or  battalion 
are  dispatched  immediately  to  the  refilling  point,  refill,  and  rejoin 
the  filled  vehicles. 

324.  The  headquarters  of  tiie  commander  of  the  ammunition 
train  during  a  battle  is  usually  at  the  point  of  contact  between  his 
first  and  second  companies  or  battalions.  This  commander  sends 
an  agent  to  connect  division  headquarters  with  his  headquarters. 
The  commander  of  each  section  of  the  ammunition  train  estab- 
lishing a  distributing  station  furnishes  an  agent  to  connect  such 
station  with  the  headquarters  of  the  unit  it  supplies.  Ordinarily 
one  ammunition-distributing  station  is  operated  for  each  brigade; 
however,  if  required,  a  greater  number  may  be  operated 

325.  After  an  engagement  every  effort  is  made  to  replace,  with- 
out delay,  all  ammunition  reserves  with  the  division*  The  ammu- 
nition carried  on  the  man,  with  the  firing  batteries  and  on  the  com- 
bat trains  is  first  replaced,  then  that  carried  on  the  ammunition 
train  is  replaced, 

326.  The  divisional  artillery  commander  is  kept  informed  at  all 
times  of  the  state  of  the  ammunition  supply  in  the  ammunition 
train;  during  action  by  the  ammunition-train  agent  at  division 


136 


SANITARY  SEEVICE. 


Ml 


5,51 


0 

ii 

i^ 

-5- 

•5- 

e 

^r+ 

.1 

-=-  \ 

'5 

-5-    '. 

-5-     '. 

o 

_■« 

+-;fl 

*> 

1. 

"C 

+'/' 

« 

1 

«r> 

€>< 

+'' 

>\ 

u 

<t 

-3- 

•r 

.-=- 

?Jt 

-5-   *. 

•s-  ! 

*« 

*A 

i 

+'/;  ^* 

V 

+'/ 

*^^ 


m 


ui-SUJ   «    o-O.^   o.c   g    0.2 

iSQ<:u:u:z<ottJ<ujiu 


,I^VOI«iA4(J 


"i*ir'^ 


SANITARY  SERVICE.  137 

headquarters  and  at  all  other  times  by  reports  from  the  commander 
of  the  ammunition  train. 

327.  Ammunition-train  commanders  will  comply  with  demands 
for  ammunition  from  troops  of  other  commands,  provided  that  their 
own  troops  are  in  a  position  to  spare  it  This  has  particular  refer- 
ence to  supplying  the  needs  of  independent  cavalry  operating  in 
the  front  and  on  the  flanks  of  the  field  forces. 

328.  The  positions  of  the  ammunition  train  and  its  different  sec- 
tions when  the  latter  are  separated  from  the  main  train  are  marked 
by  a  red  flag  during  the  day  and  by  a  red  lantern  at  night. 

Sanitary  Service. 

329.  In  general,  the  functions  of  the  sanitary  service  are  as  fol- 
lows: 

(a)  The  institution  of  all  practicable  sanitary  measures,  to  the 
end  that  the  fighting  forces  suffer  no  depletion  in  strength  due  to 
avoidable  causes. 

(6)  The  temporary  care  and  professional  treatment  of  the  sick 
and  wounded  and  their  transportation  to  accessible  points  where 
they  are  transferred  with  as  little  delay  as  possible  to  the  line  of 
communications. 

(c)  The  supply  of  the  necessary  sanitary  equipment. 

In  addition,  the  sanitary  service  is  charged  with  the  preparation 
and  preservation  of  individual  records  of  sickness  ana  injury  in 
order  that  claims  may  be  adjudicated  with  justice  to  the  Govern- 
ment and  the  individual. 

330.  The  personnel  of  the  sanitary  service  in  the  zone  of  the 
advance  may  be  classified  into  two  general  groups,  as  follows:  First, 
that  attached  to  organizations  smaller  than  a  brigade,  which  func- 
tions under  the  immediate  orders  of  the  organization  commander 
and  accompanies  its  unit  into  combat;  second,  that  attached^  to 
the  sanitary  train,  which  functions  under  the  orders  of  the  division 
surgeon  in  accordance  with  such  general  or  specific  instructions  as 
he  may  receive  from  the  division  commander  When  necessary 
the  sanitary  personnel  attached  to  organizations  may  be  tempo- 
rarily detached,  in  whole  or  part,  and  directed  to  operate  with 
the  sanitary  train. 

831.  Sanitation. — Oflicers  and  men  of  all  arms  must  have  a  knowl- 
edge of  sanitation  and  its  importance,  to  the  end  that  no  depletion 
of  the  fighting  force  occurs  through  avoidable  causes.  The  impor- 
tance of  adopting  and  carrying  out  proper  sanitary  measures  can 
not  be  overestimated. 


138  SANITABY  SERVICE. 

Commanders  of  all  grades  are  responsible  for  the  sanitary  condi- 
tion of  the  qutirters  or  localities  occupied  by  their  commands  and 
for  the  enforcement  of  all  sanitary  regulations.  In  addition  they 
are  responsible  that  all  sanitary  defects  reported  to  them  are 
promptly  corrected. 

A  medical  officer  of  experience,  designated  sanitary  inspector, 
is  charged,  under  direction  of  the  division  surgeon,  with  investi- 
gating and  reporting  upon  the  sanitation  of  the  division  to  which 
he^is  attached.  Sanitary  inspectors  report  the  result  of  their 
inspections  to  local  commanders  as  well  as  to  the  division  surgeon. 

332.  First- Aid  Packet. — Every  man  with  the  division  carries  a 
first-aid  packet.  The  sanitary  detachments  with  organizations 
carry  pouches  containing  appliances  for  first  aid  and  stimulants. 
The  combat  train  carries  litters  and  the  necessary  equipment  for 
regimental  aid  station. 

333.  Regimental  Aid  Station. — ^This  station,  established  by  each 
regiment  or  independent  battalion  during  combat  and  when  jus- 
tified by  the  number  of  wounded,  is  the  place  to  which  all  wounded 
of  the  organization  are  carried  by  its  sanitary  personnel,  and  where 
emergency  treatment  is  administered.  The  position  of  the  station 
is  fixed  by  the  organization  commander  and  is  as  near  the  firing  line 
as  possible.  This  station  will  often  be  but  little  more  than  a  place 
for  assembling  the  wounded,  as  its  personnel  belongs  to  the  oi^ni- 
zation  and,  therefore,  must  be  prepared  to  move  with  it.  After  re- 
ceiving emergency  treatment  all  wounded  able  to  walk  (except 
those  with  trivial  wounds,  who  are  sent  back  to  the  line)  are  directed 
to  the  station  for  slightly  wounded;  those  unable  to  walk  are  de- 
livered to  the  bearers  sent  forward  from  the  sanitary  train. 

The  equipment  of  the  regimental  aid  station  is  carried  on  the 
combat  tram.  It  is  operated  by  the  sanitary  personnel  of  the 
oi^nization. 

334.  Dressing  Stations. — ^These  stations,  established  during  com- 
bat by  ambulance  companies  of  the  sanitary  train  in  the  immediate 
rear  of  the  line  of  regimental  aid  stations,  are  the  places  where  all 
wounded  unable  to  walk  are  collected  from  regimental  aid  stations 
by  bearers  of  ambulance  companies.  If  conditions  so  warrant, 
these  bearers  may  be  assisted  in  their  work  by  portions  of  the 
organization  sanitary  personnel.  From  these  stations  the  wounded 
are  transported  by  ambulance  companies  back  to  field  hospitals. 
The  equipment  of  dressing  stations  is  more  elaborate  than  that  of 
the  regimental  aid  station.  It  provides  lig;ht  noiuishment  and 
stimulants  for  the  wounded  and  affords  facilities  for  more  elaborate 
drfiasine'a  and  for  emere'encv  siirperv. 


SANITARY  SERVICE.  13d 

The  equipment  for  dresaing  stations  and  the  necessary  personnel 
are  supplied  by  the  ambulance  companies  of  the  sanitar>  train. 

336.  Ambulance  Companies. — Ambulance  companies  push  up 
close  to  the  rear  of  tlie  fighting  troops  and  as  near  the  line  of  regi- 
mental aid  stations  as  possible  and  establish  dressing  stations.  In 
addition  t6  their  functions  at  the  dressing  stations,  they  are  charged 
with  the  transportation  of  the  wounded  back  to  field  hospitals  and 
with  providing  the  necessary  equipment  for  infirmary  service  in 
camps  When  field  hospitals  have  not  been  set  up  and  when 
sanitary  columns  or  railway  hospital  trains  of  the  line  of  commu- 
nications are  reasonably  accessiole,  ambulance  companies  trans- 
port the  wounded  directly  to  them. 

336.  Field  Hospital  Companies. — Field  hospital  companies  fcH-m 
part  of  the  sanitary  train.  They  are  set  up  when  conditions  so 
warrant,  ordinarily  some  3  or  4  miles  from  the  battlefield,  and  are 
the  places  to  which  the  wounded  are  transported  by  ambulance 
companies.  Their  position  must  be  one  accessible  both  from  the 
front  and  rear  and  where  good  water  is  available.  Field  hospitals 
ai-e  not  set  up  when  the  sick  or  wounded  can  be  turned  over  con- 
veniently to  elements  of  the  sanitary  column  or  railway  hospital 
trains  of  the  line  of  communications.  Canvas  is  pitched  only 
when  buildings  are  not  available  or  are  inadequate  for  the  purpose 
of  housing  the  wounded. 

The  eciuipment  of  field  hospitals,  while  niore  elaborate  than  that 
of  dressing  stations  and  while  providing  canvas  for  protection  of 
the  wounded  from  the  weather  and  facilities  for  more  extended 
surgical  work,  is  nevertheless  limited  to  providing  necessities  for 
the  sick  and  wounded  pending  their  evacuation  to  the  rear  by  the 
line  of  communications.    (See  also  par.  268.) 

337.  Evacuation  Points. — ^The  sanitary  column  of  the  line  of 
communications  includes  ambulance  companies  and  evacuation 
hospitals;  there  may  also  be  available  railway  hospital  trains  and 
boats,  any  oi  all  of  which  may  be  used  as  the  means  for  the  evacua- 
tion of  the  sick  and  wounded  from  the  division.  The  places  at 
which  the  sick  and  wounded  are  transferred  from  the  division  to 
the  line  of  communications  elements  are  termed  evacuating  points 

The  positions  of  evacuating  points  are  fixed  in  the  same  manner 
as  is  the  refilling  point  of  the  supply  service  (see  par.  288)  and 
communicated  directly  from  di\'ision'  headquarters  to  the  com- 
mander of  the  sanitary  train 

838.  Station  for  Slightly  Wounded.— A  station  for  slightly 
wounded  is  established  when  combat  is  imminent  to  relieve  dress- 


140  SANITABY  SEEVICE. 

ing  stations  and  field  hospitals  of  the  slightly  wounded  who 
can  walk  and  require  but  little  attention.  Its  position  is  fixed 
in  division  orders.  It  is  operated  by  the  personnel  of  the  sani- 
tary train  detailed  for  the  purpose.  It  is  conspicuously 
marked  so  that  it  can  be  readily  found. 

339.  The  Sanitary  Train. — The  sanitary  train  is  composed  of 
ambulance  companies,  field  hospital  companies,  and  camp  in- 
firmaries. The  sanitary  train  is  commanded  by  the  division 
surgeon,  or  in  his  absence,  by  the  senior  medical  officer  of  the 
attached  elements,  who,  upon  its  release  from  the  control  of 
the  commander  of  trains,  operates  it  in  accordance  with  orders 
or  instructions  received  from  division  headquarters. 

340.  Service  in  Camps. — In  camps  an  ambulance  service  is 
furnished  from  the  sanitary  train.  Infirmaries  are  set  up  at 
convenient  points  by  order  of  the  division  surgeon  and  oper- 
ated by  the  sanitary  personnel  attached  to  the  organizations 
which  the  infirmary  serves.  Here  cases  not  requiring  hospital 
treatment  are  cared  for,  all  other  cases  being  promptly  re- 
moved by  the  ambulance  service.  The  senior  medical  officer 
of  the  units  served  by  the  infirmary  assumes  charge  of  the 
same  and  is  authorized  to  call  directly  on  the  other  organiza- 
tions for  their  proportionate  share  of  medical  officers  and  sani- 
tary personnel  for  the  infirmary  service.  The  sergeant,  Hos- 
pital Corps,  detailed  with  the  infirmary  remains  with  it  in 
charge  of  the  equipment.  If  necessary,  field  hospitals  are  set 
up  for  the  reception  of  the  seriously  sick  and  wounded. 

341.  Service  on  the  March. — When  out  of  the  presence  of 
the  enemy  ambulances  are  ordinarily  ordered  distributed  by 
the  division  commander  throughout  the  column,  in  the  rear  of 
regiments,  battalions,  etc.  A  camp  infirmary  is  assigned  to 
each  brigade  and  marches  in  its  rear,  and  a  field  hospital 
should  be  so  located  in  the  column  of  march  as  to  permit  of 
its  being  available  for  the  reception  of  seriously  sick  and  in- 
jured as  soon  as  possible  after  the  arrival  of  troops  in  camp. 

342.  During  marches  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  ambu- 
lance companies  are  kept  intact  It  may  be  advisable  to  as- 
sign one  or  more  of  these  companies  to  a  position  in  the  col- 
umn of  the  combatant  troops,  but  any  further  dispersion  is 
inadvisable.  When  combat  is  imminent  and  when  so  ordered 
by  the  column  commander,  the  ambulance  companies  fall  out 
of  the  column,  and  as  soon  as  the  combatant  troops  have 
passed  they  proceed  to  function  as  described  in  "Service  ta 
Combat"    (See  Par.  111.) 


SANITARY  SERVICE.  141 

343.  A  man  falling  out  from  sickness  or  ini'ury  is  sent  with 
a  pass,  showing  his  name,  company,  and  regiment  or  corps  to 
the  medical  officer  In  the  rear.  The  latter  returns  the  pass, 
having  indicated  thereon  the  disposition  made  of  the  man. 

If  tiie  man  is  unaoie  lo  walls  he  is  picked  uj)  by  the  tirst  ambu- 
lance and  cared  for  If  able  to  walk  he  may  either  be  required  to 
follow  immediately  behind  his  organization  or  ordered  to  await  the 
arrival  of  the  sanitary  train  In  the  latter  case,  he  is  furnished 
with  a  tag  showing  the  orders  given  him 

The  arms,  personal  equipment,  and  clothing  of  soldiers  who  fall 
out  are  carried  with  them. 

The  horse,  saber,  and  horse  equipment  of  a  mounted  soldier 
admitted  to  the  ambulance,  or  otherwise  disposed  of,  are  taken 
back  to  the  troops  by  the  noncommissioned  officer  that  accom- 
panied him. 

344.  Service  in  Combat. — In  the  absence  of  medical  assistance, 
the  wounded  apply  their  first-aid  packets,  if  practicable.  With 
this  exception  the  care  of  the  wounded  devolves  upon  the  sanitary 
troops,  and  no  combatant,  unless  duly  authorized,  is  permitted  to 
take  or  accompany  the  sick  or  injured  to  the  rear 

346.  The  sanitary  personnel  of  organizations  must  remain  with 
it  when  advancing  into  action  and  during  the  whole  course  of  an 
engagement.  Accordingly  the  wounded  will  be  treated  where  their 
wounds  are  received,  and* the  sanitary  personnel  will  pause,  if  the 
organization  is  movin^g,  only  so  long  as  is  necessary  to  give  appropri- 
ate first  aid  At  a  later  stage  of  the  combat,  when  the  movement 
of  the  organization  permits  and  when  justified  by  the  number  of 
wounded,  a  regimental  aid  station  is  established  and  operated. 

346.  When  combat  is  imminent,  the  station  for  slightly  wounded 
is  announced  in  division  orders,  and  thereafter  it  is  to  this  station 
that  all  disabled  men  able  to  walk  are  ordered  to  report.  They 
are  furnished  with  a  tag  shovdng  the  orders  given  them  by  the 
medical  officer  authorising  their  proceeding  to  this  station 

347.  The  evacuation  of  the  wounded  from  regimental  aid  sta- 
tions when  established,  and  the  evacuation  of  the  wounded  left  by 
the  organizations  during  an  advance  when  a  regimental  aid  station 
has  not  been  established,  devolves  on  the  personnel  of  the  sanitary 
train.  In  the  case  of  a  deliberate  attack  on  the  enemy  in  position 
or  when  our  forces  occupy  a  defensive  position,  the  positions  cf 
dressing  stations  are  fixed  in  orders  by  the  division  commander^ 
and  communicated  to  the  troops.  The  division  commander  in 
this  case  advises  the  commander  of  the  sanitary  train  as  to  the 
position  of  the  field  hospitals. 


142  SAISTITAEY  SERVICE. 

348.  In  the  case  of  a  rencontre  engagement,  the  work  of  establish- 
ing dressing  stations,  field  hospitals,  and  of  evacuating  wounded 
during  combat  from  the  dressing  station  to  the  field  hospital,  or  in 
certain  cases  directly  to  the  line  of  communications,  must  be  left 
to  a  great  extent  to  the  initiative  and  judgment  of  the  commander 
of  the  sanitary  train  and  his  subordinates.  To  this  end  the  com- 
mander of  the  sanitary  train  sends  forward  one  or  more  ambulance 
companies  to  make  contact  in  certain  prescribed  areas  with  the 
sanitary  formations  6t  the  combatant  units.  When  ambulance 
companies  have  been  assigned  positions  in  the  column  of  march  of 
combatant  troops,  they  are  ordinarily  utilized  in  this  work  The 
remaining  ambulance  companies  ordinarily  accompanied  by  one 
field  hospital  and  under  the  immediate  command  of  the  sanitary 
train  commander  follow,  and  are  held  together  in  reserve  at  a  cer- 
tain, prearranged  position  selected  by  the  sanitary  train  commander 
and  by  him  communicated  to  the  commander  of  the  ambulance 
companies  sent  ahead .  The  other  field  hospitals  remain  for  the  time 
being  under  the  control  of  the  commander  of  trains,  to  be  brought 
forward 'later  if  required.  The  ambulance  company  commanders 
ordered  to  make  contact  with  the  combatant  organizations  push 
forward  agents  for  the  purpose  of  sanitary  reconnaissance  and  for 
arranging  for  the  position  of  the  dressing  stations  and  for  deter- 
mining the  best  lines  of  approach  to  them  When  so  ordered 
they  establish  dressing  stations  and  commence  collecting  wounded 
from  the  different  regimental  aid  stations,  ultimately  sending 
them  back  to  the  field  hospital  at  the  prearranged  point.  The 
commander  of  the  sanitary  train  keeps  himself  advised  by  means 
of  agents  of  the  progress  and  development  of  the  battle  and  the 
number  of  casualties  in  certain  areas  and  from  these  reports  and 
from  orders  received  from  the  division  surgeon,  he  pushes  forward 
additional  ambulance  companies  when  required,  prescribing  the 
area  of  their  respective  activity  and  the  point  to  which  their 
wounded  are  to  be  transported.  At  the  same  time  he  may  order 
forward  such  additional  neld  hospitals  as  may  be  required. 

349.  Search  for  Woxinded. — ^After  an  engagement,  commanders 
organize  a  thorough  search  of  the  battle  field  in  their  vicinity  for 
the  wounded  and  assist  in  their  protection  and  removal.  The  dead 
are  collected  by  details  from  the  line  as  soon  as  practicable  after 
the  battle  and  disposed  of  as  the  commander  directs.  (See  also 
par  231.) 

>350.  Before  a  command  enters  upon  a  campaign,  every  member 
thereof  is  provided  with  an  identincation  tag  by  which  he  can  be 


ENGINEEE  TEAIN.  143 

identified  if  killed  or  ■wounded-  Such  tags  are  not  removed  from 
the  dead,  but  are  left  on  the  bodies  when  interred  or  otherwise 
disposed  of.  Tags  found  on  the  bodies  of  the  enemy's  dead  are 
collected  and  turned  over  to  the  commander  of  trains,  who  sends 
them  to  the  provost  marshal  at  the  base. 

361.  Betreat. — In  a  retreat  such  portion  of  the  sanitary  personnel 
of  the  division  as  is  required  will  remain  with  the  sick  and  wounded 
that  can  not  be  moved,  under  the  protection  of  the  Red  Cross  flag. 

362.  American  National  Bed  Cross  Association. — The  services 
of  this  association,  its  equipment  and  personnel  are  utilized  imder 
the  immediate  direction  of  medical  officers  to  the  greatest  extent 
possible  in  the  care  of  sick  and  wounded  in  the  service  of  the 
interior  and  on  the  line  of  communications.  Their  services  are  not 
utilized  in  the  zone  of  the  advance. 

363.  Badge,  of  Neutrality. — The  emblem  of  neutrality  is  a  red 
cross  on  a  white  ground.  All  persons  belonging  to  the  sanitary 
service,  including  the  red  cross  association  personnel  and  chaplains 
attached  to  the  army,  wear  on  the  left  arm  a  brassard  bearing  this 
emblem  stamped  ^  by  competent  authority.  Those  not  uniformed 
carry  a  certificate  of  identity  in  addition  to  the  brassard. 

All  sanitary  formations  and  establishments  display  a  red  rross 
flag  accompanied  by  the  national  flag.  At  night  the  position  of 
sanitary  formations  are  marked  by  green  lanterns. 

ENGINEER  TRAIN. 

354.  To  each  division  is  attached  an  engineer  train  which  carries 
heavy  intrenching  tools,  sandbags,  reserve  explosives,  and  other 
engineer  material  which  may  be  required  by  the  division  during 
certain  periods  of  combat      (See  par.  278.) 

356.  The  organization  and  operation  of  the  engineer  train  is  the 
duty  of  the  engineer  corps.  The  engineer  train  is  commanded  by 
the  senior  engineer  officer  present  with  it,  who,  upon  its  release 
from  the  control  of  the  commander  of  trains,  operates  it  in  accord- 
ance with  the  instructions  of  the  senior  engineer  officer  of  the 
division. 

356.  The  engineer  column  which  is  attached  to  the  advance  sec- 
tion Of  the  line  of  communications  includes  in  it  such  heavy  engi- 
neer equipment  as  may  be  required,  depending  upon  the  character 
of  operations  reasonably  probable,  i.  e.,  searchlights,  pile  drivers, 

I  For  form  of  certificate  see  Rules  of  Land  Warfare,  United  StattsArmy. 


144  ENGINEEE  TRAIN. 

map  reproduction  equipmenl,  reserve  of  heavy  intrenching  topls, 
etc. 

The  en^eer  column  may  be  temporarily  assigned  in  whole  or 
part  to  division^  or  to  operate  directly  under  the  orders  of  field 
army  headquarters  in  the  zone  of  the  advance.  WTien  so  assigned, 
it  is  for  the  time  being  removed  from  the  control  of  the  commander 
of  the  line  of  communications.  If  assigned  directly  to  field  army 
headquarters  it  operates  under  the  inmiediate  orders  of  the  chief 
engineer;  if  assigned  to  a  division,  it  forms  part  of  the  engineer 
train.  When  no  longer  required  in  the  zone  of  the  advance,  it  re- 
verts to  the  control  of  the  commander  of  the  line  of  communications. 
(See  par  27«>.) 


Article  V. 
THE  ZONE  OF  THE  UNE  OF  COMMUNICATIONS. 

GENERAL. 

367.  A  line  of  oommunications  is  establislied  for  each  important 
force  about  to  engage  in  field  operations  invohing  a  movement 
from  a  base. 

When  two  or  more  important  forces  are  operating  from  a  single 
ly&ne,  they  will  be  under  the  control  of  a  single  superior  commander, 
and  only  one  line  of  communications  will  be  operated  with  a  single 
base,  and  with  such  number  of  advance  sections  as  may  be  required 

358.  A  line  of  communications  is  not  organized  when  a  force  can 
safely  occupy  a  territory  without  military  operations  of  an  exten- 
sive character  In  this  case  administration  and  supply  naturally 
and  properly  follow  the  same  general  principles  as  vdth  troops  in 
the  home  country. 

359.  The  mission  of  ^he  tactical  units  and  administrative  groups 
assigned  to  a  line  of  communications  is  to  relieve  the  combatant 
field  force  as  far  as  possible  from  every  consideration  except  that  of 
defeating  the  enemy. 

360.  The  point  at  which  the  base  of  a  line  of  communications  is  to 
be  established  is  fixed  in  War  Department  orders,  upon  recom- 
mendation of  the  commander  of  the  field  forces.  The  personnel 
for  the  line  of  communications  comprises  groups  from  every  branch 
of  the  army  and  is  sent  ahead  by  the  commander  of  the  force  to 
secure  the  base,  and  to  make  all  arrangements  for  receiving,  sup- 
plying, and  forwarding  the  troops.  I^no  additional  personnel  for 
this  purpose  has  been  assigned  to  the  commander  by  higher 
authority,  he  details  the  necessary  officers  and  men  from  the  force 
under  his  command. 

861.  The  zone  of  the  line  of  communications  embraces  all 
territory  from  and  including  the  base  to  the  point  or  points  where 
contact  is  made  with  the  trains  of  the  combatant  field  forces. 
The  activities  of  the  line  of  communications  personnel  are  in 
general  limited  to  this  zone,  except  that  lines  Of  information  are 
extended  to  contact  with  the  headquarters  of  the  field  force, 

35379»— 14 10  145 


146  SERVICE  OF  DEFENSE,  L.  OF  C. 

and  that  ammunition,  supply,  sanitary,  and  engineer  columns  will 
be  pushed  forward  beyond  this  zone  when  necessary. 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  commander  of  the  line  of  communications 
to  advance  this  line  from  time  to  time  so  as  to  maintain  contact 
with  the  trains  of  the  field  forces. 

362.  Command. — All  troops,  military  estahlishments  and  per- 
sonnel in  the  zone  of  the  line  of  communications,  are  under  control 
of  its  commander,  except  such  as  may  be  specially  exempted  by 
War  Department  orders.  He  is  responsible  for  the  defense  of  the 
line  of  communications  and  for  the  government  of  that  portion 
of  the  zone  placed  under  military  control. 

363.  Administration  and  Conteol. — For  administration  and  con- 
trol the  line  of  communications  is  organized  as  follows: 

(a)  A  service  of  defense. 

(6)  A  supply,  sanitary,  and  telegraph  service. 

(c)  A  service  of  military  railways. 

The  senior  staff  officer  of  each  group  of  the  base  section  of  the 
supply,  sanitary,  and  telegraph  service  of  the  line  of  communica- 
tions acts  as  technical  adviser  of  the  commander  of  the  line  of 
communications  on  all  matters  relating  to  the  operation  of  his 
corps  within  the  zone  of  the  Une  of  communications. 

364.  Staff  officers  belonging  to  organizations  assigned  to  the 
service  of  defense  have  no  responsibilities  in  connection  with  the 
operations  of  the  supply,  sanitary,  and  tele^ph  service  other  than 
those  directly  connected  with  their  organizations. 

365.  Upon  arrival  at  the  base  all  persons  under  the  War  Depart- 
ment orders  or  with  authority  to  join  the  field  forces  come  at  once 
under  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  line  of  communications 
and  report  their  arrival  at  headquarters. 

Service  of  Defense. 

366.  Suitable  troops  are  assigned  to  duty  iinder  the  commander 
of  the  line  of  communications  and  are  charged  under  his  orders 
with  the  defense  of  the  line  of  communications  and  with  the 
protection  of  all  columns  pushed  out  by  the  advance  section  of  the 
supply,  sanitary,  and  telegraph  service.  This  territory  is  ordinarily 
divided  into  districts,  each  under  a  separate  commander  who  is 
responsible  for  the  defense  and  military  police  of  his  own  district. 
These  commanders  have  no  control  over  properly  authorized 
movements  along  the  line  of  communications,  of  personjiel,  animals 


8EKVICE  OF  PEFENSE,  L.  OF  C> 


U7 


148     SUPPLY,  SAiriTART,  ASD  TELEGRAPH  SERVIC^E. 

or  mat^nel,  except  in  case  of  imminent  danger  from  the  enemy 
They  are  then  reeponsible  that  traffic  is  stopped  until,  in  their 
opinion,  it  may  be  safely  resumed,  or  until  orders  frorii  superior 
authority  are  received.  The  action  taken  will  be  at  once  reported 
by  telegraph  to  the  chief  of  staff  of  the  line  of  communications. 
Troops,  ammunitions,  or  supplies  going  to  the  front  are  not  to  be 
diverted  for  the  use  of  the  Lme  of  communications  troops,  except 
by  authority  of  the  commander  of  the  line  of  communications 

367  When  pjrmored  trains  are  used  their  crews  will  form  part 
of  the  line  of  communications  troops  and  are  under  the  direct  orders 
of  the  commander  of  the  district  in  which  they  are  operating 
Railway  traffic  is  not  to  be  interfered  with  by  the  use  of  armored 
trains  except  in  the  face  of  imminent  danger  from  the  enemy 

Supply,  Sanitary,  and  Telegraph  Service. 

368.  The  commander  of  the  line  of  communications  is  in  charge 
of  all  supply  and  sanitary  matters  and  of  the  construction  and 
maintenance  of  all  lines  of  information  within  the  limits  of  his 
command 

He  is  responsible  that  the  reserv^e  of  supplies  on  hand  m  his 
various  depots  shall  be  maintained  between  the  maximum  and 
minimum  amounts  fixed  by  the  commander  of  the  field  forces. 
He  furnishes  the  War  Department  a  copy  of  a  list  of  the  stores 
required,  showing  the  maximum  and  minimum  amounts  to  be  kept 
on  hand,  and  keeps  the  War  Department  informed  of  the  amount 
of  funds  needed  for  the  prosecution  of  his  work.  He  forwards  his 
requisitions  for  supplies  not  procurable  in  the  theater  of  operations 
to  the  War  Department  or  to  such  depots  as  the  War  Department 
may  designate  for  furnishing  particular  supplies. 

He  prepares  and  enforces  stringent  regulations  for  the  physical 
examination  of  officers  and  enlisted  men,  who  are  sick  or  wounded, 
to  the  end  that  the  force  in  the  theater  of  operations  suffers  no 
depletion  incident  to  the  return  to  the  home  country  of 
malingerers,  or  those  who  within  a  reasonable  length  of  time 
will  be  able  to  return  to  duty. 

369.  For  purposes  of  control  and  coordination  of  the  supply, 
sanitary  and  telegraph  service,  a  line  of  communications  is  ordi- 
narily divided  into  sections  as  follows  A  base  section  and  an 
advance  section,  each  with  an  assistant  chief  of  staff  m  charge  com- 
petent to  issue  orders  in  the  name  of  the  commander  of  the  line  of 
communications.    In  certain  unusual  cases,  due  to  an  extensive 


SUPPIY,  SANITAEY,  AND  TELEaRAPH  SEEVICE.     149 


150     STTPPLT,  SAinXAEY,  AKI>  TELSOSAFH  SEEYICE. 

prolongation  of  the  line  of  communications,  an  intermediate  sec- 
tion may  be  required  An  advance  section  is  required  at  the  head 
of  each  important  route  of  supply  diverging  from  the  base. 

370.  The  operations  of  a  base  or  intermediate  section  extend  up 
to,  but  do  not  include,  the  depots,  sanitary  units,  and  telegraph 
stations  of  the  next  section  in  advance.  Each  section  provides  for 
the  supply  of  the  line  of  communication  troops  within  its  limits. 
So  far  as  possible  formal  accountability  is  terminated  and  replaced 
by  a  system  of  responsibility  when  supplies  are  turned  over  to 
troops  or  trains  in  the  zone  of  the  advance  and  to  troops  and  trains 
of  the  section  of  defense  in  the  zone  of  the  line  of  communication. 
Commanders  and  staff  officers  of  all  grades  are  resjwnsible  for  the 
proper  use  and  disposition  of  supplies  issued  to  their  organizations 
and  for  supplies  temporarily  in  their  charge. 

371.  If  no  service  of  military  railways  be  oi^anized,  it  is  the  func- 
tion of  the  base  section  to  provide  ana  operate  the  necessary  means 
of  transport  or  to  make  shipments  by  commercial  means  between 
the  base  and  the  section  next  in  advance  Under  similar  condi- 
tions it  is  the  function  of  intermediate  sections,  if  operated,  to 
connect  in  the  same  manner  with  the  section  next  in  advance. 

J  372.  All  personnel  necessary  to  the  proper  fimctioning  of  the  sup- 
ply, sanitary,  and  telegraph  service  report  at  the  base  for  assign- 
ment to  duty  Here  advance  and  intermediate  sections  are  organ- 
ized and  sent  forward  as  required. 

373.  Base  Section. — ^The  assistant  chief  of  staff  with  the  base 
section  is  charged  with  coordinating  the  work  of  the  quartermaster, 
medical,  engineer,  ordnance,  and  signal  base  groups. 

He  is  informed  of  the  probable  requirements  of  the  advance  and 
intermediate  sections,  transmits  this  information  to  the  officers  in 
charge  of  the  various  groups  and  issues  the  orders  for  meeting 
these  requirements. 

874.  All  requisitions  are  visaed  by  the  assistant  chief  of  staff  of 
the  base  section  before  being  transmitted  to  the  point  from  which 
supplies  are  furnished. 

876.  All  suppUes  (except  those  for  the  service  of  militarv  rail- 
ways) shipped  mto  the  base  either  for  use  of  the  field  forces  or  ror  the 
troops  of  the  line  of  communication  are  consigned  to  the  "Quarter- 
master," "Surgeon,"  etc  ,  at  the  base. 

376.  Advance  Section. — The  assistant  chief  of  staff  with  the 
advance  section  is  charged  with  coordinating  the  work  of  the  quar- 
termaster, mediclal,  engineer,  ordnance,  and  signal  advance  groups. 
The  operations  of  these  groups  extend  to  and  include  the  refill- 


SEEVICE  OF  MILITARY  RAILWAYS,  1.  OF  C.  161 

ing  points  of  the  division  supply  trains,  the  evacuation  points  for 
sick  and  wounded,  and,  in  certain  instances,  to  the  distributing 
points.  (See  par.  287.)  The  signal  advance  group  establishes  and 
maintains  lines  of  information  with  the  headquarters  of  the  field 
forces. 

377.  To  the  advance  section  are  attached  ammunition,  supply, 
sanitary,  and  engineer  columns.  The  strength  and  composition  of 
these  columns  are  dependent  upon  the  character  of  operations  rea- 
sonably probable.    (See  par.  279.) 

378.  The  position  of  the  advance  depot  is  fixed  from  time  to  time 
by  the  commander  of  the  field  forces.  The  headquarters  of  the 
advance  section  is  at  the  advance  depot  and  it  is  with  the  assistant 
chief  of  staff  at  this  point  that  the  commanders  in  advance  make 
all  arrangements  for  the  evacuation  of  sick  and  wounded,  and  for 
supply. 

Ordinarily  the  advance  depot  will  be  on  a  line  of  raihroad,  and 
as  near  the  field  forces  as  possible.  In  consequence,  it  is  more  or 
less  exposed  to  the  enemy  and,  therefore,  an  undue  accumulation 
of  supplies  at  this  point  is  undesirable. 

The  positions  of  refilling,  rendezvous,  and  evacuation  points  either 
may  be  fixed  by  the  commander  of  the  field  forces  or  he  may  dele- 
gate in  orders  this  authority  to  division  commanders.    (See  par 
288.) 

379.  The  allowance  of  transportation  fixed  by  regulations  for  the 
divisional  trains  is  that  needed  for  carrying  mobile  reserves  and 
for  bringing  up  from  the  line  of  communications  ammunition, 
rations,  and  grain,  and  for  the  temporary  care  only  of  sick  and 
wounded .  For  all  other  classes  of  supplies,  for  the  evacuation.of  the 
sick  and  wounded,  and  for  special  engineer  equipment,  transporta- 
tion must,  therefore,  be  provided  by  the  different  columns  attached 
to  the  advance  section. 

Service  of  Military  Railways. 

380.  A  service  of  military  railways  is  organized  when  extensive 
military  operations  of  a  field  force  are  dependent  on  a  line  or  lines 
of  railway  for  its  supply  in  advance  of  the  base.  The  construction, 
operation,  and  maintenance  of  these  railways  is  a  duty  of  the  CJorps 
of  Engineers. 

This  service  takes  over  from  the  field  force  all  railways  captured, 
assuming  charge  of  their  reconstruction,  operation,  and  mainte- 
nance. It  is  also  charged  with  the  construction  of  new  railway 
lines  necessary  for  the  supply  of  the  field  forces.    It  is  controlled 


162  SEEVICE  OF  MILITARY  RAILWAYS,  L.  OF  C. 

and  directed  by  an  officer  detailed  as  director  of  railways,  with  a 
military  controlling  staff  and  an  operating  and  constructing  staff. 

The  director  of  railways  is  a  member  of  the  staff  of  the  com- 
mander of  the  line  of  communications  and  is  responsible  to  that 
commander  for  the  successful  operation,  maintenance,  and  construc- 
tion of  the  military  railways.  He  receives  his  orders  from  that  com- 
mander and  takes  the  necessary  steps  to  have  them  executed  by 
his  subordinates. 

No  military  officer  not  attached  to"  the  service  of  military  rail- 
ways is  allowed  to  give  any  orders  to  subordinates  of  the  latter 
service  or  to  interfere  in  any  manner  with  the  running  of  trains, 
except  in  the  case  of  an  impending  attack.     (See  par.  366.) 

381-  The  military  controlling  staff  is  composed  of  such  miUtary 
assistants  to  the  director  of  railways  as  the  military  conditions  and 
the  railway  facilities  require-  Their  duty  is  to  represent  the  di- 
rector of  railways  in  the  various  departments  or  subdivisions  of  the 
railway  to  which  they  may  be  assigned,  to  facilitate  and  insure 
the  execution  of  the  approved  plans  for  the  working  of  the  rail- 
ways, and  to  supply  the  military  knowledge  not  possessed  by  the 
civilian  officials  and  operators. 

If  two  or  more  lines  of  militaiy  railway  exist,  a  member  of  the 
military  controlling  staff,  called  an  assistant  director  of  railways, 
may  be  assigned  to  each  line  and  made  responsible  to  the  director 
of  railways  for  its  successful  operation,  maintenance,  and  construc- 
tion The  director  of  railways  in  this  case  is  responsible  for  the 
supervision  of  and  cooperation  between  the  several  lines. 

If  any  single  line  becomes  long  enough  to  subdivide  into  aivi' 
dons,  military  conditions  may  require  that  a  member  of  the  con- 
trolling staff  be  assigned  to  one  or  more  of  these  divisions.  In 
this  case  he  is  responsible  to  his  next  military  rail wa/ superior  for 
its  successful  operation  and  maintenance. 

At  such  imjjortant  railway  points  as  may  be  necessary  there  will 
be  assigned  railway  staff  officers,  each  of  whom  will  be  responsible 
to  his  next  military  railway  superior  for  facilitating  and  expediting 
the  railway  operations  at  his  station. 

The  work  of  reconstruction  at  the  railhead  will  ordinarily  be 
kept  separate  from  the  other  work  on  the  line  in  rear  and  will  be 
done  by  tiX)ops,  with  such  civilian  assistance  as  is  procurable. 
The  officer  in  charge  of  this  work  will  be  directly  under  the  mili- 
tary head  of  the  hne  of  railway  on  which  he  is  working  and  is 
responsible  for  the  prompt  reconstruction  of  the  line.  ^  As  rapidly 
us  practicable  such  reconstmction  sections  will  be  assigned  to  the 
division  immediately  in  rear  for  operation  and  maintenance. 


SERVICE  OP  MILITARY  RAILWAYS.  L.  OF  C. 


153 


154  CHANNELS  OF  COEEESFONDENCE,  L.  OF  C. 

382.  The  staff  of  civilian  assistants  wiU  consist  of  such  railway 
officials,  operatives,  and  other  employees  as  may  be  available  or 
necessary  for  the  proper  working  of  the  inilitary  railways.  As  far 
as  military  conditions  will  permit,  civilians  will  be  used  for  the 
operation,  maintenance,  and  construction  of  the  military  railways, 
officers  and  soldiers  being  used  only  when  military  conditions 
render  it  necessary  These  civilians  are  subject  to  military  super- 
vision, and  will  be  responsible  in  their  various  departments  and 
subdivisions  for  executing  the  duties  assigned  to  them  in  accord- 
ance with  the  plans  of  the  director  of  railways 

383  The  relations  between  the  ci\dlians  of  the  railway  service, 
except  as  modified  by  the  director  of  railways,  will  be  such  as  exist 
between  those  of  corresponding  grades  on  an  ordinary  railway 
The  military  staff  receive  their  orders  and  instructions  from  their 
next  higher  military  railway  superiors,  and  are  subject  to  them 
only  Each  member  of  this  staff  is  the  mihtary  adviser  of  the 
senior  civilian  in  charge  of  the  department  or  subdivision  to  which 
he  is  assigned  He  will  ordinarily  leave  the  actual  working  of  the 
road  to  his  civil  colleague,  advising  him  of  the  ends  desired  and  the 
military  conditions  involved,  and  will  intervene  in  the  actual 
working  of  the  road  only  when  convinced  that  the  civilian  is  not 
taking  the  necessary  steps  to  meet  the  requirements.  The  officer's 
decision  on  matters  within  his  own  department  or  subdivision  can 
be  overruled  only  by  his  next  military  railway  superior 

384.  The  militai-y  railway  supply  depots  are  operated  and  main- 
tained under  the  director  of  railways  by  the  railway  staff  All 
railway  supplies  and  materials  shipped  into  the  base  will  be  con- 
signed to  the  "director  of  railways." 

Channels  of  Correspondence. 

386.  The  commander  of  the  line  of  communications  must  have 
the  greatest  possible  freedom  of  action  with  reference  to  communi- 
cating with  the  War  Department  on  matters  of  routine. 

All  such  communications  will  be  signed  "By  authority  of  the 
commander  of  the  field  forces "  and  will  in  general  be  confined  to 
the  following  subjects,  viz: 

(a)  Arrangements  for  maintaining  the  supply  of  stores  and  animals. 
(6)  Matters  relating  to  fiscal  affairs  or  requirements.  , 

(c)  Irregularities,  defects  and  deficiencies  which  come  to  his  attention  in 

the  territorial  or  administrative  zone  to  the  rear  of  the  base. 
((f)  Arrangements  for  augmenting  or  replacing  the  staff  and  civilian  per- 
sonnel of  the  line  of  communications. 
(«)  Arrangements  for  the  evacuation  of  prisoners  and  of  sick  and  wounded 
from  the  bas^. 


CHANNELS  OF  COEEESPONDENCE,  L.  OF  C.  155 

After  the  system  of  supply  and  evacuation  of  sick  and  wounded 
has  been  fixed  by  the  commander  of  the  field  forces,  the  commander 
of  the  line  of  communications  and  the  assistant  chief  of  staff  of  each 
advance  section  are  authorized  to  communicate  directly  with  the 
commanders  whom  they  are  ordered  to  supply  on  all  detail  matters 
relating  to  supply,  evacuation  of  woundea,  and  maintenance  of 
lines  of  information.  Inversely,  euch  commanders  are  authorized 
to  communicate  with  the  assistant  chief  of  staff  of  the  advance 
section  in  their  immediate  rear  or  with  the  commander  of  the  line 
of  communications  on  the  s^me  subjects. 


Article  VI. 

TRANSPORTATION  BY  RAIL. 

886.  Troops  may  be  moved  by  rail  over  commercial  railways  or 
over  military  railways.  The  former  condition  will  obtain  in  all 
movements  in  time  of  peace,  and  for  most  concentration  movements 
in  time  of  war.  The  latter  condition  will  always  obtain  in  the  the- 
ater of  military  operations,  and  may  obtain  in  concentration  move- 
ments in  our  own  territory. 

TRAVEL  ON  COMMERCIAL  RAILWAYS. 

387.'  "In  time  of  war  or  threatened  war  preference  and  preced- 
ence shall,  upon  the  demand  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States,  be  o^iven,  over  all  other  traffic,  to  the  transportation  of 
troops  and  materiel  of  war,  and  carriers  sliall  adopt  every  means 
within  their  control  to  facilitate  and  expedite  the  military  traffic." 

388.  The  movement  of  troops  and  their  eqmpment  over  commer- 
cial railways  is  the  function  of  the  Quartermaster  Corps,  who  plan 
and  prepare  for  the  move  in  conformity  with  regulations  and  ordera 
from  competent  authority. 

389.  Oraers  covering  such  movements  should  give  an  exact  re- 
turn of  the  command,  and  transportation  will  be  furnished  at  the 
rate  oJP  3  men  to  each  section  in  tourist  sleepers,  or  3  men  to 
each  two  seats  in  day  coaches.  When  day  coaches  are  used 
for  journeys  of  over  24  hours*  duration,  if  practicable  a  seat 
will  be  provided  for  each  man. 

390.  Whenever  organizations  are  moved  by  rail,  with  their  ani-' 
mals,  equipment,  and  materiel,  it  is  desirable  that  complete  unita 
be  kept  together  in  trains  divided  into  convenient  train  sections. 
It  is  preferable  to  have  trains  of  moderate  size  with  good  speed 
rather  than  long  trains  with  low  speed. 

If  it  is  necessary  to  divide  a  train,  some  oflScers  and  men  will 
accompany  each  section.  The  troops  should  not  be  separated 
from  the  animals  if  it  can  be  avoided;  out  if  the  animals  are  shipped 

»  Extract  from  Chap.  3591,  Part  1,  Vol.  XXXIV,  Statutes  at  Large  of  the  United 
States  of  America. 

156 


TRATEI.  ON  COUUERCIAL  RAILWAYS.  157 

in  separatte  sections  selected  detachments  under  officers  accompany 
them,  and  such  sections  will  precede  the  troops. 

391.  When  supplies  are  shipped  to  mobiliZ/ation  or  concentration 
camps,  the  contents  of  each  car  will  be  marked  or  placarded  on  the 
outside  of  the  car,  and  the  latter,  when  practicable,  is  also  marked 
with  the  name  of  the  organi?;ation  to  which  the  supplies  are  sent. 

892.  Preparation  of  Cars. — Upon  receipt  of  orders  for  the  move- 
ment of  troops  by  rail,  the  officer  charged  with  supplying  the 
transportation  arranges  with  tiie  railroad  authorities  for  the  neces- 
sary cars.  He  procures  Usta,  with  weights,  of  all  property  to  be 
shipped  and  maizes  out  the  bills  of  lading,  provides  loading  facili- 
ties and  material  for  blocking  and  lashing,  and  constructs  the  nec- 
essary ram|)s. 

Upon  arrival  of  the  cars,  he  inspects  to  see  if  they  conform  to  the 
terms  of  the  contract,  and  reports  the  result  of  his  inspection  to  the 
commander. 

Stock  cars  are  inspected  with  especial  care  to  see  that  they  are 
in  good  order  throughout.  Projecting  nails,  bolts,  and  splinters, 
loose  boards  and  rotten  flooring,  broken  fixtures  on  hayracks,  doors, 
or  troughs,  are  sources  of  danger  or  discomfort  to  the  animals  and  of 
loss  to  the  Government.  The  cars  should  be  clean  before  loading, 
and  suitable  noninflammable  footing  be  provided. 

Passenger  cars  must  be  clean,  fully  supplied  with  water  and  ice, 
and  sufficiently  lighted  and  heated.  The  urinals  and  closets  must 
be  in  good  condition,  well  supplied  with  water  and  toilet  paper, 
and  the  sleeping  accommodations  must  be  according  to  contract. 

After  the  cars  have  been  accepted,  the  number  of  men  allotted' 
to  each  is  marked  on  the  side  or  steps.  The  cars  are  then  assigned 
to  organizations  and  plainly  marked. 

3^3.  Loading  and  Entraining.— At  the  proper  time  loading  is 
beffun  and  is  carried  on,  usually  by  the  troops,  pursuant  to  the 
orders  of  the  commander  Heavy  property  may  be  loaded  by 
details  before  the  arrival  of  the  troops. 

Artillery  and  otiier  carriages  are  made  secure  by  lashings  and  by 
nailing  blocks  of  wood  to  the  flooring  under  the  wheels. 

The  arrival  of  troops  at  the  station  should  be  timed  so  that  there 
will  be  no  delay  in  waiting  for  cars.  When  the  barrack,  camp, 
or  bivouac  is  not  more  than  a  mile  from  the  station,  troops  are  not 
required  to  fall  in  until  notice  has  been  received  that  the  cars  are 
at  the  station  and  have  been  inspected  and  assigned.  The  com- 
mand is  then  marched  to  the  train  and  the  property  and  animals 
loaded.    The  organizations  are  then  march^  opposite  their  cars 


158  TRAVEL  ON  COMMEECIAL  EAILWAYS. 

and  entxained.  The  cars  are  entered  simultaneously,  each  com- 
pany commander  distributing  his  men  according  to  the  assign^ 
ment.    Noncommissioned  ofl&cers  have  seats  near  the  doors. 

Troops  traveling  by  train  in  time  of  peace  seldom  require  their 
arms  or  all  of  their  equipment.  For  instance,  when  sleepers  are 
provided  they  generally  requite  no  equipment  other  than  their 
canteens  and  haversacks,  the  mess  kits  and  necessary  toilet  arti- 
cles being  carried  in  the  latter.  For  mounted  troops  the  saddle- 
bags take  the  place  of  haversacks.  A  few  revolvers  or  rifles  suffice 
for  the  nece^ary  guard  duty.  Therefore,  to  add  to  the  comfort 
of  the  men,  train  commanders  may  cause  the  arms  and  equip- 
ments not  required  en  route  to  be  properly  secured  and  stored 
in  a  property  or  baggage  car. 

Mounted  troops  dismount  upon  arrival  and  remove  the  horse 
equipments,  except  the  halter.  Each  man's  equipment,  except 
halter,  canteen,  and  saddlebags,  is  then  securely  tied  in  a  gunny 
sack,  or  other  suitable  receptaclej  marked  with  the  number  of 
the  man  and  letter  of  his  troop,  and  loaded  in  the  proper  car. 
Each  troop,  except  the  horse  holders,  is  then  marched  to  its  cars 
where  the  men  deposit  their  arms  (if  not  otherwise  disposed  of), 
canteens,  and  saddlebags.  It  then  marches  back,  relieves  the 
horse  holders,  and  loads  the  horses.  The  horse  holders,  unless 
otherwise  ordered,  repair  to  their  cars,  carrying  their  arms  (if 
left  with  them),  canteens,  and  saddlebags.  For  short  journeys 
the  horses  may  be  loaded  saddled  (stirrups  crossed)  and  bridled, 
or  the  bridles  may  be  tied  on  the  saddles. 

In  the  field  artillery  a  similar  method  is  pursued.  The  harness 
is  usually  tied  up  in  sets,  plainly  marked,  and  loaded  in  a  box 
car 

Animals  can  be  conveniently  loaded  through  chutes  of  stock- 
yards, or  from  freight  platforms  level  with  the  car  floors.  In 
other  cases  portable  or  improvised  ramps  will  have  to  be  used. 
When  it  is  likely  that  the  animals  will  have  to  be  unloaded  at 
places  without  facilities,  one  or  more  portable  ramps,  or  the  mate- 
rial for  improvising  them,  should  be  carried  on  the  train.  The 
loading  should  proceed  without  noise  or  confusion,  the  animals 
being  led  quietly  to  the  car  door  and  turned  over  to  the  four  men, 
two  for  each  end,  who  do  the  loading.  The  animals  should  be 
packed  as  closely  as  possible,  except  in  very  hot  weather  Halters 
are  not  removed.  Gentle  animals  should  be  placed  opposite  the 
doors,  and  are  therefore  loaded  last.  Alternate  animaLs  should 
face  in  opposite  directions. 


TRAVEL  ON  COMMERCIAL  RAILWAYS.  159 

394.  The  time  required  for  loading  each  train  depends  upon  the 
railroad  facilities  and  upon  the  experience  of  the  troops.  For 
troops  leaving  station  to  go  into  the  field,  or  changing  station  in 
the  field,  the  time  required  should  not  exceed — 

One  hour  for  infantry 

One  and  one-half  hours  for  cavalry  and  light  artillery. 

Two  hours  lor  heavy  artillery  and  for  engineers  with  bridge  train 

396.  All  movements  of  the  troops  in  loading,  entraining,  and 
detraining,  feeding  and  watering,  and  exercising  men  and  horses 
are  made,  as  a  rule,  in  military  formation  and  pursuant  to  com- 
mand, thus  avoiding  confusion  and  saving  time. 

396.  Conduct  of  the  Troops. — Delays  caused  by  the  troops, 
whether  in  loading  and  entraining  or  during  the  journey,  are 
inexcusable.  They  interfere  with  railroad  schedules  and  are 
a  source  of  great  annoyance. 

The  commander  is  the  sole  intermediary  between  the  troops 
and  the  railroad  personnel  In  case  of  deficiencies  and  other 
matters  requiring  correction,  he  addresses  himself  to  the  official- 
in  charge  only. 

The  senior  noncommissioned  officer  in  each  car  is  responsible 
for  cleanliness  and  good  order  Spitting  on  the  floors,  defacing 
woodwork  and  windows,  and  every  species  of  disorder  must  be 
prevented 

The  commander  may  station  sentinels  at  the  doors  of  each  car 
to  prevent  the  entrance  of  unauthorized  persons  and  to  keep  sol- 
diers from  riding  on  the  steps,  platforms,  or  tops  of  cars,  and  from 
leaving  without  permission  If  it  is  desirable  to  exercise  the  troops, 
they  should  leave  the  cars  in  a  body,  under  their  officers. 

Smoking  is  prohibited  in  cars  loaded  with  animals  or  forage. 

397  In  movements  by  rail  kitchen  cars  are  provided,  if  practi- 
cable, otherwise,  baggage  cars  are  fitted  up  by  the  troops  or  arrange- 
ments are  made  for  procuring  meals,  or  at  least  liquid  coffee,  at 
stations  en  route 

Careful  attention  is  paid  to  the  messing  of  the  men,  whether  in 
kitchen  cars  or  in  the  coaches  where  the  men  ride  A  mess  officer 
supervise?  the  preparation  and  serving  of  the  meals  and  requires 
the  men  to  keep  their  mess  kits  scrupulously  clean. 

398  When  the  stock  cars  provided  are  such  that  the  animals  can 
be  fed  and  watered  on  the  trains,  it  is  unnecessary  to  unload  them 
for  exercise  or  recuperation  unless  the  weather  is  very  hot  and  the 
journey  long. 


160  TRAVEL  ON  MILITAItT  RAILWAYS. 

399.  On  account  of  danger  from  fire,  neither  hay  nor  straw  is 
carried  in  stock  care.  A  short  ration  of  grain  (about  6  pounds)  is 
sufficient  to  supply  animals  while  traveling  by  rail. 

400.  On  occasions  when  troops  have  been  allowed  or  required  to 
leave  the  train  for  exercise  or  duty,  the  commander  will  cause  the 
"assembly"  to  be  sounded  five  minutes  before  departure. 

401.  DfttrainlTig  and  TTnloading. — ^The  train  schedule  is  arranged, 
when  practicable,  for  arrival  at  destination  in  the  morning.  The 
troops  are  notifi^ed  in  time  to  prepare  for  detraining. 

The  officers  and  guard  are  the  first  to  leave  the  cars.  The  com- 
mander meets  the  staff  officer  sent  to  the  train,  receives  instruc- 
tions, if  any,  gets  his  bearing^  and  orders  the  troops  to  detrain.  As 
soon  as  the  passenger  coaches  or  sleeping  cars  are  empty,  the  quar- 
termaster, or  a  si>ecially  designated  officer,  accompanied  by  the 
conductor,  if  practicable,  makes  an  inspection  of  the  cars  and 
notes  their  condition;  the  result  is  reported  to  the  commander. 

The  troojjs  prociu*e  their  field  kits  and  march  to  camp  without 
delay,  leaving  suitable  details  to  unload  and  bring  up  the  prop- 
erty If  the  camp  is  distant,  arms  are  stacked  and  a  part  or  all  of 
the  command  unloads  the  train 

In  the  cavalry  the  men  are  marched  to  the  vicinity  of  the  stock 
oars,  where  the  saddlebags  and  canteens  are  placed  in  line  on  the 
ground,  under  guard.  The  remaining  articles  of  the  field  kit  and 
horse  equipments  are  then  unloaded  and  placed  with  the  pre- 
ceding articles.  The  horses  are  then  unloaded,  saddled,  and  the 
troops  formed. 

Animals  are  unloaded  quietly,  each  one  being  led  to  the  opening 
80  that  his  body  will  be  athwart  the  car  before  leaving  it. 

The  command  may  be  marched  to  camp  at  once,  if  near  the 
station;  otherwise,  picket  lines  are  stretched,  or  the  horses  are  held 
while  the  property  is  unloaded. 

Artillery  unloads  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  of  cavalry, 

402.  On  account  of  accidents,  freight  blockades,  or  action  of  the 
enemy,  it  miiy  be  necessary  to  unload  in  the  open  country.  In 
such  cases  portable  or  improvised  ramps  will  nave  to  be  used. 
Lacking  these,  the  train  may  be  stopped  in  a  low  cut,  and  crossties, 
baled  hay,  car  doors,  and  turf  utilized  for  the  rapid  construction 
of  ramps  of  sufficient  height  to  permit  unloading  of  animals. 

TRAVEL  ON   MILITARY  RAlLW.\YS. 

403.  Method  of  Requisitioning  for  Railway  Transportation. — 
Kequisitious  should  reach  the  military  controlling  staff  a&  early  as 


TRAVEL  ON  MHJTARY  RAILWAYS.  161 

possible  and  should  give  concise  data  as  to  the  number  of  officers 
and  men,  animals,  guns,  vehicles,  and  supplies  that  will  be  in- 
volved in  the  movement.  After  the  program  for  the  movement 
has  been  settled,  changes  should  be  avoided  as  far  as  practicable 

404.  The  authority  consigning  animals  or  matMel  for  shipment 
will  be  responsible  for  loading  them  and  for  furnishing  attendance 
and  foi-age  for  the  aninials  while  en  route.  Ordinary  shipments  of 
supplies  or  materiel  will  be  turned  over  to  the  railway  authorities 
and  will  be  shipped  on  an  ordinary  bill  of  lading  Important  ship- 
ments may  be  accompanied  by  a  representative  of  the  department 
interested,  and  by  a  representative  of  the  operating  department. 

406.  The  commander  of  the  line  of  communications  will  issue 
regulations  concerning  movements  of  military  and  civil  passengers 
over  the  military  railways  If  necessary  to  the  enforcement  of 
these  regulations  naiUtary  police  of  the  service  of  defense  will  be 
placed  on  duty  on  trains  and  at  stations  for  this  purpose 

406.  Hospital  Trains. — Hospital  trains  will  be  fitted  up  on  each 
line  of  military  railway  The  necessary  sanitary  personnel  and 
special  equipment  will  be  supplied  fr(3m  the  base  section  of  the 
supply,  sanitary  and  telegi-aph  services  of  the  line  of  communica- 
tions As  far  as  practicable  such  trains.  Or  other  trains  carrying 
sick  and  wounded  who  can  travel  sitting  up,  will  leave  the  railhead 
at  certain  fixed  hours  daily 

In  anticipation  of  an  engagement,  rolling  stock  for  special  hospi- 
tal trains  will  be  collected  and  fittea  up  by  the  director  of  rail'ways 
at  suitable  points  to  meet  the  probable  needs.  At  stations  where 
sick  and  wounded  are  to  be  entrained  and  detrained,  rest  stations 
will  be  organized,  under  instructions  from  the  commander  of  the 
line  of  communications,  by  the  supply,  sanitary,  and  telegraph 
services  of  the  Une  of  communications- 

407.  Troop  Movements  by  Rail. — In  so  far  as  may  be  practicable, 
troops  will  be  moved  on  a  military  railway  in  the  same  manner  as 
on  a  commercial  railway,  and  the  general  principles  given  in  Travel 
on  Commercial  Railways  will  be  followed ;  but  such  conditions  will 
not  usually  obtain,  and  troops  will  often  have  to  be  moved  in 
freight  eqiiipment  or  packed  into  day  coaches  far  in  excess  of  the 
numbers  given  for  peace  movements.  Rapidity  of  movement  and 
economy  of  rolling  stock  will  take  precedence  over  the  comfort  of 
the  troops  whenever  necessary 

408.  Troops  in  the  theater  of  operations  carry  with  them  on  rail- 
way trains  only  such  supplies,  equipment,  etc.,  as  can  be  promptly 

36379«-H U 


168  TBAVEL  ON  MIIITABY  RAILWAYS. 

moved  away  with  the  troops  at  the  detraining  station,  or,  in  other 
words,  that  which  is  authorized  to  be  carried  on  the  men  and  ani- 
mals, and  in  the  combat  and  field  trains. 

When  large  bodies  of  troops  are  moved  by  rail,  staff  officers,  with 
representatives  of  the  various  units  and  departments,  should  pre- 
cede the  troops  to  the  destination,  in  order  to  make  arrangements 
to  receive  the  troops,  and  insure  their  prompt  movement  away  from 
the  detraining  pomt. 

409.  In  drawing  up  orders  for  the  movement  of  troops  by  rail,  the 
following  points  should  be  clearly  stated: 

(o)  Date,  place  of  entraining,  destination,  route  to  be  followed. 

lb)  Hours  of  departure  of  trains;  time  at  wluch  troops  should  reach  the 
entraining  place,  route  that  they  should  follow. 

(c)  Details  in  regard  to  feeding  of  troops,  and  watering  and  feeding  animals 
en  route. 

(i)  Places  of  assembly  near  entraining  and  detraining  stations. 

(0  Schedule  showing  assignment  of  troops,  animals,  and  vehicles  to  differ- 
ent trains. 

Troops  will  not  occupy  railway  buildings  or  use  the  railway 
facilities  or  property  without  authority  from  the  railway  staff 
officers. 

410.  Duties  of  a  Commander  of  a  Troop  Train. — ^An  officer  from 
each  unit,  supplied  with  a  copy  of  the  order  directing  the  movement 
and  a  field  return  of  the  troops  involved,  should  be  sent  ahead  to 
the  entraining  point  to  "^ascertain  from  the  railway  staff  officer 
the  arrangements  for  the  entraining  of  his  unit.  He  will  communi- 
cate his  information  to  his  commander  before  the  troops  reach  the 
station,  and  will  then  act  as  guide  to  the  unit  in  reaching  its  trains. 
The  commander  of  troops  to  be  moved  by  rail  will  retain  the  original 
copy  of  his  order. 

The  senior  officer  on  everjr  special  troop  train  is  responsible  that 
crder  is  maintained,  and  will  furnish  the  railway  operatives  the 
necessary  force  to  carry  out  the  regulations.  He  will  detail  a  guard 
on  every  troop  train  to  take  charge  of  prisoners,  property,  etc.,  and 
to  furnish  sentries,  as  required,  at  entraining  and  detraining  points, 
and  at  stations  en  route.  He  is  responsible  that  the  regulations  of 
the  railway  service  are  observed.  Except  when  necessary,  on  ac- 
count of  actual  or  threatened  attack  by  the  enemy,  he  will  not  inter- 
fere with  the  working  of  the  railway  service.  If  an  attack  is  antici- 
pated, an  oflScer  should  ride  on  the  locomotive  to  inform  the  engi- 
neer when,  for  tactical  reasons,  it  is  desirable  to  stop  the  train. 


Article  VII. 
MILITARY  POLICE. 

411.  The  duty  of  military  police  is  to  enforce  all  police  regu- 
lations in  the  theater  of  operations  and  in  mobilization  and  con- 
centration camps  They  protect  the  inhabitants  of  the  country 
from  pillage  and  violence  and  prevent  excesses  of  all  kinds;  keep 
all  roads  clear;  arrest  all  soldiers  and  civilian  employees  absent 
without  proper  authority  from  their  organizations;  arrest  all  maraud- 
ers, and  collect  all  stragglers  and  hand  them  over  to  their  organiza- 
tions. They  keep  a  list  and  description  of  all  camp  retainers  anct 
followers  and  watch  their  conduct.  They  are  charged  with  reliev- 
ing organizations  from  the  care  of  prisoners  of  war  and  with  their 
safe  conduct  to  places  where  they  are  ordered  assembled 

They  police  all  railroad  stations,  public  houses,  depots,  and 
public  buildings,  protect  telegraph  and  telephone  lines  and  rail- 
wajrs  from  damage;  keep  hostile  inhabitants  in  order,  carry  out 
their  disarmament,  and  prevent  spying. 

412.  With  the  division,  the  commander  of  trains  and  the  force 
imder  his  orders,  exercise  the  functions  of  military  police. 

413.  On  the  line  of  communications  the  commanders  of  defense 
districts  exercise  these  functions,  following  up  closely  the  advance 
of  the  division,  taking  over  all  prisoners  of  war,  and  performing  the 
military  police  duties  in  rear  of  the  zone  policed  by  the  commander 
of  trains. 

414.  The  defense  commander  of  the  area  in  and  about  the  base 
of  a  line  of  communications  is  assigned  as  provost  marshal.  The 
functions  of  a  provost  marshal,  in  addition  to  ttiose  of  general 
military  police,  are  to  receive  and  hold  all  classes  of  prisoners. 
He  makes  records  of  the  prisoners  of  war,  and  collects  and  records 
the  tags  taken  from  the  enemy's  dead,  as  required  by  the  laws  and 
usages  of  war  The  records  of  prisoners  of  war  and  of  the  enemy's, 
dead  are  transmitted  quarterly  to  the  War  Department. 

415.  In  mobilization  and  concentration  camps  the  powers  of 
military  police  are  ordinarily  exercised  by  the  commander  of 
trains,  though  if  conditions  require,  an  officer  may  be  assigned  as 
commander  of  military  police. 

163 


164  UILITARY  POLICE. 

416.  In  cases  of  emerffency  the  military  police  may  call  on  any 
troop  to  assist  them.  All  persons  belonging  to  the  military  service 
are  required  to  ^ive  every  assistance  to  the  military  police  in  the 
execution  of  their  duties. 

417.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  when  actually  performing  the 
duty  of  military  police  will  wear  a  blue  brassard  on  the  left  arm 
half  way  between  the  elbow  and  shoulder  bearing  the  letters 
*'M.  P."  in  white. 

418.  As  a  rule,  military  police  on  duty  will  not  be  reprimanded 
or  placed  in  arrest  except  by  the  superiors  under  whose  command 
they  happen  to  bef  In  exceptional  cases  field  officers  and  officers 
of  higher  grades  are  authorized  to  order  their  arrest.  Members  of 
the  military  police  when  not  on  dutj^ — that  is,  when  not  wearing 
the  blue  brassard— have  no  special  privileges. 


Article  VIII. 

CENSOBSHIF. 

419.  Censorship  within  the  theater  of  operations  is  controlled  by 
the  commander  of  the  field  forces.  An  officer  is  assigned  as  censor 
and  is  provided  with  such  assistants  as  necessary.  He  performs 
his  duties  under  the  immediate  orders  of  the  chief  of  staff  of  the 
commander  of  the  field  forces. 

420.  Censorship  includes  (1)  censorship  over  private  communi- 
cations and  (2)  censorship  over  press  publications  and  communi- 
cations. 

All  private  communications  (post  cards,  letters,  parcels,  tele- 
grams, etc.)  of  officers,  soldiers,  foreign  attaches,  newspaper  cor- 
respondents, and  all  other  individuals,  dispatched  from  the  theater 
of  operations  are  liable  to  censorship  and  to  such  delay  in  trans- 
mission as  may  be  deemed  necessary  by  the  militarj^  authorities 
A  censor  is  authorized  to  suppress  any  statement  which  might  be 
of  value  to  the  enemy  or  prejudicial  to  the  welfare  of  the  forces  in 
rhe  field, 

All  newspapers  or  journals  in  the  theater  of  operations  or  in 
localities  where  martial  law  is  in  force  are  subject  to  censorship 
and,  if  necessary,  their  publications  may  be  suppressed 

421.  The  press  has  public  functions  to  perform  with  respect  to 
the  collection  and  dissemination  of  news  concerning  the  operations 
of  the  Army  in  time  of  war  The  dissemination  of  falsenoods  or 
distortion  of  facts,  no  less  than  the  premature  disclosure  of  move- 
ments or  plans,  is  so  fraught  with  dangerous  consequences  that 
the  greatest  care  should  be  observed  in  its  prevention.  The  press 
occupies  a  dual  and  delicate  position,  being  imder  the  necessity 
of  truthfully  disclosing  to  the  people  the  facts  concerning  the  oper- 
ations of  the  Army  and,  at  the  same  time,  of  refraining  from  dis- 
closing those  things  which,  though  true,  would  be  disastrous  if 
knovy^n  to  the  enemy  It  is  perfectly  apparent  to  everyone  who 
considers  the  question  that  these  important  functions  can  not  be 
trusted  to  irresponsible  people  and  can  only  be  properly  performed 
under  reasonable  rules  and  regulations  with  respect  thereto. 

165 


166  GENSOESHIF. 

CORRESPONDENTS. 

422.  Conditions  of  Acceptance. — Each  applicant  shall  present  to 
the  Secretary  of  War  credentials  from  the  owner  or  owners,  manag-s 
ing  editor,  or  responsible  manager  of  the  publication  or  publications 
he  represents,  giving  a  brief  account  of  his  career,  stating  exactly 
the  nature  of  the  work  he  is  expected  to  do  at  the  front,  -certifying 
to  his  trustworthiness  as  working  member  of  his  profession,  and 
his  personal  fitness  to  accompanj'  the  army  His  employer  or 
employers  shall  give  a  bond  for  his  good  conduct  in  the  field, 
which,  in  case  of  the  witndrawal  of  his  pass  for  infraction  of  any 
of  the  regulations  shall  be  forfeited  to  any  charity  which  the 
Secretary  of  War  may  name  He  shall  take  an  oath  of  loyalty  of 
the  usual  military  form  and  shall  agree  to  abide  in  letter  and  spirit 
by  all  the  regulations  laid  down  for  his  guidance.  If  at  any  tin\e 
the  number  of  correspondents  becomes  so  large  as  to  be  an  encum- 
brance, the  Secretary  of  War  will  refuse  other  passes  until  such 
time  as  he  deems  expedient;  when  other  applicants  who  fulfill  the 
conditions  will  be  received  in  the  order  of  their  application. 

Not  more  than  one  correspondent  will  be  received  for  any  one 
publication  or  8>-ndicate  of  publications  or  press  association  witli 
the  same  field  army  Men  who  have  evidently  secured  credentials 
with  a  view  to  adventure  rather  than  serious  work  as  correspond- 
ents will  not  be  received.  Their  emploj-ers  must  show  that  they 
have  been  working  members  of  their  profession  In  addition  la 
the  requirements  for  home  correspondents,  a  foreign  correspondent 
must  have  served  in  other  campaigns,  present  credentials  as  to 
his  character  from  high  ofiicers  of  the  army  to  which  he  was  attached 
and  accompanying  the  letter  from  his  employers  must  present  a 
letter  from  his  ambassador  in  Washington,  personally  vouching  for 
him. 

423.  Photographs  and  Photographers. — ^An  oflficial  photographer 
will  accompany  each  field  army  or  other  important  independent 
field  force.  His  films  and  plates  will  be  sent  promptly  to  Washing- 
ton, where  prints  will  be  issued  at  a  nominal  cost  to  the  press. 
No  professional  photographers  and  moving-picture  men  will  be 
received.  No  news  or  professional  photographers  will  be  received 
if  representing  themselves  either  as  news  or  mail  correspondents. 
The  regular  correspondents  may  carry  small  hand  film  cameras. 
The  films  will  be  sent  by  the  censor  at  the  headquarters  of  the  field 
force  to  the  chief  censor's  office  in  Washington,  where  they  will  be 


CENSOBSHIP.  167 

developed  and  such  of  tliem  as  pass  the  censorship  sent  to  any 
given  address  promptly. 

424.  Censorship  of  Press  Matter. — ^A  commissioned  officer  of 
journalistic  experience  shall  act  as  chief  censor  in  Washington  and 
one  shall  be  attached  as  censor  to  the  headquarters  of  each  field 
army  or  other  important  independent  field  force.  All  correspond- 
ent's news,  or  private  dispatches,  mail  letters  for  publication, 
private  letters,  drawings  and  photographs  must  be  submitted  to 
ithis  censor  and  receive  his  stamp  before  being  sent.  After  censor- 
ship he  will  show  the  correspondent  what,  if  anything,  he  has 
elided  from  correspondent's  MSS.  He  will  permit  the  use  of  no 
code  words  in  any  private  or  public  communication.  He  may 
request  a  correspondent  to  rewrite  any  portion  of  a  dispatch  that 
he  may  suspect  of  double  meaning  without  acciompanying  his 
request  with  his  reasons  for  it.  The  correspondent  will  not  be 
allowed  to  send  information  concerning  the  occupation  or  relin- 
quishment of  a  position,  the  news  of  any  victorjr  or  defeat,  the 
names  of  organizations  or  commanders,  the  dispositions  of  troops, 
the  state  of  supply  or  transport,  the  number  of  sick,  the  extent 
of  losses,  or  any  other  matters  of  information  unless  the  dispatch 
or  report,  containing  such  information,  is  passed  on  and  authorized 
by  the  censor.  Any  relaxation  in  the  regulations  will  rest  with 
the  commanding  general  of  the  field  force.  Nothing  in  these 
regulations  is  to  be  construed  as  limiting  the  correspondent's 
freedom  of  opinion  once  there  ceases  to  be  a  necessity  for  military 
eecrecv;  the  sole  object  of  the  regulations  being  to  keep  information 
from  the  enemy  at  a  time  when  it  might  be  of  service  to  him. 

425.  Facilities  for  Work. — Immediately  on  receiving  his  pass  the 
correspondent  shall  proceed  to  the  headquarters  of  the  field  force 
to  which  he  is  assigned  and  there  report  himself  to  the  censor. 
His  pass  shall  give  him  transport  over  all  military  railways,  with 
the  privileges  of  a  commiiisioned  officer.  All  correspondents  will 
be  officially  attached  to  headquarters  of  field  armies  or  other  im- 
portant field  forces.  Their  transport  shall  have  a  place  with  that 
of  the  baggage  section  of  the  field  train  of  the  headquarters  staff. 
No  one  except  the  censor  at  headquarters  shall  have  the  authority 
()f  censorship.  Correspondents  shall  have  the  freedom  of  the  lines 
of  information  of  the  army  within  such  limitations  as  the  censor 
may,  from  time  to  time,  indicate.  The  official  army  wires  shall  be 
open  to  the  correspondents'  dispatches  when  not  occupied  by  offi- 
cial dispatches.  Correspondents*  dispatches  will  be  sent  in  the  order 


168  CENSOBSHIP. 

of  filing.  The  censor  may  limit  the  number  of  words  or  otherwise 
make  an  equitable  adjustment  of  the  use  of  the  wire  among  the 
different  correspondents  when  the  wire  is  unequal  to  carrying  all 
the  dispatches  submitted.  Within  the  censor's  discretion,  corres- 
pondents may  send  messengers  to  carry  censored  dispatches  to  bet- 
ter wire  facilities  than  those  at  the  immediate  front. 

426.  Messengers. — Any  correspondent  who  chooses  may  have  a 
mounted  messenger,  who  may  send  neither  correspondence  nor 
photographs  of  his  own.  Any  infraction  of  the  regulations  by  the 
messenger  will  be  equivalent  to  an  infraction  by  the  correspond- 
ent himself.  He  must  have  credentials  acceptable  to  the  army 
and  a  pass  in  the  correspondents'  form,  with  the  privilege  of  an 
enlisted  man.  A  similar  bond  shall  be  required  for  him  as  for  the 
correspondent.  Except  where  permission  is  given  by  the  head- 
quarters censor,  he  must  remain  with  the  correspondents'  trans- 
port. 

427.  Passes. — Every  correspondent  shall  be  supplied  with  an 
official  pass,  bearing  his  photoojaph  and  his  own  signature  and  the 
signature  of  the  Secretary  of  war  and  the  commander  of  the  field 
forces  to  which  he  is  attached.  He  shall  show  this  upon  the  demand 
of  any  field  officer,  company  commander,  or  member  of  the  mili- 
tary police,  and  shall  respect  their  requests  under  the  penalty  of 
being  sent  back  to  army  neadquarters  under  guard. 

428.  Garb. — Everv  correspondent  shall  provide  himself  with 
olive-drab  garb  for  the  field.  He  shall  wear  no  accouterments  not 
of  a  neutral  tint.  He  shall  be  supplied  with  a  white  brassard  2| 
inches  in  width,  bearing  the  letter  C  in  red,  to  be  worn  on  the  left 
arm,  in  order  that  his  status  with  the  army  may  be  known  at  a 
glance  by  both  officers  and  privates.  Messengers  shall  observe  the 
same  regulations  about  garb,  with  the  exception  that  their  brassard 
shall  bear  the  letter  M. 

429.  Discipline. — No  correspondent  shall  leave  the  army  to 
which  he  is  attached,  either  to  go  home  or  for  any  other  purpose, 
except  by  permission  of  the  War  Department.  A  correspondent 
shall  be  suspended  from  all  privileges  for  the  distortion  of  his  dis- 
patches in  the  office  of  the  publication  which  he  represents,  and 
also  for  the  use  of  language  or  expressions  conveying  a  hidden 
meaning  which  would  tend  to  mislead  or  deceive  the  censor  or 
permit  the  approval  by  him  of  otherwise  objectionable  dispatches 
or  for  any  other  infraction  of  tJiese  regulations  in  letter  or  in  spirit. 
In  extreme  cases  of  offense,  where  the  commanding  general  thinks 
it  justified,  the  correspondent  may  be  sent  to  the  rear  and  held 


CENSOBSHIF.  169 

under  arrest  until  such  time  as  the  War  Department  may  restore 
his  privileges  or  give  him  a  pass  to  leave  the  army. 

430.  Medical  Eegulations.— Correspondents  shall  submit  to  the 
army  medical  regulations  in  the  field. 

431.  Press  Kegulations  for  Officers,  Enlisted  Men,  and  Civilian 
Employees  of  the  Army. — No  officer,  enlisted  man,  or  civilian 
employee  of  the  army  shall  be  permitted  to  correspond  for  any 
publication  without  the  consent  of  the  Secretary  of  War  and  the 
majority  of  the  correspondents  attached  to  the  field  army  in  which 
he  serves.  No  censor  or  censor's  assistant  may  write  anything 
about  the  campaign  for  publication  while  he  holds  a  commission 
in  the  army 


Article  IX. 
FIELD  POST  OFFICE. 

432.  Arrangements  are  made  with  the  Post  Office  Department  for 
establishing  and  maintaining  a  postal  service  in  the  theater  of 
operations, 

This  service  is  directed  by  an  official  of  the  Post  Office  Depart- 
ment who  is  stationed  at  the  base  of  the  line  of  communications. 
This  official  cooperates  with  the  assistant  chief  of  staff  of  the  supply, 
sanitary,  and  telegraph  service  of  the  line  of  communications,  main- 
taining post  offices,  agents,  etc.,  with  its  advance  section,  and  so 
far  as  practicable,  throughout  the  zone  of  the  line  of  communica- 
tions. In  addition  to  the  foregoing  a  post-office  agent  accompanies 
each  division,  being  supplied  by  the  quartermaster  corps  with 
the  necessary  vehicles  and  animals  for  the  prompt  dispatch  and 
distribution  of  mails. 

The  commander  of  trains  is  responsible  for  the  protection  of  the 
postal  personnel  with  divisions  and  controls  their  movements. 

The  necessary  instructions  relative  to  the  distribution  and 
receipt  of  mail  are  issued  by  the  division  commander. 
170 


APPENDICES. 


USEFUL  INFORMATION. 


171 


172 


APPENDIX  1. 


ss  2; 


NM     r>.     CO     o     C4     o     o 

«(5o6     '«<     o>     to     <o     c4     c4 


11  §  I  §  i  I  i 

.o     ^     .0     A     ^ 

I  I  s  g  s 


aa   aaa  "^-^^ 


s   JJ 


I  to       O  O)  A 


i-l       C4       C4       CI       C4 


iJ'Sal 


^•9   ^-a-^ 


II    lal    "SgS    5    S    2    g    S    g 

*^°     ^"^'^     ^     „-    «-    cf    cf     ^-^ 


IS       5oS»  M< 


5a 

CO  g^ 
^5 


oS  CSJQO  t^co  «o  <o  •*  *  «6  t- 

100  «c5cO  ^'"P  rt  »0  CO  1-c  r-«  CO 

tCoT  cfcf  ^  ^  ^  T^  r-T 

Si  S§S  ii  °  S  I  8  8  I 

00  «5u5fO  OCCS  i-H  1-1  C^  1-^  •<*  c». 

c^o  lo'cfcs'  .-Tt-T  i-T  t-T  t-T  r-T 


-«^oa  s  :fe  :fe 


n 


feggis^  a  5 


ga 


APPENDIX  1. 


O       !-•       « 

o     ^     .-5 


CO         eococ^^     cSncs 


0000     000 
•^  oco  U5     00  g> 


2    5 


s     giss*  ?s^s 


t-  «o »o  i-foo< 


174  B.  SEMIFEBMANEITT  CAMPS. 

CAMP  OF  A  BEOMEirr  OP  IHFAKTBY.    WAB  STBENOTH. 


'ST^^^fw'^^" 


,  ^ ^_  _,  WfessM  li>tOfpta-_ . 

off     oWpU^         oD 

!dc3     oo     oa     OD     p^^a  q  '"Tj  a     a  i 


'flffi^wi  LJtrat ' 


00     od.uo     lOb. 


A 


*4]*-D  "D  'Q 


tatsta 
a 
a 
a 

n 
a 

D 

a 
a 
a 
o 

Q 

a 
a 
a 
a 
o 


•0  -Q 

a     D 


•D  -D 

D      D 


d; 


Di 
D! 
O 
Dl 

a. 

D>. 

□! 
D: 


,C(.ud  , 

iSanilan  | 

Dttaciel 


a; 

D- 
DI 

Bi 

S 
d; 

§i 

Si 

Di 


lit.  Battaliin 


2d.  Ssnalion 


3d  Bittilion 


rr-U  ,  ir^_  _  irr--  _  irr*.  - 1- 


C±.l    .   t^l 


,  Train  Park  i 

• ;_,_i___^___l 


.iDQ.pffO  □ 


Animals 


ISUi?. 


B.  SEMIPEBMANENT  CAMPS.  115 

CAMP  OF  A  BEQIMENT  OF  CAVALRY.    WAK  STRENGTH. 


flfftteii 


Inicirilitrint  ] 


bo     00     00     bo 


StOttQ 

^ 

D 

□1 

D] 

dI 

Di 

DI 
□! 


□I 

^1 


Sinrtarv 
Dttach, 


..Q 


.     ^      MMStJ  <«i  OffiUi 
OQO   l»-&&^6a^M'«1.'^a 


go- 

Tr^opOffigo-Uojj     g^     /^g     ^^     ^^     Qo_ 


^        fi        & 
DlnHtn      D 


-— «- -*-.--^ 1 


Isi  Sijuadron 


PitHet 


Stablt. 


.flj-.flj 


•D 

D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
Q. 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 

a 


a     a 


lab» 


^     S     k 

•D  -Q  *D 

a     D 

D  D 
D  D 
P 
D 

a 

D 

a 
a 

D 
D 
D 

a 


•d 

a 
n 

D 

□i 

D 
D 
D 

^ 

o| 

D! 


USqunina 


LB..B.lM..fl..a.Jjk 


til 

d! 

D 

d! 

D! 


Gm 


176 


B.  SEMIFEBMANENT  CAMPS. 


CAMP  OF  A  BEGIMEHT  OF  ABTILLEEY. 


•2*.*?:sl -«-»*— ^ =,-1 

QfflMfiUtnn*  «='l  ' 


ao    I     aa 


-  Mom  Mid  Offiai 


Snno'>««a  S 


d:    d 


'HdintldcKl 
iBtalMd  I 
I  Smtvy  I 
.   OeUdL     ; 

□31 :: 


, la 


•D       -Q 


-r 


L^triaes 


n      n      n      n 


ZdOiltafioo 


n     n     n     n 


D    d; 


is 


'Si 

I' 


It 

■^1 


Ssi  ± 


^SbrliL^i     (.J       LJ      LJ      LJ 
.  t !  '  Stable  Gaards  »n^  CUduwth  Shop 

;o..Q:.ja..(l..a..ll-a..[l..a..Q..a-Q-a. 


.02 


Bv  SEMIPEBMANENT^iCAMPS; 


177 


CAMPS  07  TBAmS.    WAR  STRKETGTH. 


J^  Ambulance  Companies. 


.         Officers'  -  Line 
a  a  a  aag  aoo  ai 


Stort  Q  Tents  fi  Q 

D       D       D 


a-- 


Picket 


_   Stdik  ?  .Guards 


i^"2a- 


jl.LJi 


3  Hi 


iLatnne- 


)4  of  Aimwnitiw  Train,  Inf.  Oiv., 


t  Hospital 
established 


;     2  Hospitals 
npt  established 

[      Oirtttw 


Stureo  fltntSQ         o 

D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 


Jlfasol 
D  D  D     Dh    .a 

a 

D 
Di      D 

a 

D 
D 
D 
D 


ODD  si 


DDOS 

»-«H»       ..t8-«--j| 

■  °i 
p 


VtA 


PHTO   .  .1 


if: 

:    9taU«     ! 


i  .1   <§< 

T   «     I*' 

•      I       LJ         LJ 


vr  yijlSuKty.  Iriin.^f5f- Oiv. 


n| 


6 
Mm|]«Pit 

D 
D 

a 

D 
P 


OfJfeSs 


'ti.       ta 


y..^s — ^ 


Picket 


Camp  fr  3  i)»iitsls  utaUishtd. 
160  xZeO  yards  (S.Zacrtsl 
llYard,Dr  hospital,  tuts  are 
pitched  silly  as  rujujred  (F.S.II  W\ 


Blacksmifta 


<sm(fta  SJmkb  and  ? 
HstahlenGuanlsn 


[[  TpainPark.lWatonCo. 
Caap  gf  am.  tn.,  170x300  yds. 


(I0.4ac™j.  Camp  «f  sup.  tn.,i — 
,l30x3Q0>iis.(3.2acrei 
Itsofeachwa^amiaiv 

nv  be  placed  on  sam  line  as  aniiMis; 

noutifl|  width  of  camp  SSyds.  lod 

incnasintlentttilOO^d]. 


35378«— 14 


-12 


178  B<  SEMIFEBMANlfiNT  CAMPS. 

CAMP  OF  HTFAKTRY  DIYISION.    WAB  STRENGTH. 
(335AeRES.    THSFORNOfeANfMrnOnOIBEHOMFe.  DEPQIMieUPONMMTlKEOFmGROUm^ 


Ip- 


iirU^egt. 


T       T    4.T      T 


Ir\f.Ilegt. 


&if:ilest. 


t       T       T   ^T      T 


iktl^e^t. 


Ai\.Tt\. 


DivHdxjra 


Cav.T^^t. 


litf-Regt. 


Invest. 


T     T     T      T      T      T       T 

* 


O^eK         ^^     ^    ^--^GEIND   -- 


T        T         T 

•t, 


T    T    r   T 


Hospi 


4- 

Mb. 
Cos. 


gntf-.Tn-  I 


IriflHt. 


6p.Trv. 


\i 

ForAdminislratrre 
useofRsTnanent 
ICamp  Personnel 
,(Seepv.268) 


I     QMOepot 

i  .^^^^^^ 

[Ordnance  DepoC 
T   4J     T       T      T      TlfiijieneStD. 


nosYDs. 

^  Divisiort  Headquartert  f*  K'dqrs.of  Organizations i^  Camp  Limits  -  DivTsion 

*  Brigade  Headquarters         ffl  Field  Hospital  (Set  up)      ^^:^  Hdqrs.Permantnt  CampCbmnanJy 
4*  Camp  linfimwy  a.  AmbulAAM  S«rvio«        'r  t  t  Telephone  and  Telegraph  Service 

«f  Prmanent  Can^  Persorwd 


APPENDIX  1.  179 

While  the  preceding  diagrams  are  of  semipermanent  camps 
using  canvas  as  shelter,  a  similar  airangement  is  observed  in 
more  permanent  camps,  such  as  mobilization,  in  which  the  canvas 
is  repmced  by  temporary  structures.  The  distances  and  intervals 
given  are  the  maximum  to  be  used  unless  the  topography  of  the 
camp  site  demands  an  increase  They  should  frequently  be  re- 
duced, as  indicated  below, .to  economize  in  guard  and  police  duty, 
and  in  the  labor  of  constructing  camps 

Battalions  and  squadrons  usually  camp  in  column  of  companies. 
Between  adjacent  tents,  center  to  center,  in  a  row,  allow  8  yards 
for  large  pyramidal  (16  by  16  feet),  5  or  6  yards  for  small  pyram- 
idal (9  by  9  feet),  and  10  yards  for  storage  (17  feet  10  incnes  by 
20  feet  5  inches).  Between  adjacent  company  rows,  picket  lines, 
and  gun  or  carriage  parks,  center  to  center,  20  yards;  but  this 
distance  may  be  reduced  From  latrines  50  yards  to  nearest  occu- 
pied tent;  but,  when  a  Smaller  camp  is  desired,  the  space  between 
company  latrines  and  the  men's  tents  may  be  used  to  park  car- 
riages and  animals.  For  picket  lines  and  parks,  allow  1  yard^  per 
animal  and  4  yards  per  vehicle;  but,  for  shelter  for  animals  in  a 
double  row,  2^  lineal  feet  of  structure  per  animal  will  suflEice. 
Other  distances  shown  in  diagrams  may  be  reduced .  Latrine  seats 
are  provided  at  the  rate  of  1  seat  to  about  every  10  men;  shower 
heads  at  1  to  every  50  to  100  men,  depending  upon  water  pressure; 
I  bath  house  for  officers  and  1  for  men  (or  a  single  bath  house 
suitably  partitioned)  in  each  regiment  or  separate  battalion;  vater 
spigots  at  the  rate^f  1  for  each  mess. 

No  fixed  type  of  camp  is  prescribed  for  use  in  the  theater  of 
operations.  In  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  camps  and  bivouacs 
must  be  modified  to  afford  the  best  protection  for  men,  animals, 
and  trains.  This  will  frequently  necessitate  the  juxtaposition  of 
shelter  for  the  men  and  picket  lines  for  the  animals. 


Appendix  2. 
Types  of  Field  Intrenchments. 


^r  ••^. 


A      firing  trtxhcX 

B    Cow  frcncha. 

C     Cemn]vn>u^  tradi:  Djaoe  ImerseJ:  CeaimiiicAfmtf 

F     Outd  stfparUt}  foiil  tor  thpk  ftitdiaf 

NGi  RoiiUe  fttrinn  formedUm  fm.i 

ISO  e^B 


APPENDIX  2. 


]181 


fig.1  •--''•^- 

AaMy  enlrenchavetvt  for  field  attijaery. 

"f rote«tioi^  Aji«Lix\»t  rifle  Qre  tend  ftluKiqp&a. 


Pejibfttate  eivtrctxtowBat  for  field  arlillay. 
vuital>l«  type  vrto^<3cpi«Mion.i»  xwBceM*z7  for  c«&«e*lAMkt. 


Appendix  3. 


Forms  of  Complete  Field  Orders. 

While  the  following  forms  are  given  for  the  convenience  of  oflBcers  in  the  field, 
and  with  a  view  of  securing  iiniformity  in  the  service,  it  must  be  remembered  that 
no  two  military  situations  are  the  same.  The  sequence  in  paragraph  3  is  not 
obligatory,  the  commander  arranging  the  details  according  to  nis  best  judgment. 


Foft  an  adbance. 


Field  Orders 
No.— 
[Reference  to  map  used] 
Troops 


[TiUe 


UeJ 
[Place] 

[Date  and  hourj 


1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander] 

3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  Independent  cavalry— place 
and  time  of  departure,  roads  or  country  to  be  covered, 
special  mission] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  advance  guard— place  and  time 
of  departure,  or  distance  at  which  it  is  to  precede  the 
main  body,  route,  special  mission] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  main  body — distance  at  \*^hich  it 
Is  to  follow  the  advance  guard,  or  place  and  time  of  de- 
parture] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  flank  guard— place  and  time  of 
departure,  route,  special  mission] 

(e)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops— lines  of  informa- 
tion  to  be  established,  special  mission] 

(x)  [Instructions  for  outpost— when  relieved,  subse- 
quent duties] 

4.  [Instrucitions  for  field  train— escort,  distance  in 
rear  of  colimin,  or  destination  when  different  from  that 
of  main  body,  if  disposition  not  previously  covered  in 
"Orders"] 

[Instructions  for  sanitary,  ammunition,  supply  and  engineer  trains  when  neces- 
sary) 
5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent.] 

[Authentication.] 
[How  and  to  whom  Issued] 


<a)  Independent    Cav- 
alry: 
[Commander] 
[Troops] 
<b)  Advance  Guard: 
[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(c)  Main   Body— in  or- 
der of  march: 

[Commander)  i 

(d)  Right   [left]    Flank 
Guard: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(e)  Signal  Troops: 
[Commander] 

[Troops] 


t  If  a  commander  is  designated  for  thei  main  body,  his  name  is  inserted  here. 

ISO 


APPENDIX  3.  18S 

F(st  advance  guards^. 

Field  Orders  [Titlel 

No.  —  [Place] 

{Reference  to  map  used!  [Date  and lioar] 

Troops  1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops) 

2.  [Plan  of  commander] 

(a)  Advance  Cavalry:  3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  advance  cavalry— place  and 

[Commander]        time  of  departure,  roads  or  country  to  be  covered,  special 
[Troops]  mission] 

(b)  Support:  (b)  [Instructions   for   support— place   and   time  of 

[Commander]        departure,  route,  special  mission] . 
[Troops]  (c)  [Instructions  for  reserve— distance  at  which  it  Is 

(c)  Reserve— in  order  of   to  follow  support] 

march:  (d)  [Instructions  for  flank  guard- place  and  time  of 

[Troops]  departure,  route,  special  mission] 

(d)  Right  (left)   Flank       4.  [Instructions  tor  field  train— generally  to  join  train 

Guard:  of  column  if  not  previously  covert  in  orders] 

[Commander]  5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be 

[Troops]  sent,  location  of  lines  of  information] 

[Authentication) 
[How  and  to  whom  issued) 

A  halt  for  the  nightr—  Camp  with  outpost. 

Field  Orders  [Title] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used)  [Date  and  hoar) 

1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops,  including  independent 
cavalry] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander— to  encamp  or  bivouac] 

3.  (a)  {Designation  of  commander  and  troops  of  outpost,^  general  line  to  beheld, 
special  reconnaissance,  connection  with  other  outposts,  if  any] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  troops  not  detailed  for  outpost  duty— location  of  camp, 
designation  of  camp  commander,*  observation  of  fiajiks  and  rear  when  necessary, 
lines  of  information,  conduct  in  case  of  attack] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  train — ^generally  to  join  troops,  though  if  near  enwny, 
field  train  of  outpost  troops  may  be  held  in  rear] » 

[Instructions  for  sanitary,  ammunition,  supply,  and  engineer  trains,  when 
necessary] 

5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent) 

(Authentlcatioili) 
[How  and  to  whom  issued) 

1  Where  the  advance  guard  is  large  the  order  may  direct  the  advance  guard  com 
mander  to  establish  the  outpost. 
-  Omitted  when  the  chief  exercises  immediate  command  of  the  camp. 
'May  be  provided  for  in  "order"  issued  subsequently. 


184  APPENDIX  3. 

For  outposts. 

Field  Orders  (Title] 

No.  --  ■  [Place] 

IReference  to  map  used]  (Date  and  hour] 

Troops  1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting 

troops] 
2.  [Plan  of  commander— to  establish  outpost,  ap- 

(a)  Advance  Cavalry  proximate  line  of  resistance] 

[Commander]  3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  advance  cavalry — contact 

[Troops]  with    enemy,    roads    or    country    to    be    specially 

(b)  Supports:  i  watched,  special  mission]  •, 

No.  1.  [Commander]  (b)  [Instructions  for  supports— positions  they  are  to 

[Troops]  occupy,  and  sections  of  line  of  resistance  which  they 

No.  2.  [Commander]  are  to  "hold,  intrenching,  etc.] 

[Troops]  (c)  [Instructions  for  detached  post— position  to  be 

No.  3.  [Commander]  occupied,  duties,  amount  of  resistance] 

[Troops]  (d)  [Instructions  for  reserve— location,  observation 

(c)  Detached  Post.  of  flanks,  conduct  in  case  of  attack,  duties  of  special 

[Commander]  troops] 

[Troops]  4    [Instruction  for  field  train  if  necessary] 

(d)  Reserve:  5    [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be 

[Commander]  sent,  location  of  lines  of  information] 

[Troops]  [.Authentication] 

{How  and  to  whom  issued] « 

It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  issue  two  outpost  orders;  the  first  as  above,  contain- 
ing general  instructions;  the  second,  issued  after  an 'inspection  of  the  line,  and 
containing  more  definite  instructions  or  involving  changes 

For  positions  in  readinesa 

Field  Orders  (titlej 

No.  —  [Place] 

(Reference  to  map  used)  [  I>ate  and  hour] 

1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supportmg  troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander— to  take  up  a  position  in  readiness  at  or  near  — ] 

3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  cavalry— to  reconnoiter  in  direction  of  enemy,  special 
mission]  ,  ,  , 

(b)  [Instructions  for  artillery— position  or  place  of  assembly] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  infantry— position  or  place  of  assembly,  points  to  be  espe- 
cially held,  reconnaissance] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  engmeers— position  or  place  of  assembly] 

(e)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops— lines  of  information] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  trains,  sanitary,  ammunition,  supply  and  engineer 
trains  if  not  previously  covered  m  orders— generally  to  halt  at  designated  localities 
in  rear,  ready  to  move  in  any  direction] 

5.  (Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent]  ^      , 

'  [Authentication] 

(How  and  to  whom  issued] 

1  Numbered  from  the  right. 

*  For  small  outposts  it  may  be  more  convenient  to  write  this  order  without  a 
marginal  distribution  of  troops. 


APPENDIX  3.  18S 

For  defensive  positions 
Field  Orders  ITitlel      , 

No.  —  [Placel 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

1.  (Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander— to  take  up  a  defensive  position  at  or  along ,  for  the 

purpose  of ] 

3.  (a)  (Instructions  for  artillery— position,  target,  intrenching,  etc.] 

(b)  (Instructions  for  fighting  line— division  of  front  into  sections  and  assignment 
of  troops  thereto,  intrenching,  etc.] 

(c)  (Instructions  for  reserve — troops  and  position] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  cavahy— usually  to  cover  with  its  main  force  the  more 
exposed  flank,  a  detachment  being  sent  to  patrol  the  other;  reconnaissance] 

(e)  (Instructions  for  engineers— defensive  work,  clearing  field  of  fire,  preparation 
of  obstacles,  opening  roads,  etc.] 

(f)  (Instructions  for  signal  troops— to  establish  lines  of  information] 

4.  [Instructions  for  sanitary  train— location  of  dressing,  stations  and  station  for 
slightly  wounded] 

(Instructions  for  ammunition  train— location  of  ammunition  distributing  stations) 
[Instructions  for  field  and  supply  trains,  if  not  previously  covered  in  orders] 
£..  (Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent] 
'  '  I  \uthentioation] 

[How  and  to  whom  issued] 

For  an  attack. 
Field  Orders  [Title] 

No.  —  [Place] 

[Reference  to  map  used]  [Date  and  hour] 

1.  (Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supporting  troops] 

2.  (Plan  of  commander— indicating  the  general  plan  of  attack,  usually  to  envelop 
a  flank] 

3.  (a)  (Instructions  for  artillery — ^position,  first  target,  generally  hostile  artillery) 

(b)  (Instructions  for  holding  attack ' — commander,  troops,  direction  and  ob- 
jective] 

(c)  (instructions  for  main  attack — commander,  troops,  direction  and  objective] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  reserve — commander,  troops,  position] 

(e)  [Instructions  for  cavalry— generally  to  operate  on  one  or  both  flanks,  or  to 
execute  some  special  mission] 

(f)  [Instructions  for  engineers— any  special  mission] 

(g)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops— to  establish  lines  of  information  between  the 
commander  and  the  main  and  secondary  attacks,  artillery,  reserves,  etc.] 

4.  [Instructions  for  sanitary  train— location  of  dressing  stations  and  stations  for 
slightly  wounded  when  practicable] 

(Instructions  for  ammunition  train— locationof  ammunition  distributing  stations} 
[Instructions  for  field  and  supply  trains,  if  not  previously  covered  in  orders] 

5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  mav  oe  sent] 

[Authentication] 
[How  ajid  to  whom  issued] 

Note.— In  war  it  is  not  always  possible  to  Lssue  a  complete  attack  order  like  the 
above,  disposing  of  an  entire  command.  In  unexpected  encounters,  for  instance 
orders  must  be  given  as  the  situation  develops. 

»  The  term  "holding  attack"  as  used  in  this  form  Is  for  convenience  only:  it  is 
never  used  in  actual  orders,  as  the  vigor  of  an  attack  might  be  lessened  if  the  troops 
knew  it  was  "holding"  only. 


186 


APPENDIX  3. 


Field  Orders 

No.- 
[Keference  to  map  ased] 
Trooi>s 

(a)  Leading  Troops: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(b)  Main    Body— in   order   of 

march: 

[Troops] 
<c)  Rear  Guard- 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(d)  Right  (left)  Flank  Guard: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 

(e)  Signal  Troops: 

[Commander 
[Troops] 


For  a  retreat. 


[Title] 


[Place] 
'  he 


(How  and  to  whom  issued] 


Field  Orders 

No.— 
[Reference  to  map  used] 
Troops 

(a)  Reserve — in  order  of  march 

[Troops] 
<b)  Support: 

[Commander] 
[Troops] 
<c)  Rear  Cavalry: 

[Commander] 

[Troops] 

<d)  Right  Oeft)  Flank  Guard: 

[Commander] 

[Troops] 


5.  [Place  of  commander  or 
information] 

[Ho"fr  and  to  Whom  Issticd] 


[Date  and  hour] 
,   1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supjwrtmg 
troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander— to  retire  in  direction 
of—] 

3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  leading  troops— place  and 
time  of  departure,  route,  special  mission] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  mam  body— place  and 
time  of  departure,  route] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  rear  guard— distance  from 
the  mam  body  or  place  and  time  of  departure, 
special  mission] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  flank  guard— place  and 
time  of  departure,  special  mission] 

(e)  [Instructions  for  signal  troops— lines  of  m- 
formation] 

(x)  [Instructions  for  outposts— when  relieved, 
subsequent  duties— usually  forming  the  rear 
guard] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  and  divisional  trains- 
place  and  time  of  departure,  route,  escort;  these 
trains  are  generally  some  distance  ahead  of  the 
column] 

5.  [Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may 
be  sent] 

[Authentication] 


For  rear  guards. 

[Title] 
[Place] 
[Date  and  hour] 

1.  [Information  of  enemy  and  of  our  supportmg 
troops] 

2.  [Plan  of  commander— mission  of  rear  guard] 

3.  (a)  [Instructions  for  reserve — place  and  time 
of  departure,  or  approximate  distance  from  main 
body,  reconnaissance] 

(b)  [Instructions  for  support— place  and  time  of 
departure  or  distance  from  reserve,  any  special 
reconnaissance] 

(c)  [Instructions  for  rear  cavalry— place  and 
time  of  departure,  road  or  country  to  be  covered, 
special  mission] 

(d)  [Instructions  for  flank  guard— place  and 
time  of  departure,  route,  special  mission] 

4.  [Instructions  for  field  train  when  necessary— 
usually  to  jom  train  of  main  body] 

where  messages  may  be  sent — location  of  lines  of 


{Authentication] 


APPENDIX  3. 

■ICASCH  TABLE. 


187 


In  morements  of  large  forces  on  several  roads,  it  is  sometlmds  desirable  to  prescribe 
the  daily  marches  of  the  various  columns  for  two  or  more  days.  In  such  cases 
the  order  may  often  be  simplified  by  appending  or  incorporating  a  march  tabl» 
osoally  in  the  following  form,  each  column  providing  its  own  security. 


Army,  from.- 


March  Table, 

-  [date],  to 

[Reference  to  map  used.] 


[date]. 


Date. 


Division. 


Division. 


ArmyHq* 


Location  of  main 
body  or  of  advance 
guard  at  end  of  each 
day's  march,  and  line 
of  march,  if  necessary. 


Location  of  main 
body  or  of  advance 
guard  at  end  of  each 
day's  march,  and  line 
of  march,  if  necessary. 


Location  at  end  of 
each  day's  march. 


Appendix  4. 
Field  Maps  and  Sketches. 

The  following  abbreviations  and  signs  are  authorized  for  ase  on  field  maps  and 
sketches.  For  more  elaborate  map  work  the  authorized  conventional  signs  as 
given  in  the  manual  of "  Conventional  Signs,  United  States  Army  Maps,"  are  used. 

Abbreviations  other  than  those  given  should  not  be  used 


ABBREVUTIONS. 


A. 

abut. 

Ar. 

b. 

8.S. 

hot. 

Br. 

br. 

C. 

com. 

con. 

cov. 

Cr. 

d. 

cul. 

D.S. 

€. 

Est. 

f. 

ft. 


Arroyo. 

Abutment. 

Arch. 

Brick. 

Blacksmith  Shop. 

Bottom. 

Branch. 

Bridge. 

Cape. 

Cemetery. 

Concrete. 

Covered, 

Creek. 

Deep, 

Culvert. 

Drug  Store. 

East. 

Estuary. 

Fordable. 

Fort. 


G.S. 

I'.^M. 
i. 
I. 
Jc. 

{.p. 

Lat. 

Ldg. 
L.  S.S. 
L.  H. 

Long. 

Mts. 

N. 

n.f. 

P. 

pk. 

P.O. 


General  Store. 

Girder. 

Gristmill. 

Iron. 

Island. 

Junction, 

King-post. 

Lake. 

Latitude. 

Landing. 

Life-Saving  Station. 

Lighthouse 

Longitude. 

Mountain. 

Mountains. 

North. 

Not  fordable. 

Pier. 

Plank. 

Post  Office. 


Pt. 
q.p. 
R. 

R.  H. 
R.  R. 
S. 
s. 

S.  H. 
S.  M. 
Sta. 

St. 

str. 
T.  G. 
Tres. 
tr. 

W.  T. 
W.  W. 
W. 
w, 
wd. 


Point. 

Queen-post. 

River. 

Roundhouse. 

Railroad. 

South. 

Steel. 

Schoolhouse. 

Sawmill. 

Station. 

Stone. 

Stream. 

Tollgate. 

Trestle, 

Truss. 

Water  Tank« 

Waterworks. 

West. 

Wood. 

Wide. 


SIGNS— FIELD  MAPS  AND  SKETCHES. 


Telegraph  Line  ■ 

Railroads 
Roads 

fences 


Symbol  CmodiTied  betov^  ' 

Alon|  improved  road  ^ 

A!on^  unimproved  road  *  '■ 
Alofigtrail 

Single  track  """*"• 

Double  track  ""H" 

Trolley  ■■ 

Improved  = 

Unimproved  -=  =  -  =  = 

>ail  

[barbed  wire  — — — 

smooth  wire  »    ■    ■ 
wood 
stone 
hed^ 


,^K9-, 


1S8 


APPENDIX  4. 


189 


Brid§3 


Indicate  character  and  span  by  abbreviations 


Example: 


2lM^ 


40x20 


Meaninl wooden  kingpost  bridge,40f8et  lon|,20feet  wide, 
and  10  feet  above  the  water 


Strearfw 


f 


Indicate  character  by  abbreviations. 


example:  ^-^^?W>_2Vy7.^ 

Meanin|a  stream  15  feet  wide.  8  feet  de^,  and  not  fordable. 
House  •  Church*  School  house -S.H 

Woods    ^^^sj  Orchards  irni  Cultivated  UndlCdtl 

If  boundary  lines  are  fences  they  are  indicated  as  such. 
Brush,  crops  or  ^rass,  importajit  as  cover  or  fbra^ 
Cemetery      pTT^"*!]  Trees,  isolated 

Cut  and  fill-  :  ""     ]        cut  (0  feet  deep 

fill  10  feet  hi|h 


Bruah.com, 
jraas.atc. 


h.^nl 

,    Cut 

"      10' 

.  nil 

Appendix  6. 

Extracts  from  Intematiozial  Conventioiis  and  Conferences. 

(See  Rules  for  Land  Warfare,  United  States  Army,  for  full  text  of  conventions 
and  conferences  affecting  the  conduct  of  war",  and  for  other  rules  adopted  for 
the  government  of  the  Army  of  the  United  States  in  time  of  war.  The  Rules  ol 
Land  Warfare  give  the  form  of  certificate  to  be  carried  and  the  garb  to  be  worn 
in  certain  instances  by  civilians  authorized  to  accompany  the  Army  in  the  the 
ater  of  operations  and  which  are  necessary  to  the  protection  of  the  individual  ij 
the  event  of  his  capture  by  the  enemy-l 


Extracts  from  conventions   adopted  at    the   Second   International 
Peace  Conference  held  at  The  Hague,  1907 

Each  of  these  conventions  stipulate —  ^ 

{a^  The  provisions  of  the  present  conventions  do  riot  apply  except 
to  the  contracting  powers,  and  then  only  if  all  the  belligerents  are 
parties  to  the  convention. 

(6)  Nonsignatory  jxiwers  may  adhere  to  the  present  convention. 

CONVENTION  RESPECTING  THE  LAWS  AND  CUSTOMS  OF  WAR 
ON  LAND. 

*  *  *  «  * 

Section  L— On  Belugebents. 

Chapteb  I.—  The  qualifications  of  belligerents. 

ARTiCLie  I.  The  laws,  rights,  and  duties  of  war  apply  not  only  to  armies,  but  also 
to  militia  and  volunteer  corps  fulfilling  the  following  conditions: — 

1.  To  be  commanded  by  a  person  responsible  for  his  subordinates; 

2.  To  have  a  fixed  distinctive  emblem  recognizable  at  a  distance; 

3.  To  carry  arms  oijenly;  and 

4.  To  conduct  their  operations  in  accordance  with  the  laws  and  customs  of  war. 
In  countries  where  militia  or  volunteer  corps  constitute  the  army,  or  form  part 

of  it,  thev  are  included  under  the  denomination  "army." 

Art.  II.  The  inhabitants  of  a  territory  which  has  not  been  occupied,  who,  on 
the  approach  of  the  enemy^  spontaneously  take  up  arms  to  resist  the  invading 
troops  without  having  had  time  to  organize  themselves  in  accordance  with  Article 
I.  shall  be  regarded  as  belligerents  if  they  carry  arms  openly  and  if  they  respect 
tne  laws  and  customs  of  war. 

Abt.  III.  The  armed  forces  of  the  belligerent  parties  may  consist  of  combatants 
and  noncombatants.  In  the  case  of  capture  by  the  enemy,  both  have  a  right  to  be 
treated  as  prisoners  of  war. 

190 


APPENDIX  NO.  5. 
DISTINGUISHIITG  PIAGS  AND  LANTERNS 

AS     AMEXDED     BY 

CHANGES  F.  S.  R.  NO.  5,   DEC.   20,    1916. 


APPEMDJ*  » 

OiSTiNCUiSHiNC  Flags  and  Lanterns. 


fosition  of 


Field  Army.  Hdfr%. 


tifiuttry  Divlaion  tUqrs. 


Cavatfy  Division  Hd^rs 


Artillery  BriyxdeHdjrs. 


tnAnUyBrtgade  Hdcira. 


Flay 
(by  day) 


Lantern 

(by  ni^ht) 


a 


MMA  COLUOe  eiKISJOHUfeAALiTAfF.  A£.0/{AHAM  CO, 


APPEMIlIX  S. 

Distinguishing  Flags  and  Lanterns. 


FosiUon  of 
Cavalry Srisadeffdqn. 

Supply  TraUt 
andQMDepoU 

AmmjunitiOH  train 
JhstribuUnp  povua 
ondDepoU 

SanUaryThUn, 
ReffimentalAid&Dresainy 
statun  Sanitary  CbltimA, 
HoapiUUeIc 

TeUyrofihataiion 
Postomee 

Flag 
(by  day) 

O          60- 

4 

r 

Lantern  | 
(byraght) 

5 

< 

/ 

\ 

R 

tf</  cross  flag  to  bediapU 
vithtAtnaUonalha^ 

! 

m 

H    ) 

+ 

72" 

T 

(       1 

.*6- 

P 

A.B.GMHAM  CO. 


eOWMSniTH  OUIHIATQR 


NoT2. — 1.  The  various  headquarters  and  stations  may  also  be 
marked  at  night  by  illuminated  signs.  These  may  be  extem- 
porized when  not  provided  by  the  quartermaster.  Standard  signs 
provided  by  the  quartermaster  should  be  printed  in  white  on 
pieces  of  black  waxed  oilcloth,  about  20  by  15  inches. 

2.  The  extensive  use  of  signs  in  large  camps  is  very  necessary 
to  prevent  confusion  and  delays  The  signs  required  may  be 
extemporized. 

3.  Some  samples  of  useful  signs  follow  These  may  be  illumi- 
nated at  night. 


WATER 

—Well  3^  mi.-> 

FOR  MEN 

WATER 

<— Stream  Vi  mi. — 

FOR  STOCK 

DRESSING 
STATION 
"^—1  mile— 

HDQRS. 
1st  BRIGADE 
2nd  Division 

3rd  Corps 

HDQRS. 

1st  Division 

2nd  Corps 

HDQRS. 

FIRST 

Army  Corps 

HDQRS. 
1st  BRIGADE 
2nd  Cav.  Div. 

HDQRS. 
1st  BRIGADE 
Field  Artillery 

QM. 

SUPPLY  DEPOT 

1st  Division 

Ammunition 

DEPOT 
1st  Division 

TELEGRAPH 
OFFICE 

POST 
OFFICE 

APPENDIX  6.  191 

Chapter  U.— Prisoners  of  war^ 

Art.  IV   Prisoners  of  war  are  in  the  power  of  the  hostile  Government,  but  not 

of  the  individuals  or  corps  who  capture  them. 

They  must  be  humanely  treated. 

All  their  personal  belongings,  except  arms>  horses,  and  military  papers,  remain 
their  property 

Art.  V.  Prisoners  of  war  may  be  interned  in  a  town,  fortress,  camp,  or  other 
place,  and  bound  not  to  go  beyond  certain  fixed  limits;  but  they  can  not  be  con* 
fined  except  as  an  indispensable  measure  of  safety  and  only  while  the  circum- 
stances which  necessitate  the  measure  continue  to  exist. 

Art.  VI.  The  State  may  utilize  the  labour  of  prisoners  of  war  according  to  their 
rank  and  aptitude,  officers  excepted.  The  tasks  shall  not  be  excessive  and  shall 
have  no  coimection  with  the  operations  of  the  war. 

Prisoners  may  be  authorized  to  work  for  the  public  service,  for  private  persons, 
or  on  their  own  account. 

Work  done  for  the  State  is  paid  at  the  rates  in  force  for  work  of  a  similar  kind 
done  by  soldiers  of  the  national  army,  or,  if  there  are  none  in  force,  at  a  rate  accord 
ing  to  the  work  executed. 

When  the  work  is  for  other  branches  of  the  public  service  or  for  private  persons 
the  conditions  are  settled  in  agreement  with  the  military  authorities. 

The  wages  of  the  prisoners  shall  go  toward  improving  their  position^  and  the 
balance  shall  be  paid  them  on  their  release,  after  deducting  the  cost  of  their  mainte- 
nance. 

Art.  VII.  The  Government  into  whose  hands  prisoners  of  war  have  fallen  is 
charged  with  their  maintenance. 

In  the  absence  of  a  special  agreement  between  the  belligerents,  prisoners  of  war 
shall  be  treated  as  regards  board,  lod.jrng,  and  clothing  on  the  same  footing  as  the 
troops  of  the  Government  who  captured  them. 

Art  VIII.  Prisoners  of  v.-ar  shall  be  subject  to  the  laws,  regulations,  and  orders 
in  force  in  the  army  of  the  State  in  whose  power  they  are.  Any  act  of  insubordina- 
tion justifies  the  adoption  toward  them  of  such  measures  of  severity  as  may  be 
considered  necessary 

Escaped  prisoners  who  are  retaken  before  being  able  to  rejoin  their  own  army 
or  before  leaving  the  territory  occupied  by  the  army  which  captured  them  are 
liable  to  disciplinary  piuiishment 

Prisoners  who,  after  succeeding  in  escaping,  are  again  taken  prisoners,  are  not 
liable  to  any  punishment  on  account  of  the  previous  flight. 

Art.  IX.  Every  prisoner  of  war  is  bound  to  give,  if  he  is  questioned  on  the  sub- 
ject, his  true  name  and  rank,  and  if  he  infringes  this  rule,  he  is  liable  to  have  the 
advantages  given  to  prisoners  of  his  class  curtailed. 

Art  X.  Prisoners  of  war  may  be  set  at  liberty  on  parole  if  the  laws  of  their  coun- 
try allow,  and,  in  such  cases,  they  are  bound,  on  their  personal  honour,  scrupulously 
to  fulfill,  both  toward  their  own  Government  and  the  Government  by  whom  they 
were  made  prisoners,  the  engagements  they  have  contracted. 

In  such  cases  their  ov/n  Government  is  boxmd  neither  to  require  of  nor  accept 
from  them  any  service  incompatible  with  the  parole  given. 

Art.  XI.  A  prisoner  of  war  can  not  be  compelled  to  accept  his  liberty  on  pg'role; 
similarly  the  hostile  Government,  is  not  obliged  to  accede  to  the  request  of  the 
prisoner  to  be  set  at  liberty  on  parole. 

Art.  XII.  Prisoners  of  war  liberated  on  parole  and  recaptured  bearing  arms 
against  the  Government  to  whom  they  had  pledged  their  honour^  or  against  the 
allies  of  that  Government,  forfeit  their  right  to  be  treated  as  prisoners  of  war,  and 
can  be  brought  before  the  courts. 


192  APPENDIX  6. 

Aet.  Xm.  Individuals  who  follow  an  army  without  directly  belonging  to  it, 
such  as  newspaper  correspondents  and  reporters,  sutlers  and  contractors,  who 
fall  into  the  enemy's  hands  and  whom  the  latter  thinks  expedient  to  detain,  are 
•  entitled  to  be  treated  as  prisoners  of  war,  provided  they  are  in  possession  of  a  cer- 
tificate from  the  military  authorities  of  the  army  which  they  were  accompanying. 

Art.  XrV.  An  inquiry  office  for  prisoners  of  war  is  instituted  on  the  commence- 
ment of  hostilities  in  each  of  the  belligerent  States,  and,  when  necessary,  in  neutral 
countries  which  have  received  beUigerents  in  their  territory.  It  is  the  function 
of  this  office  to  reply  to  all  inquiries  about  the  prisoners.  It  receives  from  the 
various  services  concerned  full  information  respecting  internments  and  transfers, 
releases  on  parole,  exchanges,  escapes,  admissions  into  hospital,  deaths,  as  well 
as  other  information  necessarv  to  enable  it  to  make  out  and  keep  up  to  date  an 
individual  return  for  each  prisoner  of  war.  The  office  must  state  in  this  return 
the  regimental  number,  name  and  surname,  age,  place  of  origin,  rank,  unit,  woimds, 
date  and  place  of  capture,  internment,  wounding,  and  death,  as  well  as  anv  obser- 
vations of  a  special  character.  The  individvial  return  shall  be  sent  to  the  iaovem- 
ment  of  the  other  belligerent  after  the  conclvision  of  peace. 

It  is  likewise  the  function  of  the  Inquiry  office  to  receive  and  collect  all  objects 
of  personal  use,  valuables,  letters,  etc.,  found  on  the  field  of  battle  or  left  by  i)ris- 
oners  who  have  been  released  on  i)arole,  or  exchanged,  or  who  have  escaped,  or 
died  in  hospitals  or  ambulances,  and  to  forward  them  to  those  concerned. 

Art.  XV.  ReUef  societies  for  prisoners  of  war,  which  are  projperly  constituted 
in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  their  country  arid  with  the  object  of  serving  as 
the  channel  for  charitable  effort  shall  receive  irom  the  belligerents,  for  themselves 
and  their  duly  accredited  agents  every  facility  for  the  efficient  performance  of 
their  humane  task  within  the  bounds  impooed  by  military  necessities  and  admin- 
istrative regulations.  Agents  of  these  societies  may  be  admitted  to  the  places  of 
internment  for  the  purpose  of  distributing  relief,  as  also  to  the  halting  places  of 
repatriated  prisoners.  If  furnished  with  a  personal  permit  by  the  military  authori- 
ties, ana  on  giving  an  xmdertakin^  in  writing  to  comply  with  all  measures  of  order 
and  police  which  the  latter  may  issue. 

Art.  XVI.  Inquiry  offices  enjoy  the  privilege  of  free  postage.  Letters,  money 
orders,  and  valuables,  as  well  as  parcels  by  post,  intended  for  prisoners  of  war,  or 
dispatched  by  them,  shall  be  exempt  from  all  postal  duties  in  the  countries  of  origin 
and  destination,  as  well  as  in  the  countries  they  pass  through. 

Presents  and  relief  in  kind  for  prisoners  of  war  shah  be  admitted  free  of  all  import 
or  other  duties,  as  well  as  of  payments  for  carriage  by  the  State  railways. 

Art.  XVII.  Officers  taken  prisoners  shall  receive  the  same  rate  of  pay  as  officers 
of  corresponding  rank  in  the  coimtry  where  they  are  detained,  the  amount  to  be 
ultimately  refunded  by  their  own  Government. 

Art.  XVIII.  Prisoners  of  war  shall  enjoy  complete  liberty  in  the  exercise  of  their 
rehgion.  including  attendance  at  the  services  of  whatever  church  they  may  belong 
to,  on  the  sole  condition  that  they  comply  with  the  measures  of  order  and  police 
issued  by  the  military  authorities. 

Art.  XIX.  The  wills  of  prisoners  of  ww  are  received  or  drawn  up  in  the  same 
way  as  for  soldiers  of  the  national  army. 

The  same  rule  shall  be  observed  regarding  death  certificates  as  well  as  for  the 
burial  ofprisoners  of  war,  due  regard  being  paid  to  their  grade  and  rank. 

Art.  XX.  After  the  conclusion  of  peace,  the  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war 
shall  be  carried  out  as  quickly  as  possible. 

Chapter  m.—  The  sicTt  and  wounded. 

Art.  XXI.  The  obligations  of  belligerents  with  regard  to  the  sick  and  wounded 
are  governed  by  the  Geneva  Convention. 


APPENDIX  6.  193 

Section  H.— Hosteuties. 

C;h.\.pteb  I.— Means  of  injuring  the  enemy,  sieges,  and  bonibardmetUs* 

Art.  XXII.  The  right  of  belligerents  to  adopt  means  of  injuring  the  enemy  is 
not  unlimited.  .  .... 

Art.  XXIII.  In  addition  to  the  prohibitions  provided  by  special  conventions, 

it  is  ospeciallv  forbidden — 

(a)  To  employ  poison  or  poisoned  weapons; 

lb)  To  kill  or  wound  treacherously  individuals  belonging  to  the  hostile  nation 
or  army; 

(c)  To  kill  or  wound  an  enemy  who,  having  laid  down  his  arms,  or  having  no 
longer  means  of  defense,  has  surrendered  at  discretion; 

(5)  To  declare  that  no  quarter  will  be  given; 

(e)  To  employ  arms,  projectiles,  or  material  calculated  to  cause  unnecessary 
suffer  ing; 

( / )  To  make  improper  use  of  a  flag  of  truce,  of  the  national  flag,  or  of  the  military 
insignia  and  uniform  of  the  enemy,  as  well  as  the  distinctive  badges  of  the  Geneva 
Convention; 

(g)  To  destroy  or  seize  the  enemy's  property,  unless  such  destruction  or  seizure 
be  imperatively  demanded  by  the  necessities  of  war; 

(h)  To  declare  abolished,  suspended,  Or  inadmissible  in  ia  court  of  law  the  rights 
and  actions  of  the  nationals  of  the  hostile  party. 

A  belligerent  is  likewise  forbidden  to  compel  the  nationals  of  the  hostile  party 
to  take  part  in  the  oporations  of  war  directed  against  their  own  country,  even  il 
they  were  in  the  belligerent's  service  before  the  commencement  of  the  war. 

Art.  XXIV,  Ruses  of  war  and  the  employment  of  measures  necessary  for  obtain- 
ing information  about  the  enemy  and  the  country  are  considered  permissible. 

Art.  XXV.  The  attack  or  bombardment,  by  whatever  means,  of  towns,  villagos, 
dwellings,  or  buildings  which  are  imdefended  is  prohibited. 

Art.  XXVI.  The  officer  in  command  of  an  attacking  force  must,  before  com- 
mencing a  bombardment,  except  in  cases,  of  assault,  do  all  in  his  power  to  warn 
the  authorities. 

Art.  XXVII.  In  sieges  and  bombardments  all  necessary  steps  must  be  taken  to 
spare,  as  far  as  possible,  buildings  dedicated  to  religion,  art,  science,  or  charitable 
purposes,  historic  monuments,  hospitals,  and  places  where  the  sick  and  wounded 
are  collected ,  provided  that  they  are  not  being  used  at  the  time  for  military  purposes. 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  besieged  to  Indicate  the  presence  of  such  buildings  or  places 
by  distinctive  and  visible  signs,  which  shall  be  notified  to  the  enemy  beforehand. 

Art.  XXVIII.  The  pillage  of  a  town  or  place,  even  when  taken  oy  assault,  is 
prohibited 

Chapteb  n.— Spies. 

Art.  XXIX.  A  person  can  only  be  considered  a  spy  when,  acting  clandestinely 
or  on  false  pretences,  he  obtains  or  endeavours  to  obtain  information  in  the  zone  of 
operations  of  a  belligerent,  with  the  intention  of  communicating  it  to  the  hostile 
party. 

Thus,  soldiers  not  wearing  a  disguise  who  have  penetrated  into  the  zone  of  opera- 
tions of  the  hostile  army,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  information,  are  not  con- 
sidered spies.  Similarly,  the  following  are  not  considered  spies:  Soldiers  and 
civilians,  carrying  out  their  mission  openly,  intrusted  with  the  delivery  of  des- 
patches intended  either  for  their  own  army  or  for  the  enemy^s  army.  To  this  class 
belong  likewise  persons  sent  in  balloons  for  the  purpose  of  carrying  despatches  and, 
generally,  of  maintaining  communications  between  the  different  parts  of  an  army  or 
a  territory. 

353790—14 13 


194  ^p:^endix  6. 

Aet.  XXX.  A  spy  taken  in  tlje  act  shall  not  be  punislied  without  previous  trial. 

Art.  XXXI.  A  spy  who,  after  rejoining  the  army  to  which  he  belongs,  is  subse- 
quently captured  by  the  enemy,  is  treated  as  aprisoner  of  war,  and  incurs  no  respon- 
sibility for  nis  previous  acts  of  espionage. 

Chapter  111.— Flags  of  truce. 

Art.  XXXII.  A  person  is  regarded  as  bearing  a  flag  of  truce  who  Jhas  been  au- 
thorized  by  one  of  the  belligerents  to.  enter  into  communication  with  the  other,  and 
who  advances  bearing  a  white  flag.  He  has  a  right  to  inviolability,  as  weU  as  the 
trumpeter,  bugler  or  drummer,  the  flag-bearer  and  interpreter  who  may  accompany 
him. 

ART.  XXXIII.  The  commander  to  whom  a  flag  of  truce  is-sent  is-not.in  all  cases 
obliged  to  receive  it. 

He  may  take  all  the  necessary  steps  to  prevent  the  envoy  taking  advantage  .of  his 
mission  to  obtain  information. 

In  case  of  abuse,  he  has  the  right  to  detain  the  envoy  temporarily 

Art.  XXXIV.  The  envov  loses  his  right  of  inviolabiUty  if  it  is  proved  in  a  clear 
and  incontestable  manner  that  he  has  taken  advantage  of  his  privileged  positi<«i,trO 
provoke  or  commit  an  act  of  treachery. 

Chapter  IV.—  Capitulations^ 

Art.  XXXV.  Capitulations  agreed  upon  between  the  contracting  parties  must 
take  into  account  the  rules  of  military  honour. 
Once  settled,  they  must  be  scrupulously  observed  by  both  parties. 

Chaptbb  W.—Armistiut. 

Art.  XXXVI.  An  armistice  ;5uspends  military  operations  by  mutual  agreement 
between  the  belligerent  parties,  if  its  duration  is  not  defined,  the  belligerent 
parties  jnay  resume  operations  at  any  time,  provided  always  that  the  enemy  is 
warned  within  the  time  agreed  upon,  in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  the  armistice. 

Art.  XXXVII.  An  armistice  may  be  general  or  local.  •  .The  first  suspends-  the 
military  operations  of  the  belligerent  States  everywhere;  the  second  only  between 
certain  fractions  of  the  belligerent  armies  and  within  a.fixed  radius. 

Art.  XXXVm.  An  armistice  must  be  notified  oflScially  and  in  good  timeto  the 
competent  authorities  and  to  the  troops.  Hostilities  are  suspended  immediately 
after  the  notification,  or  on  the  date  fixed. 

Art.  XXXIX.  It  rests  with  the  contracting  parties  to  settle,  in  the  terms  of  the 
armistice,  what  commvmications  may  be  held  in  the  theater  of  war  with  the  inhab- 
itants and  between  the  inhabitants  of  one  belligerent  State  and  those  of  the  other. 

Art.  XL.  Any  serious  violation  of  the  armistice  by  one  of  the  parties  gives  the 
other  party  the  right  of  denouncing  it,  and  even,  in  cases  of  urgency,  of  recom- 
mencing hostilities,  immediately. 

ART.  XLI.  A  violation  of  the  terms  of  the  armistice  by  private  persons  acting 
on  their  own  initiative  only  entitles  the  injured  party  to  demand  the  punishment 
of  the  offenders  or,  if  iiecessary,  compensation  for  the  losses  sustained. 

Section  in.— MnJiART  Authority  over  the  Terbitoey  of  the  Ho^tiLE  State 

*ART.  XLII.  Territory  is  considered  occupied  .when  It  is  actually  placed  under 
the  authority  of  the  hostile  army. 

The  occupation  .extends  only  to  the  teiritoxy  where  such  authority  =ha&  beeo 
established  and  can  be  exercised. 


APPENDIX  6.  195 

Art  XLIIl.  The  authority  of  the  legitimate  power  having  In  fact  passed  into 
the  hands  of  the  occupant,  the  latter  shall  take  all  the  measures  in  his  power  to 
re.store,  and  ensure,  as  far  as  possible,  public  order  and  safety,  while  respecting, 
unless  absolutely  prevented,  the  laws  in  force  in  the  country. 

Art.  XLIV.  a  belligerent  is  forbidden  to  force  the  inhabitants  of  territory  occu- 
pied by  it  to  furnish  information  about  the  army  of  the  other  belligerent,  or  about 
its  means  of  defence. 

Art.  XLV.  It  is  forbidden  to  compel  the  inhabitants  of  occupied  territory  to 
swear  allegiance  to  the  hostile  power. 

Art.  XL VI.  Family  honour  and  rights,  the  lives  of  persons,  and  private  prop- 
erty, as  well  as  religious  convictions  and  practice,  muSt  be  respected. 

Private  property  can  not  be  confiscated. 

Art.  XLVII.  Pillage  is  formally  forbidden. 

Art.XLVIII.  If,  in  the  territory  occupied,  the  occupant  collects  the  taxes, 
dues,  and  tolls  imposed  for  the  benefit  of  the  State,  he  shall  do  so,  as  far  as  is  possible, 
in  accordance  with  the  rules  of  assessment  and  iacidence  in  force,  -and  shall  ia  con- 
sequence be  boiuid  to  defray  the  expenses  of  the  administration  of  the  occupied 
territory  to  the  same  extent  as  the  legitimate  Government  was  so  boimd. 

Art  XLIX.  If,  in  addition  to  the  taxes  mentioned  in  the  above  article,  the 
ccGupant  levies  other  money  contributions  in  the  occupied  territory,  this  shall 
only  be  for  the  needs  of  the  army  or  of  the  administration  of  the  territory  in  question . 

Art.  L.  No  general  penalty,  pecuniary  or  otherwise,  shall  be  inflicted  upon  the 
population  on  account  of  the  acts  of  individuals  for  which  they  can  not  be  regarded 
as  jointly  and  severally  responsible. 

Art.  i/I.  No  contribution  shall  be  collected  except  under  a  written  order,  and 
on  the  responsibility  of  a  commander  in  chief. 

The  collection  of  the  said  contribution  shall  only  be  effected  as  fas  as  possible  in 
accordance  with  the  rules  of  assessment  and  incidence  of  the  taxes  in  force. 

For  every  contribution  a  receipt  shall  be  given  to  the  contributors. 

Art.  LIT.  Requisitions  in  kind  and  services  shall  not  be  demanded  from  munic- 
ipalities or  inhabitants  except  for  the  needs  of  the  army  of  occupation.  They  shall 
be  in  proportion  to  the  resources  of  the  coimtry,.  and  of  such  a  nature  as  not  to 
involve  the  inhabitants  in  the  obligation  of  taking  part  in  military  operations 
agaipst  their  own  country. 

Such  requisitions  and  services  shall  only  be  demanded  on  the  authority  of  the 
commander  in  the  locality  occupied. 

Contributions  in  kind  shall.as  far  as  possible  be  paid  for  in  cash;  if  not,  a  receipt 
shall  be  given  and  the  payment  of  the  amount  due  shall  be  made  as  soon  as  possible. 

Art.  LIII.  An  army  of  occupation  can  only  take  possession  of  cash,  funds,  and 
realizable  securities  which  are  strictly  the  property  of  the  State,  depots  of  arms, 
means  of  transport,  stores  and  supplies,  and,  generally,  all  movable  property 
belonging  to  the  State  which  may  be  used  for  military  operations. 

All  appliances,  whether  on  land,  at  sea,  or  in  the  air,  adapted  for  the  transmission 
of  news,  or  for  the  transport  of  persons  or  things,  exclusive  of  cases  governed  by 
naval  law,  depots  of  arms,  and,  generally,  all  kinds  of  ammtmition  of  war,  may  be 
seized,  even  if  they  belong  to  private  individuals,  but  must  be  restored  and  com- 
pensation fixed,  when  peace  is  made. 

Art.  LIV.  Submarine  cables  connecting  an  occupied  territory  with  a  neutral 
territory  shall  not  be  seized  or  destroyed  except  in  the  case  of  absolute  necessity. 
They  must  likewise  be  restored  and  compensation  fixed  when  peace  is  made. 

>Art-  LV.  The  occupying  State  shall  be  regarded  only  as  administrator  and 
usufructuary  of  public  buildings,  real  estate,  forests,  and  agricultural  estates  belong- 
ing to  the  hostile  State,  and  situated  in  the  occupied  country.  It  must  safeguard 
the  capital  of  these  properties  and  administer  them  in  accordance  with  the  rules 
of  usufruct. 


Ids  APPENDIX  6. 

ABT.  LVI.  The  property  of  municipalities,  that  of  institutions  dedicated  to 
religion,  charity  and  education,  the  arts  and  sciences,  even  when  State  property, 
shall  be  treated  as  private  property. 

All  seizure  of,  destruction  or  wilful  damage  done  to  institutions  of  this  character, 
historic  monuments,  works  of  art  and  science,  is  forbidden  and  should  be  made  the 
subject  of  legal  proceedings. 

CONVENTION  RESPECTING  THE  RIGHTS  AND  DUTIES  OF  NEUTRAL 
POWERS  AND  PERSONS  IN  WAR  ON  LAND 


[Translation.] 
Chaptee  I.—  The  rights  and  duties  of  netUral  powers 

Article  I.  The  territory  of  neutral  powers  is  inviolable. 

Art.  II.  Belligerents  are  forbidden  to  move  troops  or  convoys  of  either  munitions 
of  war  or  supplies  across  the  territory  of  a  neutral  power. 

Art.  III.  Belligerents  are  likewise  forbidden  to: 

(a)  Erect  on  the  territory  of  a  neutral  power  a  wireless-telegraphy  station  or  other 
apparatus  for  the  purpose  of  communicating  with  belligerent  forces  on  land  or  sea; 

Q))  Use  any  installation  of  this  kind  established  by  them  before  the  war  on  the 
territory  of  a  neutral  power  for  purely  military  purposes,  and  which  has  not  been 
opened  for  the  service  of  public  messages. 

Art.  IV.  Corps  of  combatants  can  not  be  formed  nor  recruiting  agencies  opened 
on  the  territory  of  a  neutral  power  to  assist  the  belligerents. 

Art.  V.  A  neutral  power  must  not  allow  any  of  the  acts  referred  to  in  Articles 
II  to  TV  to  occur  on  its  territory. 

It  is  not  called  upon  to  punish  acts  in  violation  of  its  neutrality  imless  the  said 
acts  have  been  committed  on  its  own  territory. 

Art.  VI.  The  responsibility  of  a  neutral  power  is  not  engaged  by  the  fact  of 
persons  crossing  the  frontier  separately  to  offer  their  services  to  one  of  the  bellig- 
erents. 

Art.  VII.  A  neutral  power  is  not  called  upon  to  prevent  the  export  or  transport, 
on  behalf  of  one  or  other  of  the  belligerents,  of  arms,  munitions  of  war,  or,  in  general, 
of  anything  which  can  be  of  use  to  an  army  or  a  fleet. 

Art.  VIII.  A  neutral  power  is  not  called  upon  to  forbid  or  restrict  the  use  on 
behalf  of  the  belligerents  of  telegraph  or  telephone  cables  or  of  wireless  telegraphy 
apparatus  belonging  to  it  or  to  companies  or  private  individuals. 

Art.  IX.  Every  measure  of  restriction  or  prohibition  taken  by  a  neutral  power 
in  regard  to  the  matters  referred  to  in  Articles  VII  and  VIII  must  be  impartially 
applied  by  it  to  both  belligerents. 

A  neutral  power  must  see  to  the  same  obligation  being  observed  by  companies 
or  private  individuals  owning  telegraph  or  telephone  cables  or  wireless  telegraphy 
apparatus. 

Art.  X.  The  fact  of  a  neutral  power  resistmg,  even  by  force,  attempts  to  violate 
its  neutrality  can  not  be  regarded  as  a  hostile  act. 

Chapter  H.— Belligerents  interned  and  wounded  tended  in  neutral  territory. 

Art.  XI.  A  neutral  power  which  receives  on  its  territory  troops  belonging  to  the 
belligerent  armies  shall  intern  them,  as  far  as  possible,  at  a  distance  from  the  theater 
of  war. 

It  may  keep  them  in  camps  and  even  confine  them  in  fortresses  or  in  places  set 
apart  for  this  purpose. 


APPENDIX  0.  197 

It  shall  decide  whether  officers  can  be  left  at  liberty  on  giving  their  parole  not 
to  leave  the  neutral  territory  without  permission. 

-Art.  XII.  In  the  absence  of  a  special  convention  to  the  contrary,  the  neutral 
power  shall  supply  the  interned  with  the  food,  clothing,  and  relief  required  by 
humanity.  , 

At  the  conclusion  of  peace  the  expenses  caused  by  the  internment  shall  be  made 
good. 

Art.  XIII.  A  neutral  power  which  receives  escaped  prisoners  of  war  shall  leave 
them  at  liberty.  If  it  allows  them  to  remain  in  its  territory  it  may  assign  them  a 
place  of  residences  _ .  -_ ^- 

The  same  rule  applies  to  prisoners  of  war  brought  by  troops  taking  refuge  in  the 
territory  of  a  neutral  power. 

Art.  XIV.  A  neutral  power  may  authorize  the  passage  into  its  territory  of  the 
sick  and  wounded  belonging  to  the  belligerent  armies,  on  condition  that  the  trains 
bringing  them  shall  carry  neither  personnel  nor  v/ar  material.  In  such  a  case,  the 
neutral  power  is  boimd  to  take  whatever  measures  of  safety  and  control  are  neces- 
sarv  for  the  purpose. 

'The  sick  or  wounded  brought  under  these  conditions  into  neutral  territory  by 
one  of  the  belligerents,  and  belonging  to  the  hostile  party,  must  be  guarded  by  the 
neutral  power  so  as  to  inisure  their  not  taking  part  again  "in  the  military  operations. 
The  same  duty  shall  devolve  on  the  neutral  State  with  regard  to  wounded  or  sick 
of  the  other  army  who  may  be  committed  to  its  care. 

Art.  XV.  The  Geneva  Convention  applies  to  sick  and  wounded  interned  in 
(neutral  territory. 

Chapter  IJI.-r  Neutral  persons. 

ART.  XVI.— The  nationals  of  a  State  which  is  not  taking  part  in  the  war  are 
considered  as  neutrals. 
Art.  XVII.— a  neutral  can  not  avail  himself  of  his  neutrality: 

(a)  If  he  commits  hostile  acts  against  a  belligerent; 

(b)  If  he  commits  acts  in  favour  of  a  belligerent,  oarticulariy  if  he  voluntarily 
enlists  in  the  ranks  of  the  armed  force  of  one  of  the  parties. 

In  such  a  case,  the  neutral  shall  not  be  more  severelv  treated  by  ibe  belligerent 
as  against  whom  he  has  abandoned  bis  neutrality  than  a  nationai  of  the  other 
belligerent  State  could  be  for  the  same  act. 

Art.  XVIII.  The  following  acts  shall  not  be  considered  as  committed  in  favour 
of  one  belligerent  in  the  sense  of  Article  XVII,  letter  (6): 
(a)  Supplies  furnished  or  loans  made  to  one  of  the  belligerents,  provided  that 
the  person  who  furnishes  the  supplies  or  who  makes  the  loans  lives  neither 
in  the  territory  of  the  ether  party  nor  in  the  territory  occupied  by  him 
and  that  the  supplies  do  not  come  from  these  territories; 
(6)  Services  rendered  in  matters  of  police  or  civil  administration. 

Chapter  IV.— Railway  material. 

Art.  XIX.  Railway  material  coming  frorq  the  territory  of  neutral  powers, 
whether  it  be  the  property  of  the  said  powers  or  of  companies  or  private  persons, 
and  recognizable  as  such,  shall  not  be  requisitioned  or  utilized  by  a  beuigerent 
except  wnere  and  to  the  extent  that  it  is  absolutely  necessary.  It  shall  be  sent 
back  as  soon  as  possible  to  the  country  of  origin. 

A  neutral  power  may  likewise,  in  case  of  necessity,  4?etain  and  utilize  to  an  equal 
extent  material  coming  from  the  territory  of  the  belligerent  power. 

Compensation  shall  be  paid  by  one  party  or  the  other  in  proportion  to  the  material 
tised,  and  to  the  period  of  usage. 


198  APBExmixe. 

CONVENTION  RELATIVE  TO  THE  LAYING  OP  AUTOMATIC    SUB- 
1«L\RINE  CONTACT  MINES. 


Article  I.  It  is  forbidden: 

1.  To  lay  unanchored  automatic  contact  mines,  except  whenl;liey  are  so  ron- 
structed  as  to  become  harmless  one  hour  at  most  after  the  person  who  laid  them 
ceases  to  control  them; 

2.  To  lay  anchored  automatic  contact  mines  which  do  not  become  harmless  as 
soon  as  they  have  brokenloose  from  their  moorings; 

3.  To  use  torpedoes  which  do  not  become  harmless  when  they  have  missed  their 
mark. 

Art.  II.  It  is  forbidden  to  lay  automatic  contact  mines  off  the  coast  and  ports 
of  the  enemy,  with  the  sole  object  of  intercepting  commercial  shipping. 

Art.  III.  When  anchored  automatic  contact  mines  are  employed,  every  possible 
precaution  must  be  taken  for  the  security  of  peaceful  shipping. 

The  belligerents  undertake  to-do  theij  utmost  to  render  these  mines  harmless 
within  a  limited  time,  and,  should  they  cease  to  be  under  surveillance,  to  notify 
the  danger  zones  as  soon,  as  military  exigencies  permit,  by  a  notice  addressed  to 
shipowners,  which  must  Also  be  communicated  to  the  Governments  through  the 
diplomatic  channel. 

Art.  IV.  Neutral  powers  which,  lay  automatia  contact  mines  oft  their  coasts 
must  observe  the  same  rules  and  take  the  same  precautions  as  are  imposed  on 
belligerents. 

The  neutral  power  must  inform  shipowners,  by  a  notice  Issued  in  advance, 
where  automatic  contact  mines,  have  been  laid.  This  notice  must  be  communi- 
cated at  once  to  the  Governments  through  the  diplomatic  channel. 

Art.  V.  At  the  close  of  the  war,  the  contracting  powers  undertake  to  do  their 
utmost  to  remove  the  mines  which  they  had  laid,  each  power  removing  its  own 
mines. 

As  regards  anchored  automatic  contact  mines  laid  by  one  of  the  belligerents  off 
the  coast  of  the  other,  their  position  must  be  notified  to  the  other  party  by  the 
power  which  laid  them,  and  each  power  must  proceed  with  the  least  possible  delay 
to  remove  the  mines  in  its  own  waters. 

Art.  VI.  The  contracting  powers  which  do  not  at  present  ovra  perfected  mines 
of  the  pattern  contemplated  in  the  present  convention,  and  which,  consequently, 
could  not  at  present  carrv  out  the  rules  laid  down  in  Articles  I  and  III,  iindertake 
to  convert  the  materiel  of  their  mines  as  soon  as  possible,  so  as  to  bring  it  into  con- 
formity with  the  foregoing  rei^uirements. 


DECLARATION  PROHIBITING  THE    DISCHARGE   OF  PROJECTILES 
AND  EXPLOSIVES  FROM  BALLOONS. 


The  contracting  powers  agree  to  prohibit,  for  a  period  extending  to  the  close  of 
the  third  peace  conference,  the  discharge  of  projectiles  and  explosives  from  balloons 
or  bv  other  new  methods  of  a  similar  nature. 

The  present  declaration  is  only  binding  on  the  contracting  powers  in  .case  of  war 
between  two  or  more  of  them.  .  ...         .^    .. 

It  shall  cease  to  be  binding  from  the  time  when,  in  a  war  between  thecontt-actmg 
powers,  one  of  the  belligerents  is  joined  by  a  noncontracting  power. 


APFBNDIZ  €. 


^W 


TABLE  OF  RATIFICATIONS  AND  ADHESIONS  TO  SUCH  OF  THE 
CONVENTIONS  AS  ARE  MENTIONED  IN  THE  TEXT. 

[A  convention  may  be  ratified  by  a  signatory  power  or  adhered  to  by  a  nonsigna- 
tory  power.  In  the  table  the  following  nomenclature  is  used:  R=Ratifled< 
RR=*Ratified  with  reservations.    A=Adhered  to.] 


• 

Convention 
concerning 
the  laws 
and  cus- 
toms of  war 
onland. 

Convention 
concerning 

the  rights 
and  duties 

of  neutral 
powers 

and  per- 
sons in  case 

of  war  on 
land. 

Convention 
relating  to 
the  laying 
of  auto- 
matic sub- 
marine cori- 
tact  mines. 

Declara- 
tioArela^ 
tiveto 
prohibit- 
ing the 
throwing 
down  of 
projectiles' 
and  explo- 
sives from 
baUoons, 
aeroplanes, 
etc. 

G6rmany ; 

RR 

R 
RR 

R 

R 

R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
A 
R 
R 
R 

BR 

1 

R 

United  States 

R 

Austria-Hungary , 

Belgium ^  .. 

R 

Bolivia.... : 

R 

China . 

R 

Cuba 

R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 

i 

R 
R 
R 
RR 
R 
R 
R 
R 

Denmark 

*  "r 

RR 
BR 
R 
R 
R 
R 

§ 

A 
R 
R 

France 

■ 

Greiit  Britain 

R 

Oiifttp.mala. ...» 

R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
A 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 

Haiti 

••'•r 

Japan 

Luxeinbilrg 

Mexico... 

R 

Netherlatids - 

R, 

Nicaragua............  , 

j^ 

Norway.. 

R 

Pianatna. 

R 

Portugal... 

R 

"Ro'imaTiia  ..., .  .  r . , .  . 

R 

Russia... , 

Salvador..^ 

R 
RR 

R 

Siam 

R 

Sweden. 

S  WItzetlan  d 

R 

R 

200  APPENDIX  6. 

B. 

iHtEENATIONAL  RED  CE0S8  CONVENTION-. 

[Revision  of  the  Geneva  Convention-J 

The  International  Convention  for  the  AmeUoration  of  the  Con- 
dition of  the  Wounded  and  Sick  in  Armies  in  the  Field,  Geneva. 
1906,  is  as  follows: 

Chaptjee  I.—  The  wounded  and  sicTt. 

Article  1  Officers  and  soldiers,  and  other  persons  officially  attached  to  armies, 
shall  be  respected  and  taken  care  of  when  wounded  or  sick,  by  the  belligerent  in 
whose  power  they  may  be,  without  distinction  of  nationality. 

Nevertheless,  a  belligerent  who  is  compelled  to  abandon  sick  or  wounded  to  the 
enemy  shall,  as  far  as  military  exigencies  permit,  leave  with  them  a  portion  of  his 
medical  personnel  and  material  to  contribute  to  the  care  of  them. 

Aet.  2.  Except  as  regards  the  treatment  to  be  provided  for  them  in  virtue  of 
the  preceding  article,  the  wounded  and  sick  of  an  army  who  fall  into  the  hands  of 
the  enemy  are  prisoners  of  war,  and  the  general  provisions  of  international  law 
concerning  prisoners  are  applicable  to  them. 

)  Belligerents  are,  however,  free  to  arrange  with  one  another  such  exceptions  and 
mitigations  with  reference  to  sick  and  wovmded  prisoners  as  they  may  judge  expe- 
dient; in  particular  they  will  be  at  liberty  to  agree- 
To  restore  to  one  another  the  wounded  left  on  the  field  after  a  battle; 
To  repatriate  any  wounded  and  sick  whom  they  do  not  wish  to  retain  as  prisoners, 
after  rendering  them  fit  for  removal  or  after  recovery; 

To  hand  over  to  a  neutral  State,  with  the  latter's  consent,  the  enemy's  wounded 
and  sick  to  be  interned  by  the  neutral  State  until  the  end  of  hostilities. 

Art.  3.  After  e^ch  engagement  the  commander  in  possession  of  the  field  shall 
take  measures  to  search  for  the  wounded,  and  to  insiure  protection  against  pillage 
and  maltreatment  both  for  the  wounded  and  for  the  dead- 
He  shall  arrange  that  a  careful  examination  of  the  bodies  is  made  before  the  dead 
are  buried  or  cremated. 

Art.  4.  As  early  as  possible  each  belligerent  shall  send  to  the  authorities  of  the 
country  or  army  to  which  they  belong  the  military  identification  marks  or  tokens 
found  on  the  dead,  and  a  nominal  rofl  of  the  wounded  or  sick  who  have  been  col- 
lected by  him. 

The  belligerents  shall  keep  each  other  mutually  informed  of  any  interments  and 
changes,  as  well  as  of  admissions  into  hospital  and  deaths  among  the  wounded  and 
sick  in  their  hands.  They  shall  collect  all  the  articles  of  personal  use,  valuables, 
letters,  etc. ,  which  are  found  on  the  field  of  battle  or  left  by  the  wounded  or  sick  who 
have  died  in  the  medical  establishments  or  units,  in  order  that  such  objects  may  be 
transmitted  to  the  persons  interested  by  the. authorities  of  their  own  country. 

Art  5.  The  competent  military  authority  may  appeal  to  the  charitable  zeal  of 
the  inhabitants  to  collect  and  take  care  of,  under  his  direction,  the  wounded  or  sick 
of  armies,  granting  to  those  who  respond  to  the  appeal  special  protection  and  cer- 
tain immunities. 

Chapter  U.— Medical  units  and  establishtnenu. 

AET.  6.  Mobile  medical  units  (that  is  to  say.  those  which  are  intended  to  accom- 
pany armies  into  the  field)  and  the  fixed  establishments  of  the  medical  service  shall 
be  respected  and  protected  by  the  belligerents. 


APPEI^IS  6.  SOI 

Art.  7.  The  protection  to  wMch  medical  units  and  establishments  are  entitled 
ceases  if  they  are  made  use  of  to  commit  acts  harmful  to  the  enemy. 

Aet.  8.  The  following  facts  are  not  considered  to  be  of  a  nature  to  deprive  a  medi- 
cal unit  or  establishment  of  the  protection  guaranteed  by  article  6— 

1.  That  the  personnel  of  the  imit  or  of  the  establishment  is  armed,  and  that  it 
uses  its  arms  for  its  o-wn  defense  or  for  that  of  the  sick  and  wotmded  imder  its  charge. 

2.  That  in  default  of  armed  orderlies  the  unit  or  establishment  is  guarded  by  a 
piquet  or  by  sentinels  fmnished  with  an  authority  in  due  form. 

3.  That  weapons  and  cartridges  taken  from  the  wounded  and  not  yet  handed 
over  to  the  proper  department  are  found  in  the  unit  or  establishment. 

Chapter  HI,— P«r«o7MieZ. 

ART  0,  The  personnel  engaged  exclusively  in  the  collection,  transport,  and 
treatment  of  the  wounded  and  the  sick,  as  well  as  in  the  administration  of  medical 
units  and  establishments,  and  the  chaplains  attached  to  armies,  shall  be  respected 
and  protected  imder  all  circumstances.  If  they  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy 
they  shall  not  be  treated  as  prisoners  of  war. 

These  provisions  apply  to  the  guard  of  medical  units  and  establishments  under 
the  circumstances  indicated  in  article  8  (2), 

Art.  10.  The  personnel  of  voluntary  aid  societies,  duly  recognized  and  authorized 
by  their  Government,  v/ho  may  be  employed  in  the  medical  units  and  establish- 
ment of  armies,  is  placed  on  the  same  footing  as  the  personnel  referred  to  in  the  pre- 
ceding article,  provided  always  that  the  first-mentioned  personnel  shall  be  subject 
to  military  law  and  regulations. 

^  Each  State  shall  notify  to  the  other,  either  in  time  of  peace  or  at  the  commence- 
ment of,  or  during  the  course  of  hostilities,  but  in  every  case  before  actually  employ- 
ing them,  the  names  of  the  societies  which  it  has  authorized,  xmder  its  responsibility, 
to  render  assistance  to  the  regular  medical  service  of  its  armies. 

Aet.  11.  A  recognized  society  of  a  neutral  covmtry  can  only  afford  the  assistance 
of  its  medical  personnel  and  imits  to  a  belligerent  with  the  previous  consent  of  its 
own  Government  and  the  authorization  of  the  belligerent  concerned. 

A  belligerent  who  accepts  such  assistance  is  bound  to  notify  the  fact  to  his  adver- 
sary before  making  any  use  of  it. 

Aet.  12.  The  persons  designated  in  articles  9, 10,  and  11,  after  they  have  fallen 
into  the  hands  of  the  enemy,  shall  continue  to  carry  pn  their  duties  under  his 
direction. 

When  their  assistance  is  no  longer  indispensable,  they  shall  be  sent  back  to  their 
army  or  to  their  coxmtry  at  such  time  and  by  such  route  as  may  be  compatible 
with  military  exigencies. 

They  shall  then  take  with  them  such  effects,  instruments,  arms,  and  horses  as  are 
their  private  property. 

'  Art.  13.  The  enemy  shall  secure  to  the  persons  mentioned  in  article  9,  while  in 
his  hands,  the  same  allowances  and  the  same  pay  as  are  granted  to  the  persons 
holding  the  same  rank  in  his  own  army. 

Chapter  IV .— Material. 

Art.  14.  If  mobile  medical  units  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy  they  shall  retain 
their  material,  including  their  teams,  irrespectively  of  the  means  of  transport  and 
the  drivers  employed. 

Nevertheless,  the  competent  military  authority  shall  be  free  to  use  the  material 
for  the  treatment  of  the  woimded  and  sick.  It  shall  be  restored  under  the  con- 
ditions laid  down  for  the  medical  personnel,  and  sq  far  as  possible  at  the  same  time. 


d02  APPEKBrS  6. 

ART.  15.  The  buildings  and  material  of  fixed  esteblishments  remain  subject  to 
the  laws  of  war,  but  may  not  be  diverted  from  their  purpose  so  long  as  they  are 
necessary  for  the  wounded  and  the  sick. 

Nevertheless,  the  commanders  of  troops  in  the  field  may  dispose  of  them,  in  case 
of  urgent  military  necessity,  provided  they  make  previous  arrangements  for  the 
welfare  of  the  wounded  and'sick  who  are  found  there. 

Art.  16.  The  material  of  voluntary  aid  societies  which  are  admitted  to  the  privi- 
leges of  the  convention  under  the  conditions  laid  down  therein  is  considered  private 
property,  and,  as  such,  to  be  respected  under  all  circimistances,  saving  only  the 
right  of  requisition  recognized  for  belligerents  in  accordance  with  the  laws  and 
customs  of  war 

Chaptee  V  .—Convoifs  oJ  evacuaiion. 

A-?.  17.  Convoys  of  evacuation  shall  be  treated  like  mobile  medical  units,  sub 
jecv  to  the  following  special  provisions— 

1.  A  belligerent  intercepting  a  convoy  may  break  it  up  If  military  exigencies 
demand,  provided  he  takes  charge  of  the  sick  and  wounded  who  are  in  it 

2.  In  this  case,  the  obligation  to  send  back  the  medical  personnel,  provided  for 
in  article  12,  shall  be  extended  to  the  whole  of  the  military  personnel  detailed  for 
the  transport  or  the  protection  of  the  convoy,  and  furnished  with  an  authority  in 
due  form  to  that  effect. 

The  obligation  to  restore  the  medical  material,  provided  for  in  article  14,  shall 
apply  to  railway  trains  and  boats  used  in  internal  navigation,  which  are  specially 
arranged  for  evacuations,  as  well  as  to  the  material  belonging  to  the  medical  service 
lor  fitting  up  ordinary  vehicles,  trains,  and  boats 

Military  vehicles,  other  than  those  of  the  medical  service,  may  be  captured  with 
their  teams. 

The  civilian  personnel  and  the  vaiious  means  of  transport  obtained  by  requisi- 
tion, including  railway  material  and  boats  used  for  convoy,  shall  be  subject  to  the 
general  rules  of  international  law 

Chapteb  Wl.— The  distinctm  emblem 

Art  18.  As  a  compliment  to  Switzerland,  the  heraldic  emblem  of  the  red  cross^ 
on  a  white  ground,  formed  by  reversing  the  Federal  colors,  is  retained  as  the 
emblem  and  distinctive  sign  oi  the  medical  service  of  armies. 

Art.  19.  »Vith  the  permission  of  the  competent  military  authority  this  emblem 
shall  be  shown  on  the  flags  and  armlets  (brassards),  as  well  as  on  all  the  material 
belcHiging  to  the  medical  service 

Art.  20.  The  personnel  protected  in  pursuance  of  articles  9  (par  1),  10,  and  11 
shall  wear,  fixed  to  the  left  arm.  an  armlet  (brassard)  with  a  red  cross  on  a  white 
ground  delivered  and  stamped  oy  the  competent  military  authority,  and  accom- 
panied by  a  certificate  of  identity  in  the  case  of  persons  who  are  attached  to  the 
medical  service  of  armies,  but  who  have  not  a  military  uniform. 

Art.  21.  The  distinctive  flag  of  the  convention  shall  only  be  hoisted  over  those 
medical  units  and  establishments  which  are  entitled  to  be  respected  under  the 
convention,  and  with  the  consent  of  the  military  authorities.  It  must  be  accom- 
panied by  the  national  flag  of  the  belligerent  to  whom  the  unit  or  establishment 
b^ongs. 

Nevertheless,  medical  Units  which  have  fallen  into  the  htods  of  the  enemy^  so 
long  as  they  are  in  that  situation,  shall  not  fly  any  other  flag  than  that  of  the  Red 
Cross. 

Art.  22.  The  medical  units  belonging  to  neutral  countries  which  may  be  author- 
ized to  afford  their  services  under  the  conditions  laid  down  in  article  11  shall  fly, 
along  with  the  flag  of  the  convention,  the  national  flag  of  the  belligerent  to  whose 
anny  they  are  attached.  *^ 


The  provisions  of  the  second  pwagrapli  of  tjie  preceding^artide  are  applicable  to 
them. 

Aet.  23.  The  emblem  of  the  red  cross  on  a  white  gromid  and  the  words  "Red 
Cross"  or  "Geneva  Cross"  shall  not  be  used,  either  in  time  of  peace  or  in  time  of 
war,  except  to  protect  or  to  indicate  the  medical  miits  and  establishments  and  the 
personnel  .and  niaterlal  protected  by  the  convention. 

Chaptee  VII.— Application  and  carrying  out  of  the  cdnvention. 

Aet.  24.  The  provisions  of  the  present  convention  are  only  binding  upon  the 
contracting  powers  in  the  case  of  war  between  two  or  more  of  them.  These  pro- 
visions shall  pease  to  be  binding  from  the  moment  when  one  of  the  belligerent 
powers  is  not  a  party  to  the  convention. 

Aet.  25.  The  commanders  in  chief  of  bellieerent  armies  shall  arrange  the  details 
for  carrying  out  the  preceding  articles,  as  well  as  for  cases  not  provided  for,  inaccord- 
ance  with  the  instructions  oitheir  respective  Governments  and  in  conformity  with 
the  general  principles  of  the  present  convention. 

Akt.  26.  The  signatory  Governments  will  take  the  necessary  measures  to  instruct 
their  troops,  especially  the  personnel  protected,  in  the  provisions  of  the  present 
convention,  and  to  brmg  them  to  the  notice  of  the  civil  population. 

Chaptee  VIU.— Prevention  of  abuses  and  infractions. 

AET  27.  The  signatory  Governments,  in  countries  the  legislation  of  which  is  not 
at  present  adequate  for  the  pm-pose,  undertake  to  adopt  or  to  propose  to  their  legis- 
lative bodies  such  measures  as  may  be  necessary  to  prevent  at  all  times  the  employ- 
ment of  the  emblem  or  the  name  of  Red  Cross  or  Geneva  Cross  by  private  indi- 
viduals or  by  societies  other  than  those  which  are  entitled  to  do  so  under  the  present 
convention,  and  in  particular  for  commercial! purposes  a^  a  trade-mark  or  trading 
mark. 

The  prohibition  of  the  employment  of  the  emblem  or  the  names  In  question  shall 
come  into  operation  from  the  date  fixed  by  each  legislature,  and  at  the  latest  five 
years  after  the  present  convention  comes  into  force.  From  that  date  it  shall  no 
loiiger  be  lawful  to  adopt  a  trade-mark  or  trading  mark  contrary  to  this  prohibition. 

Art  28.  The  signatory  Governments  also  imdertake  to  adopt,  or  to  propose 
to  their  legislative  bodies,  should  their  military  law  be  insufficient  for  the  purpose, 
the  measures  necessary  for  the  repression  in  time  of  war  of  individual  acts  of  pillage 
and  maltreatment  of  the  wounded  and  sick  of  armies,  as  well  asfor  the  punishment. 
as  an  unlawful  employment  of  military  insignia,  or  the  improper  use  of  the  lied 
Cross  flag  and  armlet  (brassard)  by  officers  and  soldiers  or  private  individuals  not 
protected  bv  the  present  convention. 

They  shall  communicate  to  one  another,  through  the  Swiss  Federal  Council,  the 
provisions  relative  to  these  measures  of  repression  at  the  latest  within  five  years 
from  the  ratification  of  the  present  convention. 

General  provisions. 

Aet  29.  The  present  conveution  shall  be  ratified  as  soon  as  possible.  The  ratifi- 
cation shall  be  deposited  at  Berne. 

Vv  hen  each  ratification  is  deposited  a  proces-verbal  shall  be  drawn  up,  and  a  copy 
thereof  certified  as  correct  shall  be  forwarded  through  the  diplomatic  channel  to  aU 
the  contracting  powers. 

Aet.  30.  The  present  convention  shall  come  into  force  for  each  power  siz  moatbM 
after  the  date  of  the  deposit  of  its  ratiflcatioo. 


304  APPENDIX  6. 

Art.  31.  The  present  convention,  duly  ratified,  shall  replace  the  convention  of 
the  22d  Augtist,  1864,  in  relations  between  the  contracting  States. 

The  convention  of  1864  remains  in  force  between  such  of  the  parties  who  signed  it 
who  may  not  likewise  ratify  the  present  convention. 

Art.  32.  The  present  convention  may  be  signed  until  the  31st  December  next 
by  the  powers  represented  at  the  conference  which  was  opened  at  Geneva  on  the 
11th  June,  1906,  as  also  by  the  powers,  not  represented  at  that  conference,  which 
signed  the  convention  of  1864. 

Such  of  the  aforesaid  powers  as  shall  have  not  signed  the  present  convention  bv 
the  31st  December,  190G,  shall  remain  free  to  accede  to  it  subsequently.  They  shall 
notify  their  accession  by  means  of  a  written  communication  addressed  to  the  Swi.ss 
Federal  Covmcil,  and  communicated  by  the  latter  to  all  the  contracting  powers. 

Other  powers  may  apply  to  accede  in  the  same  manner,  but  their  request  shall 
onlv  take  ellect  if  within  a  period  of  one  year  from  the  notification  of  it  to  the  Fed- 
eral Council  no  objection  to  it  reaches  the  coimcil  from  any  of  the  contracting  powers. 

Art.  33.  Each  of  the  contracting  powers  shall  be  at  liberty  to  denounce  the 
present  convention.  The  denunciation  shall  not  take  effect  until  one  year  after 
the  written  notification  of  it  has  reached  the  Swiss  Federal  Council.  The  coimcil 
shall  immediately  conmiimicate  the  notification  to  all  the  other  contracting 
parties. 

The  denunciation  shall  only  aflcct  the  power  which  has  notified  it. 

The  ratifications  of  the  following  States  have  up  to  the  prasent  been  deposited: 


Great  Britain. 

Denmark. 

Servia. 

Siam. 

Brazil. 

Norway. 

United  States. 

Liuieraburg. 

Honduras. 

Russia. 

Belgium. 

Portugal. 

Italy. 

Spain. 

Rnnmani*., 

Switzerland. 

Austria-Hungary. 

Sweden. 

Congo. 

Japan  and  Corea. 

Guatemala. 

German  Empire. 

Netherlands. 

Bulgaria. 

Mexico.- 

Chile. 

The  following  accessions  have  been  notified: 

Nicaragua. 

Colombia. 

Costa  I^ica. 

Venezuela, 

Cuba. 

Salvador. 

Turkey. 

Paraguay 

Great  Britain  signed  under  reserve  of  articles  23, 27  and  28.    Persia  under  reserve 
of  article  18. 


Appendix  7. 
Miscellaneous  Pata. 
1.  Ranges. — For  convenience  of  reference  ranges  are  classified  as  follows: 


Range. 

l^ifle,  yards. 

Field  artillery,  yards. 

Heavy  artillery, 
yards. 

Distant  .  . 

Over  2,000  . .    . . 

Over  4,500   . 

Over  6,500. 
6,500  to  4,000. 
4,000  to  2,500. 
Under  2,500. 

2,000  to  1,200 

4,500  to  3,5007. 

Effective.. 

1,200  to  600 

3.500  to  2,500  . 

Close 

Under  600. 

Under  2,500 ,...'. 

The  ground  effectively  covered  by  a  shrapnel  is  elliptical  in  form  and  at  the 
effective  ranges  does  not  exceed  200  yards  in  depth  by  25  yards  in  width. 
2.  Penetration  of  rifle  bullet: 


Inches. 

Material. 

Inches. 

Material. 

200 

yards. 

600 
yards. 

200 
yards. 

600. 
yards. 

Commercial  steel 

1  inch  broken  stone, 
gravel 

0.30 

4.80 

9.00 

2.20 
2.40 

0.20 

4.28 

7.00 

1.16 
1.14 

Sand,drys 

Concrete,  Port.  1-3-5- . 
Oak 

18.18 
3,00 
26.46 
30.00 
25.72 
30.00 
60.00 

11.96 

1.86 

12.46 

Hard    coal    between 

Sand,  wet 

13.00 

1-inch  boards 

Pine 

13.00 

Brick    masonry,    ce- 

Earth,  loam 4... 

16.12 

Greasy  clay..,.. » 

32.00 

Brick  masonry,  lime^ . 

1  For  single  shot. 


» In  sacks,  about  one-talf  these  figures. 


8.  Effect  of  artillery  fire: 

Up  to  3,000  yards,  the  3-inch  field  gun,  using  high  explosive-  shell,  is  eflective 
against  ordinary  types  of  overhead  cover  for  field  trenches,  brick  buildings,  and 
stone  walls  2  feet  thick.    It  is  ineffective  against  earthem  parapets. 

The  heavier  types  of  field  guns  and  howitzers  are  effective  against  all  kinds  of 
field  works,  and  protection  against  this  kind  of  fire  must.be  secured  by  conceahnent. 

205     . 


206  APPENDIX  7. 

4.  Communicating  radius  of  Signal  Corps  equipment: 

Field  battalion.signal  troops  (infantry  division)— 
1  wire  company: 

4  wire  sets  (reel  carts)  20  miles  (tptal), 
1  radio  comnany— 

2  radio  sets  (wheel)  200  miles  radius. 
2  radio  sets  (pack)  30  miles  radius. . 
Field  battalion  signal  troops  (cavalry  division)— 
1  headquarter  company— 

2  radio  sets  (wneel)  200  miles  radius. 
2  wire  sets  (reel  carts)10  miles  (total). 
1  radio  company— 

4  radio  sets  (pack)  30  miles  radius. 

5.  Length  of  bridges: 
Ponton  battalion— 

1  company  (light  equippage)  3  bridge  division,  each  184  feet,  total  552  feet. 
1  company  (heaw  equipage)  6  bridge  division,  each  220  feet,  total  1,350 feet. 

6.  Capacity  of  field  hospital  company  .<ind  CAacuation  hospital: 
Field  hospital  company,  number  of  beds  in  equipment,  i  216. 
Evacuation  hospital,  number  of  beds  in  equipment,  i  324. 

7.  Average  net  cargoes  of  veMcles,  pack  mules,  and  transportation  units: 

Pounds. 
4-mule  army  wagon  (except  that  loads  on  combat  trains  are  fixed  at 

2,465  pounds) 2,765 

Pack  mules 250 

Autotrucks 3,000 

Wagon  company 75, 000 

Auto-truck  company 80, 000 

Pack  train  company  (no  grain  carried) 12, 000 

8.  Average  resalts  of  one  man  lionr  labor: 
Excavation— 

In  easy  soil—  „  , .  , 

Cubic  feet.s 

First  hour .-..*.... 30 

Second  hour 25 

Third  hour 15 

Thereafter  continuous  work. . . . » 101 

In  hard  soil,  about  half  the  above. 

In  loose  earth,  60  cubic  feet. 

Filling  sand  bags,  20  bags  (0.5  cubic  foot  each). 
Revetment  construction  (material  and  tools  on  hand): 
Rough  brash  wood  or  plank square  feet  per  man  hour. .    40 

Bushwood  hurdles,  rough — 

Making * do 15 

Placing do....    30, 

Sand  bags- 
Filling .........do....    10 

Placing do. ...    20 

Sod- 
Obtaining  sod  for - ...  .do —     7 

Placing .-. ...• do....    10 

»  By  utilizing  local  facilities  a  greater  number  of  patients  can  be  taken  care  of  by 
personnel. 
'  By  workiD|  in  two  reliefs  above  figures  can  be  increased  by  one-twro. 


APPENDIX  7. 


aofi 


8.  Average  results  of  one  man  hour  labor— Continued. 
Obstacle  construction  (material  and  tools  on  hand) —  Cubic  feet. 

Abattis,  wred  a  strong  row) ,. linear  feet..     1  5 

Wire  entanglement- 
High square  feet..       27 

«,      .    h^"^-- <io 90 

Clearmg  i— 

Thickets  up  to  1.5  inches  diameter square  yards. .       25 

Light  clearings  of  soft  woods,   trees  to  12  inches  in  diameter 

square  yards..       25 

Medium  clearing do 15 

9.  Water — Approximate  daily  requirements: 
1  gallon  per  man  on  march. 

5  gallons  per  man  in  camp. 

6  to  10  gallons  per  animal  on  march  and  camp. 

(The  above  figures  apply  to  water  taken  from  streams,  where  animals  are  watered 
at  the  streams,  and  cooking  water  carried.  In  estimating  the  daily  supply  for 
perman^t  or  semipermanent  camps,  where  water  is  piped  to  kitchens,  bath  houses, 
etc.,  the  requiremwits  will  be  25  to  30  gallons  per  man  and  10  to  15  gallons  per 
animal,  depending  on  climatic  conditions.) 

Estimating  quantity  of  water  in  stream: 

BxDxVxiO,800=gallons  in  24  hours.  B=average  width,  D==saverage  depth, 
V=average  velocity  (all  in  feet). 

10.  Practicability  of  slopes. — Slopes  from  0°  to  5*  are  practicahle  for  maneu- 
vering all  arms,  singly  or  combined. 

On  slopes  from  5°  to  10"  all  arms  can  still  he  maneuvered,  but  with  increasing 
difficulty. 
On  slopes  from  10°  to  15°  all  arms  can  be  moved  up  or  down. 
Slopes  from  15°  to  30°  are  practicable  for  small  detachments  only. 
On  slopes  from  30°  to  45'  foot  troops  can  move  with  difficulty. 
War  material  can  be  dragged  up  any  slope. 


Slope 
frac- 
tions.* 

Degrees. 

Operations. 

^ 

t:::.::: 

A 

1 
3 
5 

6 

7 
8 

^* 

45 

Maximum  for  railroads. 

Maximum  for  first-class  roads. 

Practicable  for  all  arms.    Somewhat  difficult  for  cavalry  to 

charge  descending. 
Maximum  for  cavalry  charge  in  mass  ascending.    Infantry 

in  close  order  descends  with  some  difficulty. 
Cavalry  can  descend  at  a  trot 

Not  practicable  for  heavily  loaded  vehicles. 
Field  artillery  can  no  longer  maneuver. 
Maximum  up  to  which  all  arms  can  move 

Light  vehicles  can  ascend. 

Individuals  and  mules  can  ascend  or  descend 

Foot  troops  can  ascend  or  descend  aided  by  hands. 

« 

1  Removal  of  cuttings  in  both  cases  involves  an  equal  amount  of  labor. 
« Natural  tangent  of  angle  between  slope  and  horizontal;  read  1  on  60,  etc, 


20S  APPENDIX  7. 


11.  Fords,  practicable  depth: 
3-3.5  feet  deep  for  infantry.] 

tfdtfee^^flnutj^'^-  I^epending  on  current  and  nature  of  bottom. 
2.3  feet  deep  for  wagons.    J 

12.  Stream  flow: 

Velocity  in  miles=0.7  of  velocity  in  feet  per  second. 

13.  Strength  of  lee: 

3  inches  thick  will  support  small  group  of  men. 

4i  to  7  inches  thick  will  support  cavalry  and  light  guns. 

8  to  12  inches  thick  will  support  heavy  guns  and  wagons. 

14.  Estimating  transport  capacity  of  ships: 

Allow  3  to  4  gross  tons  per  man  and  8  to  10  per  animal  for  ships  of  more  than 
S,000  tons,  and  4  to  5  per  man  and  10  to  12  per  animal  for  smaller  ship.  This  allow- 
ance includes  rations,  water,  forage,  etc.,  for  the  voyage  and  a  margin  for  reserve 
supplies.  The  tonnage  allowance  for  ammals  is  sufficient  to  provide  for  vehicles, 
It  being  assumed  that  no  vehicle  will  be  separated  from  its  draft  animals,  and  that 
the  integrity  of  units  is  preserved  as  far  as  possible.  The  gross  tonnage  of  a  ship 
is  her  total  internal  space  capacity,  which  is  completely  closed  in  and  protected 
from  sea  and  weather,  measured  in  register  tons.    A  register  ton  is  100  cubic  feet. 

A  ship's  ton  on  which  basis  freight  is  computed  is  40  cubic  feet. 

,15.  Time  by  compass  bearing  (approximate): 

Take  true  azimuth  (or  bearing)  of  sun  (T.  A.);  (T.  A.-1S0°)  4/6G=hours  before 
•r  after  12  o'clock. 

lf».  Use  of  watch  as  compass  (approximate); 

Direct  hour  hand  toward  sun.  A  bearing  half  way  between  hour  hand  and  the 
2  0  Clock  mark  on  the  watch  is  the  true  south. . 


APPENDIX  8 

Signals  and   Codes 
1.  General  Service  Code.      {International  Morse  Code.) 
Used  for  visual   (except  semaphore)   and  sound  signaling,  radio  teleg- 
raphy,   on    cables    using    siphon    recorders,    in    communication    with    the 
Navy,  and  in  intra-Field  Artillery  buzzer   communication. 

A J S 

B K T    — 

C L U 

D M V 

E    -  N   —  W 

F O X 

G P Y 

H Q Z 

I    —  R 

NUMERALS. 
1 5 8 


2 

3 


PUNCTUATION. 

Period     

Comma     .  .  . , 

Interrogation     

Hyphen    or    dash 

Parentheses    (before  and  after  the  words). 

Quotation    mark     (beginning    and    ending). 

Exclamation     ....'. 

Apostrophe     

Semicolon     

Colon    

Bar     indicating     fraction 

Underline  (])efore  and  after  the  word  or 
words    it    is    wished   to   underline) 

Double  dash  (between  preamble  and  ad- 
dress, between  address  and  body  of 
message,  between  body  of  message  and 
signature,  and  immediately  before  a 
fraction) 

Cross    


Note. — Numerals  and  punctuations  must  be  spelled  out  in  the  ardois, 
as  they  require  more  than  four  elements,  which  is  the  limit  of  the 
ardois  keyboard. 

2.  Conventional  Flag  Siffnals.      (Printed   on  page   218.) 

3.  The  Two-Arm  Semaphore   Code    (pages   210,    211). 

209 


810 


APPSVUZ  8. 

ms  TWO-ABM  SSUAPHOSS  CODE. 


ERROR 


8 


NEGA1 


PREPARATORY 


ANNULLING 


INTERROGATORY 


APP£2n)IZ  t. 


311 


A^^iRMATiVt 


ACKNOWLLDGE 


R      ^ 


r> 


u 


w 


Y  la 


INTERVAL 


NUMERALS 


212  AFFENPIZ  8. 

WiQVTXQ. 

SigmUng  by  flag,  torch,  hand  lantern,  or  beam  of  aearchligU  (without  shutter).^ 

1.  There  Is  one  position  and  there  arc  fhxee  motions.  The  position  is  with 
flag  or  other  appliance  held  vertically,  the  signalman  facing  directly  toward  the 
station  with  which  it  is  desired  to  communicate.  The  first  motion  (the  dot)  is  to 
the  right  of  the  sender,  and  will  embrace  an  arc  of  90°,  starting  with  the  v(  r  i  al 
and  returning  to  it,  and  will  be  made  in  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  Line  connecting 
the  two  stations.  The  second  motion  (the  dash)  is  a  similar  motion  to  the  left  of 
the  sender.  The  third  motion  (front)  is  downward  directly  in  front  of  the  sender 
and  instantly  returned  upward  to  the  first  position.  This  is  used  to  indicate  a 
pause  or  conclusion. 

2.  The  beam  of  the  searchlight,  though  ordinarily  used  with  the  shutter  like  the 
heUogranh,  may  be  used  for  long-distance  signaling,  when  no  shutter  is  suitable  or 
available,  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  flag  or  torch,  the  first  position  being  a  vertical 
one.  A  movement  of  the  beam  90°  to  the  right  of  the  sender  indicates  a  dot,  a 
similar  movement  to  the  lert  Indicates  a  dash;  the  beam  is  lowered  vertically  for 
front. 

3.  To  use  the  torch  or  hand  lantern,  a  footlight  must  be  employed  as  a  point  of 
reference  to  the  motion.  The  lantern  is  more  conveniently  swung  out  upward 
to  the  right  of  the  footlight  for  a  dot,  to  the  left  for  a  dash,  and  raised  vertically  for  ■ 
front. 

4.  To  call  a  station,  make  the  call  -jfctter  until  acknowledged,  at  intervals  giving 
the  call  or  signal  of  the  calling  station.  If  the  call  letter  of  a  station  is  unknown, 
wave  flag  until  acknowledged.  In  using  the  searchlight  without  shutter  throw 
the  beam  in  a  vertical  position  aiid  move  it  through  an  arc  of  180°  in  a  plane  at 
right  angles  to  the  line  connecting  the  two  stations  until  acknowledged.    To 

acknowledge  a  call,  signal  "Acknowledgement  (or)  I  understand  ( front). 

followed  by  the  call  letter  of  the  acknowledging  station 

Signaling  with  heliograph,  flash  lantern,  and  searchlight  (with  shvUer).* 

1.  .The  first  position  is  to  turn  a  steady  flash  on  the  receiving  statioiL  The 
signals  are  made  by  short  and  long  flashes.  Use  a  short  flash  for  dot  and  a  long 
steady  flash  for  dash.  The  elements  of  a  letter  should  be  slightly  longer  than  in 
soimd  signals. 

2.  To  call  a  station,  make  the  call  letter  until  acknowledged,  at  intervals' giving 
the  call  or  signal  of  the  calling  station. 

3.  If  the  call  letter  of  a  station  be  unknown,  signal  a  series  of  dots  rapidly  made 
until  acknowledged.  Each  station  will  then  turn  on  a  steady  flash  and  adjust 
When  the  adjustment  is  satisfactory  to  the  caUed  station,  it  will  cut  off  its  flash, 
and  the  calling  station  will  proceed  with  its  message. 

4.  If  the  receiver  sees  that  the  sender's  mirror  needs  adjustment,  he  will  turn  on 
a  steady  flash  until  answered  by  a  steady  flash.  AVhen  the  adjustment  is  satisfac- 
tory, the  recaiver  will  cut  off  his  flash  and  the  sender  will  resume  his  message. 

5.  To  break  the  sending  station  for  other  purposes,  turn  on  a  steady  flash. 

»  Extracts  from  Signal  Book,  United  States  Army 


AP]^EN1)I2  8.  213 

Sound  Signals.^ 

1.  Sound  signals  made  by  the  whistle,  foghorn,  bugle,  trumpet,  and  drum  may 
well  be  used  in  a  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  at  night.  They  may  be  used  with  the 
dot  and  dash  code. 

2.  In  applying  the  code  to  .whistle,  foghorn,  bugle,  or  trumpet,  one  short  blast 
indicates  a  dot  and  one  long  blast  a  dash,  w'ith  the  drum,  one  tap  indicates  a 
dot  and  two  taps  in  rapid  succession  a  dash.  Although  these  signals  can  be  used 
with  a  dot  and  dash  code,  they  should  be  so  used  in  coimection  with  a  precon- 
certed or  conventional  code. 

Morse  Code.    (Americdn  Morse  Code.y 

Used  only  by  the  army  on  telegraph  lines,  on  short  cables,  and  on  field  lines, 
and  on  all  commercial  lines  in  the  United  States. 

A    .-                                            O    .    • 
B    -.,.  P    

\J      •  •      •  Qaao* 

»    ...  R    .    .. 

£    •  8     •  •  • 

F    ...  T    - 

G    --.  U    ,.- 

<!••••  ¥••■_ 

I     ..  W   •__ 

•!•>•••  X*-*« 

K    -.-  Y     ..    ,. 

li    •—  Z     •  •  •    • 

M   --  &    •    • • • 


N 


IbTUMEEALS. 


1  •--.  6 

2  ••...  7 

3  .....  8 

4  .....  9 

5  ...  0 


PUNCTUATION. 


Perk    ....... 

Comma... — 
Interrogation. 


»  Extracts  from  Signal  Book,  United  States  Army 


Appendix  9. 
list  of  Abbreviations. 

Tactical  organizations: 

3dDiv Third  Infantry  Division. 

Ist  Cav.  Div ^  First  Cavalry  Division . 

Ist  Sep.  Brig First  Separate  Brigade. 

8tli  Brig.  3d  Div Eighth   Infantry   Brigade   of   Third 

Infantry  Division. 

2d  Brig,  let  Cav.  Div. .  Second  Cavahy  Brigade  of  First  Cav- 
ah*y  Division. 

4th  Brig.  F.  A. Fourth  Brigade  of  Field  Artillery 

5th  Hv.  A Fifth  Regiment  of  Heavy  Artillery . 

4th  M.  A Fourth  Regiment  of  Mountain  Ar- 
tillery. 

1st  Pon.  Bn First  Ponton  Battalion. 

1st  Aero  Sq First  Aero  Squadron. 

3d  Inf Third  Regiment  of  Infantry. 

2d  Cav Second  Regiment  of  Cavalry 

3d  L.  A Third  Regiment  of  Light  Artillery. 

6th  H.  A Sixth  Regiment  of  Horse  Artillery. 

Ist  Bn.  Engrs First  Pioneer  Battalion  of  Engineers. 

1st  Bn.  mtd.  Engrs. ....  First  Pioneer  Battalion  of  Engineers, 
Mounted. 

Ist  Bn.  Sig First  Field  Battalion  Signal  Troops. 

1st  Bn.  Sig.  caVp First  Field  Battalion  Signal  Troops,, 

Cavalry 

1st  Tel.  Bn First  Telegraph  Battalion. 

Trains: 

C.  Tn Combat  train. 

F.Tn , Field  train. 

B.  Sec.  F.  Tn Bag^e  section  field  train. 

R.  Sec.  F.  Tn Ration  section  field  train. 

Am.  Tn Ammunition  train. 

Sp.  Tn Supply  train. 

Sn.  Tn :.  Sanitary  train. 

1st  Amb.-Co First  Ambulance  Company. 

2d  F.  Hosp.  Co Second  Field  Hospital  Company. 

Ist  Med.  Ree.  Oo First  Medical  Reserve  Company. 

Bngr.  Tn Engineer  train. 


APPEKDIZ  9.  215 


Columns  (1  of  c): 

Am.  Col Ammunition  column. 

Sp.  Col Supply  column. 

Sn.  Col Samtary  column^ 

Engr.  Col Engineer  column. 

PEACnONAL  ORGANIZATION. 

Infantry: 

3d  Div.  (less  cav.  and  1  bn.  F.  A.) 

2d  Brig,  (less  1  regt.) 

1st  Inf.  (less  6  cos.  and  M.  G.  Co.) 

1  bn.  6th  Inf. 

1st  Bn.  eth  Inf.  (less  1  co.) 

Co.  A  1st  Inf.  (less  1  plat.) 
Cavalry: 

Ist  Cav.  Div.  (less  1  brig.) 

2d  Brig,  (less  1  regt.) 

3d  Cav.  (less  1  sq.  and  M.  G.  detch.) 

1  Sq.  4th  Cav. 

1st  Sq.  4th  Cav.  (less  1  tr.) 

Tr.  C  4th  Cav.  (less  2  plats.) 
Artillery: 

4th  Brig.  F.  A.  (less  1  bn.) 

3d  L.  A.  (less  1  bn.) 

1  bn.  1st  L.  A.  (less  1  btry.) 

1st  L.  A.  (less  2  btries.) 

Btry.  A  6th  H.  A; 

5th  Hv.  A.  (less  1  bn  6^  How.) 

1  Bn.  4.7'^  How.,  5th  Hv.  A. 

1  Btry.  4.7''  gun,  5th  Hv.  A, 
Engineers: 

1st  Bn.  Engrs.  (less  I'co.) 
Co.  A  Engrs.  (less  1  sec.) 

2  Sees.  Engrs. 

1st  Pon.  Bn.  (less  1  co  heavv  equip.) 
1  pon.  CO.  light  equip,  (less  2  bridge  div.) 
Signal: 

1st  Bn.  Sig  (less  1  wire  plat.) 

1  rad.  Co.  Si^ 

1  wire  Co,  Sig. 

1  rad.  sec.  pack,  Sig. 

1  rad.  plat,  wagon,  Sig. 


316  APPENDIX  9. 

Signal— Continued. 

1  wire  sec.  Sig. 

1  wire  plat.  Sig. 
Miscellaneous: 

Adj ,.  adjutant. 

Adm.  Sec.  G.  S administrative  section,  general  staff. 

A.  D.  of  Ry assistant  director  of  railways. 

Am ammunition. 

Adv.  Gd advance  guard. 

Adv.  Sec.  L.  of  C, .  advance  section,  line  of  coiumunica- 

tions. 

Asst.  C.  of  S. . . : assistant  cHef  of  staff. 

Base  Sec.  L.  of  C base  section,  line  of  conamuDications. 

Brig.  Gen. —  brigadier  general. 

Capt captain. 

C.  G commanding  general. 

0.  G.  L.  of  C. . ...  commanding  general,  line  of  commu- 
nications. 

CO... i commanding  officer.^ 

Col colonel. 

C.of  S cMef  of  staff . 

Comdg - commanding. 

Comb.  Sec.  G.  S combat  section,  general  staff. 

Detcb - detachment. 

D.  of  Ry -  -  -  director  of  railways. 

E.  O engineer  officer. 

F.  O -  field  order. 

F.  S.  R field,  service  regulations.  • 

Gd guard. 

Gren general. 

G.  O general  order. 

Insp inspector. 

Int.  Sec.  G.  S intelligence  section,  general  staff. 

Inter.  Sec.  L.  of  C. . . .  intermediate  section,  line  of  commu- 
nications. 

J.  A ....^ ...judge  advocate. 

L.  of  C -  line  of  communications. 

Lt lieutenant. 

Lt.  Col , lieutenant  colonel. 

Lt.  Gen lieutenant  general. 

Maj major. 

Maj.  Gen major  general.    ** 


APPENDIX  9.  21) 

Miscellaneous — Continued. 

M.  P military  police. 

N^  C.  0 .• noncommissioned  officer. 

O.  O — ordnance  officer. 

Q.  M quartermaster. 

S.  A.  Am small  arms  ammunition. 

Sig.  O , signal  officer 

S.  0 : special  order. 

Surg , surgeon. 


218  SIGNALS  AND  CODES, 

{Appendix  8,  continued  from  page  209.) 

2.  Conventional  flag  signals. 

For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the  reserve  or  com« 
mander  in  rear,  the  subjoined  signals  (Signal  Corps  codes)  are 
prescribed  and  should  be  memorized.  In  transmission,  their  conceal- 
ment from  the  enemy's  view  should  be  insured.  In  the  absence  of 
signal  flags,    the  headdress   or   other   substitute  may  be  used. 


Letter  of 

If  signaled  from  the 

rear  to 

If    signaled    from     the    firing 

alphabet. 

the  firing  line. 

line  to  the  rear. 

A  M 

Ammunition    going    forward. 

Ammunition  required. 

ceo 

Charge     (mandatory 

at    all 

Am  about  to  charge  if  no  in- 

times). 

structions    to    the    contrary. 

C  F 

Cease    firing. 

Cease  firing. 

D  T 

Double    time    or    "rush." 

Double    time    or    "rush"     or 

hurry. 

P 

Commence   firing. 

Commence  firing. 

F  L 

Artillery   fire    is   causing   us 

Artillery    fire    is    causing    us 

losses. 

losses. 

G 

Move    forward 

Preparing  to  move  forward. 

H  H  H 

Halt. 

Halt. 

K 

Negative. 

Negative. 

L  T 

Left. 

Left. 

0 

What    is   the    (R.   N. 

etc.)? 

What    is    the     (R.    N.    etc.)? 

(Ardois   and 

Interrogatory. 

Interrogatory. 

semaphore 

only.) 

What    is   the    (R.    N. 

etc.)? 

What    is    the     (R.    N.    etc.)? 

(Allmethods 

Interrogatory. 

Interrogatory. 

but  ardois 

and  sema- 

phore.) 

P 

Affirmative. 

Affirmative. 

R 

Acknowledgment. 

Acknowledgment. 

R  N 

Range. 

Range. 

R  T 

Right. 

Right. 

s  s  s 

Support   going   forward. 

Support   needed. 

T 

Target. 

Target. 

QUICK  REFERENCE  INDEX. 


PARTS. 

Page. 

1.  Organization 9 

2.  Operations ". 12 

3.  Administration ., Ill 

Appendices ^... 171 

GENERAL. 

ARTICLES  AND  APPENPICES. 

Abbreviations,  list  of 214 

Administration,  general Ill 

Censorship 165 

Combat 67 

Conventions  and  conferences,  international-. --  190 

Flags  and  lanterns 189 

Information ^ ^.... 12 

Intrenchments,  types  of -..- 180 

Maps  and  sketches ' * 188 

Marches  and  convoys 47 

Military  police .• 163 

Miscellaneous  data ^ ^ 205 

Orders 40 

Forms  of 182 

Organissation , ^ 9 

Post  offices 170 

Security 24 

Semipermanent  camps ^ 174 

Service  of  the  interior ^ .' 112 

Service  of  the  theater  of  operations 117 

Shelter lOS! 

Signals  and  codes 209 

Transportation  by  rail , 156 

War  strength,  road  space  and  camp  dimensions 172 

Zone  of  the  advance 120 

Zone  of  the  line  of  communications 145 

DETAILED. 

SUBJECl  JiATTER. 

Abbreviations,  list  of 214 

Administration,  general ,... lU 

Advance  guards 14,  16,  24,  26,  29,  80 

Aircraft ^^^^^^^.^ .19 

Ammunition  service I  132 

Artillery  fire,  effect  of » ..~ -205 

Bridges,  length  of  ponton , ,^ ..,., '206. 

2l» 


220  QUICK  EEFEEENCE,  INDEX, 

Camps:  Page. 

Data  and  dimensions 172 

On  the  march 55,106>172 

Semipermanent 174 

Cargoes  of  vehicles,  pack  mules,  etc J '....'.  206 

Censorship ,..'. 165 

Coast  defense ^ 10 

Codes  and  signals *...*.*.*.'.*.*.'.  200 

Gpmbat:  " 

Bivouacs , 101 

Combined  arms ..'..'...'.'.'.'.'.',  68 

Defeneive— 

Assembly  positions •. 95 

Cavalry 91 

Coimter  attack 90 

Covering  positions ^ 96 

Defensive  positions 91 

Delajring  actions , , ..'...  98 

Passive  defense , 89 

Positions. in  readiness ^     ..  .  93 

Retreat 96 

Sceldng  favorable  decision... 89 

Withdrawal 94 

Deployment. 11.. '.l....-iy.."-.  78 

Fixe  superiority ,...!...  70 

Frontage.. ^.,.  71 

Intrenchments  - ,^ 72 

Leader,  post  of ..". 72 

Machine  gtms... 72 

Measures  after  battle , , 102.142 

Night—  '. 

Advance.. ,,.. ^^ 101 

Defensive ,,,.^ 100 

Offensive... XOO 

Offensive — . 

Assault... 85 

Attack 82 

Attack,  enveloping 83' 

Attack,  holding ,... ,,,, 84 

Pursuit ,..., 87 

Turning  movements 84 

Orders , 75 

Plan 75 

Principles. 67 

Rencontre ;.l......... .•....^... .J...- 80 

Reserves.;. 73 

Surprise ^ 80 

Conference,  Hague , 190 

Convention,  Red  Cross '. 200 

Correspondents,  newspaper ;. 166 

Engineer  train 123,124 

Flags  and  lanterns,  distinguishing 189 

Flank  guards 12,  24,  31 

Fords,  practicable  depths 307 


QUICK  REFERENCE  INDEX  221 

Page. 

Bfospitals,  capacity  of .- 206 

[ce,  strength  of , 207 

[nformation: 

General  principles i 12 

Transmission  of , 12,22 

[ntrcnciiments: 

In  combat .■ 72 

Types  of 180 

Labor,  results  by  one  man 206 

Silacbine  guns  in  combat ■ 72 

Mar)S  and  sketches t... ,.  188 

Marches  and  convoys: 

Conduct  of 47 

Conducting  prisoners 63 

Convoys » 59 

Convoys  by  water 63 

Ptegulations  for— 

In  campaign 56 

In  peace 55 

yiessages,  reports,  maps,  and  diaries 20 

Military  police: 

Commander  of  trains 163 

Commanders,  defense  districts,  line  of  communications 163 

Provost  marshal,  functions  of 163 

Newspaper  correspondents , ^.  .lea 

Orders:  ~  25, 37,  140 

Composition  of ^ • 42 

Field 40 

For  combat 142 

Forms  of 44,182 

General 41 

General  principles  of. 40 

Letters  ol  instruction 40 

^'Orders" 41 

Special , 41 

Verbal , 41 

Organization: 

.Army 10 

Brigade 10 

Brigade,  separate .  10 

Coast  Artillery 10 

Coast  defense : 10 

Division .= 10 

Field  Army .• 10 

Field  Army  troops 10 

Militia,  organized  land 9 

Mobile  Army 9 

Over-sea  departments 11 

Regular  Army 9 

Tables  of 11 

Volunteers ^ 

Outposts  and  outguards ; '  14,  24,  88 

Over-sea  departments. , . , , . . . , , , ii,  lib 


ssd  atncK  eefee^nce  inbes:. 

Page. 

Patrols,  reconnoitering » 17 

Penetration  of  rifle  bullet 205 

Post  offices 170 

Ranges » 205 

Rearguards 31,32 

Reconnaissance: 

By  aero  squadron 13 

By  Cavalry 13 

By  divisional  cavalry 14 

By  Infantry 15 

By  Independent  Cavalry 14 

During  combat... i '. 16 

Preceding  combat 15 

Retreating  force,  security  for 30 

Road  spaces  and  dimensions  of  camps 172 

Sanitary  service,  zone  of  the  advance 137 

Security: 

Advance  guard 26,29,30 

Flank  guard. 31 

General  principles 24 

Outposts  and  outguards 33 

Rear  guards 31, 32 

Retreating  force 30 

Service  of  defense.    {See  Zone  of  advance.) 
Service  of  the  interior: 

Bureau  chief ,. 112 

Carop — 

Concentration '. j 113 

Mobilization.... 113 

Department  commander 112 

General  regulations , 112 

Over-sea  departments 116 

Ports  of  embarkation 114 

Service  of  military  railways.    (See  Zone  of  advance.) 
Service  of  the  theater  of  operations: 

Commander,  line  of  communications 119 

General  regulations 117 

General  Staff- 
Administrative  section .- .■ 118 

Combat  section 118 

Intelligence  section 118 

Headquarters  and  staff 117 

Technical  and  administrative  staff 118 

Shelter: 

-,  Camps  on  the  march 55, 106, 172 

Care  of  troops .' 108 

During  battle 108 

During  sieges 108 

General  principles  of 103 

In  the  theater  of  operations i ,-  lOS 

In  the  zone  of  the  interior 104 

Ships,  transport  capacity ^ 208 

Signal  equipment,  radius  of ....  i -. .•  205 


QJJICK  REFEKENCE  INDEX-  223 

Signals  and  codes „ f^' 

Slopes,  practicability  of iit!!."!!!.'!!!I**,'!!*i"**.* 207 

Supply,  sanitary,  4nd  telegraph  'selr^cei  iine'of  coinmiiiicatiom* "  *     us 

Supply  service,  zone  of  the  advance to5 

Time  by  compass '*'• '• i^ 

Trains:  ^ -'•• 208 

Ammunition .^ 

Combat *■*•• '}li 

Engineer.. !I!!!i.'."!*.*!.' i*<»  ]7Z 

Field.. • ^'}S 

Field  baggage  section... !.'!!!!M.*' }^ 

Field  ration  section '*' iff* 

^X':rr '■"■"-"":•":•■-■::;::::;::::::;:;::;;:;  m.l'? 

Transportation:  * ' * '•  123,129 

Columns- 
Ammunition ,„, 

Engineer ."*"* .••-•-«-....-. .i.......  i2d 

Sanitary * ••• }ii 

Supply.....:.....;  ; •-  123 

Commander  of  trains*.".*.".'!!! !!.'!! ' " "•  ^ 

Comm«rcial ^.  ... 

Military • — .....  156 

Trains...... !!  * - -160 

War  strength,  round  numbers.".!!!!!!!!!!*** ••"••  ^^']^ 

Watch  Bs  compass ' •  ^'^ 

Water  consumption •     ' • ^f 

Zone  of  the  advance: 207 

Ammunition  service— 

A  function  of  the  Field  Artillery. ...  ,  -, 

Commander,  ammunition  train 75? 

Distributing  station .    ' j^ 

Refillingpoint ■•-  J?* 

Rendezvous  point ' ii; 

Supply  by  column !!!!!! * f^* 

Engineer  train " 1^| 

General  regulations i^X 

Sanitary  service—                "       ' ' "0 

Ambulance  companies .  , ,« 

Dressing  stations ......!!!! " t^Z 

Evacuating  points i !!!!!" ioq 

Field-hospital  companies '  *  , ,? 

General  functions ' ••■  ^^9 

Incamp ,          |^7 

In  combat "" ••••  J*? 

Inretreat ' |fl 

On  the  march * •  if* 

Red  Cross  Association.....!!!!! "*•'" }j2 

Regimental  aid  station "'* ?*S 

Sanitation 138 

*  etatio^s  for  slightly  woun'd'ed"//.*.".*.* 13J 


224  aXTICK  REFERENCE  INDEX* 

Z<Hae  of  tlie  advance— Continued. 

Supply  service—  !Page. 

Disposition  of  rations 128 

Operation , 130 

Point- 
Distributing, 126 

Refilling.. 124 

Rendezvous, . , '126 

Ration , 127 

Requisitions — i 127 

Zone  of  the  line  of  communications: 

Channels  of  correspondence ^ —  154 

G  eneral  regulations , 145 

Service  of— 

Defense,  districts  and  commanders- ,  — •  145 

Military  railways- 
Director  of  railways ;. .■ 152 

Military  controlling  staff 152 

R ailway  staflt  officers  .^ * 152 

Staff  of  civilian  assistants ., 154 

Supply,  sanitary,  and  telegraph  service- 
Ad  vance  section- 
Advance  groups .- 150 

Assistant  Chief  of  Staff :..•.. , .  150 

Base  section- 
Assistant  Chief  of  Staff 150 

Base  groups - 150 

Intermediate  section  .- ; 148 

Maximum  and  minimum  supply  and  requisitions : , 148 


ADDITIONAL,  COPIES 

OF  THIS  PUBLICATION  MAY  BE  PROCUBED  FRO:i 

THE  ABMY  &  NAVY  JOURNAL 

20  ^'ESEY  STREET,  NEW  YORK 

OR 

D.   APPLETON  &  CO. 

35  W.    3  2ND   STREET,   NEW  YORK 

AT 

75  CENTS  PER  COPY 

WITH  A  DISCOUNT  FOR  QUANTITIES. 


University  of  California  Library 
Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


P^iione  ^^^newalc 


310 


/  ^ 


9188 


NOM-RERIEWABLE 


OCT  0 


DUE  2  WKS  FROM  DATE  RECEIVED 


XlA  ACCEbS 

Interlibrary  Lo£ 
11630  Univars 
3jx951575 
■     s  Ange'-5> 

NOV  y  3  ?nM 


8  2004 


St-RVICE-S 

n 

i;y  Htjseatc^  UDiary 

Ha  '"'".025  1575 


I 


UC  S:\."^E5\  =E310NAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


B     000  008  325     3 


-^m 


^ 


